Casio Fx9750Gii 0Calculator Graphic Users Manual Fx 9860G Series_fx 9750GII_fx 7400GII_Software Ver. 2.00_Eng

2014-12-12
: Casio Casio-Fx9750Gii-0Calculator-Graphic-Users-Manual-119380 casio-fx9750gii-0calculator-graphic-users-manual-119380 casio pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 412
Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF
E

fx-9860GII SD
fx-9860GII
fx-9860G AU PLUS
fx-9860G Slim (Updated to OS 2.00)
fx-9860G SD (Updated to OS 2.00)
fx-9860G (Updated to OS 2.00)
fx-9860G AU (Updated to OS 2.00)
I[*ɉ
I[*ɉ
Software Version 2.00
User’s Guide

CASIO Worldwide Education Website

http://edu.casio.com
CASIO EDUCATIONAL FORUM

http://edu.casio.com/forum/

• The contents of this user’s guide are subject to change without notice.
• No part of this user’s guide may be reproduced in any form without the express written
consent of the manufacturer.
• The options described in Chapter 13 of this user’s guide may not be available in certain
geographic areas. For full details on availability in your area, contact your nearest CASIO
dealer or distributor.
• Be sure to keep all user documentation handy for future reference.
i

Contents
Getting Acquainted — Read This First!
Chapter 1 Basic Operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Keys .............................................................................................................................. 1-1
Display .......................................................................................................................... 1-2
Inputting and Editing Calculations................................................................................. 1-5
Using the Math Input/Output Mode ............................................................................. 1-10
Option (OPTN) Menu .................................................................................................. 1-22
Variable Data (VARS) Menu ....................................................................................... 1-23
Program (PRGM) Menu ............................................................................................. 1-25
Using the Setup Screen .............................................................................................. 1-26
Using Screen Capture................................................................................................. 1-29
When you keep having problems… ........................................................................... 1-30

Chapter 2 Manual Calculations
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Basic Calculations......................................................................................................... 2-1
Special Functions.......................................................................................................... 2-6
Specifying the Angle Unit and Display Format............................................................ 2-10
Function Calculations.................................................................................................. 2-11
Numerical Calculations ............................................................................................... 2-21
Complex Number Calculations.................................................................................... 2-30
Binary, Octal, Decimal, and Hexadecimal Calculations with Integers......................... 2-33
Matrix Calculations...................................................................................................... 2-36
Mertic Conversion Calculations................................................................................... 2-48

Chapter 3 List Function
1.
2.
3.
4.

Inputting and Editing a List............................................................................................ 3-1
Manipulating List Data................................................................................................... 3-5
Arithmetic Calculations Using Lists ............................................................................. 3-10
Switching Between List Files....................................................................................... 3-13

Chapter 4 Equation Calculations
1. Simultaneous Linear Equations .................................................................................... 4-1
2. High-order Equations from 2nd to 6th Degree .............................................................. 4-2
3. Solve Calculations......................................................................................................... 4-4

Chapter 5 Graphing
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

Sample Graphs ............................................................................................................. 5-1
Controlling What Appears on a Graph Screen.............................................................. 5-2
Drawing a Graph ........................................................................................................... 5-6
Storing a Graph in Picture Memory............................................................................. 5-10
Drawing Two Graphs on the Same Screen................................................................. 5-11
Manual Graphing......................................................................................................... 5-12
Using Tables ............................................................................................................... 5-15
Dynamic Graphing ...................................................................................................... 5-20
Graphing a Recursion Formula ................................................................................... 5-22
Graphing a Conic Section ........................................................................................... 5-27
Changing the Appearance of a Graph ........................................................................ 5-27
Function Analysis ........................................................................................................ 5-29
ii

Chapter 6 Statistical Graphs and Calculations
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Before Performing Statistical Calculations .................................................................... 6-1
Calculating and Graphing Single-Variable Statistical Data ........................................... 6-4
Calculating and Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data ........................................... 6-9
Performing Statistical Calculations.............................................................................. 6-15
Tests ........................................................................................................................... 6-22
Confidence Interval ..................................................................................................... 6-35
Distribution .................................................................................................................. 6-38
Input and Output Terms of Tests, Confidence Interval, and Distribution .................... 6-50
Statistic Formula ......................................................................................................... 6-53

Chapter 7 Financial Calculation (TVM)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Before Performing Financial Calculations ..................................................................... 7-1
Simple Interest .............................................................................................................. 7-2
Compound Interest........................................................................................................ 7-3
Cash Flow (Investment Appraisal) ................................................................................ 7-5
Amortization .................................................................................................................. 7-7
Interest Rate Conversion .............................................................................................. 7-9
Cost, Selling Price, Margin .......................................................................................... 7-10
Day/Date Calculations................................................................................................. 7-11
Depreciation ................................................................................................................ 7-12
Bond Calculations ....................................................................................................... 7-14
Financial Calculations Using Functions ...................................................................... 7-16

Chapter 8 Programming
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Basic Programming Steps............................................................................................. 8-1
PRGM Mode Function Keys.......................................................................................... 8-2
Editing Program Contents ............................................................................................. 8-3
File Management .......................................................................................................... 8-5
Command Reference .................................................................................................... 8-7
Using Calculator Functions in Programs ..................................................................... 8-21
PRGM Mode Command List ....................................................................................... 8-37
Program Library .......................................................................................................... 8-42

Chapter 9 Spreadsheet
1.
2.
3.
4.

Spreadsheet Basics and the Function Menu ................................................................ 9-1
Basic Spreadsheet Operations ..................................................................................... 9-2
Using Special S • SHT Mode Commands .................................................................... 9-14
Drawing Statistical Graphs, and Performing Statistical and Regression
Calculations................................................................................................................. 9-15
5. S • SHT Mode Memory ................................................................................................ 9-20

Chapter 10 eActivity
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

eActivity Overview ....................................................................................................... 10-1
eActivity Function Menus ............................................................................................ 10-2
eActivity File Operations ............................................................................................. 10-3
Inputting and Editing Data ........................................................................................... 10-4
eActivity Guide .......................................................................................................... 10-13

Chapter 11 Memory Manager
1. Using the Memory Manager ........................................................................................ 11-1

iii

Chapter 12 System Manager
1. Using the System Manager ......................................................................................... 12-1
2. System Settings .......................................................................................................... 12-1

Chapter 13 Data Communications
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Connecting Two Units ................................................................................................. 13-1
Connecting the Calculator to a Personal Computer .................................................... 13-1
Performing a Data Communication Operation ............................................................ 13-2
Data Communications Precautions ............................................................................. 13-5
Screen Image Send .................................................................................................. 13-11

Chapter 14 Using SD Cards (fx-9860GⅡ SD only)
1. Using an SD Card ....................................................................................................... 14-1
2. Formatting an SD Card ............................................................................................... 14-3
3. SD Card Precautions during Use ................................................................................ 14-3

Appendix
1. Error Message Table ....................................................................................................A-1
2. Input Ranges ................................................................................................................A-5

E-CON2 Application
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

E-CON2 Overview
Using the Setup Wizard
Using Advanced Setup
Using a Custom Probe
Using the MULTIMETER Mode
Using Setup Memory
Using Program Converter
Starting a Sampling Operation
Using Sample Data Memory
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
Calling E-CON2 Functions from an eActivity

iv

Getting Acquainted — Read This First!
I About this User’s Guide
S Model-specific Function and Screen Differences
This User’s Guide covers multiple different calculator models. Note that some of the functions
described here may not be available on all of the models covered by this User’s Guide. All of
the screen shots in this User’s Guide show the fx-9860Gɉ SD screen, and the appearance of
the screens of other models may be slightly different.

S Math natural input and display
Under its initial default settings, the fx-9860Gɉ SD, fx-9860Gɉ, or fx-9860G AU PLUS
is set up to use the “Math input/output mode”, which enables natural input and display of
math expressions. This means you can input fractions, square roots, differentials, and other
expressions just as they are written. In the “Math input/output mode”, most calculation results
also are displayed using natural display.
You also can select a “Linear input/output mode” if you like, for input and display of
calculation expressions in a single line. The initial default setting of the fx-9860Gɉ SD, fx9860Gɉ, and fx-9860G AU PLUS input/output mode is the Math input/output mode.
The examples shown in this User’s Guide are mainly presented using the Linear input/output
mode. Note the following points if you are using an fx-9860Gɉ SD, fx-9860Gɉ, or fx-9860G
AU PLUS.
• For information about switching between the Math input/output mode and Linear input/
output mode, see the explanation of the “Input/Output” mode setting under “Using the Setup
Screen” (page 1-26).
• For information about input and display using the Math input/output mode, see “Using the
Math Input/Output Mode” (page 1-10).

S For owners of models not equipped with a Math input/output mode
(fx-7400Gɉ, fx-9750Gɉ)...
The fx-7400Gɉ and fx-9750Gɉ do not include a Math input/output mode. When performing
the calculations in this manual on these models, use the linear input mode.
fx-7400Gɉ and fx-9750Gɉ owners should ignore all explanations in this manual concerned
with the Math input/output mode.

S V()
The above indicates you should press  and then V, which will input a  symbol. All
multiple-key input operations are indicated like this. Key cap markings are shown, followed by
the input character or command in parentheses.

S K EQUA
This indicates you should first press K, use the cursor keys (D, A, B, C) to select
the EQUA mode, and then press U. Operations you need to perform to enter a mode from
the Main Menu are indicated like this.

S Function Keys and Menus
• Many of the operations performed by this calculator can be executed by pressing function
keys  through . The operation assigned to each function key changes according to
v

0

the mode the calculator is in, and current operation assignments are indicated by function
menus that appear at the bottom of the display.
• This User’s Guide shows the current operation assigned to a function key in parentheses
following the key cap for that key. (Comp), for example, indicates that pressing 
selects {Comp}, which is also indicated in the function menu.
• When (E) is indicated in the function menu for key , it means that pressing  displays
the next page or previous page of menu options.

S Menu Titles
• Menu titles in this User’s Guide include the key operation required to display the menu
being explained. The key operation for a menu that is displayed by pressing * and then
{LIST} would be shown as: [OPTN]-[LIST].
• (E) key operations to change to another menu page are not shown in menu title key
operations.

S Command List
The PRGM Mode Command List (page 8-37) provides a graphic flowchart of the various
function key menus and shows how to maneuver to the menu of commands you need.
Example: The following operation displays Xfct: [VARS]-[FACT]-[Xfct]

S E-CON2
This manual does not cover the E-CON2 mode. For more information about the E-CON2
mode, download the E-CON2 manual (English version only) from: http://edu.casio.com.

I Contrast Adjustment
Adjust the contrast whenever objects on the display appear dim or difficult to see.
1. Use the cursor keys (D, A, B, C) to select the SYSTEM icon and press U, then
) to display the contrast adjustment screen.
press (

2. Adjust the contrast.
• The C cursor key makes display contrast darker.
• The B cursor key makes display contrast lighter.
• (INIT) returns display contrast to its initial default.
3. To exit display contrast adjustment, press K.

vi

Chapter 1 Basic Operation
1. Keys
I Key Table
Page
5-29

1-2
2-7
1-2

1
Page

Page

Page

Page

Page

5-5

5-3

5-28

5-30

5-1
5-24

1-22

1-25
1-23

1-26
1-2

2-14

1-18,
2-14

2-14

2-14
2-13

2-30
2-14
1-11
1-12
1-18
2-19

2-13

2-13

2-19

10-11

1-19
2-19

2-1

10-9
2-6

2-1

Page

Page

Page

Page

1-30

1-8

1-9

1-6,1-15
1-16

Page

1-6
1-9
2-1
3-2

2-1

2-41
2-1

2-30

2-13
2-7

2-9

2-1

2-1

Not all of the functions described above are available on all models covered by this manual.
Depending on calculator model, some of the above keys may not be included on your calculator.

1-1

I Key Markings
Many of the calculator’s keys are used to perform more than one function. The functions
marked on the keyboard are color coded to help you find the one you need quickly and easily.

Function

Key Operation



log

J



10x

J



B

?J

The following describes the color coding used for key markings.
Color

•

Key Operation

Yellow

Press  and then the key to perform the marked function.

Red

Press ? and then the key to perform the marked function.

Alpha Lock
Normally, once you press ? and then a key to input an alphabetic character, the keyboard
reverts to its primary functions immediately.
If you press  and then ?, the keyboard locks in alpha input until you press ? again.

2. Display
I Selecting Icons
This section describes how to select an icon in the Main Menu to enter the mode you want.

S To select an icon
1. Press K to display the Main Menu.
2. Use the cursor keys (B, C, D, A) to move the
highlighting to the icon you want.

1-2

Currently selected icon

3. Press U to display the initial screen of the mode
whose icon you selected. Here we will enter the
STAT mode.

• You can also enter a mode without highlighting an icon in the Main Menu by inputting the
number or letter marked in the lower right corner of the icon.
• Use only the procedures described above to enter a mode. If you use any other procedure,
you may end up in a mode that is different than the one you thought you selected.
The following explains the meaning of each icon.
Icon

Mode Name
RUN
(fx-7400Gɉ only)
RUN • MAT*1
(Run • Matrix)
STAT
(Statistics)
e • ACT*2
(eActivity)
S • SHT*2
(Spreadsheet)

Description
Use this mode for arithmetic calculations and function
calculations, and for calculations involving binary, octal,
decimal, and hexadecimal values.
Use this mode for arithmetic calculations and function
calculations, and for calculations involving binary, octal,
decimal, and hexadecimal values and matrices.
Use this mode to perform single-variable (standard deviation)
and paired-variable (regression) statistical calculations, to
perform tests, to analyze data and to draw statistical graphs.
eActivity lets you input text, math expressions, and other data
in a notebook-like interface. Use this mode when you want to
store text or formulas, or built-in application data in a file.
Use this mode to perform spreadsheet calculations. Each file
contains a 26-column × 999-line spreadsheet. In addition to the
calculator’s built-in commands and S • SHT mode commands,
you can also perform statistical calculations and graph
statistical data using the same procedures that you use in the
STAT mode.

GRAPH

Use this mode to store graph functions and to draw graphs
using the functions.

DYNA*1

Use this mode to store graph functions and to draw multiple
versions of a graph by changing the values assigned to the
variables in a function.

(Dynamic Graph)
TABLE

Use this mode to store functions, to generate a numeric table
of different solutions as the values assigned to variables in a
function change, and to draw graphs.

RECUR*1
(Recursion)

Use this mode to store recursion formulas, to generate a
numeric table of different solutions as the values assigned to
variables in a function change, and to draw graphs.

CONICS*1

Use this mode to draw graphs of conic sections.

EQUA

Use this mode to solve linear equations with two through six
unknowns, and high-order equations from 2nd to 6th degree.

(Equation)
PRGM
(Program)

Use this mode to store programs in the program area and to
run programs.

1-3

Icon

Mode Name
TVM*1
(Financial)

Description
Use this mode to perform financial calculations and to draw
cash flow and other types of graphs.

E-CON2*1

Use this mode to control the optionally available EA-200 Data
Analyzer.
For more information about the E-CON2 mode, download the
E-CON2 manual (English version only) from: http://edu.casio.
com.

LINK

Use this mode to transfer memory contents or back-up data to
another unit or PC.

MEMORY

Use this mode to manage data stored in memory.

SYSTEM

Use this mode to initialize memory, adjust contrast, and to
make other system settings.

*1 Not included on the fx-7400Gɉ.
*2 Not included on the fx-7400Gɉ/fx-9750Gɉ.

I About the Function Menu
Use the function keys ( to ) to access the menus and commands in the menu bar
along the bottom of the display screen. You can tell whether a menu bar item is a menu or a
command by its appearance.

I About Display Screens
This calculator uses two types of display screens: a text screen and a graph screen. The
text screen can show 21 columns and 8 lines of characters, with the bottom line used for the
function key menu. The graph screen uses an area that measures 127 (W) × 63 (H) dots.
Text Screen

Graph Screen

I Normal Display
The calculator normally displays values up to 10 digits long. Values that exceed this limit are
automatically converted to and displayed in exponential format.

S How to interpret exponential format

1.2E+12 indicates that the result is equivalent to 1.2 s 1012. This means that you should move
the decimal point in 1.2 twelve places to the right, because the exponent is positive. This
results in the value 1,200,000,000,000.
1-4

1.2E–03 indicates that the result is equivalent to 1.2 s 10–3. This means that you should move
the decimal point in 1.2 three places to the left, because the exponent is negative. This results
in the value 0.0012.
You can specify one of two different ranges for automatic changeover to normal display.
Norm 1 ................... 10–2 (0.01) > |x|, |x|  1010
Norm 2 ................... 10–9 (0.000000001) > |x|, |x|  1010
All of the examples in this manual show calculation results using Norm 1.
See page 2-11 for details on switching between Norm 1 and Norm 2.

I Special Display Formats
This calculator uses special display formats to indicate fractions, hexadecimal values, and
degrees/minutes/seconds values.
S Fractions
.................... Indicates: 456

12
23

S Hexadecimal Values
................... Indicates: 0ABCDEF1(16), which equals
180150001(10)
S Degrees/Minutes/Seconds
.................... Indicates: 12° 34’ 56.78”

• In addition to the above, this calculator also uses other indicators or symbols, which are
described in each applicable section of this manual as they come up.

3. Inputting and Editing Calculations
I Inputting Calculations
When you are ready to input a calculation, first press
to clear the display. Next, input your
calculation formulas exactly as they are written, from left to right, and press U to obtain the
result.
Example

2 + 3 – 4 + 10 =
A
BC
@?U

1-5

I Editing Calculations
Use the B and C keys to move the cursor to the position you want to change, and then
perform one of the operations described below. After you edit the calculation, you can execute
it by pressing U. Or you can use C to move to the end of the calculation and input more.
• You can select either insert or overwrite for input*1. With overwrite, text you input replaces
the text at the current cursor location. You can toggle between insert and overwrite by
performing the operation: #(INS). The cursor appears as “I” for insert and as “ ” for
overwrite.
*1 With all models except the fx-7400Gɉ/fx-9750Gɉ, insert and overwrite switzng is possible
only when the Linear input/output mode (page 1-29) is selected.

S To change a step
Example

To change cos60 to sin60
AE?
BBB
#
Q

S To delete a step
Example

To change 369 s s 2 to 369 s 2
BEH		A
B#

In the insert mode, the # key operates as a backspace key.

S To insert a step
Example

To change 2.362 to sin2.362
A
BEV
BBBBB
Q

1-6

I Using Replay Memory
The last calculation performed is always stored into replay memory. You can recall the
contents of the replay memory by pressing B or C.
If you press C, the calculation appears with the cursor at the beginning. Pressing B causes
the calculation to appear with the cursor at the end. You can make changes in the calculation
as you wish and then execute it again.
• Replay memory is enabled in the Linear input/output mode only. In the Math input/output
mode, the history function is used in place of replay memory. For details, see “History
Function” (page 1-17).
Example 1

To perform the following two calculations
4.12 s 6.4 = 26.368
4.12 s 7.1 = 29.252
C
@A	E
CU
BBBB
#(INS)
F
@
U

After you press
, you can press D or A to recall previous calculations, in sequence from
the newest to the oldest (Multi-Replay Function). Once you recall a calculation, you can use
C and B to move the cursor around the calculation and make changes in it to create a new
calculation.
Example 2
@AB
CDEU
ABCDEFU

D (One calculation back)
D (Two calculations back)
• A calculation remains stored in replay memory until you perform another calculation.
• The contents of replay memory are not cleared when you press the
recall a calculation and execute it even after pressing the
key.

I Making Corrections in the Original Calculation
Example

14 w 0 s 2.3 entered by mistake for 14 w 10 s 2.3
@C?	A
B

1-7

key, so you can

U

Press ).
Cursor is positioned automatically at the
location of the cause of the error.

Make necessary changes.
B@
Execute again.
U

I Using the Clipboard for Copy and Paste
You can copy (or cut) a function, command, or other input to the clipboard, and then paste the
clipboard contents at another location.
• The procedures described here all use the Linear input/output mode. For details about the
copy and paste operation while the Math input/output mode is selected, see “Using the
Clipboard for Copy and Paste in the Math Input/Output Mode” (page 1-18).

S To specify the copy range
1. Move the cursor (I) to the beginning or end of the range of text you want to copy and then
press G(CLIP). This changes the cursor to “ ”.

2. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor and highlight the range of text you want to copy.

3. Press (COPY) to copy the highlighted text to the clipboard, and exit the copy range
specification mode.

The selected characters are not
changed when you copy them.

To cancel text highlighting without performing a copy operation, press ).

S To cut the text
1. Move the cursor (I) to the beginning or end of the range of text you want to cut and then
press G(CLIP). This changes the cursor to “ ”.

1-8

2. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor and highlight the range of text you want to cut.

3. Press (CUT) to cut the highlighted text to the clipboard.

Cutting causes the original
characters to be deleted.

S Pasting Text
Move the cursor to the location where you want to paste the text, and then press
H(PASTE). The contents of the clipboard are pasted at the cursor position.

H(PASTE)

I Catalog Function
The Catalog is an alphabetic list of all the commands available on this calculator. You can
input a command by calling up the Catalog and then selecting the command you want.

S To use the Catalog to input a command
1. Press C(CATALOG) to display an alphabetic Catalog of commands.
• The screen that appears first is the last one you used for command input.
• With the fx-9860G Slim, the first two lines of explanation text for the currently selected
command will appear at the bottom of the screen. Pressing (HELP) will display a fullscreen view of the text for reading. If the text does not fit within a single screen, you can
use D and A to scroll it.
(HELP)
m
k
)
To close the help text screen, press ).
2. Press (CTGY) to display the category list.
• You can skip this step and go straight to step 5,
if you want.

3. Use the cursor keys (D, A) to highlight the command category you want, and then press
(EXE) or U.
• This displays a list of commands in the category you selected.
1-9

4. Input the first letter of the command you want to input. This will display the first command
that starts with that letter.
5. Use the cursor keys (D, A) to highlight the command you want to input, and then press
(INPUT) or U.
Example

To use the Catalog to input the ClrGraph command
C(CATALOG)((C)A~AU

Pressing ) or )(QUIT) closes the Catalog.

S To input a command with ; (fx-9860G Slim only)
1. Press ;.
• This will display the category selection screen.

• (EXE)... {displays a list of commands in the currently selected category}
• (EXIT)... {exits the category selection screen}
2. Continue from step 3 of the procedure under “To use the Catalog to input a command”.

4. Using the Math Input/Output Mode
Important!
• The fx-7400Gɉ and fx-9750Gɉ are not equipped with a Math input/output mode.
Selecting “Math” for the “Input/Output” mode setting on the Setup screen (page 1-29) turns on
the Math input/output mode, which allows natural input and display of certain functions, just as
they appear in your textbook.
• The operations in this section all are performed in the Math input/output mode.
- The initial default setting for the fx-9860Gɉ SD/fx-9860Gɉ/fx-9860G AU PLUS is the Math
input/output mode. If you have changed to the Linear input/output mode, switch back to the
Math input/output mode before performing the operations in this section. See “Using the
Setup Screen” (page 1-26) for information about how to switch modes.
- The initial default setting for the fx-9860G Slim/fx-9860G SD/fx-9860G/fx-9860G AU is
the Linear input/output mode. Switch to the Math input/output mode before performing the
operations in this section. See “Using the Setup Screen” (page 1-26) for information about
how to switch modes.
• In the Math input/output mode, all input is insert mode (not overwrite mode) input. Note that
the #(INS) operation (page 1-6) you use in the Linear input/output mode to switch to
insert mode input performs a completely different function in the Math input/output mode. For
more information, see “Using Values and Expressions as Arguments” (page 1-14).
1-10

• Unless specifically stated otherwise, all operations in this section are performed in the
RUN • MAT mode.

I Input Operations in the Math Input/Output Mode
S Math Input/Output Mode Functions and Symbols
The functions and symbols listed below can be used for natural input in the Math input/output
mode. The “Bytes” column shows the number of bytes of memory that are used up by input in
the Math input/output mode.
Function/Symbol

Key Operation

Bytes

Fraction (Improper)

6

9

Mixed Fraction*1

6()

14

Power

,

4

Square

V

4

Negative Power (Reciprocal)

(x –1)

5



V()

6

Cube Root

(3)

9

Power Root

,(x)

9

ex

((ex)

6

10x

J(10x)

6

log(a,b)

(Input from MATH menu*2)

7

Abs (Absolute Value)

(Input from MATH menu*2)

6

Linear Differential*3

(Input from MATH menu*2)

7

3

2

Quadratic Differential*

(Input from MATH menu* )

7

Integral*3

(Input from MATH menu*2)

8

3 Calculation*4

(Input from MATH menu*2)

11

2

14*5

Matrix

(Input from MATH menu* )

Parentheses

 and 

1

Braces (Used during list input.)

	( { ) and ( } )

1

Brackets (Used during matrix input.)


( [ ) and ( ] )

1

*1 Mixed fraction is supported in the Math input/output mode only.
*2 For information about function input from the MATH function menu, see “Using the MATH
Menu” described below.
*3 Tolerance cannot be specified in the Math input/output mode. If you want to specify
tolerance, use the Linear input/output mode.
*4 For 3 calculation in the Math input/output mode, the pitch is always 1. If you want to specify
a different pitch, use the Linear input/output mode.
*5 This is the number of bytes for a 2 × 2 matrix.

1-11

S Using the MATH Menu
In the RUN • MAT mode, pressing (MATH) displays the MATH menu.
You can use this menu for natural input of matrices, differentials, integrals, etc.
• {MAT} ... {displays the MAT submenu, for natural input of matrices}
• {2s2} ... {inputs a 2 × 2 matrix}
• {3s3} ... {inputs a 3 × 3 matrix}
• {msn} ... {inputs a matrix with m lines and n columns (up to 6 × 6)}
• {logab} ... {starts natural input of logarithm logab}
• {Abs} ... {starts natural input of absolute value |X|}

d f(x)
x=a }
dx
d2 f(x)x = a
2
2
}
• {d /dx } ... {starts natural input of quadratic differential
dx2
b
• {°dx} … {starts natural input of integral
f(x)dx }
a
• {d/dx} ... {starts natural input of linear differential

B

• {3(} … {starts natural input of 3 calculation

3 f(x) }

A
x=A

S Math Input/Output Mode Input Examples
This section provides a number of different examples showing how the MATH function menu
and other keys can be used during Math input/output mode natural input. Be sure to pay
attention to the input cursor position as you input values and data.
Example 1

To input 23 + 1
A,
B
C

@
U

Example 2

(

To input 1+

2
5

)

2

@

6
AA

1-12

D
C
V

U

1

Example 3

To input 1+

0

x + 1dx

@
(MATH)(E)(°dx)

T
@

C?

D@

C

U

Example 4

To input 2 ×

1
2
2

2
1
2

A	(MATH)(MAT)(2×2)

6@AA

CC

V()AC

1-13

CV()ACC6@AA

U

S When the calculation does not fit within the display window
Arrows appear at the left, right, top, or bottom edge of the
display to let you know when there is more of the
calculation off the screen in the corresponding direction.
When you see an arrow, you can use the cursor keys to
scroll the screen contents and view the part you want.

S Math Input/Output Mode Input Restrictions
Certain types of expressions can cause the vertical width of a calculation formula to be greater
than one display line. The maximum allowable vertical width of a calculation formula is about
two display screens (120 dots). You cannot input any expression that exceeds this limitation.

S Using Values and Expressions as Arguments
A value or an expression that you have already input can be used as the argument of a
function. After you have input “(2+3)”, for example, you can make it the argument of ,
resulting in (2+3).
Example
1. Move the cursor so it is located directly to the left of the part of the expression that you want
to become the argument of the function you will insert.

2. Press #(INS).
• This changes the cursor to an insert cursor ().

3. Press V() to insert the  function.
• This inserts the  function and makes the parenthetical expression its argument.

As shown above, the value or expression to the right of the cursor after #(INS) are
pressed becomes the argument of the function that is specified next. The range encompassed
as the argument is everything up to the first open parenthesis to the right, if there is one, or
everything up to the first function to the right (sin(30), log2(4), etc.).
1-14

This capability can be used with the following functions.
Function

Key Operation

Improper Fraction

6

Power

,



V()

Cube Root

(3)

Power Root

,(x)

ex

((ex)

10x

J(10x)

log(a,b)

(MATH)(logab)

Absolute Value

(MATH)(Abs)

Linear Differential

(MATH)(d/dx)

Quadratic Differential

(MATH)(d2/dx2)

Integral

(MATH)(E)
(°dx)

3 Calculation

(MATH)(E)
(3( )

Original
Expression

Expression After
Insertion

• In the Linear input/output mode, pressing #(INS) will change to the insert mode. See
page 1-6 for more information.

S Editing Calculations in the Math Input/Output Mode
The procedures for editing calculations in the Math input/output mode are basically the same
as those for the Linear input/output mode. For more information, see “Editing Calculations”
(page 1-6).
Note however, that the following points are different between the Math input/output mode and
the Linear input/output mode.
• Overwrite mode input that is available in the Linear input/output mode is not supported by
the Math input/output mode. In the Math input/output mode, input is always inserted at the
current cursor location.
• In the Math input/output mode, pressing the # key always performs a backspace operation.
• Note the following cursor operations you can use while inputting a calculation with Math
input/output mode.
To do this:
Move the cursor from the end of the calculation to the beginning
Move the cursor from the beginning of the calculation to the end

1-15

Press this key:
C
B

I Using Undoing and Redoing Operations
You can use the following procedures during calculation expression input in the Math input/
output mode (up until you press the U key) to undo the last key operation and to redo the
key operation you have just undone.
- To undo the last key operation, press: ?#(UNDO).
- To redo a key operation you have just undone, press: ?#(UNDO) again.
• You also can use UNDO to cancel an
key operation. After pressing
to clear an
expression you have input, pressing ?#(UNDO) will restore what was on the display
before you pressed
.
• You also can use UNDO to cancel a cursor key operation. If you press C during input and
then press ?#(UNDO), the cursor will return to where it was before you pressed C.
• The UNDO operation is disabled while the keyboard is alpha-locked. Pressing
?#(UNDO) while the keyboard is alpha-locked will perform the same delete operation
as the # key alone.
Example
@
6@C
#
?#(UNDO)
A

?#(UNDO)

I Math Input/Output Mode Calculation Result Display
Fractions, matrices, and lists produced by Math input/output mode calculations are displayed
in natural format, just as they appear in your textbook.

Sample Calculation Result Displays
• Fractions are displayed either as improper fractions or mixed fractions, depending on the
“Frac Result” setting on the Setup screen. For details, see “Using the Setup Screen” (page
1-26).

1-16

• Matrices are displayed in natural format, up to 6 × 6. A matrix that has more than six rows or
columns will be displayed on a MatAns screen, which is the same screen used in the Linear
input/output mode.
• Lists are displayed in natural format for up to 20 elements. A list that has more than 20
elements will be displayed on a ListAns screen, which is the same screen used in the Linear
input/output mode.
• Arrows appear at the left, right, top, or bottom edge of the display to let you know when there
is more data off the screen in the corresponding direction.

You can use the cursor keys to scroll the screen and view the data you want.
• Pressing (DEL)(DEL • L) while a calculation result is selected will delete both the result
and the calculation that produced it.
• The multiplication sign cannot be omitted immediately before an improper fraction or mixed
fraction. Be sure to always input a multiplication sign in this case.
A	A6D
Example: 2× 2
5
• A ,, V, or (x–1) key operation cannot be followed immediately by another ,,
V, or (x–1) key operation. In this case, use parentheses to keep the key operations
separate.
BV(x–1)

Example: (32)–1

I History Function
The history function maintains a history of calculation expressions and results in the Math
input/output mode. Up to 30 sets of calculation expressions and results are maintained.
@
AU
	AU

You can also edit the calculation expressions that are maintained by the history function and
recalculate. This will recalculate all of the expressions starting from the edited expression.
Example

To change “1+2” to “1+3” and recalculate

Perform the following operation following the sample shown above.
DDDDB#BU

1-17

• The value stored in the answer memory is always dependent on the result produced by
the last calculation performed. If history contents include operations that use the answer
memory, editing a calculation may affect the answer memory value used in subsequent
calculations.
- If you have a series of calculations that use the answer memory to include the result of the
previous calculation in the next calculation, editing a calculation will affect the results of all
the other calculations that come after it.
- When the first calculation of the history includes the answer memory contents, the answer
memory value is “0” because there is no calculation before the first one in history.

I Using the Clipboard for Copy and Paste in the Math Input/Output Mode
You can copy a function, command, or other input to the clipboard, and then paste the
clipboard contents at another location.
• In the Math input/output mode, you can specify only one line as the copy range.
• The CUT operation is supported for the Linear input/output mode only. It is not supported for
the Math input/output mode.

S To copy text
1. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the line you want to copy.
2. Press G(CLIP). The cursor will change to “

”.

3. Press (CPY · L) to copy the highlighted text to the clipboard.

S To paste text
Move the cursor to the location where you want to paste the text, and then press
H(PASTE). The contents of the clipboard are pasted at the cursor position.

I Calculation Operations in the Math Input/Output Mode
This section introduces Math input/output mode calculation examples.
• For details about calculation operations, see “Chapter 2 Manual Calculations”.

S Performing Function Calculations Using Math Input/Output Mode
Example

Operation

6 = 3
4 × 5 10

664	5U

cos  = 1 (Angle: Rad)
2
3

A$(P)63CU

log28 = 3

(MATH)(logab) 2C8U

7

,(x) 7C123U

( )

123 = 1.988647795

2 + 3 × 3 64 − 4 = 10
log

3
= 0.1249387366
4

2
3	,(x) 3C64C4U
(MATH)(Abs)J364U
1-18

2 + 3 1 = 73
4 20
5
1.5 + 2.3i = 3 + 23 i
2 10

d 3
2
dx ( x + 4x + x − 6 ) x = 3 = 52
5

 2x

2

1

6

∑ (k

2

+ 3 x + 4 dx = 404
3

)

− 3k + 5 = 55

k=2

265C
36()1C4U
1.5
2.3?(i)U,
(MATH)(d/dx)T,3C
4
TV
T6C3U
(MATH)(E)(°dx) 2TV
3T
4C1
C5U
(MATH)(E)(3)?(K)V3?(K)

5C?(K)C2C6U

I Performing Matrix Calculations Using Math Input/Output Mode
S To specify the dimensions (size) of a matrix
1. In the RUN • MAT mode, press K(SET UP)(Math)).
2. Press (MATH) to display the MATH menu.
3. Press (MAT) to display the following menu.
• {2s2} … {inputs a 2 × 2 matrix}
• {3s3} … {inputs a 3 × 3 matrix}
• {msn} … {inputs an m-row × n-column matrix (up to 6 × 6)}
Example

To create a 2-row s 3-column matrix
(msn)

Specify the number of rows.
AU
Specify the number of columns.
BU
U

S To input cell values
Example

To perform the calculation shown below
1
1
33
2
×8
13
5
6
4
1-19

The following operation is a continuation of the example calculation on the previous page.
@C@6ACCBBC
@B6CCCDCEC
	GU

S To assign a matrix created using Math input/output mode to a MAT mode
matrix
Example

To assign the calculation result to Mat J
A(Mat)(Ans)?
A(Mat)?(J)U

• Pressing the # key while the cursor is located at the top (upper left) of the matrix will delete
the entire matrix.

#


I Using Graph Modes and the EQUA Mode in the Math Input/Output
Mode
Using the Math input/output mode with any of the modes below lets you input numeric
expressions just as they are written in your text book and view calculation results in natural
display format.
Modes that support input of expressions as they are written in textbooks:
RUN • MAT, e • ACT, GRAPH, DYNA, TABLE, RECUR, EQUA (SOLV)
Modes that support natural display format:
RUN • MAT, e • ACT, EQUA
The following explanations show Math input/output mode operations in the GRAPH, DYNA,
TABLE, RECUR and EQUA modes, and natural calculation result display in the EQUA mode.
• See the sections that cover each calculation for details about its operation.
• See “Input Operations in the Math Input/Output Mode” (page 1-11) and “Calculation
Operations in the Math Input/Output Mode” (page 1-18) for details about Math input/output
mode input operations and calculation result displays in the RUN • MAT mode.
• e • ACT mode input operations and result displays are the same as those in the RUN • MAT
mode. For information about e • ACT mode operations, see “Chapter 10 eActivity”.

1-20

Important!
• On a model whose operating system has been updated to OS 2.00 from an older OS
version, Math input/output mode input and result display are not supported in any mode
except the RUN • MAT mode and e • ACT mode.

S Math Input/Output Mode Input in the GRAPH Mode
You can use the Math input/output mode for graph expression input in the GRAPH, DYNA,
TABLE, and RECUR modes.

x
x
In the GRAPH mode, input the function y = 2 − 2 −1 and then graph it.
' '
Make sure that initial default settings are configured on the View
Window.
2

Example 1

KGRAPHTV6V()A\
CCT6V()ACC\
@U
(DRAW)

Example 2

x 1
In the GRAPH mode, input the function y =
x 2− 1 x −1 dx and then
0 4
2
graph it.
Make sure that initial default settings are configured on the View
Window.



KGRAPH*(CALC)(°dx)
@6CCTV@6AC
T@C?CTU
(DRAW)

• Math Input/Output Mode Input and Result Display in the EQUA Mode
You can use the Math input/output mode in the EQUA mode for input and display as shown
below.
• In the case of simultaneous equations ((SIML)) and high-order equations ((POLY)),
solutions are output in natural display format (fractions, , P are displayed in natural format)
whenever possible.
• In the case of Solver ((SOLV)), you can use Math input/output mode natural input.

1-21

Example

To solve the quadratic equation x2 + 3x + 5 = 0 in the EQUA mode
KEQUAK(SET UP)
AAAA(Complex Mode)
(a+bi))
(POLY)(2)@UBUDUU

5. Option (OPTN) Menu
The option menu gives you access to scientific functions and features that are not marked on
the calculator’s keyboard. The contents of the option menu differ according to the mode you
are in when you press the * key.
• The option menu does not appear if you press * while binary, octal, decimal, or
hexadecimal is set as the default number system.
• For details about the commands included on the option (OPTN) menu, see the “* key”
item in the “PRGM Mode Command List” (page 8-37).
• The meanings of the option menu items are described in the sections that cover each mode.
The following list shows the option menu that is displayed when the RUN • MAT (or RUN) or
PRGM mode is selected.
Item names below that are marked with an asterisk (*) are not included on the fx-7400Gɉ.
• {LIST} ... {list function menu}
• {MAT}* ... {matrix operation menu}
• {CPLX} ... {complex number calculation menu}
• {CALC} ... {functional analysis menu}
• {STAT} ... {paired-variable statistical estimated value menu} (fx-7400Gɉ)
{menu for paired-variable statistical estimated value, distribution, standard
deviation, variance, and test functions} (all models except fx-7400Gɉ)
• {CONV} ... {metric conversion menu}
• {HYP} ... {hyperbolic calculation menu}
• {PROB} ... {probability/distribution calculation menu}
• {NUM} ... {numeric calculation menu}
• {ANGL} ... {menu for angle/coordinate conversion, sexagesimal input/conversion}
• {ESYM} ... {engineering symbol menu}
• {PICT} ... {graph save/recall menu}
• {FMEM} ... {function memory menu}
• {LOGIC} ... {logic operator menu}
• {CAPT} ... {screen capture menu}
• {TVM}* ... {financial calculation menu}
• The PICT, FMEM and CAPT items are not displayed when “Math” is selected for the “Input/
Output” mode setting on the Setup screen.

1-22

6. Variable Data (VARS) Menu
To recall variable data, press ) to display the variable data menu.
{V-WIN}/{FACT}/{STAT}/{GRPH}/{DYNA}/{TABL}/{RECR}/{EQUA}/{TVM}/{Str}
• Note that the EQUA and TVM items appear for function keys ( and ) only when you
access the variable data menu from the RUN • MAT (or RUN) or PRGM mode.
• The variable data menu does not appear if you press ) while binary, octal, decimal, or
hexadecimal is set as the default number system.
• Depending on the calculator model, some menu items may not be included.
• For details about the commands included on the variable data (VARS) menu, see the “)
key” item in the “PRGM Mode Command List” (page 8-37).
• Item names below that are marked with an asterisk (*) are not included on the fx-7400Gɉ.

S V-WIN — Recalling V-Window values
• {X}/{Y}/{T,Ƨ} ... {x-axis menu}/{y-axis menu}/{T,Ƨmenu}
• {R-X}/{R-Y}/{R-T,Ƨ} ... {x-axis menu}/{y-axis menu}/{T,Ƨmenu} for right side of Dual
Graph
• {min}/{max}/{scal}/{dot}/{ptch} ... {minimum value}/{maximum value}/{scale}/{dot
value*1}/{pitch}
*1 The dot value indicates the display range (Xmax value – Xmin value) divided by the
screen dot pitch (126). The dot value is normally calculated automatically from the
minimum and maximum values. Changing the dot value causes the maximum to be
calculated automatically.

S FACT — Recalling zoom factors
• {Xfct}/{Yfct} ... {x-axis factor}/{y-axis factor}
S STAT — Recalling statistical data
• {X} … {single-variable, paired-variable x-data}
¯ }/{3x}/{3x2}/{Ʊx}/{sx}/{minX}/{maxX} ... {number of data}/{mean}/{sum}/{sum
• {n}/{x
of squares}/{population standard deviation}/{sample standard deviation}/{minimum
value}/{maximum value}
• {Y} ... {paired-variable y-data}
• {Κ}/{3y}/{3y2}/{3xy}/{Ʊx}/{sy}/{minY}/{maxY} ... {mean}/{sum}/{sum of squares}/{sum
of products of x-data and y-data}/{population standard deviation}/{sample standard
deviation}/{minimum value}/{maximum value}
• {GRPH} ... {graph data menu}
• {a}/{b}/{c}/{d}/{e} ... {regression coefficient and polynomial coefficients}
• {r}/{r2} ... {correlation coefficient}/{coefficient of determination}
• {MSe} ... {mean square error}
• {Q1}/{Q3} ... {first quartile}/{third quartile}
• {Med}/{Mod} ... {median}/{mode} of input data
• {Strt}/{Pitch} ... histogram {start division}/{pitch}
• {PTS} ... {summary point data menu}
• {x1}/{y1}/{x2}/{y2}/{x3}/{y3} ... {coordinates of summary points}
1-23

• {INPT}* ... {statistical calculation input values}
¯ }/{sx}/{n1}/{n2}/{x¯ 1}/{x¯ 2}/{sx1}/{sx2}/{sp} ... {size of sample}/{mean of sample}/{sample
• {n}/{x
standard deviation}/{size of sample 1}/{size of sample 2}/{mean of sample 1}/{mean of
sample 2}/{standard deviation of sample 1}/{standard deviation of sample 2}/{standard
deviation of sample p}
• {RESLT}* ... {statistical calculation output values}
• {TEST} ... {test calculation results}
ˆ }/{ pˆ 1}/{ pˆ 2}/{df}/{se}/{r}/{r 2}/{pa}/{Fa}/{Adf}/{SSa}/{MSa}/{pb}/{Fb}/
• {p}/{z}/{t}/{Chi}/{F}/{ p
{Bdf}/{SSb}/{MSb}/{pab}/{Fab}/{ABdf}/{SSab}/{MSab}/{Edf}/{SSe}/{MSe}
... {p-value}/{z score}/{t score}/{C2 value}/{F value}/{estimated sample proportion}/
{estimated proportion of sample 1}/{estimated proportion of sample 2}/{degrees of
freedom}/{standard error}/{correlation coefficient}/{coefficient of determination}/
{factor A p-value}/{factor A F value}/{factor A degrees of freedom}/{factor A sum of
squares}/{factor A mean squares}/{factor B p-value}/{factor B F value}/{factor B
degrees of freedom}/{factor B sum of squares}/ {factor B mean squares}/{factor AB
p-value}/{factor AB F value}/{factor AB degrees of freedom}/{factor AB sum of
squares}/{factor AB mean squares}/{error degrees of freedom}/{error sum of
squares}/{error mean squares}
• {INTR} ... {confidence interval calculation results}
ˆ }/{ pˆ 1}/{ pˆ 2}/{df} ... {confidence interval lower limit (left edge)}/
• {Left}/{Right}/{ p
{confidence interval upper limit (right edge)}/{estimated sample proportion}/
{estimated proportion of sample 1}/{estimated proportion of sample 2}/{degrees of
freedom}
• {DIST} ... {distribution calculation results}
• {p}/{xInv}/{x1Inv}/{x2Inv}/{zLow}/{zUp}/{tLow}/{tUp} ... {probability distribution
or cumulative distribution calculation result (p-value)}/{inverse Student-t, C2, F,
binomial, Poisson, geometric or hypergeometric cumulative distribution calculation
result}/{inverse normal cumulative distribution upper limit (right edge) or lower limit
(left edge)}/{inverse normal cumulative distribution upper limit (right edge)}/{normal
cumulative distribution lower limit (left edge)}/{normal cumulative distribution upper
limit (right edge)}/{Student-t cumulative distribution lower limit (left edge)}/{Student-t
cumulative distribution upper limit (right edge)}

S GRPH — Recalling graph functions
• {Y}/{r} ... {rectangular coordinate or inequality function}/{polar coordinate function}
• {Xt}/{Yt} ... parametric graph function {Xt}/{Yt}
• {X} ... {X=constant graph function}
• Press these keys before inputting a value to specify a memory area.

S DYNA* — Recalling dynamic graph setup data
• {Strt}/{End}/{Pitch} ... {coefficient range start value}/{coefficient range end value}/
{coefficient value increment}

S TABL — Recalling table setup and content data
• {Strt}/{End}/{Pitch} ... {table range start value}/{table range end value}/{table value
increment}
• {Reslt*1} ... {matrix of table contents}
*1 The Reslt item appears only when the TABL menu is displayed in the RUN • MAT (or
RUN) and PRGM modes.
1-24

S RECR* — Recalling recursion formula*1, table range, and table content data
• {FORM} ... {recursion formula data menu}
• {an}/{an+1}/{an+2}/{bn}/{bn+1}/{bn+2}/{cn}/{cn+1}/{cn+2} ... {an}/{an+1}/{an+2}/{bn}/{bn+1}/{bn+2}/{cn}/
{cn+1}/{cn+2} expressions
• {RANG} ... {table range data menu}
• {Strt}/{End} ... table range {start value}/{end value}
• {a0}/{a1}/{a2}/{b0}/{b1}/{b2}/{c0}/{c1}/{c2} ... {a0}/{a1}/{a2}/{b0}/{b1}/{b2}/{c0}/{c1}/{c2} value
• {anSt}/{bnSt}/{cnSt} ... origin of {an}/{bn}/{cn} recursion formula convergence/divergence
graph (WEB graph)
• {Reslt*2}* ... {matrix of table contents*3}
*1 An error occurs when there is no function or recursion formula numeric table in memory.
*2 “Reslt” is available only in the RUN • MAT and PRGM modes.
*3 Table contents are stored automatically in Matrix Answer Memory (MatAns).

S EQUA* — Recalling equation coefficients and solutions*1 *2
• {S-Rlt}/{S-Cof} ... matrix of {solutions}/{coefficients} for linear equations with two through
six unknowns*3
• {P-Rlt}/{P-Cof} ... matrix of {solution}/{coefficients} for a quadratic or cubic equation
*1 Coefficients and solutions are stored automatically in Matrix Answer Memory (MatAns).
*2 The following conditions cause an error.
- When there are no coefficients input for the equation
- When there are no solutions obtained for the equation
3

* Coefficient and solution memory data for a linear equation cannot be recalled at the same
time.

S TVM* — Recalling financial calculation data
• {n}/{I%}/{PV}/{PMT}/{FV} ... {payment periods (installments)}/{annual interest rate}/
{present value}/{payment}/{future value}
• {P/Y}/{C/Y} ... {installment periods per year}/{compounding periods per year}

S Str — Str command
• {Str} ... {string memory}

7. Program (PRGM) Menu
To display the program (PRGM) menu, first enter the RUN • MAT (or RUN) or PRGM mode
from the Main Menu and then press )(PRGM). The following are the selections
available in the program (PRGM) menu.
• {COM} ...... {program command menu}
• {CTL} ....... {program control command menu}
• {JUMP} ..... {jump command menu}
• {?} ............ {input command}
• {<} .......... {output command}
• {CLR} ....... {clear command menu}
1-25

• {DISP} ...... {display command menu}
• {REL} ....... {conditional jump relational operator menu}
• {I/O} ......... {I/O control/transfer command menu}
• {:} ............. {multi-statement command}
• {STR} ....... {string command}
The following function key menu appears if you press )(PRGM) in the RUN • MAT (or
RUN) mode or the PRGM mode while binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal is set as the
default number system.
• {Prog}....... {program recall}
• {JUMP}/{?}/{<}/{REL}/{:}
The functions assigned to the function keys are the same as those in the Comp mode.
For details on the commands that are available in the various menus you can access from the
program menu, see “Chapter 8 Programming”.

8. Using the Setup Screen
The mode’s Setup screen shows the current status of mode settings and lets you make any
changes you want. The following procedure shows how to change a setup.

S To change a mode setup
1. Select the icon you want and press U to enter a mode and display its initial screen. Here
we will enter the RUN • MAT (or RUN) mode.
2. Press K(SET UP) to display the mode’s Setup
screen.
• This Setup screen is just one possible example. Actual
Setup screen contents will differ according to the mode
you are in and that mode’s current settings.

3. Use the D and A cursor keys to move the highlighting to the item whose setting you
want to change.
4. Press the function key ( to ) that is marked with the setting you want to make.
5. After you are finished making any changes you want, press ) to exit the Setup screen.

I Setup Screen Function Key Menus
This section details the settings you can make using the function keys in the Setup screen.
indicates default setting.
Item names below that are marked with an asterisk (*) are not included on the fx-7400Gɉ.
1-26

S Mode (calculation/binary, octal, decimal, hexadecimal mode)
• {Comp} ... {arithmetic calculation mode}
• {Dec}/{Hex}/{Bin}/{Oct} ... {decimal}/{hexadecimal}/{binary}/{octal}

S Frac Result (fraction result display format)
• {d/c}/{ab/c} ... {improper}/{mixed} fraction

S Func Type (graph function type)
Pressing one of the following function keys also switches the function of the T key.
• {Y=}/{r=}/{Parm}/{X=} ... {rectangular coordinate (Y= I(x) type)}/{polar coordinate}/
{parametric}/{rectangular coordinate (X= I(y) type)} graph
• {Y>}/{Y<}/{YP}/{YO} ... {y>f(x)}/{y}/{X<}/{XP}/{XO} ... {x>f(y)}/{x, <, r, b
And (logical operator), and (bitwise operator)
Or, Xor (logical operator), or, xor, xnor (bitwise operator)

*1 You can combine the contents of multiple function memory (fn) locations or graph memory
(Yn, rn, Xtn, Ytn, Xn) locations into composite functions. Specifying fn1(fn2), for example,
results in the composite function fn1°fn2 (see page 5-7). A composite function can consist of
up to five functions.
Example

2 + 3 s (log sin2P2 + 6.8) = 22.07101691 (angle unit = Rad)
1

2
3
4
5
6

• You cannot use a differential, quadratic differential, integration, 3, maximum/minimum value,
Solve, RndFix or logab calculation expression inside of a RndFix calculation term.
• When functions with the same priority are used in series, execution is performed from right to
left.

exIn 120 m ex{In( 120)}
Otherwise, execution is from left to right.
• Compound functions are executed from right to left.
• Anything contained within parentheses receives highest priority.

I Calculation Result Irrational Number Display
(fx-9860GII SD/fx-9860GII/fx-9860G AU PLUS only)
You can configure the calculator to display calculation results in irrational number format
(including  or P) by selecting “Math” for the “Input/Output” mode setting on the Setup screen.
Example


2+
8 = 3
2

(Input/Output: Math)

V()AC
V()GU

2-3

S Calculation Result Display Range with 
Display of a calculation result in  format is supported for result with  in up to two terms.
Calculation results in  format take one of the following forms.

b p d'
e
b, p d p a
b, p a'
p a
c

f

• The following are the ranges for each of the coefficients (a, b, c, d, e, f) can be displayed in
the  calculation result format.
1  a < 100, 1 < b < 1000, 1  c < 100
0  d < 100, 0  e < 1000, 1  f < 100
• In the cases shown below, a calculation result may be able to be displayed in  format even
if their coefficients (a, c, d) are outside the above ranges.
A  format calculation result uses a common denominator.

b + d´'
e
a'
b + d'
e m a´'
c´
c
f

* c´ is the least common multiple of c and f.

Since the calculation result uses a common denominator, calculation result still may be
displayed using the  format even when coefficients (a´, c´, d´) are outside the corresponding
range of coefficients (a, c, d).
Example:

3 '
2 10'
3 + 11'
2
'
+
=
11 10
110

Calculation Examples
This calculation:

Produces this type of display:

2 s (3 – 2
5) = 6 – 4
5

 format

2)*1
35
2 s 3 = 148.492424 (= 105

Decimal format

150'
2
= 8.485281374*1
25
23 s (5 – 2
3) = 35.32566285 (= 115 – 46
3)*1

Decimal format


2+
3+
8=
3 + 3
2

 format

2+'
3+'
6 = 5.595754113*2
'

Decimal format

*1 Decimal format because values are outside of range.
*2 Decimal format because calculation result has three terms.
• The calculation result is displayed using decimal format even if an intermediate result goes
greater than two terms.
Example: (1 + 
2+
3) (1 – 
2–
3)

(= – 4 – 2
6)

= –8.898979486
• If the calculation formula has a  term and a term that cannot be displayed as a fraction,
the calculation result will be displayed in decimal format.
Example: log3 + 
2 = 1.891334817
2-4

S Calculation Result Display Range with P
A calculation results is displayed using P format in the following cases.
• When the calculation result can be displayed in the form nP

n is an integer up to |106|.

b
b
P or
P
c
c
However, {number of a digits + number of b digits + number of c digits} must be 9 or less
b
b
when the above a or
is reduced.*1*2 Also, the maximum number of allowable c digits is
c
c
2

• When the calculation result can be displayed in the form a

three.*

*1 When c < b, the number of a, b, and c digits are counted when the fraction is converted
from an improper fraction ( b ) to a mixed fraction (a

c

b
).
c

2

* When “Manual” is specified for the Setup screen “Simplify” setting, the calculation result
may be displayed in decimal format, even if these conditions are met.
Calculation Examples
This calculation:

Produces this type of display:

78Ps 2 = 156P

P format

123456P s 9 = 3490636.164 (= 11111104 P)*3

Decimal format

105
2

568
71
P = 105
P
824
103

258
P = 6.533503684
3238

P format
2

129
 *4
1619

Decimal format

*3 Decimal format because calculation result integer part is |106| or greater.
*4 Decimal format because number of denominator digits is four or greater for the a

b
P form.
c

I Multiplication Operations without a Multiplication Sign
You can omit the multiplication sign (s) in any of the following operations.
• Before Type A functions ( on page 2-2) and Type C functions ( on page 2-2), except for
negative signs
Example 1

3, 2Pol(5, 12), etc.
2sin30, 10log1.2, 2'

• Before constants, variable names, memory names
Example 2

2P, 2AB, 3Ans, 3Y1, etc.

• Before an open parenthesis
Example 3

3(5 + 6), (A + 1)(B – 1), etc.

2-5

I Overflow and Errors
Exceeding a specified input or calculation range, or attempting an illegal input causes an error
message to appear on the display. Further operation of the calculator is impossible while an
error message is displayed. For details, see the “Error Message Table” on page A-1.
• Most of the calculator’s keys are inoperative while an error message is displayed. Press )
to clear the error and return to normal operation.

I Memory Capacity
Each time you press a key, either one byte or two bytes is used. Some of the functions that
require one byte are: @, A, B, sin, cos, tan, log, In, , and P.
Some of the functions that take up two bytes are d/dx(, Mat, Xmin, If, For, Return, DrawGraph,
SortA(, PxIOn, Sum, and an+1.
• The required number of bytes to input functions and commands is different in the Linear
input/output mode and the Math input/output mode. For details about the number of bytes
required for each function in the Math input/output mode, see page 1-11.

2. Special Functions
I Calculations Using Variables
Example

Operation

Display

193.2??T(A)U

193.2

193.2 ÷ 23 = 8.4

?T(A)23U

8.4

193.2 ÷ 28 = 6.9

?T(A)28U

6.9

I Memory
S Variables (Alpha Memory)
This calculator comes with 28 variables as standard. You can use variables to store values you
want to use inside of calculations. Variables are identified by single-letter names, which are
made up of the 26 letters of the alphabet, plus r and Q. The maximum size of values that you
can assign to variables is 15 digits for the mantissa and 2 digits for the exponent.
• Variable contents are retained even when you turn power off.

S To assign a value to a variable
[value] ? [variable name] U
Example 1

To assign 123 to variable A
@AB??T(A)U
2-6

Example 2

To add 456 to variable A and store the result in variable B
?T(A)
CDE?
?J(B)U

S To assign the same value to more than one variable
[value]? [first variable name]?(~) [last variable name]U
• You cannot use “r” or “Q” as a variable name.
Example

To assign a value of 10 to variables A through F
@???T(A)
?(~)?R(F)U

S String Memory
You can store up to 20 strings (named Str 1 to Str 20) in string memory. Stored strings can be
output to the display or used inside functions and commands that support the use of strings as
arguments.
For details about string operations, see “Strings” (page 8-18).
Example

To assign string “ABC” to Str 1 and then output Str 1 to the display
?( A -LOCK)$(”)T(A)
J(B)((C)$(”)?(Releases Alpha Lock.)
?)(E)(Str)*@U
(Str)*@U
* fx-7400GII: (Str)
String is displayed justified left.

• Perform the above operation in the Linear input/output mode. It cannot be performed in the
Math input/output mode.

S Function Memory

[OPTN]-[FMEM]

Function memory is convenient for temporary storage of often-used expressions. For longer
term storage, we recommend that you use the GRAPH mode for expressions and the PRGM
mode for programs.
• {STO}/{RCL}/{fn}/{SEE} ... {function store}/{function recall}/{function area specification as a
variable name inside an expression}/{function list}

2-7

S To store a function
Example

To store the function (A+B) (A–B) as function memory number 1
?T(A)
?J(B)
?T(A)?J(B)
*(E)(E)(FMEM)*
(STO)@U
* fx-7400GII: (FMEM)
)))

• If the function memory number to which you store a function already contains a function, the
previous function is replaced with the new one.
• You can also use ? to store a function in function
memory in a program. In this case, you must enclose the
function inside of double quotation marks.

S To recall a function
Example

To recall the contents of function memory number 1
*(E)(E)(FMEM)*
(RCL)@U
* fx-7400GII: (FMEM)

• The recalled function appears at the current location of the cursor on the display.

S To recall a function as a variable
B??T(A)U
@??J(B)U
*(E)(E)(FMEM)*(fn)
@
AU
* fx-7400GII: (FMEM)

S To display a list of available functions
*(E)(E)(FMEM)*
(SEE)
* fx-7400GII: (FMEM)

2-8

S To delete a function
Example

To delete the contents of function memory number 1

*(E)(E)(FMEM)*
(STO)@U
* fx-7400GII: (FMEM)
• Executing the store operation while the display is blank deletes the function in the function
memory you specify.

I Answer Function
The Answer Function automatically stores the last result you calculated by pressing
U (unless the U key operation results in an error). The result is stored in the answer
memory.
• The largest value that the answer memory can hold is 15 digits for the mantissa and 2 digits
for the exponent.
• Answer memory contents are not cleared when you press the
power off.

key or when you switch

S To use the contents of the answer memory in a calculation
Example

123 + 456 = 579
789 – 579 = 210
@AB
CDEU
FGH(Ans)U

fx-7400GII, fx-9750GII users...
• The answer memory contents are not changed by an operation that assigns values to Alpha
memory (such as: D??J(B)U).
fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GII, fx-9860G AU PLUS, fx-9860G Slim users...
• In the Math input/output mode, the operation to recall answer memory contents is different
from the operation in the Linear input/output mode. For details, see “History Function” (page
1-17).
• Performing an operation that assigns a value to an Alpha memory (such as
D??J(B)U), answer memory contents are updated in the Math input/output mode
but not in the Linear input/output mode.

2-9

I Performing Continuous Calculations
Answer memory also lets you use the result of one calculation as one of the arguments in the
next calculation.
Example

1w3=
1w3s3=
@BU
(Continuing)	BU

Continuous calculations can also be used with Type B functions (x2, x–1, x!, on page 2-2), +, –,
^(xy), x, ° ’ ”, etc.

3. Specifying the Angle Unit and Display Format
Before performing a calculation for the first time, you should use the Setup screen to specify
the angle unit and display format.

I Setting the Angle Unit

[SET UP]- [Angle]

1. On the Setup screen, highlight “Angle”.
2. Press the function key for the angle unit you want to specify, then press ).
• {Deg}/{Rad}/{Gra} ... {degrees}/{radians}/{grads}
• The relationship between degrees, grads, and radians is shown below.
360° = 2P radians = 400 grads
90° = P/2 radians = 100 grads

I Setting the Display Format

[SET UP]- [Display]

1. On the Setup screen, highlight “Display”.
2. Press the function key for the item you want to set, then press ).
• {Fix}/{Sci}/{Norm}/{Eng} ... {fixed number of decimal places specification}/
{number of significant digits specification}/{normal display}/{Engineering mode}

S To specify the number of decimal places (Fix)
Example

To specify two decimal places
(Fix)AU
Press the number key that corresponds to the number of decimal places you want to specify
(n = 0 to 9).

• Displayed values are rounded off to the number of decimal places you specify.

2-10

S To specify the number of significant digits (Sci)
Example

To specify three significant digits
(Sci)BU
Press the number key that corresponds to the number of significant digits you want to specify
(n = 0 to 9). Specifying 0 makes the number of significant digits 10.

• Displayed values are rounded off to the number of significant digits you specify.

S To specify the normal display (Norm 1/Norm 2)
Press (Norm) to switch between Norm 1 and Norm 2.
Norm 1: 10–2 (0.01) > |x|, |x| 1010
Norm 2: 10–9 (0.000000001) > |x|, |x| 1010

S To specify the engineering notation display (Eng mode)
Press (Eng) to switch between engineering notation and standard notation. The indicator
“/E” is on the display while engineering notation is in effect.
You can use the following symbols to convert values to engineering notation, such as 2,000
(= 2 × 103) m 2k.
E (Exa)

s 1018

m (milli)

s 10–3

P (Peta)

s 1015

M (micro)

s 10–6

T (Tera)

s 1012

n (nano)

s 10–9

G (Giga)

s 109

p (pico)

s 10–12

M (Mega)

s 106

f (femto)

s 10–15

k (kilo)

s 103

• The engineering symbol that makes the mantissa a value from 1 to 1000 is automatically
selected by the calculator when engineering notation is in effect.

4. Function Calculations
I Function Menus
This calculator includes five function menus that give you access to scientific functions not
printed on the key panel.
• The contents of the function menu differ according to the mode you entered from the Main
Menu before you pressed the * key. The following examples show function menus that
appear in the RUN • MAT (or RUN) or PRGM mode.

2-11

S Hyperbolic Calculations (HYP)

[OPTN]-[HYP]

• {sinh}/{cosh}/{tanh} ... hyperbolic {sine}/{cosine}/{tangent}
• {sinh–1}/{cosh–1}/{tanh–1} ... inverse hyperbolic {sine}/{cosine}/{tangent}

S Probability/Distribution Calculations (PROB)

[OPTN]-[PROB]

• {x!} ... {press after inputting a value to obtain the factorial of the value}
• {nPr}/{nCr} ... {permutation}/{combination}
• {RAND} ... {random number generation}
• {Ran#}/{Int}/{Norm}/{Bin}/{List} ... {random number generation (0 to 1)}/{random integer
generation}/{random number generation in accordance with normal distribution based
on mean ƫ and standard deviation Ʊ}/{random number generation in accordance with
binomial distribution based on number of trials n and probability p}/{random number
generation (0 to 1) and storage of result in ListAns}
• {P(}/{Q(}/{R(} ... normal probability {P(t)}/{Q(t)}/{R(t)}
• {t(} ... {value of normalized variate t(x)}

S Numeric Calculations (NUM)

[OPTN]-[NUM]

• {Abs} ... {select this item and input a value to obtain the absolute value of the value}
• {Int}/{Frac} ... select the item and input a value to extract the {integer}/{fraction} part.
• {Rnd} ... {rounds off the value used for internal calculations to 10 significant digits (to match
the value in the answer memory), or to the number of decimal places (Fix) and number
of significant digits (Sci) specified by you}
• {Intg} ... {select this item and input a value to obtain the largest integer that is not greater
than the value}
• {RndFi} ... {rounds off the value used for internal calculations to specified digits (0 to 9) (see
page 2-2).}
• {GCD} ... {greatest common divisor for two values}
• {LCM} ... {least common multiple for two values}
• {MOD} ... {remainder of division (remainder output when n is divided by m)}
• {MOD • E} ... {remainder when division is performed on a power value (remainder output
when n is raised to p power and then divided by m)}

S Angle Units, Coordinate Conversion, Sexagesimal Operations (ANGL)
[OPTN]-[ANGL]
• {°}/{r}/{g} ... {degrees}/{radians}/{grads} for a specific input value
• {° ’ ”} ... {specifies degrees (hours), minutes, seconds when inputting a degrees/minutes/
seconds value}
• {° ’ ”} ... {converts decimal value to degrees/minutes/seconds value}
• The {° ’ ”} menu operation is available only when there is a calculation result on the display.
• {Pol(}/{Rec(} ... {rectangular-to-polar}/{polar-to-rectangular} coordinate conversion
• {DMS} ... {converts decimal value to sexagesimal value}

2-12

S Engineering Symbol (ESYM)

[OPTN]-[ESYM]

• {m}/{μ}/{n}/{p}/{f} ... {milli (10 )}/{micro (10 )}/{nano (10 )}/{pico (10 )}/{femto (10–15)}
–3

–6

–9

–12

• {k}/{M}/{G}/{T}/{P}/{E} ... {kilo (103)}/{mega (106)}/{giga (109)}/{tera (1012)}/{peta (1015)}/
{exa (1018)}
• {ENG}/{ENG} ... shifts the decimal place of the displayed value three digits to the {left}/{right}
and {decreases}/{increases} the exponent by three.
When you are using engineering notation, the engineering symbol is also changed
accordingly.
• The {ENG} and {ENG} menu operations are available only when there is a calculation result
on the display.

I Angle Units
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example

Operation

To convert 4.25 rad to degrees:
243.5070629

K(SET UP)AAAAAA*(Deg))
4.25*(E)(ANGL)**(r)U

47.3° + 82.5rad = 4774.20181°

47.3
82.5*(E)(ANGL)**(r)U

2°20´30˝ + 39´30˝ = 3°00´00˝

2*(E)(ANGL)**(° ’ ”) 20(° ’ ”) 30
(° ’ ”)
0(° ’ ”)39(° ’ ”) 30(° ’ ”)U
(° ’ ”)

2.255° = 2°15´18˝

2.255*(E)(ANGL)**(E)(DMS)U
* fx-7400GII, fx-9750GII: AAAAA ** fx-7400GII: (ANGL)

I Trigonometric and Inverse Trigonometric Functions
• Be sure to set the angle unit before performing trigonometric function and inverse
trigonometric function calculations.

radians = 100 grads)
2
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
(90° =

Example

Operation

cos (  rad) = 0.5
3

K(SET UP)AAAAAA*(Rad))
A$(P)3U

2 • sin 45° s cos 65° = 0.5976724775

K(SET UP)AAAAAA*(Deg))
2	Q45	A65U*1

sin–10.5 = 30°
(x when sinx = 0.5)

Q(sin–1) 0.5*2U
* fx-7400GII, fx-9750GII: AAAAA

*1 	 can be omitted.
2

* Input of leading zero is not necessary.

2-13

I Logarithmic and Exponential Functions
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example

Operation

log 1.23 (log101.23) = 0.08990511144 J1.23U
log28 = 3

*(CALC)*(E)(logab) 28U

(–3)4 = (–3) s (–3) s (–3) s (–3) = 81
7

1
7

3,4U
7,(x)123U

123 (= 123 ) = 1.988647795

* fx-7400GII: (CALC)
• The Linear input/output mode and Math input/output mode produce different results when
two or more powers are input in series, like: 2 , 3 , 2.
Linear input/output mode: 2^3^2 = 64

2

Math input/output mode: 23 = 512

This is because the Math input/output mode internally treats the above input as: 2^(3^(2)).

I Hyperbolic and Inverse Hyperbolic Functions
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example

Operation

sinh 3.6 = 18.28545536
cosh–1

*(E)(HYP)*(sinh) 3.6U

20
= 0.7953654612
15

*(E)(HYP)*(cosh–1)2015U
* fx-7400GII: (HYP)

I Other Functions
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example

Operation


2 +
5 = 3.65028154

V() 2
V()5U

(–3)2 = (–3) s (–3) = 9

3VU

8! (= 1 s 2 s 3 s .... s 8) = 40320

8*(E)(PROB)*1(x!)U

What is the integer part of – 3.5?

*(E)(NUM)*2(Int)3.5U
–3
*1 fx-7400GII: (PROB) *2 fx-7400GII: (NUM)

2-14

I Random Number Generation (RAND)
S Random Number Generation (0 to 1) (Ran#, RanList#)
Ran# and RanList# generate 10 digit random numbers randomly or sequentially from 0 to 1.
Ran# returns a single random number, while RanList# returns multiple random numbers in list
form. The following shows the syntaxes of Ran# and RanList#.
Ran# [a]

1a9

RanList# (n [,a])

1  n  999

• n is the number of trials. RanList# generates the number of random numbers that
corresponds to n and displays them on the ListAns screen. A value must be input for n.
• “a” is the randomization sequence. Random numbers are returned if nothing is input for “a”.
Entering an integer of 1 through 9 for a will return the corresponding sequential random
number.
• Executing the function Ran# 0 initializes the sequences of both Ran# and RanList#. The
sequence also is initialized when a sequential random number is generated with a different
sequence of the previous execution using Ran# or RanList#, or when generating a random
number.
Ran# Examples
Example

Operation

Ran#
(Generates a random number.)

*(E)(PROB)*(RAND)
(Ran#)U

(Each press of U generates a new random
number.)

U
U

Ran# 1
(Generates the first random number in
sequence 1.)

*(E)(PROB)*(RAND)
(Ran#)1U

(Generates the second random number in
sequence 1.)

U

Ran# 0
(Initializes the sequence.)

(Ran#)0U

Ran# 1
(Generates the first random number in
sequence 1.)

(Ran#)1U

* fx-7400GII: (PROB)

2-15

RanList# Examples
Example

Operation

RanList# (4)
(Generates four random numbers and
displays the result on the ListAns screen.)

*(E)(PROB)*(RAND)(List)
4U

RanList# (3, 1)
(Generates from the first to the third random
numbers of sequence 1 and displays the
result on the ListAns screen.)

)*(E)(PROB)*(RAND)
(List) 31U

(Next, generates from the fourth to the sixth
random number of sequence 1 and displays
the result on the ListAns screen.)

)U

Ran# 0
(Initializes the sequence.)

)(Ran#) 0U

RanList# (3, 1)
(Re-generates from the first to the third
random numbers of sequence 1 and displays
the result on the ListAns screen.)

(List) 31U

* fx-7400GII: (PROB)

S Random Integer Generation (RanInt#)
RanInt# generates random integers that fall between two specified integers.
RanInt# (A, B [,n])

A0

1  n  999

• Omitting a value for n returns a generated random number as-is. Specifying a value for n
returns the specified number of random values in list form.
2-16

Example

Operation

RanNorm# (8, 68)
(Randomly produces a body length value
obtained in accordance with the normal
distribution of a group of infants less than
one year old with a mean body length of
68cm and standard deviation of 8.)

*(E)(PROB)*(RAND)(Norm)
868U

RanNorm# (8, 68, 5)
(Randomly produces the body lengths of five
infants in the above example, and displays
them in a list.)

*(E)(PROB)*(RAND)(Norm)
8685U

* fx-7400GII: (PROB)

S Random Number Generation in Accordance with Binomial Distribution
(RanBin#)
This function generates random integers in accordance with binomial distribution based on
values specified for the number of trials n and probability p.
RanBin# (n, p [,m])

1  n  100000

1  m  999

0p1

• Omitting a value for m returns a generated random number as-is. Specifying a value for m
returns the specified number of random values in list form.
Example

Operation

RanBin# (5, 0.5)
(Randomly produces the number of heads
that can be expected in accordance with
binomial distribution for five coin tosses
where the probability of heads is 0.5.)

*(E)(PROB)*(RAND)(Bin)
50.5U

RanBin# (5, 0.5, 3)
(Performs the same coin toss sequence
described above three times and displays
the results in a list.)

*(E)(PROB)*(RAND)(Bin)
50.53U

* fx-7400GII: (PROB)

I Coordinate Conversion
S Rectangular Coordinates

S Polar Coordinates

• With polar coordinates, Ƨ can be calculated and displayed within a range of
–180°< Ƨ  180° (radians and grads have same range).
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
2-17

Example

Operation

Calculate r and Ƨ° when x = 14 and y = 20.7
1
2

24.989

55.928

 24.98979792 (r)
 55.92839019 ( )

Calculate x and y when r = 25 and Ƨ = 56°
1
2

13.979

20.725

K(SET UP)AAAAAA*
(Deg))
*(E)(ANGL)**(E)(Pol()
1420.7U)
(Rec() 2556U

 13.97982259 (x)
 20.72593931 (y)
* fx-7400GII, fx-9750GII: AAAAA ** fx-7400GII: (ANGL)

I Permutation and Combination
S Permutation
n!
nPr =
(n – r)!

S Combination
n!
nCr =
r! (n – r)!

• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example 1

To calculate the possible number of different arrangements using 4
items selected from among 10 items
Formula

10

P4 = 5040

Operation
10*(E)(PROB)*(nPr) 4U
* fx-7400GII: (PROB)

Example 2

To calculate the possible number of different combinations of 4 items
that can be selected from among 10 items
Formula

10

C4 = 210

Operation
10*(E)(PROB)*(nCr) 4U
* fx-7400GII: (PROB)

I Greatest Common Divisor (GCD), Least Common Multiple (LCM)
Example

Operation

To determine the greatest common
divisor of 28 and 35
(GCD (28, 35) = 7)

*(E)(NUM)*(E)(GCD) 28
35U

To determine the least common multiple
of 9 and 15
(LCM (9, 15) = 45)

*(E)(NUM)*(E)(LCM) 915
U
* fx-7400GII: (NUM)

2-18

I Division Remainder (MOD), Remainder of Exponential Division (MOD
Exp)
Example

Operation

To determine the remainder when 137 is
divided by 7
(MOD (137, 7) = 4)

*(E)(NUM)*(E)(MOD) 1377
U

To determine the remainder when 53 is
divided by 3
(MOD • E (5, 3, 3) = 2)

*(E)(NUM)*(E)(MOD • E)
533U
* fx-7400GII: (NUM)

I Fractions
• In the Math input/output mode, the fraction input method is different from that described
below. For fraction input operations in the Math input/output mode, see page 1-11.
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example

Operation

2
1
73
–– + 3 –– = –––
5
4
20
= 3.65 (Conversion to decimal)*1

25
314U

1
1
––––– + ––––– = 6.066202547 s 10–4 *2
2578
4572

12578
14572U

1
–– s 0.5 = 0.25*3
2

12	.5U

,

*1 Fractions can be converted to decimal values and vice versa.
*2 When the total number of characters, including integer, numerator, denominator and delimiter
marks exceeds 10, the fraction is automatically displayed in decimal format.
*3 Calculations containing both fractions and decimals are calculated in decimal format.
• Pressing the ,() key toggles the display fraction between mixed fraction and
improper fraction format.

I Engineering Notation Calculations
Input engineering symbols using the engineering notation menu.
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example

Operation

999k (kilo) + 25k (kilo)
= 1.024M (mega)

K(SET UP)DD(Eng))999*(E)(E)
(ESYM)*(E)(k)
25(k)U

9 w 10 = 0.9 = 900m (milli)
= 0.9

910U
*(E)(E)(ESYM)*(E)(E)(ENG)*1
2-19

= 0.0009k (kilo)
= 0.9
= 900m

(ENG)*1
(ENG)*2
(ENG)*2
* fx-7400GII: (ESYM)

*1 Converts the displayed value to the next higher engineering unit, by shifting the decimal
point three places to the right.
*2 Converts the displayed value to the next lower engineering unit, by shifting the decimal point
three places to the left.

I Logical Operators (AND, OR, NOT, XOR)

[OPTN]-[LOGIC]

The logical operator menu provides a selection of logical operators.
• {And}/{Or}/{Not}/{Xor} ... {logical AND}/{logical OR}/{logical NOT}/{logical XOR}
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example

What is the logical AND of A and B when A = 3 and B = 2?
A AND B = 1
Operation

Display

3??T(A)U
2??J(B)U
?T(A)*(E)(E)
(LOGIC)*(And)?J(B)U

1
* fx-7400GII: (LOGIC)

S About Logical Operations
• A logical operation always produces either 0 or 1 as its result.
• The following table shows all of possible results that can be produced by AND, OR and XOR
operations.
Value or Expression A

Value or Expression B

A AND B

A OR B

A XOR B

Ax0

Bx0

1

1

0

Ax0

B=0

0

1

1

A=0

Bx0

0

1

1

A=0

B=0

0

0

0

• The following table shows the results produced by the NOT operation.
Value or Expression A

NOT A

Ax0

0

A=0

1

2-20

5. Numerical Calculations
The following explains the numerical calculation operations included in the function menu
displayed when *(CALC) ((CALC) on the fx-7400GII) is pressed. The following
calculations can be performed.
• {Int÷}/{Rmdr}/{Simp} ... {quotient}/{remainder}/{simplification}
• {Solve}/{d/dx}/{d2/dx2}/{°dx}/{SolvN} ... {equality solution}/{differential}/{quadratic differential}/
{integration}/{f(x) function solution}
• {FMin}/{FMax}/{3(}/{logab} ... {minimum value}/{maximum value}/{summation}/{logarithm
logab}

I Quotient of Integer ÷ Integer

[OPTN]-[CALC]-[Int÷]

The “Int÷” function can be used to determine the quotient when one integer is divided by
another integer.
Example

To calculate the quotient of 107 ÷ 7
@?F*(CALC)*(E)
(E)(Int÷)F
U
* fx-7400GII: (CALC)

I Remainder of Integer ÷ Integer

[OPTN]-[CALC]-[Rmdr]

The “Rmdr” function can be used to determine the remainder when one integer is divided by
another integer.
Example

To calculate the remainder of 107 ÷ 7
@?F*(CALC)*(E)
(E)(Rmdr)F
U
* fx-7400GII: (CALC)

I Simplification

[OPTN]-[CALC]-[Simp]

The “Simp” function can be used to simplify fractions manually. The following operations can
be used to perform simplification when an unsimplified calculation result is on the display.
• {Simp} U ... This function automatically simplifies the displayed calculation result using the
smallest prime number available. The prime number used and the simplified result are
shown on the display.
• {Simp} n U ... This function performs simplification according to the specified divisor n.

2-21

Under initial default settings, this calculator automatically simplifies fraction calculation results
before displaying them. Before performing the following examples, use the Setup screen to
change the “Simplify” setting from “Auto” to “Manual” (page 1-29).
• When “a+bi” or “rQ” is specified for the Setup screen “Complex Mode” setting, fraction
calculation results always are simplified before being displayed, even if the “Simplify” setting
is “Manual”.
• If you want to simplify fractions manually (Simplify: Manual), make sure that the “Real” is
selected for the “Complex Mode” setting.
Example 1

15
60

To simplify

15
5
1
=
=
60 20
4

@DE?U
*(CALC)*(E)(E)(Simp)U
* fx-7400GII: (CALC)

(Simp)U

The “F=” value is the divisor.
Example 2

To simplify

27
specifying a divisor of 9
63

27
3
=
63
7

AFEBU*(CALC)*
(E)(E)(Simp)HU
* fx-7400GII: (CALC)

• An error occurs if simplification cannot be performed using the specified divisor.
• Executing Simp while a value that cannot be simplified is displayed will return the original
value, without displaying “F=”.

I Solve Calculations

[OPTN]-[CALC]-[Solve]

The following is the syntax for using the Solve function in a program.
Solve( f(x), n, a, b)

(a: lower limit, b: upper limit, n: initial estimated value)

There are two different input methods that can be used for Solve calculations: direct
assignment and variable table input.
With the direct assignment method (the one described here), you assign values directly to
variables. This type of input is identical to that used with the Solve command used in the
PRGM mode.

2-22

Variable table input is used with the Solve function in the EQUA mode. This input method is
recommended for most normal Solve function input.
An error (Time Out) occurs when there is no convergence of the solution.
For information about Solve calculations, see page 4-4.
• You cannot use a quadratic differential, 3, maximum/minimum value or Solve calculation
expression inside of any of the above functions.
• Pressing
during calculation of Solve (while the cursor is not shown on the display)
interrupts the calculation.

I Solving an f(x) Function

[OPTN]-[CALC]-[SolvN]

You can use SolvN to solve an f(x) function using numerical analysis. The following is the input
syntax.
SolveN (left side [=right side] [,variable] [, lower limit, upper limit])
• The right side, variable, lower limit and upper limit all can be omitted.
• “left side[=right side]” is the expression to be solved. Supported variables are A through Z, r,
and Q. When the right side is omitted, solution is perform using right side = 0.
• The variable specifies the variable within the expression to be solved for (A through Z, r, Q).
Omitting a variable specification cause X to be used as the variable.
• The lower limit and upper limit specify the range of the solution. You can input a value or an
expression as the range.
• The following functions cannot be used within any of the arguments.
Solve(, d2/dx2, FMin(, FMax(, 3(
Up to 10 calculation results can be displayed simultaneously in ListAns format.
• The message “No Solution” is displayed if no solution exists.
• The message “More solutions may exist.” is displayed when there may be solutions other
than those displayed by SolvN.
Example

To solve x2 – 5x – 6 = 0
*(CALC)*(SolvN)
TVDTEU
* fx-7400GII: (CALC)

)

2-23

I Differential Calculations

[OPTN]-[CALC]-[d/dx]

To perform differential calculations, first display the function analysis menu, and then input the
values using the syntax below.
*(CALC)* (d/dx) f(x)atol

* fx-7400GII: (CALC)

(a: point for which you want to determine the derivative, tol: tolerance)
d f (a)
d/dx ( f (x), a) 
dx
The differentiation for this type of calculation is defined as:
f (a + Ax) – f (a)
f ' (a) = lim –––––––––––––
Ax0

Ax

In this definition, infinitesimal is replaced by a sufficiently small x, with the value in the
neighborhood of f' (a) calculated as:

f (a + Ax) – f (a)
f ' (a)  –––––––––––––
Ax
In order to provide the best precision possible, this unit employs central difference to perform
differential calculations.
Example

To determine the derivative at point x = 3 for the function
y = x3 + 4x2 + x – 6, with a tolerance of “tol” = 1E – 5

Input the function f(x).
*(CALC)* (d/dx)T,B
CTV
TE
* fx-7400GII: (CALC)
Input point x = a for which you want to determine the derivative.
B
Input the tolerance value.
@$DU

Using Differential Calculation in a Graph Function
• Omitting the tolerance (tol) value when using the differential command inside of a graph
function simplifies the calculation for drawing the graph. In such a case, precision is
sacrificed for the sake of faster drawing. The tolerance value is specified, the graph is drawn
with the same precision obtained when you normally perform a differential calculation.
• You can also omit input of the derivative point by using the following format for the differential
graph: Y2=d/dx(Y1). In this case, the value of the X variable is used as the derivative point.

Differential Calculation Precautions
• In the function f(x), only X can be used as a variable in expressions. Other variables
(A through Z excluding X, r, Ƨ) are treated as constants, and the value currently assigned to
that variable is applied during the calculation.
• Input of the tolerance (tol) value and the closing parenthesis can be omitted. If you omit
tolerance (tol) value, the calculator automatically uses a value for tol as 1E–10.
• Specify a tolerance (tol) value of 1E–14 or greater. An error (Time Out) occurs whenever no
solution that satisfies the tolerance value can be obtained.
• Pressing
during calculation of a differential (while the cursor is not shown on the display)
interrupts the calculation.
2-24

• Inaccurate results and errors can be caused by the following:
- discontinuous points in x values
- extreme changes in x values
- inclusion of the local maximum point and local minimum point in x values
- inclusion of the inflection point in x values
- inclusion of undifferentiable points in x values
- differential calculation results approaching zero
• Always use radians (Rad mode) as the angle unit when performing trigonometric differentials.
• You cannot use a differential, quadratic differential, integration, 3, maximum/minimum value,
Solve, RndFix or logab calculation expression inside a differential calculation term.
• In the Math input/output mode, the tolerance value is fixed at 1E–10 and cannot be changed.

I Quadratic Differential Calculations

[OPTN]-[CALC]-[d2/dx2]

After displaying the function analysis menu, you can input quadratic differentials using the
following syntax.
*(CALC)*(d2/dx2) f(x)atol

* fx-7400GII: (CALC)

(a: differential coefficient point, tol: tolerance)
d 2 ( f (x), a)
d2
–––
 –––2 f (a)
2
dx
dx
Quadratic differential calculations produce an approximate differential value using the following
second order differential formula, which is based on Newton’s polynomial interpretation.

f ''(a) =

2 f(a + 3h) – 27 f(a + 2h) + 270 f(a + h) – 490 f(a) + 270 f(a – h) – 27 f(a –2h) + 2 f(a – 3h)
180h2

In this expression, values for “sufficiently small increments of h” are used to obtain a value that
approximates f"(a).
Example

To determine the quadratic differential coefficient at the point where
x = 3 for the function y = x3 + 4x2 + x – 6
Here we will use a tolerance tol = 1E – 5

Input the function f(x).
*(CALC)* (d2/dx2) T,B
CTV
TE
* fx-7400GII: (CALC)
Input 3 as point a, which is the differential coefficient point.
B
Input the tolerance value.
@$D
U

Quadratic Differential Calculation Precautions
• In the function f(x), only X can be used as a variable in expressions. Other variables (A
through Z excluding X, r, Ƨ) are treated as constants, and the value currently assigned to
that variable is applied during the calculation.
2-25

• Input of the tolerance (tol) value and the closing parenthesis can be omitted.
• Specify a tolerance (tol) value of 1E–14 or greater. An error (Time Out) occurs whenever no
solution that satisfies the tolerance value can be obtained.
• The rules that apply for linear differential also apply when using a quadratic differential
calculation for the graph formula (see page 2-24).
• Inaccurate results and errors can be caused by the following:
- discontinuous points in x values
- extreme changes in x values
- inclusion of the local maximum point and local minimum point in x values
- inclusion of the inflection point in x values
- inclusion of undifferentiable points in x values
- differential calculation results approaching zero
• You can interrupt an ongoing quadratic differential calculation by pressing the

key.

• Always use radians (Rad mode) as the angle unit when performing trigonometric quadratic
differentials.
• You cannot use a differential, quadratic differential, integration, 3, maximum/minimum value,
Solve, RndFix or logab calculation expression inside of a quadratic differential calculation
term.
• With quadratic differential calculation, calculation precision is up to five digits for the
mantissa.
• In the Math input/output mode, the tolerance value is fixed at 1E–10 and cannot be changed.

I Integration Calculations

[OPTN]-[CALC]-[°dx]

To perform integration calculations, first display the function analysis menu and then input the
values using the syntax below.
*(CALC)* (°dx) f(x)  a  b  tol 

* fx-7400GII: (CALC)

(a: start point, b: end point, tol: tolerance)

b

 f(x), a, b, tol)  a f(x)dx

Area of

b

 f(x)dx is calculated
a

As shown in the illustration above, integration calculations are performed by calculating
integral values from a through b for the function y = f (x) where a  x  b, and f (x)  0. This in
effect calculates the surface area of the shaded area in the illustration.

2-26

Example

To perform the integration calculation for the function shown below,
with a tolerance of “tol” = 1E – 4



5
1

(2x2 + 3x + 4) dx

Input the function f (x).
*(CALC)* (°dx)ATV
BT
C
* fx-7400GII: (CALC)
Input the start point and end point.
@D
Input the tolerance value.
@$CU
Note the following points to ensure correct integration values.
(1) When cyclical functions for integration values become positive or negative for different
divisions, perform the calculation for single cycles, or divide between negative and positive,
and then add the results together.

Positive
part (S )
Negative part (S )

b

c

b

a

a

c

 f(x)dx =  f(x)dx + (– f(x)dx)
Positive part (S)

Negative part (S)

(2) When minute fluctuations in integration divisions produce large fluctuations in integration
values, calculate the integration divisions separately (divide the large fluctuation areas into
smaller divisions), and then add the results together.



b

f(x)dx =
a



x

1

f(x)dx +
a

x


2

x

1

f(x)dx +.....+



b

x

f(x)dx

4

• Pressing
during calculation of an integral (while the cursor is not shown on the display)
interrupts the calculation.
• Always use radians (Rad mode) as the angle unit when performing trigonometric
integrations.
• An error (Time Out) occurs whenever no solution that satisfies the tolerance value can be
obtained.
2-27

Integration Calculation Precautions
• In the function f(x), only X can be used as a variable in expressions. Other variables (A
through Z excluding X, r, Ƨ) are treated as constants, and the value currently assigned to
that variable is applied during the calculation.
• Input of “tol” and closing parenthesis can be omitted. If you omit “tol,” the calculator
automatically uses a default value of 1E–5.
• Integration calculations can take a long time to complete.
• You cannot use a differential, quadratic differential, integration, 3, maximum/minimum value,
Solve, RndFix or logab calculation expression inside of an integration calculation term.
• In the Math input/output mode, the tolerance value is fixed at 1E–5 and cannot be changed.

I 3 Calculations

[OPTN]-[CALC]-[3(]

To perform 3 calculations, first display the function analysis menu, and then input the values
using the syntax below.
*(CALC)* (E)(3( ) ak  k  A  B  n 



* fx-7400GII: (CALC)



(a k, k, , , n) =

 a =a
k



+ a +1 +........+ a

k=

(n: distance between partitions)
Example

To calculate the following:
6

 (k

2

– 3k + 5)

k=2

Use n = 1 as the distance between partitions.
*(CALC)*(E)(3( )?(K)
VB?(K)
D
?(K)AE@U
* fx-7400GII: (CALC)

3 Calculation Precautions
• The value of the specified variable changes during a 3 calculation. Be sure to keep separate
written records of the specified variable values you might need later before you perform the
calculation.
• You can use only one variable in the function for input sequence ak.
• Input integers only for the initial term (A) of sequence ak and last term (B) of sequence ak.
• Input of n and the closing parentheses can be omitted. If you omit n, the calculator
automatically uses n = 1.
• Make sure that the value used as the final term B is greater than the value used as the initial
term A. Otherwise, an error will occur.
• To interrupt an ongoing 3 calculation (indicated when the cursor is not on the display), press
the
key.
• You cannot use a differential, quadratic differential, integration, 3, maximum/minimum value,
Solve, RndFix or logab calculation expression inside of a 3 calculation term.
• In the Math input/output mode, the distance between partitions (n) is fixed at 1 and cannot be
changed.
2-28

I Maximum/Minimum Value Calculations

[OPTN]-[CALC]-[FMin]/[FMax]

After displaying the function analysis menu, you can input maximum/minimum calculations
using the formats below, and solve for the maximum and minimum of a function within interval
a  x  b.

S Minimum Value
*(CALC)* (E)(FMin) f (x)  a  b  n 

* fx-7400GII: (CALC)

(a: start point of interval, b: end point of interval, n: precision (n = 1 to 9))

S Maximum Value
*(CALC)* (E)(FMax) f (x) a  b  n 

* fx-7400GII: (CALC)

(a: start point of interval, b: end point of interval, n: precision (n = 1 to 9))
Example

To determine the minimum value for the interval defined by start
point a = 0 and end point b = 3, with a precision of n = 6 for the function
y = x2 – 4x + 9

Input f (x).
*(CALC)* (E)(FMin)TVCT
H
* fx-7400GII: (CALC)
Input the interval a = 0, b = 3.
?B
Input the precision n = 6.
EU

• In the function f (x), only X can be used as a variable in expressions. Other variables (A
through Z excluding X, r, Ƨ) are treated as constants, and the value currently assigned to
that variable is applied during the calculation.
• Input of n and the closing parenthesis can be omitted.
• Discontinuous points or sections with drastic fluctuation can adversely affect precision or
even cause an error.
• Inputting a larger value for n increases the precision of the calculation, but it also increases
the amount of time required to perform the calculation.
• The value you input for the end point of the interval (b) must be greater than the value you
input for the start point (a). Otherwise an error occurs.
• You can interrupt an ongoing maximum/minimum calculation by pressing the

key.

• You can input an integer in the range of 1 to 9 for the value of n. Using any value outside this
range causes an error.
• You cannot use a differential, quadratic differential, integration, 3, maximum/minimum value,
Solve, RndFix or logab calculation expression inside of a maximum/minimum calculation
term.

2-29

6. Complex Number Calculations
You can perform addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, parentheses calculations,
function calculations, and memory calculations with complex numbers just as you do with the
manual calculations described on pages 2-1 to 2-14.
You can select the complex number calculation mode by changing the Complex Mode item on
the Setup screen to one of the following settings.
• {Real} ... Calculation in the real number range only*1
• {a+bi} ... Performs complex number calculation and displays results in rectangular form
• {rƧ} ... Performs complex number calculation and displays results in polar form*2
*1 When there is an imaginary number in the argument, however, complex number calculation
is performed and the result is displayed using rectangular form.
Examples:
ln 2i

= 0.6931471806 + 1.570796327i

ln 2i + ln (– 2) = (Non-Real ERROR)
*2 The display range of Ƨ depends on the angle unit set for the Angle item on the Setup
screen.
• Deg ... –180 < Ƨ  180
• Rad ... – P < Ƨ  P
• Gra ... –200 < Ƨ  200
Press *(CPLX) (*(CPLX) on the fx-7400GII) to display the complex calculation
number menu, which contains the following items.
• {i} ... {imaginary unit i input}
• {Abs}/{Arg} ... obtains {absolute value}/{argument}
• {Conj} ... {obtains conjugate}
• {ReP}/{ImP} ... {real}/{imaginary} part extraction
• {rƧ}/{a+bi} ... converts the result to {polar}/{rectangular} form
• You can also use ?(i) in place of *(CPLX) (*(CPLX) on the fx-7400GII)
(i).
• Solutions obtained by the Real, a+bi and rƧ modes are different for power root (xy)
calculations when x < 0 and y = m/n when n is an odd number.
Example: 3x (– 8) = – 2 (Real)
= 1 + 1.732050808i (a +bi)
= 260 (r Ƨ )
• To input the “  ” operator into the polar coordinate expression (r Ƨ ), press T().

2-30

I Arithmetic Operations

[OPTN]-[CPLX]-[i]

Arithmetic operations are the same as those you use for manual calculations. You can even
use parentheses and memory.
Example

(1 + 2i) + (2 + 3i)
*(CPLX)*
@
A(i)

A
B(i)U
* fx-7400GII: (CPLX)

I Reciprocals, Square Roots, and Squares
Example

(3 + i)
*(CPLX)*
V()B
(i)U
* fx-7400GII: (CPLX)

I Complex Number Format Using Polar Form
Example

230 s 345 = 675
K(SET UP)AAAAAA*
(Deg)A(rƧ))
AT()B?	B
T()CDU
* fx-7400GII, fx-9750GII: AAAAA

I Absolute Value and Argument

[OPTN]-[CPLX]-[Abs]/[Arg]

The unit regards a complex number in the form a + bi as a coordinate on a Gaussian plane,
and calculates absolute value²Z ²and argument (arg).
Example

To calculate absolute value (r) and argument (Ƨ) for the complex number
3 + 4i, with the angle unit set for degrees
Imaginary axis

Real axis

2-31

*(CPLX)*(Abs)
B
C(i)U
(Calculation of absolute value)
* fx-7400GII: (CPLX)
*(CPLX)*(Arg)
B
C(i)U
(Calculation of argument)
* fx-7400GII: (CPLX)
• The result of the argument calculation differs in accordance with the current angle unit
setting (degrees, radians, grads).

I Conjugate Complex Numbers

[OPTN]-[CPLX]-[Conj]

A complex number of the form a + bi becomes a conjugate complex number of the form

a – bi.
Example

To calculate the conjugate complex number for the complex number
2 + 4i
*(CPLX)*(Conj)
A
C(i)U
* fx-7400GII: (CPLX)

I Extraction of Real and Imaginary Parts

[OPTN]-[CPLX]-[ReP]/[lmP]

Use the following procedure to extract the real part a and the imaginary part b from a complex
number of the form a + bi.
Example

To extract the real and imaginary parts of the complex number 2 + 5i
*(CPLX)*(E)(ReP)
A
D(E)(i)U
(Real part extraction)
* fx-7400GII: (CPLX)
*(CPLX)*(E)(ImP)
A
D(E)(i)U
(Imaginary part extraction)
* fx-7400GII: (CPLX)

I Polar and Rectangular Form Transformation

[OPTN]-[CPLX]-[rƧ]/[a+bi]

Use the following procedure to transform a complex number displayed in rectangular form to
polar form, and vice versa.

2-32

Example

To transform the rectangular form of complex number 1 + 
3 i to its
polar form
K(SET UP)AAAAAA*
(Deg)A(a+bi))
@
V()B
*(CPLX)**(i)(E)(rQ)U
* fx-7400GII, fx-9750GII: AAAAA
** fx-7400GII: (CPLX)
AT()E?
*(CPLX)*(E)(a+bi)U
* fx-7400GII: (CPLX)

• The input/output range of complex numbers is normally 10 digits for the mantissa and two
digits for the exponent.
• When a complex number has more than 21 digits, the real part and imaginary part are
displayed on separate lines.
• The following functions can be used with complex numbers.
, x 2, x –1, ^(x y), 3, x, In, log, logab, 10x, e x, Int, Frac, Rnd, Intg, RndFix(, Fix, Sci, ENG,
ENG, ° ’ ”, ° ’ ”, a b/c, d /c

7. Binary, Octal, Decimal, and Hexadecimal
Calculations with Integers
You can use the RUN • MAT (or RUN) mode and binary, octal, decimal, and hexadecimal
settings to perform calculations that involve binary, octal, decimal and hexadecimal values. You
can also convert between number systems and perform bitwise operations.
• You cannot use scientific functions in binary, octal, decimal, and hexadecimal calculations.
• You can use only integers in binary, octal, decimal, and hexadecimal calculations, which
means that fractional values are not allowed. If you input a value that includes a decimal part,
the calculator automatically cuts off the decimal part.
• If you attempt to enter a value that is invalid for the number system (binary, octal, decimal,
hexadecimal) you are using, the calculator displays an error message. The following shows
the numerals that can be used in each number system.
Binary: 0, 1
Octal: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Decimal: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Hexadecimal: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, F
• Negative binary, octal, and hexadecimal values are produced using the two’s complement of
the original value.
• The following are the display capacities for each of the number systems.

2-33

Number System

Binary

Octal

Decimal

Hexadecimal

Display Capacity

16 digits

11 digits

10 digits

8 digits

• The alphabetic characters used in the hexadecimal number appear differently on the display
to distinguish them from text characters.
Normal Text

A

B

C

D

E

F

Hexadecimal Values

S

T

U

V

W

X

T

J

(

Q

A

R

Keys

• The following are the calculation ranges for each of the number systems.
Binary Values
Positive: 0  x  111111111111111
Negative: 1000000000000000  x  1111111111111111
Octal Values
Positive: 0  x  17777777777
Negative: 20000000000  x  37777777777
Decimal Values
Positive: 0  x  2147483647
Negative: –2147483648  x  –1
Hexadecimal Values
Positive: 0  x  7FFFFFFF
Negative: 80000000  x  FFFFFFFF

S To perform a binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal calculation
[SET UP]-[Mode]-[Dec]/[Hex]/[Bin]/[Oct]
1. In the Main Menu, select RUN • MAT (or RUN).
2. Press K(SET UP). Move the highlighting to “Mode”, and then specify the default
number system by pressing (Dec), (Hex), (Bin), or (Oct) for the Mode setting.
3. Press ) to change to the screen for calculation input. This causes a function menu with
the following items to appear.
• {d~o}/{LOG}/{DISP} ... {number system specification}/{bitwise operation}/
{decimal/hexadecimal/binary/octal conversion} menu

I Selecting a Number System
You can specify decimal, hexadecimal, binary, or octal as the default number system using the
Setup screen.

S To specify a number system for an input value
You can specify a number system for each individual value you input. Press (d~o) to display
a menu of number system symbols. Press the function key that corresponds to the symbol you
want to select and then input the value.
• {d}/{h}/{b}/{o} ... {decimal}/{hexadecimal}/{binary}/{octal}
2-34

S To input values of mixed number systems
Example

To input 12310, when the default number system is hexadecimal
K(SET UP)
Move the highlighting to “Mode”, and then
press (Hex)).
(d~o)(d)@ABU

I Negative Values and Bitwise Operations
Press (LOG) to display a menu of negation and bitwise operators.
• {Neg} ... {negation}*1
• {Not}/{and}/{or}/{xor}/{xnor} ... {NOT}*2/{AND}/{OR}/{XOR}/{XNOR}*3
*1 two’s complement
*2 one’s complement (bitwise complement)
*3 bitwise AND, bitwise OR, bitwise XOR, bitwise XNOR

S Negative Values
Example

To determine the negative of 1100102
K(SET UP)
Move the highlighting to “Mode”, and then
press (Bin)).
(LOG)(Neg)
@@??@?U

• Negative binary, octal, and hexadecimal values are produced by taking the binary two’s
complement and then returning the result to the original number base. With the decimal
number base, negative values are displayed with a minus sign.

S Bitwise Operations
Example

To input and execute “12016 and AD16”
K(SET UP)
Move the highlighting to “Mode”, and then
press (Hex)).
@A?(LOG)
(and)

#U

I Number System Transformation
Press (DISP) to display a menu of number system transformation functions.
• {Dec}/{Hex}/{Bin}/{Oct} ... transformation of displayed value to its {decimal}/
{hexadecimal}/{binary}/{octal} equivalent
2-35

S To convert a displayed value from one number system to another
Example

To convert 2210 (default number system) to its binary or octal value
K(SET UP)
Move the highlighting to “Mode”, and then
press (Dec)).
(d~o)(d)AAU
)(DISP)(Bin)U
(Oct)U

8. Matrix Calculations
Important!
• Matrix calculations cannot be performed on the fx-7400GII.
From the Main Menu, enter the RUN • MAT mode, and press (MAT) to perform Matrix
calculations.
26 matrix memories (Mat A through Mat Z) plus a Matrix Answer Memory (MatAns), make it
possible to perform the following matrix operations.
• Addition, subtraction, multiplication, division
• Scalar multiplication calculations
• Determinant calculations
• Matrix transposition
• Matrix inversion
• Matrix squaring
• Raising a matrix to a specific power
• Absolute value, integer part extraction, fractional part extraction, maximum integer
calculations
• Inputting complex numbers in matrix elements and using complex number related functions
• Matrix modification using matrix commands
The maximum number of rows that can be specified for a matrix is 999, and the maximum
number of columns is 999.
About Matrix Answer Memory (MatAns)
• The calculator automatically stores matrix calculation results in Matrix Answer Memory. Note
the following points about Matrix Answer Memory.
• Whenever you perform a matrix calculation, the current Matrix Answer Memory contents are
replaced by the new result. The previous contents are deleted and cannot be recovered.
• Inputting values into a matrix does not affect Matrix Answer Memory contents.

2-36

I Inputting and Editing Matrices
Pressing (MAT) displays the Matrix Editor screen. Use the Matrix Editor to input and edit
matrices.

m s n … m (row) s n (column) matrix
None… no matrix preset
• {DEL}/{DEL•A} ... deletes {a specific matrix}/{all matrices}
• {DIM} ... {specifies the matrix dimensions (number of cells)}

S Creating a Matrix
To create a matrix, you must first define its dimensions (size) in the Matrix Editor. Then you can
input values into the matrix.

S To specify the dimensions (size) of a matrix
Example

To create a 2-row s 3-column matrix in the area named Mat B

Highlight Mat B.
A
(DIM) (This step can be omitted.)
Specify the number of rows.
AU
Specify the number of columns.
BU
U

• All of the cells of a new matrix contain the value 0.
• Changing the dimensions of a matrix deletes its current contents.
• If “Memory ERROR” remains next to the matrix area name after you input the dimensions, it
means there is not enough free memory to create the matrix you want.

S To input cell values
Example

To input the following data into Matrix B:
1 2 3
4 5 6

2-37

The following operation is a continuation of the example calculation on the previous page.
@UAUBU
CUDUEU
(Data is input into the highlighted cell. Each
time you press U, the highlighting moves
to the next cell to the right.)
• Displayed cell values show positive integers up to six digits, and negative integers up to five
digits (one digit used for the negative sign). Exponential values are shown with up to two
digits for the exponent. Fractional values are not displayed.

S Deleting Matrices
You can delete either a specific matrix or all matrices in memory.

S To delete a specific matrix
1. While the Matrix Editor is on the display, use D and A to highlight the matrix you want to
delete.
2. Press (DEL).
3. Press (Yes) to delete the matrix or (No) to abort the operation without deleting
anything.

S To delete all matrices
1. While the Matrix Editor is on the display, press (DEL • A).
2. Press (Yes) to delete all matrices in memory or (No) to abort the operation without
deleting anything.

I Matrix Cell Operations
Use the following procedure to prepare a matrix for cell operations.
1. While the Matrix Editor is on the display, use D and A to highlight the name of the matrix
you want to use.
You can jump to a specific matrix by inputting the letter that corresponds to the matrix name.
Inputting ?G(N), for example, jumps to Mat N.
Pressing (Ans) jumps to the matrix current memory.
2. Press U and the function menu with the following items appears.
• {R-OP} ... {row operation menu}
• {ROW}
• {DEL}/{INS}/{ADD} ... row {delete}/{insert}/{add}
• {COL}
• {DEL}/{INS}/{ADD} ... column {delete}/{insert}/{add}
• {EDIT} ... {cell editing screen}
All of the following examples use Matrix A.

2-38

S Row Calculations
The following menu appears whenever you press (R-OP) while a recalled matrix is on the
display.
• {Swap} ... {row swap}
• {sRw} ... {product of specified row and scalar}
• {sRw+} ... {addition of one row and the product of a specified row with a scalar}
• {Rw+} ... {addition of specified row to another row}

S To swap two rows
Example

To swap rows two and three of the following matrix:
All of the operation examples are performed using the following matrix.
Matrix A =

1

2

3

4

5

6

(R-OP)(Swap)
Input the number of the rows you want to swap.
AUBUU

S To calculate the scalar multiplication of a row
Example

To calculate the product of row 2 and the scalar 4
(R-OP)(sRw)

Input multiplier value.*
CU
Specify row number.
AUU
* A complex number also can be input as multiplier value (k).

S To calculate the scalar multiplication of a row and add the result to another
row
Example

To calculate the product of row 2 and the scalar 4, then add the result to
row 3
(R-OP)(sRw+)

Input multiplier value.*
CU
Specify number of row whose product should be calculated.
AU
Specify number of row where result should be added.
BUU
* A complex number also can be input as multiplier value (k).
2-39

S To add two rows together
Example

To add row 2 to row 3
(R-OP)(Rw+)

Specify number of row to be added.
AU
Specify number of row to be added to.
BUU

S Row Operations
• {DEL} ... {delete row}
• {INS} ... {insert row}
• {ADD} ... {add row}

S To delete a row
Example

To delete row 2
(ROW)A

(DEL)

S To insert a row
Example

To insert a new row between rows one and two
(ROW)A
(INS)

S To add a row
Example

To add a new row below row 3
(ROW)AA
(ADD)

2-40

S Column Operations
• {DEL} ... {delete column}
• {INS} ... {insert column}
• {ADD} ... {add column}

S To delete a column
Example

To delete column 2
(COL)C
(DEL)

I Modifying Matrices Using Matrix Commands

[OPTN]-[MAT]

S To display the matrix commands
1. From the Main Menu, enter the RUN • MAT mode.
2. Press * to display the option menu.
3. Press (MAT) to display the matrix command menu.
The following describes only the matrix command menu items that are used for creating
matrices and inputting matrix data.
• {Mat} ... {Mat command (matrix specification)}
• {MmL} ... {MatmList command (assign contents of selected column to list file)}
• {Aug} ... {Augment command (link two matrices)}
• {Iden} ... {Identity command (identity matrix input)}
• {Dim} ... {Dim command (dimension check)}
• {Fill} ... {Fill command (identical cell values)}
• You can also use A(Mat) in place of *(MAT)(Mat).

S Matrix Data Input Format

[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Mat]

The following shows the format you should use when inputting data to create a matrix using
the Mat command.
a11 a12 ... a1n
...

...

a22 ... a2n

...

a21
am1

am2 ... amn

= [ [a11, a12, ..., a1n] [a21, a22, ..., a2n] .... [am1, am2, ..., amn] ]

m Mat [letter A through Z]

2-41

Example

To input the following data as Matrix A:

1 3 5
2 4 6


( [ )
( [ )@BD
( ] )
( [ )ACE
( ] )( ] )?*(MAT)
(Mat)?T(A)
U

Matrix name

• The maximum value of both m and n is 999.
• An error occurs if memory becomes full as you are inputting data.
• You can also use the above format inside a program that inputs matrix data.

S To input an identity matrix

[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Iden]

Use the Identity command to create an identity matrix.
Example

To create a 3 s 3 identity matrix as Matrix A
*(MAT)(E)(Iden)
B?(E)(Mat)?T(A)U
Number of rows/columns

S To check the dimensions of a matrix

[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Dim]

Use the Dim command to check the dimensions of an existing matrix.
Example 1

To check the dimensions of Matrix A
*(MAT)(E)(Dim)
(E)(Mat)?T(A)U

The display shows that Matrix A consists of two rows and three columns.
Since the result of the Dim command is list type data, it is stored in ListAns Memory.
You can also use {Dim} to specify the dimensions of the matrix.
Example 2

To specify dimensions of 2 rows and 3 columns for Matrix B
	( H )AB( J )?
*(MAT)(E)(Dim)
(E)(Mat)?J(B)U

S Modifying Matrices Using Matrix Commands
You can also use matrix commands to assign values to and recall values from an existing
matrix, to fill in all cells of an existing matrix with the same value, to combine two matrices into
a single matrix, and to assign the contents of a matrix column to a list file.
2-42

S To assign values to and recall values from an existing matrix
[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Mat]
Use the following format with the Mat command to specify a cell for value assignment and
recall.
Mat X [m, n]
X = matrix name (A through Z, or Ans)

m = row number
n = column number
Example 1

To assign 10 to the cell at row 1, column 2 of the following matrix:
1 2
Matrix A =

3

4

5

6

@??*(MAT)(Mat)
?T(A)
( F )@A
( G )U
Example 2

Multiply the value in the cell at row 2, column 2 of the above matrix by 5
*(MAT)(Mat)
?T(A)
( F )AA
( G )	DU

S To fill a matrix with identical values and to combine two matrices into a
single matrix
[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Fill]/[Aug]
Use the Fill command to fill all the cells of an existing matrix with an identical value and the
Augment command to combine two existing matrices into a single matrix.
Example 1

To fill all of the cells of Matrix A with the value 3
*(MAT)(E)(Fill)
B(E)(Mat)?T(A)U
(Mat)?T(A)U

Example 2

To combine the following two matrices:
1
3
B=
A=
2
4
*(MAT)(Aug)
(Mat)?T(A)
(Mat)?J(B)U

• The two matrices you combine must have the same number of rows. An error occurs if you
try to combine two matrices that have different number of rows.

2-43

• You can use Matrix Answer Memory to assign the results of the above matrix input and edit
operations to a matrix variable. To do so, use the following syntax.
Fill (n, Mat A)
Augment (Mat A, Mat B) m Mat G
In the above, A, B, and G are any variable names A through Z, and n is any value.
The above does not affect the contents of Matrix Answer Memory.

S To assign the contents of a matrix column to a list

[OPTN]-[MAT]-[MmL]

Use the following format with the MatmList command to specify a column and a list.
Mat m List (Mat X, m) m List n
X = matrix name (A through Z)

m = column number
n = list number
Example

To assign the contents of column 2 of the following matrix to list 1:

Matrix A =

1

2

3

4

5

6

*(MAT)(MmL)
(Mat)?T(A)A
?*(LIST)(List)@U
(List)@U

I Matrix Calculations

[OPTN]-[MAT]

Use the matrix command menu to perform matrix calculation operations.

S To display the matrix commands
1. From the Main Menu, enter the RUN • MAT mode.
2. Press * to display the option menu.
3. Press (MAT) to display the matrix command menu.
The following describes only the matrix commands that are used for matrix arithmetic
operations.
• {Mat} ... {Mat command (matrix specification)}
• {Det} ... {Det command (determinant command)}
• {Trn} ... {Trn command (transpose matrix command)}
• {Iden} ... {Identity command (identity matrix input)}
• {Ref} ... {Ref command (row echelon form command)}
• {Rref} ... {Rref command (reduced row echelon form command)}
All of the following examples assume that matrix data is already stored in memory.

2-44

S Matrix Arithmetic Operations
Example 1

[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Mat]/[Iden]

To add the following two matrices (Matrix A + Matrix B):
A=

1

1

2

1

B=

2

3

2

1

*(MAT)(Mat)?T(A)

(Mat)?J(B)U
Example 2

To multiply the two matrices in Example 1 (Matrix A s Matrix B)
*(MAT)(Mat)?T(A)	
(Mat)?J(B)U

• The two matrices must have the same dimensions in order to be added or subtracted. An
error occurs if you try to add or subtract matrices of different dimensions.
• For multiplication (Matrix 1 s Matrix 2), the number of columns in Matrix 1 must match the
number of rows in Matrix 2. Otherwise, an error occurs.

S Determinant
Example

[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Det]
Obtain the determinant for the following matrix:
1 2 3
Matrix A =

4

5

6

−1 −2

0

*(MAT)(Det)(Mat)
?T(A)U
• Determinants can be obtained only for square matrices (same number of rows and columns).
Trying to obtain a determinant for a matrix that is not square produces an error.
• The determinant of a 2 s 2 matrix is calculated as shown below.
|A| =

a11 a12
a21 a22

= a11a22 – a12a21

• The determinant of a 3 s 3 matrix is calculated as shown below.
|A| =

a11 a12 a13
a21 a22 a23
a31 a32 a33

= a11a22a33 + a12a23a31 + a13a21a32 – a11a23a32 – a12a21a33 – a13a22a31

S Matrix Transposition

[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Trn]

A matrix is transposed when its rows become columns and its columns become rows.
Example

To transpose the following matrix:

Matrix A =

1

2

3

4

5

6

2-45

*(MAT)(Trn)(Mat)
?T(A)U

S Row Echelon Form

[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Ref]

This command uses the Gaussian elimination algorithm to find the row echelon form of a
matrix.
Example

To find the row echelon form of the following matrix:
Matrix A =

1

2

3

4

5

6

*(MAT)(E)(Ref)
(E)(Mat)?T(A)U

S Reduced Row Echelon Form

[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Rref]

This command finds the reduced row echelon form of a matrix.
Example

To find the reduced row echelon form of the following matrix:

Matrix A =

2

−1

3

19

1

1

−5

−21

0

4

3

0

*(MAT)(E)(Rref)
(E)(Mat)?T(A)U

• The row echelon form and reduced row echelon form operation may not produce accurate
results due to dropped digits.

S Matrix Inversion
Example

[x–1]

To invert the following matrix:
Matrix A =

1

2

3

4

*(MAT)(Mat)
?T(A)(x–1)U

2-46

• Only square matrices (same number of rows and columns) can be inverted. Trying to invert a
matrix that is not square produces an error.
• A matrix with a determinant of zero cannot be inverted. Trying to invert a matrix with
determinant of zero produces an error.
• Calculation precision is affected for matrices whose determinant is near zero.
• A matrix being inverted must satisfy the conditions shown below.
A A–1 = A–1 A = E =

1 0
0 1

The following shows the formula used to invert Matrix A into inverse matrix A–1.
A=

a b
c d

A–1=

1
ad – bc

d –b
–c a

Note that ad – bc x 0.

S Squaring a Matrix
Example

[x2]

To square the following matrix:
Matrix A =

1

2

3

4

*(MAT)(Mat)?T(A)VU

S Raising a Matrix to a Power
Example

[^]

To raise the following matrix to the third power:
Matrix A =

1

2

3

4

*(MAT)(Mat)?T(A)
,BU
• For matrix power calculations, calculation is possible up to a power of 32766.

S Determining the Absolute Value, Integer Part, Fraction Part, and Maximum
Integer of a Matrix
[OPTN]-[NUM]-[Abs]/[Frac]/[Int]/[Intg]
Example

To determine the absolute value of the following matrix:
Matrix A =

1

–2

–3

4

*(E)(NUM)(Abs)
*(MAT)(Mat)?T(A)U
2-47

S Complex Number Calculations with a Matrix
Example

To determine the absolute value of a matrix with the following complex
number elements:
–1 + i

Matrix D =

1+i

1+i
–2 + 2i

*(E)(NUM)(Abs)
*(MAT)(Mat)?Q(D)U

• The following complex number functions are supported in matrices.
i, Abs, Arg, Conjg, ReP, ImP, a+bi, rQ
Note, however, that “a+bi” and “rQ” cannot be used in the Linear input/output mode.

Matrix Calculation Precautions
• Determinants and inverse matrices are subject to error due to dropped digits.
• Matrix operations are performed individually on each cell, so calculations may require
considerable time to complete.
• The calculation precision of displayed results for matrix calculations is p1 at the least
significant digit.
• If a matrix calculation result is too large to fit into Matrix Answer Memory, an error occurs.
• You can use the following operation to transfer Matrix Answer Memory contents to another
matrix (or when Matrix Answer Memory contains a determinant to a variable).
MatAns m Mat A
In the above, A is any variable name A through Z. The above does not affect the contents of
Matrix Answer Memory.

9. Metric Conversion Calculations
You can convert values from one unit of measurement to another. Measurement units are
classified according to the following 11 categories. The indicators in the “Display Name”
column show the text that appears in the calculator’s function menu.
Display Name

Category

Display Name

Category

Display Name

Category

LENG

Length

TMPR

Temperature

PRES

Pressure

AREA

Area

VELO

Velocity

ENGY

Energy/Work

VLUM

Volume

MASS

Mass

PWR

Power

TIME

Time

FORC

Force/Weight

2-48

You can convert from any unit in a category to any other unit in the same category.
• Attempting to convert from a unit in one category (such as “AREA”) to a unit in another
category (such as “TIME”) results in a Conversion ERROR.
• See the “Unit Conversion Command List” (page 2-50) for information about the units included
in each category.

I Performing a Unit Conversion Calculation

[OPTN]-[CONV]

Input the value you are converting from and the conversion commands using the syntax shown
below to perform a unit conversion calculation.
{value converting from}{conversion command 1}  {conversion command 2}
• Use {conversion command 1} to specify the unit being converted from and {conversion
command 2} to specify the unit being converted to.
•  is a command that links the two conversion commands. This command is always available
at () of the Conversion menu.
• Real numbers or a list that contains real number elements only can be used as the value
being converted from. When values being converted from are input into a list (or when list
memory is specified), conversion calculation is performed for each element in the list and
calculation results are returned in list format (ListAns screen).
• A complex number cannot be used as a value to be converted from. An error occurs if even
a single element of a list being used as the value being converted from contains a complex
number.
Example 1

To convert 50cm to inches
D?*(E)(CONV)*(LENG)
D(cm)()(LENG)CA(in)U
* fx-7400GII: (CONV)

Example 2

To convert {175, 162, 180} centimeters to feet
	({)@FD@EA
@G?(})
*(E)(CONV)*(AREA)A(m2)
()(AREA)B(ha)U
* fx-7400GII: (CONV)

2-49

I Unit Conversion Command List
Display Name

Cat.

Display Name

Unit

fm

fermi

cm3

cubic centimeter

Å

angstrom

mL

milliliter

Mm

micrometer

mm

millimeter

m3

cubic meter

cm

centimeter

in3

cubic inch

m

meter

ft3

cubic foot

km

kilometer

AU

astronomical unit

l.y.

light year

pc

parsec

Mil

1/1000 inch

pt

pint

in

inch

qt

quart

ft

foot

tsp

teaspoon

yd

yard

tbsp

tablespoon

fath

fathom

cup

cup

rd

rod

ns

nanosecond

mile

mile

Ms

microsecond

nautical mile

ms

millisecond

n mile

Area

Unit

Volume

L

liter

fl_oz(UK)

ounce

fl_oz(US)

fluid ounce (U.S.)

gal(US)

gallon

gal(UK)

UK gallon

cm2

square centimeter

m2

square meter

ha

hectare

km2

square kilometer

in2

square inch

week

week

ft2

square foot

yr

year

yd2

square yard

s-yr

sidereal year

acre

acre

t-yr

tropical year

mile2

square mile

Time

Length

Cat.

2-50

s

second

min

minute

h

hour

day

day

Temperature

°C

degrees Celsius

Pa

Pascal

K

Kelvin

kPa

Kilo Pascal

°F

degrees Fahrenheit

mmH2O

millimeter of water

°R

degrees Rankine

mmHg

millimeter of Mercury

m/s

meter per second

atm

atmosphere

km/h

kilometer per hour

inH2O

inch of water

knot

knot

inHg

inch of Mercury

ft/s

foot per second

lbf/in2

pound per square
inch

mile/h
u

mile per hour

Display Name

bar
kgf/cm2

atomic mass unit

eV

milligram

bar
kilogram force per
square centimeter
electron Volt

kg

kilogram

calth

calorieth

metric ton

cal15

calorie (15°C)

oz

avoirdupois ounce

calIT

calorieIT

lb

pound mass

kcalth

kilocalorieth

kcal15

kilocalorie (15°C)

kcalIT

kilocalorieIT

l-atm

liter atmosphere

slug

ton(short)

ton, short (2000lbm)

ton(long)

ton, long (2240lbm)

Energy/Work

gram

mton

J

Unit

g

slug

Force/Weight

Cat.

Joule

N

newton

kW•h

kilowatt hour

lbf

pound of force

ft•lbf

foot-pound

tonf

ton of force

Btu

British thermal unit

dyne

dyne

erg

erg

kgf

kilogram of force

kgf•m
W
calth/s
Power

Mass

mg

Unit

Pressure

Display Name

Velocity

Cat.

hp
ft•lbf/s
Btu/min

kilogram force meter
watt
calorie per second
horsepower
foot-pound per
second
British thermal unit
per minute

Source: NIST Special Publication 811 (1995)

2-51

Chapter 3 List Function
A list is a storage place for multiple data items.
This calculator lets you store up to 26 lists in a single file, and you can store up to six files in
memory. Stored lists can be used in arithmetic and statistical calculations, and for graphing.
Element number
List 1
SUB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
•
•
•
•

56
37
21
69
40
48
93
30

Display range

Cell

List 2

List 3

1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128

107
75
122
87
298
48
338
49

•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•

Column

List 4

List 5

3.5
6
2.1
4.4
3
6.8
2
8.7

4
0
0
2
0
3
9
0

•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•

List 26
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

List name
Sub name

Row

•
•
•
•

1. Inputting and Editing a List
When you enter the STAT mode, the “List Editor” will appear first. You can use the List Editor to
input data into a list and to perform a variety of other list data operations.

S To input values one-by-one
Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the list
name, sub name or cell you want to select. Note that A
does not move the highlighting to a cell that does not
contain a value.

The screen automatically scrolls when the highlighting is located at either edge of the screen.
The following example is performed starting with the highlighting located at Cell 1 of List 1.
1. Input a value and press U to store it in the list.
BU
• The highlighting automatically moves down to the next
cell for input.
2. Input the value 4 in the second cell, and then input the
result of 2 + 3 in the next cell.
CUA
BU

• You can also input the result of an expression or a complex number into a cell.
• You can input values up to 999 cells in a single list.
3-1

3

S To batch input a series of values
1. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to another
list.
2. Press 	( { ), and then input the values you want,
pressing  between each one. Press ( } ) after
inputting the final value.
	( { )EFG( } )
3. Press U to store all of the values in your list.
U

• Remember that a comma separates values, so you should not input a comma after the final
value of the set you are inputting.
Right: {34, 53, 78}
Wrong: {34, 53, 78,}
You can also use list names inside of a mathematical expression to input values into another
cell. The following example shows how to add the values in each row in List 1 and List 2, and
input the result into List 3.
1. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the name
of the list where you want the calculation results to be
input.
2. Press * and input the expression.
*(LIST)(List)@

*(LIST)(List)AU

• You can also use @(List) in place of *(LIST)(List).

I Editing List Values
S To change a cell value
Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the cell whose value you want to change. Input
the new value and press U to replace the old data with the new one.

S To edit the contents of a cell
1. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the cell whose contents you want to edit.
2. Press (E)(EDIT).
3. Make any changes in the data you want.
3-2

S To delete a cell
1. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the cell you want to delete.
2. Press (E)(DEL) to delete the selected cell and cause everything below it to be shifted
up.
• The cell delete operation does not affect cells in other lists. If the data in the list whose cell
you delete is somehow related to the data in neighboring lists, deleting a cell can cause
related values to become misaligned.

S To delete all cells in a list
Use the following procedure to delete all the data in a list.
1. Use the cursor key to move the highlighting to any cell of the list whose data you want to
delete.
2. Pressing (E)(DEL • A) causes a confirmation message to appear.
3. Press (Yes) to delete all the cells in the selected list or (No) to abort the delete
operation without deleting anything.

S To insert a new cell
1. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the location where you want to insert the
new cell.
2. Press (E)(INS) to insert a new cell, which contains a value of 0, causing everything
below it to be shifted down.
• The cell insert operation does not affect cells in other lists. If the data in the list where you
insert a cell is somehow related to the data in neighboring lists, inserting a cell can cause
related values to become misaligned.

I Naming a List
You can assign List 1 through List 26 “sub names” of up to eight bytes each.

S To name a list
1. On the Setup screen, highlight “Sub Name” and then press (On)).
2. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the SUB cell of the list you want to name.

3-3

3. Type in the name and then press U.
• To type in a name using alpha characters, press ? to enter the ALPHA-LOCK
mode.
Example: YEAR
(Y)A(E)T(A)E(R)U

• The following operation displays a sub name in the RUN • MAT (or RUN) mode.
@(List) n
( [ )?( ] )U
(n = list number from 1 to 26)

• Though you can input up to 8 bytes for the sub name, only the characters that can fit within
the List Editor cell will be displayed.
• The List Editor SUB cell is not displayed when “Off” is selected for “Sub Name” on the Setup
screen.

I Sorting List Values
You can sort lists into either ascending or descending order. The highlighting can be located in
any cell of the list.

S To sort a single list
Ascending order
1. While the lists are on the screen, press (E)(TOOL)(SRT • A).
2. The prompt “How Many Lists?:” appears to ask how many lists you want to sort. Here we will
input 1 to indicate we want to sort only one list.
@U
3. In response to the “Select List List No:” prompt, input the number of the list you want to sort.
@U
Descending order
Use the same procedure as that for the ascending order sort. The only difference is that you
should press (SRT • D) in place of (SRT • A).

S To sort multiple lists
You can link multiple lists together for a sort so that all of their cells are rearranged in
accordance with the sorting of a base list. The base list is sorted into either ascending
order or descending order, while the cells of the linked lists are arranged so that the relative
relationship of all the rows is maintained.
3-4

Ascending order
1. While the lists are on the screen, press (E)(TOOL)(SRT • A).
2. The prompt “How Many Lists?:” appears to ask how many lists you want to sort. Here we will
sort one base list linked to one other list, so we should input 2.
AU
3. In response to the “Select Base List List No:” prompt, input the number of the list you want
to sort into ascending order. Here we will specify List 1.
@U
4. In response to the “Select Second List List No:” prompt, input the number of the list you
want to link to the base list. Here we will specify List 2.
AU
Descending order
Use the same procedure as that for the ascending order sort. The only difference is that you
should press (SRT • D) in place of (SRT • A).
• You can specify a value from 1 to 6 as the number of lists for sorting.
• If you specify a list more than once for a single sort operation, an error occurs.
An error also occurs if lists specified for sorting do not have the same number of values
(rows).

2. Manipulating List Data
List data can be used in arithmetic and function calculations. In addition, various list data
manipulation functions make manipulation of list data quick and easy.
You can use list data manipulation functions in the RUN • MAT (or RUN), STAT, TABLE,
EQUA and PRGM modes.

I Accessing the List Data Manipulation Function Menu
All of the following examples are performed after entering the RUN • MAT (or RUN) mode.
Press * and then (LIST) to display the list data manipulation menu, which contains the
following items.
• {List}/{LmM}/{Dim}/{Fill}/{Seq}/{Min}/{Max}/{Mean}/{Med}/{Aug}/{Sum}/{Prod}/{Cuml}/
{%}/{ }
Note that all closing parentheses at the end of the following operations can be omitted.

S To transfer list contents to Matrix Answer Memory
(Not included on the fx-7400GII)

[OPTN]-[LIST]-[LmM]

*(LIST)(LmM)(List)  (List)  ...
(List)  U
• You can skip input (List) in the part of the above operation.
• All the lists must contain the same number of data items. If they don’t, an error occurs.
Example: List m Mat (1, 2)U
3-5

Example

To transfer the contents of List 1 (2, 3, 6, 5, 4) to column 1, and the
contents of List 2 (11, 12, 13, 14, 15) to column 2 of Matrix Answer
Memory
*(LIST)(LmM)
(List)@(List)AU

S To count the number of data items in a list

[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Dim]

*(LIST)(Dim)(List)  U
• The number of cells a list contains is its “dimension.”
Example

To count the number of values in List 1 (36, 16, 58, 46, 56)
*(LIST)(Dim)
(List)@U

S To create a list by specifying the number of data items

[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Dim]

Use the following procedure to specify the number of data in the assignment statement and
create a list.
 ?*(LIST)(Dim)(List)  U (n = 1 - 999)
Example

To create five data items (each of which contains 0) in List 1
D?*(LIST)(Dim)
(List)@U

You can view the newly created list by entering the STAT
mode.

S To replace all data items with the same value
*(LIST)(Fill)  (List)  U
Example

To replace all data items in List 1 with the number 3
*(LIST)(Fill)
B(List)@U

The following shows the new contents of List 1.

3-6

[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Fill]

S To generate a sequence of numbers

[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Seq]

*(LIST)(Seq)       
  U
• The result of this operation is stored in ListAns Memory.
Example

To input the number sequence 12, 62, 112, into a list, using the function
f(x) = X2. Use a starting value of 1, an ending value of 11, and an
increment of 5.
*(LIST)(Seq)TV
T@@@DU

Specifying an ending value of 12, 13, 14, or 15 produces the same result as shown above
since they are less than the value produced by the next increment (16).

S To find the minimum value in a list

[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Min]

*(LIST)(E)(Min)(E)(E)(List)  U
Example

To find the minimum value in List 1 (36, 16, 58, 46, 56)
*(LIST)(E)(Min)
(E)(E)(List)@U

S To find which of two lists contains the greatest value

[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Max]

*(LIST)(E)(Max)(E)(E)(List)  (List)
 U
• The two lists must contain the same number of data items. If they don’t, an error occurs.
• The result of this operation is stored in ListAns Memory.
Example

To find whether List 1 (75, 16, 98, 46, 56) or List 2 (35, 59, 58, 72, 67)
contains the greatest value
*(LIST)(E)(Max)
(E)(E)(List)@
(List)AU

S To calculate the mean of data items

[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Mean]

*(LIST)(E)(Mean)(E)(E)(List)  U
Example

To calculate the mean of data items in List 1 (36, 16, 58, 46, 56)
*(LIST)(E)(Mean)
(E)(E)(List)@U
3-7

S To calculate the median of data items of specified frequency
[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Med]
This procedure uses two lists: one that contains values and one that indicates the frequency
(number of occurrences) of each value. The frequency of the data in Cell 1 of the first list is
indicated by the value in Cell 1 of the second list, etc.
• The two lists must contain the same number of data items. If they don’t, an error occurs.
*(LIST)(E)(Med)(E)(E)(List)  (List)
 U
Example

To calculate the median of values in List 1 (36, 16, 58, 46, 56), whose
frequency is indicated by List 2 (75, 89, 98, 72, 67)
*(LIST)(E)(Med)
(E)(E)(List)@
(List)AU

S To combine lists

[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Aug]

• You can combine two different lists into a single list. The result of a list combination operation
is stored in ListAns memory.
*(LIST)(E)(Aug)(E)(E)(List)  (List)
 U
Example

To combine the List 1 (–3, –2) and List 2 (1, 9, 10)
*(LIST)(E)(Aug)
(E)(E)(List)@
(List)AU

S To calculate the sum of data items in a list

[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Sum]

*(LIST)(E)(E)(Sum)(E)(List)  U
Example

To calculate the sum of data items in List 1 (36, 16, 58, 46, 56)
*(LIST)(E)(E)(Sum)
(E)(List)@U

S To calculate the product of values in a list

[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Prod]

*(LIST)(E)(E)(Prod)(E)(List)  U
Example

To calculate the product of values in List 1 (2, 3, 6, 5, 4)
*(LIST)(E)(E)(Prod)
(E)(List)@U

3-8

S To calculate the cumulative frequency of each data item [OPTN]-[LIST]-[Cuml]
*(LIST)(E)(E)(Cuml)(E)(List)  U
• The result of this operation is stored in ListAns Memory.
Example

To calculate the cumulative frequency of each data item in List 1
(2, 3, 6, 5, 4)
*(LIST)(E)(E)(Cuml)
(E)(List)@U
2+3=
2+3+6=
2+3+6+5=
2+3+6+5+4=

S To calculate the percentage represented by each data item

[OPTN]-[LIST]-[%]

*(LIST)(E)(E)(%)(E)(List)  U
• The above operation calculates what percentage of the list total is represented by each data
item.
• The result of this operation is stored in ListAns Memory.
Example

To calculate the percentage represented by each data item in List 1
(2, 3, 6, 5, 4)
*(LIST)(E)(E)(%)
(E)(List)@U
2/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100 =
3/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100 =
6/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100 =
5/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100 =
4/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100 =

S To calculate the differences between neighboring data inside a list
[OPTN]-[LIST]-[ ]
*(LIST)(E)(E)( )  U
• The result of this operation is stored in ListAns Memory.
Example

To calculate the difference between the data items in List 1 (1, 3, 8, 5, 4)
*(LIST)(E)(E)( )
@U
3–1=
8–3=
5–8=
4–5=

3-9

• You can specify the storage location in list memory for a calculation result produced by a list
calculation whose result is stored in ListAns memory. For example, specifying “ List 1 m List
2” will store the result of List 1 in List 2.
• The number of cells in the new List is one less than the number of cells in the original list.
• An error occurs if you execute List for a list that has no data or only one data item.

3. Arithmetic Calculations Using Lists
You can perform arithmetic calculations using two lists or one list and a numeric value.

List
Numeric Value

+
−
×
÷

ListAns Memory
List
=
Numeric Value

List

Calculation results are stored in
ListAns Memory.

I Error Messages
• A calculation involving two lists performs the operation between corresponding cells.
Because of this, an error occurs if the two lists do not have the same number of values
(which means they have different “dimensions”).
• An error occurs whenever an operation involving any two cells generates a mathematical
error.

I Inputting a List into a Calculation
There are three methods you can use to input a list into a calculation.
• Specification of the list number of a list created with List Editor.
• Specification of the sub name of a list created with List Editor.
• Direct input of a list of values.

S To specify the list number of a list created with List Editor
1. In the RUN • MAT (or RUN) mode, perform the following key operation.
*(LIST)(List)
• Enter the “List” command.
2. Enter the list number (integer from 1 to 26) you want to specify.

S To specify the sub name of a list created with List Editor
1. In the RUN • MAT (or RUN) mode, perform the following key operation.
*(LIST)(List)
• Enter the “List” command.
2. Enter the sub name of the list you want to specify, enclosed in double quotes (" ").
Example: "QTY"
3-10

S To directly input a list of values
You can also directly input a list of values using {, }, and .
Example

To input the list: 56, 82, 64
	( { )DEGA
EC( } )

S To assign the contents of one list to another list
Use ? to assign the contents of one list to another list.
Example

To assign the contents of List 3 (41, 65, 22) to List 1
*(LIST)(List)B?(List)@U

In place of (LIST)(List)B operation in the above procedure, you could input
	( { )C@EDAA( } ).

S To recall the value in a specific list cell
You can recall the value in a specific list cell and use it in a calculation. Specify the cell number
by enclosing it inside square brackets.
Example

To calculate the sine of the value stored in Cell 3 of List 2
Q*(LIST)(List)A
( [ )B( ] )U

S To input a value into a specific list cell
You can input a value into a specific list cell inside a list. When you do, the value that was
previously stored in the cell is replaced with the new value you input.
Example

To input the value 25 into Cell 2 of List 3
AD?*(LIST)(List)B
( [ )A( ] )U

I Recalling List Contents
Example

To recall the contents of List 1
*(LIST)(List)@U

• The above operation displays the contents of the list you specify and also stores them in
ListAns Memory. You can then use the ListAns Memory contents in a calculation.

3-11

S To use list contents in ListAns Memory in a calculation
Example

To multiply the list contents in ListAns Memory by 36
*(LIST)(List)(Ans)	BEU

• The operation *(LIST)(List)(Ans) recalls ListAns Memory contents.
• This operation replaces current ListAns Memory contents with the result of the above
calculation.

I Graphing a Function Using a List
When using the graphing functions of this calculator, you can input a function such as Y1 =
List 1X. If List 1 contains the values 1, 2, 3, this function will produces three graphs: Y = X,
Y = 2X, Y = 3X.
There are certain limitations on using lists with graphing functions.

I Inputting Scientific Calculations into a List
You can use the numeric table generation functions in the TABLE mode to input values that
result from certain scientific function calculations into a list. To do this, first generate a table
and then use the list copy function to copy the values from the table to the list.
Example

To use the TABLE mode to create a number table for the formula (Y1 = x2
–1), and then copy the table to List 1 in the STAT mode

1. In the TABLE mode, input the formula Y1 = x2 –1.
2. Create the number table.

3. Use C to move the highlighting to the Y1 column.
4. Press *(LMEM).

5. Press @U.
6. Enter the STAT mode to confirm that TABLE mode column Y1 has been copied to List 1.

3-12

I Performing Scientific Function Calculations Using a List
Lists can be used just as numeric values are in scientific function calculations. When the
calculation produces a list as a result, the list is stored in ListAns Memory.

Example

To use List 3

41
65
22

to perform sin (List 3)

Use radians as the angle unit.
Q*(LIST)(List)BU

4. Switching Between List Files
You can store up to 26 lists (List 1 to List 26) in each file (File 1 to File 6). A simple operation
lets you switch between list files.

S To switch between list files
1. From the Main Menu, enter the STAT mode.
Press K(SET UP) to display the STAT mode Setup screen.

2. Use A to highlight “List File”.
3. Press (FILE) and then input the number of the list file you want to use.
Example

To select File 3
(FILE)B

U
All subsequent list operations are applied to the lists contained in the file you select (List File 3
in the above example).

3-13

Chapter 4 Equation Calculations
From the Main Menu, enter the EQUA mode.
• {SIML} ... {linear equation with 2 to 6 unknowns}
• {POLY} ... {degree 2 to 6 equation}
• {SOLV} ... {solve calculation}

1. Simultaneous Linear Equations
You can solve simultaneous linear equations with two to six unknowns.
• Simultaneous Linear Equation with Two Unknowns:

a1x + b1y = c1
a2x + b2y = c2
• Simultaneous Linear Equation with Three Unknowns:

…

a1x + b1y + c1z = d1
a2x + b2y + c2z = d2
a3x + b3y + c3z = d3
1. From the Main Menu, enter the EQUA mode.
2. Select the SIML (Simultaneous) mode, and specify the number of unknowns (variables).
You can specify from 2 to 6 unknowns.
3. Sequentially input the coefficients.
• The cell that is currently selected for input is highlighted. Each time you input a coefficient,
the highlighting shifts in the sequence:

a1 m b1 m c1 m … an m bn m cn m (n = 2 to 6)
• You can also input fractions and values assigned to variables as coefficients.
• You can cancel the value you are inputting for the current coefficient by pressing ) at
any time before you press U to store the coefficient value. This returns to the coefficient
to what it was before you input anything. You can then input another value if you want.
• To change the value of a coefficient that you already stored by pressing U, move the
cursor to the coefficient you want to edit. Next, input the value you want to change to.
• Pressing (CLR) clears all coefficients to zero.
4. Solve the equations.
Example

To solve the following simultaneous linear equations for x, y, and z
4 x + y – 2z = – 1
x + 6y + 3z = 1
– 5x + 4y + z = – 7

4-1

4

 K EQUA
 (SIML)
(3)
 CU@UAU@U
@UEUBU@U
DUCU@UFU
 (SOLV)

• Internal calculations are performed using a 15-digit mantissa, but results are displayed using
a 10-digit mantissa and a 2-digit exponent.
• Simultaneous linear equations are solved by inverting the matrix containing the coefficients
of the equations. For example, the following shows the solution (x, y, z) of a simultaneous
linear equation with three unknowns.
x
a1 b1 c1 –1 d1
y
d2
= a2 b2 c2
z
a3 b3 c3
d3
Because of this, precision is reduced as the value of the determinant approaches zero. Also,
simultaneous equations with three or more unknowns may take a very long time to solve.
• An error occurs if the calculator is unable to find a solution.
• After calculation is complete, you can press (REPT), change coefficient values, and then
re-calculate.

2. High-order Equations from 2nd to 6th Degree
Your calculator can be used to solve high-order equations from 2nd to 6th degree.
• Quadratic Equation: ax2 + bx + c = 0 (a p 0)
• Cubic Equation:
…

• Quartic Equation:

ax3 + bx2 + cx + d = 0 (a p 0)
ax4 + bx3 + cx2 + dx + e = 0 (a p 0)

1. From the Main Menu, enter the EQUA mode.
2. Select the POLY (Polynomial) mode, and specify the degree of the equation.
You can specify a degree 2 to 6.
3. Sequentially input the coefficients.
• The cell that is currently selected for input is highlighted. Each time you input a coefficient,
the highlighting shifts in the sequence:

ambmcm…
• You can also input fractions and values assigned to variables as coefficients.
• You can cancel the value you are inputting for the current coefficient by pressing ) at
any time before you press U to store the coefficient value. This returns to the coefficient
to what it was before you input anything. You can then input another value if you want.

4-2

• To change the value of a coefficient that you already stored by pressing U, move the
cursor to the coefficient you want to edit. Next, input the value you want to change to.
• Pressing (CLR) clears all coefficients to zero.
4. Solve the equations.
Example

To solve the cubic equation (Angle unit = Rad)
x3 – 2x2 – x + 2 = 0

 K EQUA
 (POLY)
(3)
 @UAU@UAU
 (SOLV)
Multiple Solutions (Example: x3 + 3x2 + 3x + 1 = 0)

Complex Number Solution (Example: x3 + 2x2 + 3x + 2 = 0)
Complex Mode: Real (page 1-27)

Complex Mode: a + bi

Complex Mode: rQ

• Internal calculations are performed using a 15-digit mantissa, but results are displayed
using a 10-digit mantissa and a 2-digit exponent.
• It may take considerable time for the calculation result of a high-order equation of 3rd degree
or higher to appear on the display.
• An error occurs if the calculator is unable to find a solution.
• High-order equation calculations may not produce accurate results when the equation has
multiple solutions.
• After calculation is complete, you can press (REPT), change coefficient values, and then
re-calculate.

4-3

3. Solve Calculations
The Solve Calculation mode lets you determine the value of any variable in a formula without
having to solve the equation.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the EQUA mode.
2. Select the SOLV (Solver) mode, and input the equation as it is written.
• If you do not input an equals sign, the calculator assumes that the expression is to the left
of the equals sign, and there is a zero to the right.
• An error occurs if you input more than one equals sign.
3. In the table of variables that appears on the display, input values for each variable.
• You can also specify values for Upper and Lower to define the upper and lower limits of
the range of solutions.
• An error occurs if the solution falls outside the range you specify.
4. Select the variable for which you want to solve to obtain the solution.
“Lft” and “Rgt” indicate the left and right sides that are calculated using the solution.*1
*1 Solutions are approximated using Newton’s method. Lft and Rgt values are displayed for
confirmation, because Newton’s method may produce results that are the real solution.
The closer the difference between the Lft and Rgt values is to zero, the lower degree of
error in the result.
Example

An object thrown into the air at initial velocity V takes time T to reach
height H. Use the following formula to solve for initial velocity V when
H = 14 (meters), T = 2 (seconds) and gravitational acceleration is G =
9.8 (m/s2).
H = VT – 1/2 GT2

 K EQUA
 (SOLV)
?,(H)
(=)?A(V)?(T)\
@A?(G)?(T)VU
 @CU(H = 14)
?U(V = 0)
AU(T = 2)
H
GU(G = 9.8)
 Press DDD to highlight V = 0, and then press
(SOLV).

• The message “Retry” appears on the display when the calculator judges that convergence is
not sufficient for the displayed results.
• A Solve operation will produce a single solution. Use POLY when you want to obtain multiple
solutions for a high-order equation (such as ax2 + bx + c = 0).

4-4

Chapter 5 Graphing
Select the icon in the Main Menu that suits the type of graph you want to draw or the type of table
you want to generate.
• GRAPH … General function graphing
• RUN • MAT (or RUN) … Manual graphing (pages 5-12 to 5-15)
• TABLE … Number table generation (pages 5-15 to 5-19)
• DYNA* … Dynamic graphing (pages 5-20 to 5-22)
• RECUR* … Recursion graphing or number table generation (pages 5-22 to 5-26)
• CONICS* … Conic section graphing (page 5-27)
* Not included on the fx-7400Gɉ.

1. Sample Graphs

5

I How to draw a simple graph (1)
To draw a graph, simply input the applicable function.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the GRAPH mode.
2. Input the function you want to graph.
Here you would use the V-Window to specify the range and other parameters of the graph.
See page 5-2.
3. Draw the graph.
Example

To graph y = 3x2

 K GRAPH
 BTVU
 (DRAW) (or U)

• Press
to return to the screen in step 2 (Graph relation list). After drawing a graph, you
can toggle between the Graph relation list and graph screen by pressing (GjT).

I How to draw a simple graph (2)
You can store up to 20 functions in memory and then select the one you want for graphing.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the GRAPH mode.
2. Specify the function type and input the function whose graph you want to draw.
You can use the GRAPH mode to draw a graph for the following types of expressions:
rectangular coordinate expression (Y=f(x)), polar coordinate expression, parametric
function, rectangular coordinate expression (X=f(y)), inequality.
(TYPE)(Y=) ... rectangular coordinates (Y=f(x) type)
(r=) ... polar coordinates
(Parm) ... parametric function
(X=) ... rectangular coordinates (X=f(y) type)

5-1

(CONV)(Y=) to (Yb)
(E)(X=) to (Xb) ... changes the function type
(E)(Y>) to (Yb) .... Y inequality on left side
(E)(E)(X>) to (Xb) .... X inequality on left side
Repeat this step as many times as required to input all of the functions you want.
Next you should specify which of the functions among those that are stored in memory
you want to graph (see page 5-6). If you do not select specific functions here, the graph
operation will draw graphs of all the functions currently stored in memory.
3. Draw the graph.
• You can use the function menu that appears when you press (STYL) in step 2 of the
above procedure to select one of the following line styles for each graph.
(

) ... Normal (initial default)

(

) … Thick (twice the thickness of Normal)

(

) … Broken (thick broken)

(

) … Dot (dotted)

• When simultaneously graphing multiple inequalities, you can use the “Ineq Type” setting
on the Setup screen (K(SETUP)) to specify either of two fill ranges.
(AND) ... Fills areas only where the conditions of
all of the graphed inequalities are satisfied.
This is the initial default.

(OR) ..... Fills all areas where the conditions of the
graphed inequalities are satisfied.

Example

Input the functions shown below and draw their graphs.
Y1 = 2x2 – 3, r2 = 3sin2Q

 K GRAPH
 (TYPE)(Y=)ATVBU
(TYPE)(r=)BQATU
 (DRAW)

2. Controlling What Appears on a Graph Screen
I V-Window (View Window) Settings
Use the View Window to specify the range of the x- and y-axes, and to set the spacing
between the increments on each axis. You should always set the V-Window parameters you
want to use before graphing.
5-2

S To make V-Window settings
1. From the Main Menu, enter the GRAPH mode.
2. Press (V-WIN) to display the V-Window setting screen.
Rectangular coordinate parameter
Xmin/Xmax … Minimum/maximum x-axis value
Xscale … Spacing of x-axis increments
Xdot … Value that corresponds to one x-axis dot
Ymin/Ymax … Minimum/maximum y-axis value
Yscale … Spacing of y-axis increments
Polar coordinate parameter
TQ min/TQ max ... Minimum/maximum T, Qvalues
TQ ptch ... T, Q pitch
3. Press A to move the highlighting and input an appropriate value for each parameter,
pressing U after each.
• {INIT}/{TRIG}/{STD} … V-Window {initial settings}/{initial settings using specified angle
unit}/{standardized settings}
• {STO}/{RCL} … V-Window setting {store}/{recall}
After settings are the way you want them, press ) or )(QUIT) to exit the V-Window
setting screen.
• Pressing U without inputting anything while I (busy indicator) is displayed exits the
V-Window setting screen.

S V-Window Setting Precautions
• Inputting zero for TQ ptch causes an error.
• Any illegal input (out of range value, negative sign without a value, etc.) causes an error.
• When TQ max is less than TQ min, TQ ptch becomes negative.
• You can input expressions (such as 2P) as V-Window parameters.
• When the V-Window setting produces an axis that does not fit on the display, the scale of
the axis is indicated on the edge of the display closest to the origin.
• Changing the V-Window settings clears the graph currently on the display and replaces it
with the new axes only.
• Changing the Xmin or Xmax value causes the Xdot value to be adjusted automatically.
Changing the Xdot value causes the Xmax value to be adjusted automatically.
• A polar coordinate (r =) or parametric graph will appear coarse if the settings you make in
the V-Window cause the TQ ptch value to be too large, relative to the differential between
the TQ min and TQ max settings. If the settings you make cause the TQ ptch value to be
too small relative to the differential between the TQ min and TQ max settings, on the other
hand, the graph will take a very long time to draw.
• The following is the input range for V-Window parameters.
–9.999999999E 97 to 9.999999999E 97

5-3

I V-Window Memory
You can store up to six sets of V-Window settings in V-Window memory for recall when you
need them.

S To store V-Window settings
1. From the Main Menu, enter the GRAPH mode.
2. Press (V-WIN) to display the V-Window setting screen, and input the values you
want.
3. Press (STO) to display the pop-up window.
4. Press a number key to specify the V-Window memory where you want to save the settings,
and then press U. Pressing @U stores the settings in V-Window Memory 1 (V-Win1).

S To recall V-Window memory settings
1. From the Main Menu, enter the GRAPH mode.
2. Press (V-WIN) to display the V-Window setting screen.
3. Press (RCL) to display the pop-up window.
4. Press a number key to specify the V-Window memory number for the settings you want to
recall, and then press U. Pressing @U recalls the settings in V-Window Memory 1
(V-Win1).

I Specifying the Graph Range
You can define a range (start point, end point) for a function before graphing it.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the GRAPH mode.
2. Make V-Window settings.
3. Specify the function type and input the function. The following is the syntax for function
input.
Function 
( [ ) Start Point  End Point ( ] )
4. Draw the graph.
Example

Graph y = x2 + 3x – 2 within the range – 2  x  4.
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = –3,

Xmax = 5,

Xscale = 1

Ymin = –10,

Ymax = 30,

Yscale = 5

 K GRAPH
 (V-WIN)BUDU@UA
@?UB?UDU)
 (TYPE)(Y=)TV
BTA

( [ )AC( ] )U
 (DRAW)
• You can specify a range when graphing rectangular expressions, polar expressions,
parametric functions, and inequalities.
5-4

I Zoom
This function lets you enlarge and reduce the graph on the screen.
1. Draw the graph.
2. Specify the zoom type.
(ZOOM)(BOX) ... Box zoom
Draw a box around a display area, and that area is enlarged to
fill the entire screen.
(FACT)
Specifies the x-axis and y-axis zoom factors for factor zoom.
(IN)/(OUT) ... Factor zoom
The graph is enlarged or reduced in accordance with the factor
you specify, centered on the current pointer location.
(AUTO) ... Auto zoom
V-Window y-axis settings are automatically adjusted so the
graph fills the screen along the y-axis.
(E)(ORIG) ... Original size
Returns the graph to its original size following a zoom operation.
(E)(SQR) ... Graph correction
V-Window x-axis values are corrected so they are identical to
the y-axis values.
(E)(RND) ... Coordinate rounding
Rounds the coordinate values at the current pointer location.
(E)(INTG) ... Integer
Each dot is given a width of 1, which makes coordinate values
integers.
(E)(PRE) ... Previous
V-Window parameters are returned to what they were prior to
the last zoom operation.
Box zoom range specification
3. Use the cursor keys to move the pointer ( ) in the center of the screen to the location
where you want one corner of the box to be, and then press U.
4. Use the cursor keys to move the pointer. This causes a box to appear on the screen. Move
the cursor until the area you want to enlarge is enclosed in the box, and then press U to
enlarge it.
Example

Graph y = (x + 5)(x + 4)(x + 3), and then perform a box zoom.
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = –8,

Xmax = 8,

Xscale = 2

Ymin = –4,

Ymax = 2,

Yscale = 1

 K GRAPH
(V-WIN)GUGUAUA
CUAU@U)
(TYPE)(Y=)T
DT
C
T
BU
(DRAW)
5-5

 (ZOOM)(BOX)
 B~BU
 B~B,D~DU

• You must specify two different points for box zoom, and the two points cannot be on a
straight line vertically or horizontally from each other.

3. Drawing a Graph
You can store up to 20 functions in memory. Functions in memory can be edited, recalled, and
graphed.

I Specifying the Graph Type
Before you can store a graph function in memory, you must first specify its graph type.
1. While the Graph relation list is on the display, press (TYPE) to display the graph type
menu, which contains the following items.
• {Y=}/{r=}/{Parm}/{X=} ... {rectangular coordinate (Y=f(x) type)}/{polar coordinate}/
{parametric}/{rectangular coordinate (X=f(y) type)} graph
• {Y>}/{Y<}/{YP}/{YO} ... {Y>f (x)}/{Y}/{X<}/{XP}/{XO} ... {X>f(y)}/{X}/{Y<}/{YP}/{YO}/{X=}/{X>}/{X<}/{XP}/{XO}
... {changes the function type of the selected expression}
2. Press the function key that corresponds to the graph type you want to specify.

I Storing Graph Functions
S To store a rectangular coordinate function (Y=)
Example

To store the following expression in memory area Y1: y = 2x2 – 5
(TYPE)(Y=) (Specifies rectangular coordinate expression.)
ATVD(Inputs expression.)
U (Stores expression.)

• A function cannot be stored into a memory area that already contains a function of a different
type from the one you are trying to store. Select a memory area that contains a function that
is the same type as the one you are storing, or delete the function in the memory area to
which you are trying to store.

5-6

S To store a parametric function
Example

To store the following expressions in memory areas Xt3 and Yt3:
x = 3 sinT
y = 3 cosT
(TYPE)(Parm) (Specifies parametric expression.)
BQTU(Inputs and stores x expression.)
BATU(Inputs and stores y expression.)

S To create a composite function
Example

To use relations in Y1 and Y2 to create composite functions for Y3
and Y4
Y1 = (X + 1), Y2 = X2 + 3
Assign Y1°Y2 to Y3, and Y2°Y1 to Y4.
(Y1°Y2 = ((x2 + 3) +1) = (x2 + 4) Y2°Y1 = ( (X + 1))2 + 3 = X + 4 (X  −1))
Input relations into Y3 and Y4.
(TYPE)(Y=))(GRPH)
(Y)@(Y)AU
)(GRPH)(Y)A
(Y)@U

• A composite function can consist of up to five functions.

S To assign values to the coefficients and variables of a graph function
Example

To assign the values −1, 0, and 1 to variable A in Y = AX2−1, and draw a
graph for each value
(TYPE)(Y=)
?T(A)TV@U
)(GRPH)(Y)@?T(A)

(=)@U
)(GRPH)(Y)@?T(A)

(=)?U
)(GRPH)(Y)@?T(A)

(=)@U
DDDD(SEL)
(DRAW)

5-7

The above three screens are produced using the Trace function.
See “Function Analysis” (page 5-29) for more information.

I Editing and Deleting Functions
S To edit a function in memory
Example

To change the expression in memory area Y1 from y = 2x2 – 5 to

y = 2 x2 – 3
C (Displays cursor.)
CCCCC#B(Changes contents.)
U(Stores new graph function.)

S To change the line style of a graph function
1. On the Graph relation list screen, use D and A to highlight the relation whose line style
you want to change.
2. Press (STYL).
3. Select the line style.
Example

To change the line style of y = 2x2 – 3, which is stored in area Y1, to
“Broken”
(STYL)(

) (Selects “Broken”.)

S To change the type of a function *1
1. While the Graph relation list is on the display, press D or A to move the highlighting to
the area that contains the function whose type you want to change.
2. Press (TYPE)(CONV).
3. Select the function type you want to change to.
Example

To change the function in memory area Y1 from y = 2x2 – 3 to
y < 2 x2 – 3
(TYPE)(CONV)(Y<) (Changes the function type to “Y<”.)

1

* The function type can be changed for rectangular coordinate functions and inequalities only.

S To delete a function
1. While the Graph relation list is on the display, press D or A to move the highlighting to
the area that contains the function you want to delete.
2. Press (DEL) or #.
5-8

3. Press (Yes) to delete the function or (No) to abort the procedure without deleting
anything.
• Using the above procedure to delete one line of a parametric function (such as Xt2) also
will delete the applicable paired line (Yt2, in the case of Xt2).

I Selecting Functions for Graphing
S To specify the draw/non-draw status of a graph
1. On the Graph relation list, use D and A to highlight the relation you do not want to graph.
2. Press (SEL).
• Each press of (SEL) toggles graphing on and off.
3. Press (DRAW).
Example

To select the following functions for drawing:
Y1 = 2x2 – 5, r2 = 5 sin3Q
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = –5,

Xmax = 5,

Xscale = 1

Ymin = –5,

Ymax = 5,

Yscale = 1

TQ min = 0,

TQ max = P ,

TQ ptch = 2P / 60

AD (Select a memory area that contains a
function for which you want to specify non-draw.)
(SEL) (Specifies non-draw.)
(DRAW) or U (Draws the graphs.)
• You can use the Setup screen settings to alter the appearance of the graph screen as shown
below.
• Grid: On (Axes: On Label: Off)
This setting causes dots to appear at the grid intersects
on the display.

• Axes: Off (Label: Off Grid: Off)
This setting clears the axis lines from the display.

• Label: On (Axes: On Grid: Off)
This setting displays labels for the x- and y-axes.

5-9

I Graph Memory
Graph memory lets you store up to 20 sets of graph function data and recall it later when you
need it.
A single save operation saves the following data in graph memory.
• All graph functions in the currently displayed Graph relation list (up to 20)
• Graph types
• Function graph line information
• Draw/non-draw status
• V-Window settings (1 set)

S To store graph functions in graph memory
1. Press (GMEM)(STO) to display the pop-up window.
2. Press a number key to specify the Graph memory where you want to save the graph
function, and then press U. Pressing @U stores the graph function to Graph Memory 1
(G-Mem1).
• There are 20 graph memories numbered G-Mem1 to G-Mem20.
• Storing a function in a memory area that already contains a function replaces the existing
function with the new one.
• If the data exceeds the calculator’s remaining memory capacity, an error occurs.

S To recall a graph function
1. Press (GMEM)(RCL) to display the pop-up window.
2. Press a number key to specify the Graph memory for the function you want to recall, and
then press U. Pressing @U recalls the graph function in Graph Memory 1 (G-Mem1).
• Recalling data from graph memory causes any data currently on the Graph relation list to
be deleted.

4. Storing a Graph in Picture Memory
You can save up to 20 graphic images in picture memory for later recall. You can overdraw
the graph on the screen with another graph stored in picture memory.

S To store a graph in picture memory
1. After graphing in GRAPH mode, press *(PICT)(STO) to display the pop-up
window.
2. Press a number key to specify the Picture memory where you want to save the picture, and
then press U. Pressing @U stores the picture function to Picture Memory 1 (Pict 1).
• There are 20 picture memories numbered Pict 1 to Pict 20.
• Storing a graphic image in a memory area that already contains a graphic image replaces
the existing graphic image with the new one.
• A dual graph screen or any other type of graph that uses a split screen cannot be saved in
picture memory.
5-10

S To recall a stored graph
1. After graphing in GRAPH mode, press *(PICT)(RCL) to display the pop-up
window.
2. Press a number key to specify the Picture memory for the picture you want to recall, and
then press U. Pressing @U recalls the picture function in Picture Memory 1 (Pict 1).
• Recalling picture memory contents causes the currently displayed graph to be overwritten.
• Use the sketch Cls function (page 5-28) to clear a graph that was recalled from picture
memory.

5. Drawing Two Graphs on the Same Screen
I Copying the Graph to the Sub-screen
Dual Graph lets you split the screen into two parts. Then you can graph two different functions
in each for comparison, or draw a normal size graph on one side and its enlarged version on
the other side. This makes Dual Graph a powerful graph analysis tool.
With Dual Graph, the left side of the screen is called the “main screen”, while the right side is
called the “sub-screen”.
S Main Screen
The graph in the main screen is actually drawn from a function.
S Sub-screen
The graph on the sub-screen is produced by copying or zooming the main screen graph.
You can even make different V-Window settings for the sub-screen and main screen.

S To copy the graph to the sub-screen
1. From the Main Menu, enter the GRAPH mode.
2. On the Setup screen, select “G + G” for Dual Screen.
3. Make V-Window settings for the main screen.
Press (RIGHT) to display the sub-graph settings screen. Pressing (LEFT) returns to
the main screen setting screen.
4. Store the function, and draw the graph in the main screen.
5. Perform the Dual Graph operation you want.
*(COPY) ... Duplicates the main screen graph in the sub-screen
*(SWAP) ... Swaps the main screen contents and sub-screen contents
• Indicators appear to the right of the formulas in the Graph relation list to tell where graphs
are drawn with Dual Graph.
Indicates sub-screen graph (on right side of display)
Indicates graph drawn on both sides of display
Performing a draw operation with the function marked “ R ” in the above example screen
causes the graph to be drawn on the right side on the display. The function marked “ B ” is
drawn on both sides of the graph.
5-11

Pressing (SEL) while one of the function’s is highlighted would causes its “ R ” or “ B ”
indicator to be cleared. A function without an indicator is drawn as the main screen graph
(on the left side of the display).
Graph y = x(x + 1)(x – 1) in the main screen and sub-screen.

Example

Use the following V-Window settings.
(Main Screen) Xmin = –2,

Xmax = 2,

Xscale = 0.5

Ymin = –2,

Ymax = 2,

Yscale = 1

Xmin = –4,

Xmax = 4,

Xscale = 1

Ymin = –3,

Ymax = 3,

Yscale = 1

(Sub-screen)

 K GRAPH
 K(SET UP)_
AAAA*(G + G))
*fx-7400Gɉ, fx-9750Gɉ: AAA
 (V-WIN) AUAU?
DUA
AUAU@U
(RIGHT) CUCU@UA
BUBU@U)
 (TYPE)(Y=)TT
@
T@U
(DRAW)
 *(COPY)
• Pressing

while a graph is on the display will return to the screen in step 4.

6. Manual Graphing
I Rectangular Coordinate Graph
Inputting the Graph command in the RUN • MAT (or RUN) mode enables drawing of
rectangular coordinate graphs.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the RUN • MAT (or RUN) mode.
2. Make V-Window settings.
3. Input the commands for drawing the rectangular coordinate graph.
4. Input the function.
Example

Graph y = 2x2 + 3x – 4.
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = –5,

Xmax = 5,

Xscale = 2

Ymin = –10,

Ymax = 10,

Yscale = 5

 K RUN • MAT (or RUN)

5-12

 (V-WIN)DUDUAUA
@?U@?UDU)
 (SKTCH)(Cls)U
(GRPH)(Y=)
 ATV
BTCU
• Certain functions can be graphed easily using built-in function graphs.
• You can draw graphs of the following built-in scientific functions.
Rectangular Coordinate Graph
• sin x
• cos–1 x
• tanh x
•
x
• 10x
d (x)
•
dx

• cos x
• tan–1 x
• sinh–1 x
• x2
• ex
d2
• 2 (x)
dx

• tan x
• sinh x
• cosh–1 x
• log x
• x–1
• xdx

Polar Coordinate Graph
• sin–1 x
• cosh x
• tanh–1 x
• lnx
• 3
x

• sin Q
• cos–1 Q
• tanh Q
•
Q
• 10Q

• cos Q
• tan–1 Q
• sinh–1 Q
• Q2
• eQ

• tan Q
• sinh Q
• cosh–1 Q
• log Q
• Q–1

• sin–1 Q
• cosh Q
• tanh–1 Q
• lnQ
• 3
Q

- Input for x and Q variables is not required for a built-in function.
- When inputting a built-in function, other operators or values cannot be input.

I Drawing Multiple Graphs on the Same Screen
Use the following procedure to assign various values to a variable contained in an expression
and overwrite the resulting graphs on the screen.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the GRAPH mode.
2. On the Setup screen, change the “Dual Screen” setting to “Off”.
3. Make V-Window settings.
4. Specify the function type and input the function. The following is the syntax for function
input.
Expression containing one variable 
( [ ) variable 
(=)
value  value  ...  value ( ] )
5. Draw the graph.
Example

To graph y = Ax2 – 3 as the value of A changes in the sequence 3, 1, –1
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = –5,

Xmax = 5,

Xscale = 1

Ymin = –10,

Ymax = 10,

Yscale = 2

 K GRAPH
 K(SET UP)_
AAAA*(Off))
*fx-7400Gɉ, fx-9750Gɉ: AAA
 (V-WIN)DUDU@UA
@?U@?UAU)

5-13

 (TYPE)(Y=)?T(A)TVB

( [ )?T(A)
(=)B@@
( ] )U
 (DRAW)
• The value of only one of the variables in the expression can change.
• Any of the following cannot be used for the variable name: X, Y, r, Q, T.
• You cannot assign a variable to the variable inside the function.
• When Simul Graph is turned on, all of the graphs for the specified variable values are drawn
simultaneously.
• Overwrite can be used when graphing rectangular expressions, polar expressions,
parametric functions, and inequalities.

I Using Copy and Paste to Graph a Function
You can graph a function by copying it to the clipboard, and then pasting it into the graph
screen.
There are two types of functions you can paste into the graph screen.
Type 1 (Y= expression)
A function with the Y variable to the left of the equal sign is graphed as Y=
expression.
Example: To paste Y=X and graph it
• Any spaces to the left of Y are ignored.
Type 2 (expression)
Pasting this type of expression graphs Y= expression.
Example: To paste X and graph Y=X
• Any spaces to the left of the expression are ignored.

S To graph a function using copy and paste
1. Copy the function you want to graph to the clipboard.
2. From the Main Menu, enter the GRAPH mode.
3. On the Setup screen, change the “Dual Screen” setting to “Off”.
4. Make V-Window settings.
5. Draw the graph.
6. Paste the expression.
Example

While the graph of y = 2x2 + 3x – 4 is currently displayed, to paste the
previously copied function Y=X from the clipboard
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = –5,

Xmax = 5,

Xscale = 2

Ymin = –10,

Ymax = 10,

Yscale = 5

5-14

 K RUN • MAT (or RUN)
?(Y)
(=)T
G(CLIP)BBB(COPY)
 KGRAPH
 K(SET UP)_
AAAA*(Off))
*fx-7400Gɉ, fx-9750Gɉ: AAA
 (V-WIN)DUDUAUA
@?U@?UDU)
 (TYPE)(Y=)ATV
BTCU
(DRAW)
 H(PASTE)
• Paste is supported only when “Off” is selected for the “Dual Screen” setting on the Setup
screen.
• Though there is no limit on the number of graphs you can draw by pasting a function, the
total number of graphs supported by trace and other functions is 30 (number of graphs
drawn using expression number 1 to 20, plus graphs drawn using pasted functions).
• For the graph of a pasted function, the graph expression that appears when using trace or
other functions is displayed in the format: Y= expression.
• Re-executing a draw without clearing graph screen memory will redraw all the graphs,
including those produced by pasting functions.

7. Using Tables
To enter the TABLE mode, select the TABLE icon on the Main Menu.

I Storing a Function and Generating a Number Table
S To store a function
Example

To store the function y = 3x2 – 2 in memory area Y1

Use D and A to move the highlighting in the Table relation list to the memory area where
you want to store the function. Next, input the function and press U to store it.

S Variable Specifications
There are two methods you can use to specify value for the variable x when generating a
numeric table.
• Table range method
With this method, you specify the conditions for the change in value of the variable.
• List
With this method, the data in the list you specify is substituted for the x-variable to
generate a number table.
5-15

S To generate a table using a table range
Example

To generate a table as the value of variable x changes from –3 to 3, in
increments of 1
K TABLE
(SET)
BUBU@U

The numeric table range defines the conditions under which the value of variable x changes
during function calculation.
Start ............ Variable x start value
End ............. Variable x end value
Step ............ Variable x value change (interval)
After specifying the table range, press ) to return to the Table relation list.

S To generate a table using a list
1. While the Table relation list is on the screen, display the Setup screen.
2. Highlight Variable and then press (LIST) to display the pop-up window.
3. Select the list whose values you want to assign for the x-variable.
• To select List 6, for example, press EU. This causes the setting of the Variable
item of the Setup screen to change to List 6.
4. After specifying the list you want to use, press ) to return to the previous screen.

S Generating a Table
Example

To generate a table of values for the functions stored in memory areas
Y1 and Y3 of the Table relation list

Use D and A to move the highlighting to the
function you want to select for table generation and
press (SEL) to select it.
The “=” sign of selected functions is highlighted on
the screen. To deselect a function, move the cursor
to it and press (SEL) again.
Press (TABL) to generate a number table using
the functions you selected. The value of variable x
changes according to the range or the contents
of the list you specified.
The example screen shown here shows the results based
on the contents of List 6 (–3, –2, –1, 0, 1, 2, 3).
Each cell can contain up to six digits, including negative sign.
5-16

S To generate a differential number table
Changing the setting of Setup screen’s Derivative item to On causes a number table that
includes the derivative to be displayed whenever you generate a number table.
Locating the cursor at a differential
coefficient displays “dy/dx” in the top line,
which indicates differential.

• An error occurs if a graph for which a range is specified
or an overwrite graph is included among the graph
expressions.

S Specifying the Function Type
You can specify a function as being one of three types.
• Rectangular coordinate (Y=)
• Polar coordinate (r=)
• Parametric (Parm)
1. Press (TYPE) while the relation list is on the screen.
2. Press the number key that corresponds to the function type you want to specify.
• The number table is generated only for the function type specified on the relation list (Table
Func). You cannot generate a number table for a mixture of different function types.

I Editing Tables
You can use the table menu to perform any of the following operations once you generate a
table.
• Change the values of variable x
• Edit (delete, insert, and append) rows
• Delete a table
• Draw a connect type graph
• Draw a plot type graph
• {FORM} ... {return to Table relation list}
• {DEL} ... {delete table}
• {ROW}
• {DEL}/{INS}/{ADD} ... {delete}/{insert}/{add} row
• {G • CON}/{G • PLT} ... {connected type}/{draw plot type} graph draw
• If you try to replace a value with an illegal operation (such as division by zero), an error
occurs and the original value remains unchanged.
• You cannot directly change any values in the other (non-x) columns of the table.

5-17

I Copying a Table Column to a List
A simple operation lets you copy the contents of a numeric table column into a list.
Use B and C to move the cursor to the column you want to copy. The cursor can be in any
row.

S To copy a table to a list
Example

To copy the contents of Column x into List 1
*(LMEM)

Input the number of the list you want to copy and then press U.
@U

I Drawing a Graph from a Number Table
Use the following procedure to generate a number table and then draw a graph based on the
values in the table.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the TABLE mode.
2. Make V-Window settings.
3. Store the functions.
4. Specify the table range.
5. Generate the table.
6. Select the graph type and draw it.
(G • CON) ... line graph
(G • PLT) ... plot type graph
• After drawing the graph, pressing (G j T) or
Example

returns to the number table screen.

Store the two functions below, generate a number table, and then draw
a line graph. Specify a range of –3 to 3, and an increment of 1.
Y1 = 3x2 – 2, Y2 = x2
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = 0,

Xmax = 6,

Xscale = 1

Ymin = –2,

Ymax = 10,

Yscale = 2

 K TABLE
 (V-WIN)?UEU@UA
AU@?UAU)

5-18

 (TYPE)(Y=)BTVAU
TVU
 (SET)BUBU@U)
 (TABL)
 (G • CON)
• You can use Trace, Zoom, or Sketch after drawing a graph.

I Simultaneously Displaying a Number Table and Graph
Specifying T+G for Dual Screen on the Setup screen makes it possible to display a number
table and graph at the same time.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the TABLE mode.
2. Make V-Window settings.
3. On the Setup screen, select T+G for Dual Screen.
4. Input the function.
5. Specify the table range.
6. The number table is displayed in the sub-screen on the right.
7. Specify the graph type and draw the graph.
(G • CON) ... line graph
(G • PLT) ... plot type graph
Example

Store the function Y1 = 3x2 – 2 and simultaneously display its number
table and line graph. Use a table range of –3 to 3 with an increment of 1.
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = 0,

Xmax = 6,

Xscale = 1

Ymin = –2,

Ymax = 10,

Yscale = 2

 K TABLE
 (V-WIN)?UEU@UA
AU@?UAU)
 K(SET UP)AAA*(T+G))_
*fx-7400Gɉ, fx-9750Gɉ: AA
 (TYPE)(Y=)BTVAU
 (SET)
BUBU@U)
 (TABL)
 (G • CON)
• The Setup screen’s “Dual Screen” setting is applied in the TABLE mode and the RECUR
mode.
• You can make the number table active by pressing *(CHNG) or

5-19

.

8. Dynamic Graphing
Important!
• The fx-7400Gɉ is not equipped with the DYNA mode.

I Using Dynamic Graph
Dynamic Graph lets you define a range of values for the coefficients in a function, and then
observe how a graph is affected by changes in the value of a coefficient. It helps to see how
the coefficients and terms that make up a function influence the shape and position of a graph.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the DYNA mode.
2. Make V-Window settings.
3. On the Setup screen, specify the Dynamic Type.
(Cnt) ... Continuous
(Stop) ... Automatic stop after 10 draws
4. Use the cursor keys to select the function type on the built-in function type list.*1
5. Input values for coefficients, and specify which coefficient will be the dynamic variable.*2
6. Specify the start value, end value, and increment.
7. Specify the drawing speed.
(SPEED) ( ).... Pause after each draw (Stop&Go)
( ) ...... Half normal speed (Slow)
( ) ...... Normal speed (Normal)
( )..... Twice normal speed (Fast)
8. Draw the Dynamic Graph.
*1 The following are the seven built-in function types.
• Y=AX+B

• Y=A(X+B)2+C

• Y=AX2+BX+C

• Y=Asin(BX+C)

• Y=Acos(BX+C)

• Y=Atan(BX+C)

• Y=AX^3+BX2+CX+D

After you press (TYPE) and select the function type you want, you can then input the
actual function.
*2 You could also press U here and display the parameter setting menu.
• The message “Too Many Functions” appears when more than one function is selected for
Dynamic Graphing.
Example

Use Dynamic Graph to graph y = A (x – 1)2 – 1, in which the value of
coefficient A changes from 2 through 5 in increments of 1. The graph is
drawn 10 times.

 K DYNA
 (V-WIN)(INIT))
 K(SET UP)A*(Stop))
*fx-9750Gɉ: K(SET UP)
 (B-IN)A(SEL)
 (VAR)AU@U@U
 (SET)AUDU@U)
 (SPEED)( ))
 (DYNA)
5-20

Repeats from  through .
1

2




4

3



I Drawing a Dynamic Graph Locus
Turning on the Dynamic Graph locus setting on the Setup screen lets you overlay a graph
drawn by changing the coefficient values.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the DYNA mode.
2. Make V-Window settings.
3. On the Setup screen, select “On” for “Locus”.
4. Use the cursor keys to select the function type on the built-in function type list.
5. Input values for coefficients, and specify which coefficient will be the dynamic variable.
6. Specify the start value, end value, and increment.
7. Specify Normal for the draw speed.
8. Draw the Dynamic Graph.
Example

Use Dynamic Graph to graph y = Ax, in which the value of coefficient
A changes from 1 through 4 in increments of 1. The Graph is drawn 10
times.

 K DYNA
 (V-WIN)(INIT))
 K(SET UP)_
AA*(On))_
*fx-9750Gɉ: A
 (B-IN)(SEL)
 (VAR)@U?U
 (SET)@UCU@U)
 (SPEED)( ))
 (DYNA)

····
····

5-21

I Graph Calculation DOT Switching Function
Use this function to specify drawing of all the dots on the Dynamic Graph X-axis, or every
other dot. This setting is value for Dynamic Func Y= graphic only.
1. Press K(SET UP) to display the Setup screen.
2. Press \
AAA* to select Y=Draw Speed.
*fx-9750Gɉ: AA
3. Select the graphing method.
(Norm) … Draws all X-axis dots. (initial default)
(High) … Draws every other X-axis dot. (faster drawing than Normal)
4. Press ).

I Using Dynamic Graph Memory
You can store Dynamic Graph conditions and screen data in Dynamic Graph memory for
later recall when you need it. This lets you save time, because you can recall the data and
immediately begin a Dynamic Graph draw operation. Note that you can store one set of data
in memory at any one time.

S To save data in Dynamic Graph memory
1. While a Dynamic Graph draw operation is being performed, press
speed adjustment menu.

to change to the

2. Press (STO). In response to the confirmation dialog that appears, press (Yes) to
save the data.

S To recall data from Dynamic Graph memory
1. Display the Dynamic Graph relation list.
2. Pressing (RCL) recalls Dynamic Graph memory contents and draws the graph.

9. Graphing a Recursion Formula
Important!
• The fx-7400Gɉ is not equipped with the RECUR mode.

I Generating a Number Table from a Recursion Formula
You can input up to three of the following types of recursion formulas and generate a number
table.
• General term of sequence {an}, composed of an, n
• Linear two-term recursion composed of an+1, an, n
• Linear three-term recursion composed of an+2, an+1, an, n
1. From the Main Menu, enter the RECUR mode.
5-22

2. Specify the recursion type.
(TYPE)(an) ... {general term of sequence an}
(an+1) ... {linear two-term recursion}
(an+2) ... {linear three-term recursion}

3. Input the recursion formula.
4. Specify the table range. Specify a start point and end point for n. If necessary, specify a
value for the initial term, and a pointer start point value if you plan to graph the formula.
5. Display the recursion formula number table.
Example

Generate a number table from recursion between three terms as
expressed by an+2 = an+1 + an, with initial terms of a1 = 1, a2 = 1 (Fibonacci
sequence), as n changes in value from 1 to 6.

 K RECUR
 (TYPE)(an+2)
 (n.an ··)(an+1)
(an)U
 (SET)(a1)@UEU@U@U)
 (TABL)
* The first two values correspond
to a1 = 1 and a2 = 1.
• Pressing (FORM) will return to the screen for storing recursion formulas.
• Specifying “On” for the “3Display” of the Setup screen causes the sum of each term to be
included in the table.

I Graphing a Recursion Formula
After generating a number table from a recursion formula, you can graph the values on a line
graph or plot type graph.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the RECUR mode.
2. Make V-Window settings.
3. Specify the recursion formula type and input the formula.
4. Specify the table range, and start and ending values for n. If necessary, specify the initial
term value and pointer start point.
5. Select the line style for the graph.
6. Display the recursion formula number table.
7. Specify the graph type and draw the graph.
(G • CON) ... line graph
(G • PLT) ... plot type graph
Example

Generate a number table from recursion between two terms as
expressed by an+1 = 2an + 1, with an initial term of a1 = 1, as n changes in
value from 1 to 6. Use the table values to draw a line graph.
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = 0,

Xmax = 6,

Xscale = 1

Ymin = –15,

Ymax = 65,

Yscale = 5

5-23

 K RECUR
 (V-WIN)?UEU@UA\
@DUEDUDU)
 (TYPE)(an+1)A(an)
@U
 (SET)(a1)@UEU@U)
 (SEL+S)D(

))

 (TABL)
 (G • CON)
• After drawing a graph, you can use Trace, Zoom, and Sketch.
• Press
to return to the number table screen. After drawing a graph, you can toggle
between the number table screen and graph screen by pressing (GjT).

I Graphing a Phase Plot from Two Numeric Sequences
You can draw the phase plot for numeric sequences generated by two expressions input in the
RECUR mode with one value on the horizontal axis and the other value on the vertical axis.
For an (an+1, an+2), bn (bn+1, bn+2), cn (cn+1, cn+2), the numeric sequence of the alphabetically first
expression is on the horizontal axis while the following numeric sequence is on the vertical
axis.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the RECUR mode.
2. Configure V-Window settings.
3. Enter two recursion formulas and select both of them for table generation.
4. Configure table generation settings.
Specify the start and end values for variable n and the initial term for each recursion
formula.
5. Display the recursion formula number table.
6. Draw the phase plot.
Example

To input the two sequence formulas for regression between two terms
an+1 = 0.9an and bn+1 = bn + 0.1n − 0.2, and specify initial terms a1 = 1 and
b1 = 1 for each. Generate a number table as the value of the n variable
goes from 1 to 10 and use it to draw a phase plot.
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = 0,

Xmax = 2,

Xscale = 1

Ymin = 0,

Ymax = 4,

Yscale = 1

 K RECUR
 (V-WIN)?UAU@UA
?UCU@U)
 (TYPE)(an+1)?
H(an)U
(n.an ··)(bn)
?
@(n)?
AU
 (SET)(a1)@U@?U@U@U)

5-24

 (TABL)

 (PHAS)

• If you enter three expressions on the RECUR mode screen and select all of them for table
creation, you will need to specify which two of the three expressions you want to use to draw
the phase plot. To do so, use the function menu that appears when you press (PHAS) on
the table screen.
(a • b).......... Graph using an (an+1, an+2) and bn (bn+1, bn+2).
(b • c).......... Graph using bn (bn+1, bn+2) and cn (cn+1, cn+2).
(a • c).......... Graph using an (an+1, an+2) and cn (cn+1, cn+2).

• Specifying “On” for the “3Display” of the Setup screen causes the sum of each term to be
included in the table. At this time you can select use of the two numeric sequences as-is to
draw the plot graph, or use of the sums of each of the two numeric sequences. To do so, use
the function menu that appears when you press (PHAS) on the table screen.
(an) ............ Use numeric sequence for graphing.
(3an).......... Use numeric sequence sums for graphing.

• When “On” is selected “3Display” on the Setup screen and all three of the expressions
you input in the RECUR mode are selected for table creation, use the function menu
that appears when you press (PHAS) on the table screen to specify which two of the
expressions you want to use, and to specify whether you want to use numeric sequence
data or numeric sequence sum data.
(a • b).......... Graph using number sequences an
(an+1, an+2) and bn (bn+1, bn+2)
(b • c).......... Graph using number sequences bn
(bn+1, bn+2) and cn (cn+1, cn+2)
(a • c).......... Graph using number sequences an
(an+1, an+2) and cn (cn+1, cn+2)
(3 a • b) ....... Graph using the sums of number
sequences an (an+1, an+2) and bn (bn+1, bn+2)
(3 b • c) ....... Graph using the sums of number
sequences bn (bn+1, bn+2) and cn (cn+1, cn+2)
(3 a • c) ....... Graph using the sums of number
sequences an (an+1, an+2) and cn (cn+1, cn+2)
5-25

I WEB Graph (Convergence, Divergence)
y = f(x) is graphed by presuming an+1 = y, an = x for linear two-term regression an+1 = f(an)
composed of an+1, an. Next, it can be determined whether the function is convergent or
divergent.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the RECUR mode.
2. Make V-Window settings.
3. Select 2-term recursion as the recursion formula type, and input the formula.
4. Specify the table range, n start and end points, initial term value, and pointer start point.
5. Display the recursion formula number table.
6. Draw the graph.
7. Press U, and the pointer appears at the start point you specified.
Press U several times.
If convergence exists, lines that resemble a spider web are drawn on the display. Failure
of the web lines to appear indicates either divergence or that the graph is outside the
boundaries of the display screen. When this happens, change to larger V-Window values
and try again.
You can use DA to select the graph.
Example

To draw the WEB graph for the recursion formula an+1 = –3(an)2 + 3an, bn+1
= 3bn + 0.2, and check for divergence or convergence. Use the following
table range: Start = 0, End = 6, a0 = 0.01, anStr = 0.01, b0 = 0.11, bnStr
= 0.11

 K RECUR
 (V-WIN)?U@U@UA
?U@U@U)
 (TYPE)(an+1)B(an)V
B(an)U
B(bn)
?
AU
 (SET)(a0)
?UEU?
?@U?
@@UA
?
?@U?
@@U)
 (TABL)
 (WEB)
 U~U(an is convergence)
AU~U(bn is divergence)
• To change the graph line style, press (SEL+S) after step 4.
• With WEB Graph, you can specify the line type for a y = f(x) graph. The line type setting is
valid only when “Connect” is selected for “Draw Type” on the Setup screen.

5-26

10. Graphing a Conic Section
Important!
• The fx-7400Gɉ is not equipped with the CONICS mode.

I Graphing a Conic Section
You can use the CONICS mode to graph parabolas, circles, ellipses, and hyperbolas. You can
input a rectangular coordinate function, polar coordinate function, or parametric function for
graphing.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the CONICS mode.
2. Select the function type.
(RECT).... {rectangular coordinate}
(POL).... {polar coordinate}
(PARM).... {parametric}
3. Select the pattern of the function in accordance with the type of graph you want to draw.

1
U

4. Enter the coefficients of the function and draw the graph.
Example

To input the rectangular coordinate function x = 2y2 + y − 1 and graph a
parabola open on the right, and then input the polar coordinate function
r = 4cosQand draw a circle graph.

 KCONICS
 (RECT)A(X=AY2+BY+C)U
 AU@U@U(DRAW)

 ))
 (POL)AAAA(R=2AcosQ)U
 AU(DRAW)

11. Changing the Appearance of a Graph
I Drawing a Line
The sketch function lets you draw points and lines inside of graphs.
You can select one of four different line styles for drawing with the sketch function.
5-27

1. From the Main Menu, enter the GRAPH mode.
2. Make V-Window settings.
3. On the Setup screen, use the “Sketch Line” setting to specify the line style you want.
(

) … Normal (initial default)

(

) … Thick (twice the thickness of Normal)

(

) … Broken (thick broken)

(

) … Dot (dotted)

4. Input the function of the graph.
5. Draw the graph.
6. Select the sketch function you want to use.*1
(SKTCH)(Cls) ... Screen clear
(Tang) ... Tangent line
(Norm) ... Line normal to a curve
(Inv) ... Inverse function*2
_
(E)(PLOT)
{Plot}/{Pl • On}/{Pl • Off}/{Pl • Chg} ... Point {Plot}/{On}/{Off}/{Change}
_
(E)(LINE)
{Line}/{F • Line} ... {connects 2 points plotted by (E)(PLOT) with
a line}/{for drawing a line between any 2 points}
(E)(Crcl) ... Circle
(E)(Vert) ... Vertical line
(E)(Hztl) ... Horizontal line
(E)(E)(PEN) ... Freehand
(E)(E)(Text) ... Text input
7. Use the cursor keys to move the pointer (
press U.*3

) to the location where you want to draw, and

*1 The above shows the function menu that appears in the GRAPH mode. Menu items may
differ somewhat in other modes.
*2 In the case of an inverse function graph, drawing starts immediately after you select this
option.
*3 Some sketch functions require specification of two points. After you press U to specify the
first point, use the cursor keys to move the pointer to the location of the second point and
press U.
• You can specify line type for the following sketch functions: Tangent, Normal, Inverse, Line,
F • Line, Circle, Vertical, Horizontal, Pen
Example

Draw a line that is tangent to point (2, 0) on the graph for y = x (x + 2)
(x – 2).

 K GRAPH
 (V-WIN)(INIT))
 K_
(SET UP)AAAAAAAA*(

))_

*fx-7400Gɉ, fx-9750Gɉ: AAAAAAA
5-28

 (TYPE)(Y=)TT
AT_
AU
 (DRAW)
 (SKTCH)(Tang)
 C~CU*1
*1 You can draw a tangent line in succession by moving the “

” pointer and pressing U.

12. Function Analysis
I Reading Coordinates on a Graph Line
Trace lets you move a pointer along a graph and read out coordinates on the display.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the GRAPH mode.
2. Draw the graph.
3. Press (TRCE), and a pointer appears in the center of the graph.*1
4. Use B and C to move the pointer along the graph to
the point at which you want to display the derivative.
When there are multiple graphs on the display, press \
D and A to move between them along the x-axis of
the current pointer location.
5. You can also move the pointer by pressing T to display the pop-up window, and then
inputting coordinates.
The pop-up window appears even when you input coordinates directly.
To exit a trace operation, press (TRCE).
*1 The pointer is not visible on the graph when it is located at a point outside the graph display
area or when an error of no value occurs.
• You can turn off display of the coordinates at the pointer location by specifying “Off” for the
“Coord” item on the Setup screen.
• The following shows how coordinates are displayed for each function type.
Polar Coordinate Graph
Parametric Graph
Inequality Graph

I Displaying the Derivative
In addition to using Trace to display coordinates, you can also display the derivative at the
current pointer location.

5-29

1. From the Main Menu, enter the GRAPH mode.
2. On the Setup screen, specify On for Derivative.
3. Draw the graph.
4. Press (TRCE), and the pointer appears at the
center of the graph. The current coordinates and the
derivative also appear on the display at this time.

I Graph to Table
You can use trace to read the coordinates of a graph and store them in a number table. You
can also use Dual Graph to simultaneously store the graph and number table, making this an
important graph analysis tool.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the GRAPH mode.
2. On the Setup screen, specify GtoT for Dual Screen.
3. Make V-Window settings.
4. Save the function and draw the graph on the
main (left) screen.
5. Activate Trace. When there are multiple graphs on
the display, press D and A to select the graph you
want.
6. Use B and C to move the pointer and press U
to store coordinates into the number table. Repeat
this step to store as many values as you want.
7. Press *(CHNG) to make the number table active.

I Coordinate Rounding
This function rounds off coordinate values displayed by Trace.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the GRAPH mode.
2. Draw the graph.
3. Press (ZOOM)(E)(RND). This causes
the V-Window settings to be changed automatically
in accordance with the Rnd value.
4. Press (TRCE), and then use the cursor keys
to move the pointer along the graph. The coordinates
that now appear are rounded.

I Calculating the Root
This feature provides a number of different methods for analyzing graphs.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the GRAPH mode.
2. Draw the graphs.
3. Select the analysis function.
(G-SLV)(ROOT) ... Calculation of root
(MAX) ... Local maximum value
(MIN) ... Local minimum value
5-30

(Y-ICPT) ... y-intercept
(ISCT) ... Intersection of two graphs
(E)(Y-CAL) ... y-coordinate for given x-coordinate
(E)(X-CAL) ... x-coordinate for given y-coordinate
(E)(°dx) ... Integral value for a given range
4. When there are multiple graphs on the screen, the selection cursor (I) is located at the
lowest numbered graph. Press D and A to move the cursor to the graph you want to
select.
5. Press U to select the graph where the cursor is located and display the value produced by
the analysis.
When an analysis produces multiple values, press C to calculate the next value.
Pressing B returns to the previous value.

• Either of the following can cause poor accuracy or even make it impossible to obtain
solutions.
- When the graph of the solution obtained is a point of tangency with the x-axis
- When a solution is an inflection point

I Calculating the Point of Intersection of Two Graphs
Use the following procedure to calculate the point of intersection of two graphs.
1. Draw the graphs.
2. Press (G-SLV)(ISCT). When there are three or more graphs, the selection cursor
(I) appears at the lowest numbered graph.
3. Press D and A to move the cursor to the graph you want to select.
4. Press U to select the first graph, which changes the shape of the cursor from I to R.
5. Press D and A to move the cursor to the second graph.
6. Press U to calculate the point of intersection for the two graphs.
When an analysis produces multiple values, press C to calculate the next value.
Pressing B returns to the previous value.
Example

Graph the two functions shown below, and determine the point of
intersection between Y1 and Y2.
Y1 = x + 1, Y2 = x2

5-31

• You can calculate the point of intersection for rectangular coordinate graphs (Y=f(x) type)
and inequality graphs (Y f(x), Y f(x), Y Pf(x) or Y Of(x)) only.
• Either of the following can cause poor accuracy or even make it impossible to obtain
solutions.
- When a solution is a point of tangency between two graphs
- When a solution is an inflection point

I Determining the Coordinates for Given Points
The following procedure describes how to determine the y-coordinate for a given x, and the
x-coordinate for a given y.
1. Draw the graph.
2. Select the function you want to perform. When there are multiple graphs, the selection
cursor (I) appears at the lowest numbered graph.
(G-SLV)(E)(Y-CAL) ... y-coordinate for given x
(E)(X-CAL) ... x-coordinate for given y
3. Use DA to move the cursor (I) to the graph you want, and then press U to select it.
4. Input the given x-coordinate value or y-coordinate value.
Press U to calculate the corresponding y-coordinate value or x-coordinate value.
Example

Graph the two functions shown below and then determine the ycoordinate for x = 0.5 and the x-coordinate for y = 2.2 on graph Y2.
Y1 = x + 1, Y2 = x(x + 2)(x – 2)

• When there are multiple results for the above procedure, press C to calculate the next
value. Pressing B returns to the previous value.
• The X-CAL value cannot be obtained for a parametric function graph.

I Calculating the lntegral Value for a Given Range
Use the following procedure to obtain integration values for a given range.
1. Draw the graph.
2. Press (G-SLV)(E)(°dx). When there are multiple graphs, this causes the
selection cursor (I) to appear at the lowest numbered graph.
3. Use DA to move the cursor (I) to the graph you want, and then press U to select it.
4. Use BC to move the lower limit pointer to the location you want, and then press U.
5. Use C to move the upper limit pointer to the location you want.
6. Press U to calculate the integral value.

5-32

Example

Graph the function shown below, and then determine the integral value
at (–2, 0).
Y1 = x(x + 2)(x – 2)

• You can also specify the lower limit and upper limit by inputting them on the 10-key pad.
• When setting the range, make sure that the lower limit is less than the upper limit.
• Integral values can be calculated for rectangular coordinate graphs only.

I Conic Section Graph Analysis
Important!
• The fx-7400Gɉ is not equipped with the CONICS mode.
You can determine approximations of the following analytical results using conic section
graphs.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the CONICS mode.
2. Select the function type.
(RECT).... {rectangular coordinate}
(POL).... {polar coordinate}
(PARM).... {parametric}
3. Use D and A to select the conic section you want to analyze.
4. Input the conic section constants.
5. Draw the Graph.
After graphing a conic section, press (G-SLV) to display the following graph analysis
menus.

S Parabolic Graph Analysis
• {FOCS}/{VTX}/{LEN}/{e} ... {focus}/{vertex}/{length of latus rectum}/{eccentricity}
• {DIR}/{SYM} ... {directrix}/{axis of symmetry}
• {X-IN}/{Y-IN} ... {x-intercept}/{y-intercept}

S Circular Graph Analysis
• {CNTR}/{RADS} ... {center}/{radius}
• {X-IN}/{Y-IN} ... {x-intercept}/{y-intercept}

S Elliptical Graph Analysis
• {FOCS}/{VTX}/{CNTR}/{e} ... {focus}/{vertex}/{center}/{eccentricity}
• {X-IN}/{Y-IN} ... {x-intercept}/{y-intercept}

S Hyperbolic Graph Analysis
• {FOCS}/{VTX}/{CNTR}/{e} ... {focus}/{vertex}/{center}/{eccentricity}
• {ASYM} ... {asymptote}
• {X-IN}/{Y-IN} ... {x-intercept}/{y-intercept}
5-33

S To calculate the focus and length of latus rectum
Example

[G-SLV]-[FOCS]/[LEN]

To determine the focus and length of latus rectum for the parabola X =
(Y – 2)2 + 3
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = –1,

Xmax = 10,

Xscale = 1

Ymin = –5,

Ymax = 5,

Yscale = 1

K CONICS
U
@UAUBU(DRAW)
(G-SLV)
(FOCS)
(Calculates the focus.)

(G-SLV)
(LEN)
(Calculates the length of latus rectum.)

• When calculating two foci for an ellipse or hyperbolic graph, press C to calculate the
second focus. Pressing B returns to the first focus.
• When calculating two vertexes for a hyperbolic graph, press C to calculate the second
vertex. Pressing B returns to the first vertex.
• Pressing C when calculating the vertices of an ellipse will calculate the next value.
Pressing B will scroll back through previous values. An ellipse has four vertices.

S To calculate the center
Example

[G-SLV]-[CNTR]

To determine the center for the circle
(X + 2)2 + (Y + 1)2 = 22
K CONICS
AAAAU
AU@UAU(DRAW)
(G-SLV)
(CNTR)
(Calculates the center.)

5-34

Chapter 6 Statistical Graphs and

Calculations
Important!
This chapter contains a number of graph screen shots. In each case, new data values were input in
order to highlight the particular characteristics of the graph being drawn. Note that when you try to
draw a similar graph, the unit uses data values that you have input using the List function. Because
of this, the graphs that appear on the screen when you perform a graphing operation will probably
differ somewhat from those shown in this manual.

1. Before Performing Statistical Calculations
Entering the STAT mode from the Main Menu displays the List Editor screen.
You can use the List Editor screen to input statistical data and perform statistical calculations.
Use D, A, B and C to move the
highlighting around the lists.

Once you input data, you can use it to produce a graph and
check for tendencies. You can also use a variety of different
regression calculations to analyze the data.
• For information about using the statistical data lists, see
“Chapter 3 List Function”.

I Changing Graph Parameters
Use the following procedures to specify the graph draw/non-draw status, the graph type, and
other general settings for each of the graphs in the graph menu (GPH1, GPH2, GPH3).
While the statistical data list is on the display, press (GRPH) to display the graph menu,
which contains the following items.
• {GPH1}/{GPH2}/{GPH3} ... graph {1}/{2}/{3} drawing*1
• {SEL} ... {simultaneous graph (GPH1, GPH2, GPH3) selection}
You can specify the multiple graphs.
• {SET} ... {graph settings (graph type, list assignments)}
*1 The initial default graph type setting for all the graphs (Graph 1 through Graph 3) is scatter
diagram, but you can change to one of a number of other graph types.

1. General graph settings

[GRPH]-[SET]

This section describes how to use the general graph settings screen to make the following
settings for each graph (GPH1, GPH2, GPH3).
• Graph Type
The initial default graph type setting for all the graphs is scatter graph. You can select one of a
variety of other statistical graph types for each graph.
6-1

6

• List
The initial default statistical data is List 1 for single-variable data, and List 1 and List 2 for
paired-variable data. You can specify which statistical data list you want to use for x-data and
y-data.
• Frequency
Normally, each data item or data pair in the statistical data list is represented on a graph as
a point. When you are working with a large number of data items however, this can cause
problems because of the number of plot points on the graph. When this happens, you can
specify a frequency list that contains values indicating the number of instances (the frequency)
of the data items in the corresponding cells of the lists you are using for x-data and y-data.
Once you do this, only one point is plotted for the multiple data items, which makes the graph
easier to read.
• Mark Type
This setting lets you specify the shape of the plot points on the graph.

S To display the general graph settings screen

[GRPH]-[SET]

Pressing (GRPH)(SET) displays the general graph
settings screen.

• StatGraph (statistical graph specification)
• {GPH1}/{GPH2}/{GPH3} ... graph {1}/{2}/{3}
• Graph Type (graph type specification)
• {Scat}/{xy}/{NPP}/{Pie} ... {scatter diagram}/{xy line graph}/{normal probability plot}/{pie
graph}
• {Hist}/{Box}/{Bar}/{N·Dis}/{Brkn} ... {histogram}/{med-box graph}/{bar graph}/{normal
distribution curve}/{broken line graph}
• {X}/{Med}/{X^2}/{X^3}/{X^4} ... {linear regression graph}/{Med-Med graph}/{quadratic
regression graph}/{cubic regression graph}/{quartic regression graph}
• {Log}/{Exp}/{Pwr}/{Sin}/{Lgst} ... {logarithmic regression graph}/{exponential regression
graph}/{power regression graph}/{sinusoidal regression graph}/{logistic regression
graph}
• XList (x-axis data list)/YList (y-axis data list)
• {List} ... {List 1 to 26}
• Frequency (number of times a value occurs)
• {1} ... {1-to-1 plot}
• {List} ... {List 1 to 26}
• Mark Type (plot mark type)
• {U}/{s}/{•} ... scatter diagram plot points
When “Pie” (pie graph) is selected as the Graph Type:
• Data (Specifies the list to be used as graph data.)
• {LIST} ... {List 1 to List 26}

6-2

• Display (pie graph value display setting)
• {%}/{Data} ... For each data element {display as percentage}/{display as value}
• % Sto Mem (Specifies storage of percentage values to a list.)
• {None}/{List} ... For percentage values: {Do not store to list}/{Specify List 1 to 26 and store}
When “Box” (med-box graph) is selected as the Graph Type:
• Outliers (outliers specification)
• {On}/{Off} ... {display}/{do not display} Med-Box outliers
When “Bar” (bar graph) is selected as the Graph Type:
• Data1 (first stick data list)
• {LIST} ... {List 1 to 26}
• Data2 (second stick data list)/Data3 (third stick data list)
• {None}/{LIST} ... {none}/{List 1 to 26}
• Stick Style (stick style specification)
• {Leng}/{HZtl} ... {length}/{horizontal}

2. Graph draw/non-draw status

[GRPH]-[SEL]

The following procedure can be used to specify the draw (On)/non-draw (Off) status of each of
the graphs in the graph menu.

S To specify the draw/non-draw status of a graph
1. Pressing (GRPH)(SEL) displays the graph On/Off
screen.
• Note that the StatGraph1 setting is for Graph 1 (GPH1 of the graph menu), StatGraph2 is
for Graph 2, and StatGraph3 is for Graph 3.
2. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the graph whose status you want to change,
and press the applicable function key to change the status.
• {On}/{Off} ... {On (draw)}/{Off (non-draw)}
• {DRAW} ... {draws all On graphs}
3. To return to the graph menu, press ).
• V-Window parameters are normally set automatically for statistical graphing. If you want to
set V-Window parameters manually, you must change the Stat Wind item to “Manual”.
While the statistical data list is on the display, perform the following procedure.
K(SET UP)(Man)
)(Returns to previous menu.)
Note that V-Window parameters are set automatically for the following types of graphs
regardless of whether or not the Stat Wind item is set to “Manual”.
Pie, 1-Sample Z Test, 2-Sample Z Test, 1-Prop Z Test, 2-Prop Z Test, 1-Sample t Test, 2Sample t Test, C2 GOF Test, C2 2-way Test, 2-Sample F Test (x-axis only disregarded).
• The default setting automatically uses List 1 data as x-axis (horizontal) values and List 2 data
as y-axis (vertical) values. Each set of x/y data is a point on the scatter diagram.
6-3

2. Calculating and Graphing Single-Variable
Statistical Data
Single-variable data is data with only a single variable. If you are calculating the average height
of the members of a class for example, there is only one variable (height).
Single-variable statistics include distribution and sum. The following types of graphs are
available for single-variable statistics.
You can also use the procedures under “Changing Graph Parameters” on page 6-1 to make
the settings you want before drawing each graph.

I Normal Probability Plot
This plot compares the data accumulated ratio with a normal distribution accumulated ratio.
XList specifies the list where data is input, and Mark Type is used to select from among the
marks {U / s / • } you want to plot.

Press

, ) or )(QUIT) to return to the statistical data list.

I Pie Graph
You can draw a pie graph based on the data in a specific list. The maximum number of graph
data items (list lines) is 20. The graph is labeled A, B, C, and so on, corresponding to lines 1,
2, 3, and so on of the list used for the graph data.

When “%” is selected for the “Display” setting on the general graph settings screen (page 6-3),
a value showing the percentage is displayed for each of the alphabetic label letters.

I Histogram
XList specifies the list where the data is input, while Freq specifies the list where the data
frequency is input. 1 is specified for Freq when frequency is not specified.



U(DRAW)

6-4

The display screen appears as shown above before the graph is drawn. At this point, you can
change the Start and Width values.

I Med-box Graph
This type of graph lets you see how a large number of
data items are grouped within specific ranges. A box
minX
encloses all the data in an area from the first quartile
(Q1) to the third quartile (Q3), with a line drawn at the
median (Med). Lines (called whiskers) extend from
either end of the box up to the minimum (minX) and
maximum (maxX) of the data.
From the statistical data list, press (GRPH) to display the
graph menu, press (SET), and then change the graph
type of the graph you want to use (GPH1, GPH2, GPH3) to
med-box graph.

Q1 Med Q3

maxX

To plot the data that falls outside the box, first specify
“MedBox” as the Graph Type. Then, on the same screen you
use to specify the graph type, turn the Outliers item “On”,
and draw the graph.

• Changing the “Q1Q3 Type” setting on the Setup screen can cause the Q1 and Q3 positions
to change, even when a Med-box graph is drawn based on a single list.

I Bar Graph
You can specify up to three lists for drawing a bar graph. The graph is labeled [1], [2], [3], and
so on, corresponding to lines 1, 2, 3, and so on of the list used for the graph data.

• Any of the following causes an error and cancels bar graph drawing.
- A Condition ERROR occurs when drawing of multiple graphs is specified using the graph
On/Off screen (page 6-3), and bar graph is specified for one of the graphs and a different
graph type is specified for another graph.
- A Dimension ERROR occurs when you draw a graph with two or three lists specified and
the specified lists have a different number of list elements.
- A Condition ERROR occurs when lists are assigned for Data1 and Data3, while “None” is
specified for Data2.

6-5

I Normal Distribution Curve
The normal distribution curve is graphed using the normal
distribution function.
XList specifies the list where the data is input, while Freq
specifies the list where the data frequency is input. 1 is
specified for Freq when frequency is not specified.

I Broken Line Graph
Lines connect center points of a histogram bar.
XList specifies the list where the data is input, while Freq specifies the list where the data
frequency is input. 1 is specified for Freq when frequency is not specified.



U(DRAW)

The display screen appears as shown above before the graph is drawn. At this point, you can
change the Start and Width values.

I Displaying the Calculation Results of a Drawn Single-Variable Graph
Single-variable statistics can be expressed as both graphs
and parameter values. When these graphs are displayed,
the single-variable calculation results appear as shown to
the right when you press (1VAR).

• Use A to scroll the list so you can view the items that run off the bottom of the screen.
The following describes the meaning of each of the parameters.

x¯ ..................mean
3x ................sum
3x2 ...............sum of squares

Q1 ................first quartile

Sx .................population standard
deviation

maxX............maximum

sx .................sample standard
deviation

Mod:n ..........number of data mode items

Med ..............median
Q3 ................third quartile
Mod ..............mode
Mod:F ..........data mode frequency

n ..................number of data items
minX.............minimum

6-6

• Press (DRAW) to return to the original single-variable statistical graph.
• When Mod has multiple solutions, they are all displayed.
• You can use the Setup screen’s “Q1Q3 Type” setting to select either “Std” (standard
calculation) or “OnData” (French calculation) for the Q1 and Q3 calculation mode.
For details about calculation methods while “Std” or “OnData” is selected, see “Calculation
Methods for the Std and OnData Settings” below.

I Calculation Methods for the Std and OnData Settings
Q1 and Q3 can be calculated in accordance with the Setup screen’s “Q1Q3 Type” setting as
described below.

S Std
With this calculation method, processing depends on whether the number of elements n in the
population is an even number or odd number.
When the number of elements n is an even number:
Using the center point of the total population as the reference, the population elements are
divided into two groups: a lower half group and an upper half group. Q1 and Q3 then become
the values described below.
Q1 = {median of the group of
Q3 = {median of the group of

n
2

n

2
Center Point

1

2

3

items from the bottom of the population}
items from the top of the population}
Center Point
4

5

Center Point
6

7

8

4+5
= Median
2
6+7
= Q3
2

2+3
= Q1
2
When the number of elements n is an odd number:

Using the median of the total population as the reference, the population elements are divided
into two groups: a lower half group (values less than the median) and an upper half group
(values greater than the median). The median value is excluded. Q1 and Q3 then become the
values described below.
n–1
Q1 = {median of the group of
items from the bottom of the population}
2
n–1
items from the top of the population}
Q3 = {median of the group of
2
• When n = 1, Q1 = Q3 = population center point.

6-7

Center Point
1

2

Center Point

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Median

2+3
= Q1
2

7+8
= Q3
2

S OnData
The Q1 and Q3 values for this calculation method are described below.
Q1 = {value of element whose cumulative frequency ratio is greater than 1/4 and nearest to
1/4}
Q3 = {value of element whose cumulative frequency ratio is greater than 3/4 and nearest to
3/4}
The following shows an actual example of the above.
(Number of Elements: 10)
Data Value

Frequency

Cumulative
Frequency

Cumulative
Frequency Ratio

1

1

1

1/10 = 0.1

2

1

2

2/10 = 0.2

3

2

4

4/10 = 0.4

4

3

7

7/10 = 0.7

5

1

8

8/10 = 0.8

6

1

9

9/10 = 0.9

7

1

10

10/10 = 1.0

• 3 is the value of whose cumulative frequency ratio is greater than 1/4 and nearest to 1/4, so
Q1 = 3.
• 5 is the value of whose cumulative frequency ratio is greater than 3/4 and nearest to 3/4, so
Q3 = 5.
Reference Point (0.25)
0.1

0.2

1

2

Reference Point (0.75)

0.4

3

3

4

4

Q1

0.7

0.8

0.9

1.0

4

5

6

7

Q3

6-8

3. Calculating and Graphing Paired-Variable
Statistical Data
I Drawing a Scatter Diagram and xy Line Graph
The following procedure plots a scatter diagram and connects the dots to produce an xy line
graph.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the STAT mode.
2. Input the data into a list.
3. Specify Scat (scatter diagram) or xy (xy line graph) as the graph type, and then execute the
graph operation.
Press

, ) or )(QUIT) to return to the statistical data list.

Example

Input the two sets of data shown below. Next, plot the data on a scatter
diagram and connect the dots to produce an xy line graph.
0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2 (xList)
–2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4 (yList)

 K STAT
 ?
DU@
AUA
CUCUD
AUC
A
@U?
BU@
DUAUA
CU
 (Scatter diagram) (GRPH)(SET)A(Scat))(GPH1)
 (xy line graph) (GRPH)(SET)A(xy))(GPH1)

(xy line graph)

(Scatter diagram)

I Drawing a Regression Graph
Use the following procedure to input paired-variable statistical data, perform a regression
calculation using the data, and then graph the results.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the STAT mode.
2. Input the data into a list, and plot the scatter diagram.
3. Select the regression type, execute the calculation, and display the regression parameters.
4. Draw the regression graph.

6-9

Example

Input the two sets of data shown below and plot the data on a scatter
diagram. Next, perform logarithmic regression on the data to display the
regression parameters, and then draw the corresponding regression
graph.
0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2 (xList)
–2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4 (yList)

 K STAT
 ?
DU@
AUA
CUCUD
AUC
A
@U?
BU@
DUAUA
CU
(GRPH)(SET)A(Scat))(GPH1)
 (CALC)(E)(Log)
 (DRAW)

• You can perform trace on a regression graph. You cannot perform trace scroll.
• Input a positive integer for frequency data. Other types of values (decimals, etc.) cause an
error.

I Selecting the Regression Type
After you graph paired-variable statistical data, you can use the function menu at the bottom of
the display to select from a variety of different types of regression.
• {ax+b}/{a+bx}/{Med}/{X^2}/{X^3}/{X^4}/{Log}/{ae^bx}/{ab^x}/{Pwr}/{Sin}/{Lgst} ...
{linear regression (ax+b form)}/{linear regression (a+bx form)}/{Med-Med}/{quadratic
regression}/{cubic regression}/{quartic regression}/{logarithmic regression}/{exponential
regression (aebx form)}/{exponential regression (abx form)}/{power regression}/
{sinusoidal regression}/{logistic regression} calculation and graphing
• {2VAR}... {paired-variable statistical results}

I Displaying Regression Calculation Results
Whenever you perform a regression calculation, the regression formula parameter (such as a
and b in the linear regression y = ax + b) calculation results appear on the display. You can use
these to obtain statistical calculation results.
Regression parameters are calculated as soon as you press a function key to select a
regression type, while a graph is on the display.
The following parameters are used by linear regression, logarithmic regression, exponential
regression, and power regression.

r .............. correlation coefficient
r2 ............. coefficient of determination
MSe......... mean square error

6-10

I Graphing Statistical Calculation Results
While the parameter calculation result is on the display, you can graph the displayed
regression formula by pressing (DRAW).

I Linear Regression Graph
Linear regression uses the method of least squares to plot a straight line that passes close to
as many data points as possible, and returns values for the slope and y-intercept (y-coordinate
when x = 0) of the line.
The graphic representation of this relationship is a linear regression graph.
(CALC)(X)
(ax+b) or (a+bx)
(DRAW)
The following is the linear regression model formula.

y = ax + b
a ............. regression coefficient (slope)
b ............. regression constant term (y-intercept)
y = a + bx
a ............. regression constant term (y-intercept)
b ............. regression coefficient (slope)

I Med-Med Graph
When it is suspected that there are a number of extreme values, a Med-Med graph can be
used in place of the least squares method. This is similar to linear regression, but it minimizes
the effects of extreme values.
(CALC)(Med)
(DRAW)
The following is the Med-Med graph model formula.

y = ax + b
a .............. Med-Med graph slope
b .............. Med-Med graph y-intercept

I Quadratic/Cubic/Quartic Regression Graph
A quadratic/cubic/quartic regression graph represents connection of the data points of a
scatter diagram. It uses the method of least squares to draw a curve that passes close to
as many data points as possible. The formula that represents this is quadratic/cubic/quartic
regression.
Ex. Quadratic regression
(CALC)(X^2)
(DRAW)

6-11

Quadratic regression

Cubic regression

Model formula....... y = ax2 + bx + c

Model formula....... y = ax3 + bx2 + cx + d

a .......... regression second coefficient
b .......... regression first coefficient
c .......... regression constant term
(y-intercept)

a .......... regression third coefficient
b .......... regression second coefficient
c .......... regression first coefficient
d .......... regression constant term
(y-intercept)

Quartic regression
Model formula....... y = ax4 + bx3 + cx2 + dx + e

a .......... regression fourth coefficient
b .......... regression third coefficient
c .......... regression second coefficient
d .......... regression first coefficient
e .......... regression constant term (y-intercept)

I Logarithmic Regression Graph
Logarithmic regression expresses y as a logarithmic function of x. The standard logarithmic
regression formula is y = a + b × In x, so if we say that X = In x, the formula corresponds to
linear regression formula y = a + bX.
(CALC)(E)(Log)
(DRAW)
The following is the logarithmic regression model formula.

y = a + b·ln x
a .............. regression constant term
b .............. regression coefficient

I Exponential Regression Graph
Exponential regression expresses y as a proportion of the exponential function of x. The
standard exponential regression formula is y = a × ebx, so if we take the logarithms of both
sides we get In y = In a + bx. Next, if we say Y = In y, and A = In a, the formula corresponds to
linear regression formula Y = A + bx.
(CALC)(E)(Exp)
(aeˆbx) or (abˆx)
(DRAW)
The following is the exponential regression model formula.

y = a·ebx
a .............. regression coefficient
b .............. regression constant term
y = a·bx
a .............. regression constant term
b .............. regression coefficient
6-12

I Power Regression Graph
Power regression expresses y as a proportion of the power of x. The standard power
regression formula is y = a × xb, so if we take the logarithm of both sides we get In
y = In a + b × In x. Next, if we say X = In x, Y = In y, and A = In a, the formula corresponds to
linear regression formula Y = A + bX.
(CALC)(E)(Pwr)
(DRAW)
The following is the power regression model formula.

y = a·xb
a .............. regression coefficient
b .............. regression power

I Sinusoidal Regression Graph
Sinusoidal regression is best applied for cyclical data.
The following is the sinusoidal regression model formula.

y = a·sin(bx + c) + d
(CALC)(E)(Sin)
(DRAW)

Drawing a sine regression graph causes the angle unit setting of the calculator to automatically
change to Rad (radians). The angle unit does not change when you perform a sine regression
calculation without drawing a graph.
• Certain types of data may take a long time to calculate. This does not indicate malfunction.

I Logistic Regression Graph
Logistic regression is best applied for time-based phenomena in which there is a continual
increase until a saturation point is reached.
The following is the logistic regression model formula.

y=

c
1 + ae–bx

(CALC)(E)(E)(Lgst)
(DRAW)
• Certain types of data may take a long time to calculate. This does not indicate malfunction.

I Residual Calculation
Actual plot points (y-coordinates) and regression model distance can be calculated during
regression calculations.
6-13

While the statistical data list is on the display, recall the Setup screen to specify a LIST (“List 1”
through “List 26”) for “Resid List”. Calculated residual data is stored in the specified list.
The vertical distance from the plots to the regression model will be stored in the list.
Plots that are higher than the regression model are positive, while those that are lower are
negative.
Residual calculation can be performed and saved for all regression models.
Any data already existing in the selected list is cleared. The residual of each plot is stored in
the same precedence as the data used as the model.

I Displaying the Calculation Results of a Drawn Paired-Variable Graph
Paired-variable statistics can be expressed as both graphs and parameter values. When these
graphs are displayed, the paired-variable calculation results appear as shown below when you
press (CALC)(2VAR).

• Use A to scroll the list so you can view the items that run off the bottom of the screen.
M ........... mean of data stored in xList

3y2 ........ sum of squares of data stored in yList

3x ......... sum of data stored in xList

Sy .......... population standard deviation of data
stored in yList

3x2 ........ sum of squares of data stored in
xList

Sx .......... population standard deviation of
data stored in xList

sy .......... sample standard deviation of data
stored in yList
3xy ........ sum of the product of data stored in
xList and yList

sx .......... sample standard deviation of
data stored in xList

minX...... minimum of data stored in xList

n ........... number of data

maxX..... maximum of data stored in xList

N ............ mean of data stored in yList

minY...... minimum of data stored in yList

3y ......... sum of data stored in yList

maxY..... maximum of data stored in yList

I Copying a Regression Graph Formula to the GRAPH Mode
You can copy regression formula calculation results to the GRAPH mode Graph relation list,
and store and compare.
1. While a regression calculation result is on the display (see “Displaying Regression
Calculation Results” on page 6-10), press (COPY).
• This will display the GRAPH mode Graph relation list.*1
2. Use D and A to highlight the area to which you want to copy the regression formula of
the displayed result.
3. Press U to save the copied graph formula and return to the previous regression calculation
result display.
*1 You cannot edit regression formulas for graph formulas in the GRAPH mode.
6-14

4. Performing Statistical Calculations
All of the statistical calculations up to this point were performed after displaying a graph. The
following procedures can be used to perform statistical calculations alone.

S To specify statistical calculation data lists
You have to input the statistical data for the calculation you want to perform and specify
where it is located before you start a calculation. Display the statistical data and then press
(CALC)(SET).

The following is the meaning for each item.
1Var XList ....... location of single-variable statistic x values (XList)
1Var Freq........ location of single-variable frequency values (Frequency)
2Var XList ....... location of paired-variable statistic x values (XList)
2Var YList ....... location of paired-variable statistic y values (YList)
2Var Freq........ location of paired-variable frequency values (Frequency)
• Calculations in this section are performed based on the above specifications.

I Single-Variable Statistical Calculations
In the previous example under “Displaying the Calculation Results of a Drawn Single-Variable
Graph”, statistical calculation results were displayed after the graph was drawn. These were
numeric expressions of the characteristics of variables used in the graphic display.
These values can also be directly obtained by displaying the
statistical data list and pressing (CALC)(1VAR).

After this, pressing D or A scrolls the statistical calculation result display so you can view
variable characteristics.
For details on the meanings of these statistical values, see “Displaying the Calculation Results
of a Drawn Single-Variable Graph” (page 6-6).

I Paired-Variable Statistical Calculations
In the previous example under “Displaying the Calculation Results of a Drawn Paired-Variable
Graph”, statistical calculation results were displayed after the graph was drawn. These were
numeric expressions of the characteristics of variables used in the graphic display.

6-15

These values can also be directly obtained by displaying the
statistical data list and pressing (CALC)(2VAR).

After this, pressing D or A scrolls the statistical calculation result display so you can view
variable characteristics.
For details on the meanings of these statistical values, see “Displaying the Calculation Results
of a Drawn Paired-Variable Graph” (page 6-14).

I Regression Calculation
In the explanations from “Linear Regression Graph” to “Logistic Regression Graph”, regression
calculation results were displayed after the graph was drawn. Here, each coefficient value of
the regression line or regression curve is expressed as a number.
You can directly determine the same expression from the data input screen.
Pressing (CALC)(REG) displays a function menu, which contains the following items.
• {ax+b}/{a+bx}/{Med}/{X^2}/{X^3}/{X^4}/{Log}/{ae^bx}/{ab^x}/{Pwr}/{Sin}/{Lgst} ...
{linear regression (ax+b form)}/{linear regression (a+bx form)}/{Med-Med}/{quadratic
regression}/{cubic regression}/{quartic regression}/{logarithmic regression}/{exponential
regression (aebx form)}/{exponential regression (abx form)}/{power regression}/
{sinusoidal regression}/{logistic regression} parameters
Example

To display single-variable regression parameters
(CALC)(REG)(X)(ax+b)

The meanings of the parameters that appear on this screen are the same as those for “Linear
Regression Graph” to “Logistic Regression Graph”.

S Calculation of the Coefficient of Determination (r2) and MSe
You can use the STAT mode to calculate the coefficient of determination (r2) for quadratic
regression, cubic regression, and quartic regression. The following types of MSe calculations
are also available for each type of regression.

6-16

• Linear Regression (ax + b)............. MSe =
(a + bx)............. MSe =
• Quadratic Regression..................... MSe =
• Cubic Regression ........................... MSe =
• Quartic Regression ........................ MSe =
• Logarithmic Regression.................. MSe =
• Exponential Repression (a·ebx) ....... MSe =
(a·bx)........ MSe =
• Power Regression .......................... MSe =
• Sin Regression ............................... MSe =
• Logistic Regression ........................ MSe =

1
n–2

n

 (y – (ax + b))
i

1
n–4

n

 (y – (a + bx ))
i

n

 (y – (ax
i

1
n–2

2

+ bxi + c))2

n

 (y – (ax + bx + cx + d ))
3
i

i

i

2

i

2

i=1
n

 (y – (ax + bx
4
i

i

3
i

+ cxi2 + dxi + e))2

i=1
n

 (y – (a + b ln x ))
i

2

i

i=1
n

 (ln y – (ln a + bx ))
i

i

2

i=1
n

1
n–2

1
n–2

i

i=1

1
n–2

1
n–2

2

i

i=1

1
n–5
1
n–2

2

i=1

1
n–2

1
n–3

i

 (ln y – (ln a + (ln b) · x ))
i

i

2

i=1

n

 (ln y – (ln a + b ln x ))
i

i

2

i=1
n

 (y – (a sin (bx + c) + d ))
i

i

2

i=1
n



yi –

i=1

C
1 + ae–bxi

2

S Estimated Value Calculation for Regression Graphs
The STAT mode also includes a Y-CAL function that uses regression to calculate the estimated
y-value for a particular x-value after graphing a paired-variable statistical
regression.
The following is the general procedure for using the Y-CAL function.
1. After drawing a regression graph, press (G-SLV)(Y-CAL) to enter the graph
selection mode, and then press U.
If there are multiple graphs on the display, use D and A to select the graph you want,
and then press U.
• This causes an x-value input dialog box to appear.

2. Input the value you want for x and then press U.
• This causes the coordinates for x and y to appear at
the bottom of the display, and moves the pointer to the
corresponding point on the graph.
6-17

3. Pressing T or a number key at this time causes the x-value input dialog box to reappear
so you can perform another estimated value calculation if you want.
• The pointer does not appear if the calculated coordinates are not within the display range.
• The coordinates do not appear if “Off” is specified for the “Coord” item of the Setup screen.
• The Y-CAL function can also be used with a graph drawn by using DefG feature.

S Regression Formula Copy Function from a Regression Calculation Result
Screen
In addition to the normal regression formula copy function that lets you copy the regression
calculation result screen after drawing a statistical graph (such as Scatter Plot), the STAT
mode also has a function that lets you copy the regression formula obtained as the result of a
regression calculation. To copy a resulting regression formula, press (COPY).

I Estimated Value Calculation ( , )
After drawing a regression graph with the STAT mode, you can use the RUN • MAT (or RUN)
mode to calculate estimated values for the regression graph’s x and y parameters.
Example

To perform a linear regression using the nearby data and estimate the
values of ţ and [ů when xi = 20 and yi = 1000

xi
yi

10

15

20

25

30

1003

1005

1010

1011

1014

1. From the Main Menu, enter the STAT mode.
2. Input data into the list and draw the linear regression graph.
3. From the Main Menu, enter the RUN • MAT (or RUN) mode.
4. Press the keys as follows.
A?(value of xi)
*(STAT)*(ţ)U
* fx-7400GII: (STAT)
The estimated value ţ is displayed for xi = 20.
@???(value of yi)
(xˆ )U
The estimated value xˆ is displayed for yi = 1000.
• You cannot obtain estimated values for a Med-Med, quadratic regression, cubic regression,
quartic regression, sinusoidal regression, or logistic regression graph.

6-18

I Normal Probability Distribution Calculation
You can calculate normal probability distributions for single-variable statistics with the
RUN • MAT (or RUN) mode.
Press *(E)(PROB) ((PROB) on the fx-7400GII) (E) to display a function
menu, which contains the following items.
• {P(}/{Q(}/{R(} ... obtains normal probability {P(t)}/{Q(t)}/{R(t)} value
• {t(} ... {obtains normalized variate t(x) value}
• Normal probability P(t), Q(t), and R(t), and normalized variate t(x) are calculated using the
following formulas.
Standard Normal Distribution

P (t)

Q (t)

0 t

R (t)

0 t

0 t

x
Example

The following table shows the results of measurements of the height of
20 college students. Determine what percentage of the students fall in
the range 160.5 cm to 175.5 cm. Also, in what percentile does the 175.5
cm tall student fall?
Class no. Height (cm) Frequency

Class no. Height (cm) Frequency

1

158.5

1

6

173.3

4

2

160.5

1

7

175.5

2

3

163.3

2

8

178.6

2

4

167.5

2

9

180.4

2

5

170.2

3

10

186.7

1

1. From the Main Menu, enter the STAT mode.
2. Input the height data into List 1 and the frequency data into List 2.
3. Perform the single-variable statistical calculations.
You can obtain the normalized variate immediately after
performing single-variable statistical calculations only.
(CALC)(SET)
(LIST)@U
A(LIST)AU)(QUIT)
(CALC)(1VAR)

6-19

4. Press K, select the RUN • MAT (or RUN) mode, press *(E)(PROB)
((PROB) on the fx-7400GII) to recall the probability calculation (PROB) menu.
(PROB)*(E)(t() @E?
DU
* fx-7400GII: (PROB)
(Normalized variate t for 160.5 cm)

Result: –1.633855948
( –1.634)

(t() @FD
DU
(Normalized variate t for 175.5 cm)

Result: 0.4963343361
( 0.496)

(P()?
CHE
(P()@
EBCU
(Percentage of total)

Result:

0.638921
(63.9% of total)

(R()?
CHEU
(Percentile)

Result:
0.30995
(31.0 percentile)

I Drawing a Normal Probability Distribution Graph
You can draw a normal probability distribution graph using manual graphing with the
RUN • MAT (or RUN) mode.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the RUN • MAT (or RUN) mode.
2. Input the commands to draw a rectangular coordinate graph.
3. Input the probability value.
Example

To draw a normal probability P (0.5) graph.

 K RUN • MAT (or RUN)
 (SKTCH)(Cls)U
(GRPH)(Y=)
 *(E)(PROB)*(E)(P()?
DU
* fx-7400GII: (PROB)

I Calculations Using the Distribution Function
Important!
• The following operations cannot be performed on the fx-7400GII.
You can use special functions in the RUN • MAT mode or PRGM mode to perform calculations
that are the same as the STAT mode distribution function calculation (page 6-38).
Example

To calculate normal probability distribution in the RUN • MAT mode for
the data {1, 2, 3}, when the population standard deviation is S = 1.5 and
the population mean is ƫ = 2.
6-20

1. From the Main Menu, enter the RUN • MAT mode.
2. Press the keys as follows.
*(STAT)(DIST)(NORM)
(NPd)	( { )@AB
( } )@
DAU

• For details about what you can do with the distribution function and its syntax, see
“Performing Distribution Calculations in a Program” (page 8-29).

I Determining Standard Deviation and Variance from List Data
You can use functions to determine standard deviation and variance for specified list data. This
calculation is performed in the RUN • MAT (or RUN) mode. You can perform calculations using
data you saved to a list (List 1 to List 26) with the STAT mode List Editor or list data you input
directly on the RUN • MAT (or RUN) mode screen.
Syntax

StdDev(List n [,List m])
Variance(List n [,List m])
List n........Sample data
List m.......Frequency data

Example

To store the x-data below in List 1, the frequency values in List 2, and
determine the standard deviation and variance

x

60

70

80

90

Frequency

3

5

4

1

1. From the Main Menu, enter the STAT mode.
2. Use the List Editor to store the above data.
3. From the Main Menu, enter the RUN • MAT (or RUN) mode.
4. Press the keys as follows.
*(STAT)(S • Dev)*)
(LIST)(List)@(List)AU
* fx-7400GII: (STAT)(S • Dev)
)(STAT)(Var)*)
(LIST)(List)@(List)AU
* fx-7400GII: (STAT)(Var)

6-21

I Calculations Using the TEST Command
Important!
• The following operations cannot be performed on the fx-7400GII.
You can use special functions in the RUN • MAT mode or PRGM mode to perform calculations
that are the same as the STAT mode Z Test, t Test, and other test calculations (page 6-22).
Example

To determine the z score and p-value when a one-sample Z test is
performed under the conditions below:
test condition (ƫcondition) x ƫ0*, assumed population mean ƫ0 = 0,
population standard deviation Ʊ = 1, sample mean M = 1, number of
samples n = 2
* “ƫ condition x ƫ0” can be specified by entering 0 as the initial argument of
the one-sample Z test command “OneSampleZTest”.

1. From the Main Menu, enter the RUN • MAT mode.
2. Perform the following key operation.
*(STAT)(E)(TEST)(Z)
(1-S)??@@A
U
)))
(LIST)(List)(Ans)U

The following calculation results are displayed as ListAns elements 1 through 4.
1: z score
2: p-value
3: M
4: n
• For details about the function of the supported TEST command and their syntax, see “Using
the TEST Command to Execute a Command in a Program” (page 8-32).

5. Tests
Important!
• Test calculations cannot be performed on the fx-7400GII.
The Z Test provides a variety of different standardization-based tests. They make it possible to
test whether or not a sample accurately represents the population when the standard deviation
of a population (such as the entire population of a country) is known from previous tests. Z
testing is used for market research and public opinion research, that need to be performed
repeatedly.
6-22

1-Sample Z Test tests for the unknown population mean when the population standard
deviation is known.
2-Sample Z Test tests the equality of the means of two populations based on independent
samples when both population standard deviations are known.
1-Prop Z Test tests for an unknown proportion of successes.
2-Prop Z Test tests to compare the proportion of successes from two populations.
The t Test tests the hypothesis when the population standard deviation is unknown. The
hypothesis that is the opposite of the hypothesis being proven is called the null hypothesis,
while the hypothesis being proved is called the alternative hypothesis. The t Test is normally
applied to test the null hypothesis. Then a determination is made whether the null hypothesis
or alternative hypothesis will be adopted.
1-Sample t Test tests the hypothesis for a single unknown population mean when the
population standard deviation is unknown.
2-Sample t Test compares the population means when the population standard deviations are
unknown.
LinearReg t Test calculates the strength of the linear association of paired data.
With the C2 test, a number of independent groups are provided and a hypothesis is tested
relative to the probability of samples being included in each group.
The C2 GOF test (C2 one-way Test) tests whether the observed count of sample data fits
a certain distribution. For example, it can be used to determine conformance with normal
distribution or binomial distribution.
The C2 two-way test creates a cross-tabulation table that structures mainly two qualitative
variables (such as “Yes” and “No”), and evaluates the independence of the variables.
2-Sample F Test tests the hypothesis for the ratio of sample variances. It could be used, for
example, to test the carcinogenic effects of multiple suspected factors such as tobacco use,
alcohol, vitamin deficiency, high coffee intake, inactivity, poor living habits, etc.
ANOVA tests the hypothesis that the population means of the samples are equal when
there are multiple samples. It could be used, for example, to test whether or not different
combinations of materials have an effect on the quality and life of a final product.
One-Way ANOVA is used when there is one independent variable and one dependent
variable.
Two-Way ANOVA is used when there are two independent variables and one dependent
variable.
The following pages explain various statistical calculation methods based on the principles
described above. Details concerning statistical principles and terminology can be found in any
standard statistics textbook.
On the initial STAT mode screen, press (TEST) to display the test menu, which contains
the following items.
• (TEST)(Z) ... Z Tests (page 6-24)
(t) ... t Tests (page 6-26)
(CHI) ... C2 Test (page 6-29)
(F) ... 2-Sample F Test (page 6-30)
(ANOV) ... ANOVA (page 6-31)
6-23

After setting all the parameters, use A to move the highlighting to “Execute” and then press
one of the function keys shown below to perform the calculation or draw the graph.
• (CALC) ... Performs the calculation.
• (DRAW) ... Draws the graph.
• V-Window settings are automatically optimized for drawing the graph.

I Z Tests
S Z Test Common Functions
You can use the following graph analysis functions after drawing a Z Test result output graph.
• (Z) ... Displays z score.
Pressing (Z) displays the z score at the bottom of the display, and displays the pointer at
the corresponding location in the graph (unless the location is off the graph screen).
Two points are displayed in the case of a two-tail test. Use B and C to move the pointer.
• (P) ... Displays p-value.
Pressing (P) displays the p-value at the bottom of the display without displaying the pointer.
• Executing an analysis function automatically stores the z and p values in alpha variables Z
and P, respectively.

S 1-Sample Z Test
This test is used when the population standard deviation is known to test the hypothesis. The
1-Sample Z Test is applied to the normal distribution.
Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
(TEST)
(Z)
(1-S)

The following shows the parameter data specification items that are different from list data
specification.

Calculation Result Output Example

 

Mx11.4 .......... direction of test
sx .................. Displayed only for Data: List setting.
6-24

• [Save Res] does not save the M condition in line 2.

S 2-Sample Z Test
This test is used when the standard deviations for two populations are known to test the
hypothesis. The 2-Sample Z Test is applied to the normal distribution.
Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
(TEST)
(Z)
(2-S)

The following shows the parameter data specification items that are different from list data
specification.

Calculation Result Output Example

 

M1xM2 ............ direction of test
sx1 ................ Displayed only for Data: List setting.
sx2 ................ Displayed only for Data: List setting.

• [Save Res] does not save the M1 condition in line 2.

S 1-Prop Z Test
This test is used to test for an unknown proportion of successes. The 1-Prop Z Test is applied
to the normal distribution.
Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
(TEST)
(Z)
(1-P)

6-25

Calculation Result Output Example

Propx0.5 ....... direction of test
• [Save Res] does not save the Prop condition in line 2.

S 2-Prop Z Test
This test is used to compare the proportion of successes. The 2-Prop Z Test is applied to the
normal distribution.
Perform the following key operation from the statistical data list.
(TEST)
(Z)
(2-P)

Calculation Result Output Example

p1>p2 ............ direction of test
• [Save Res] does not save the p1 condition in line 2.

I t Tests
S t Test Common Functions
You can use the following graph analysis functions after drawing a t Test result output graph.
• (T) ... Displays t score.
Pressing (T) displays the t score at the bottom of the display, and displays the pointer at the
corresponding location in the graph (unless the location is off the graph screen).
Two points are displayed in the case of a two-tail test. Use B and C to move the pointer.
• (P) ... Displays p-value.
6-26

Pressing (P) displays the p-value at the bottom of the display without displaying the pointer.
• Executing an analysis function automatically stores the t and p values in alpha variables T
and P, respectively.

S 1-Sample t Test
This test uses the hypothesis test for a single unknown population mean when the population
standard deviation is unknown. The 1-Sample t Test is applied to t distribution.
Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
(TEST)
(t)
(1-S)

The following shows the parameter data specification items that are different from list data
specification.

Calculation Result Output Example

 

Mx11.3 .......... direction of test

• [Save Res] does not save the M condition in line 2.

S 2-Sample t Test
2-Sample t Test compares the population means when the population standard deviations are
unknown. The 2-Sample t Test is applied to t distribution.
Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
(TEST)
(t)
(2-S)

6-27

The following shows the parameter data specification items that are different from list data
specification.

Calculation Result Output Example

 

M1xM2 ............ direction of test
sp ................. Displayed only when Pooled: On setting.

• [Save Res] does not save the M1 condition in line 2.

S LinearReg t Test
LinearReg t Test treats paired-variable data sets as (x, y) pairs, and uses the method of least
squares to determine the most appropriate a, b coefficients of the data for the regression
formula y = a + bx. It also determines the correlation coefficient and t score, and calculates the
extent of the relationship between x and y.
Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
(TEST)
(t)
(REG)

Calculation Result Output Example

 

Bx0 & Rx0 ......... direction of test

Pressing (COPY) while a calculation result is on the display copies the regression formula
to the Graph relation list.

6-28

When there is a list specified for the [Resid List] item on the Setup screen, regression formula
residual data is automatically saved to the specified list after the calculation is finished.
• You cannot draw a graph for LinearReg t Test.
• [Save Res] does not save the B & R conditions in line 2.
• When the list specified by [Save Res] is the same list specified by the [Resid List] item on the
Setup screen, only [Resid List] data is saved in the list.

I Ƶ2 Test
• Ƶ2 Test Common Functions
You can use the following graph analysis functions after drawing a graph.
• (CHI) ... Displays C2 value.
Pressing (CHI) displays the C2 value at the bottom of the display, and displays the pointer at
the corresponding location in the graph (unless the location is off the graph screen).
• (P) ... Displays p-value.
Pressing (P) displays the p-value at the bottom of the display without displaying the pointer.
• Executing an analysis function automatically stores the C2 and p values in alpha variables C
and P, respectively.

• Ƶ2 GOF Test (Ƶ2 one-way Test)
The C2 GOF Test (Ƶ2 one-way test) tests whether the frequency of sample data fits a certain
distribution. For example, it can be used to determine conformance with normal distribution or
binomial distribution.
Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
(TEST)
(CHI)
(GOF)

Next, specify the lists that contain the data. The following shows the meaning of the above
items.
Observed ...... name of List (1 to 26) that contains observed counts (all cells positive
integers)
Expected....... name of List (1 to 26) that is for saving expected frequency
CNTRB ......... Specifies a list (List 1 to List 26) as the storage location of the contribution
of each observed count obtained as calculation results.

6-29

Calculation Result Output Examples

CNTRB ......... list for output of contribution values

• Ƶ2 two-way Test
C2 two-way Test sets up a number of independent groups and tests hypothesis related to
the proportion of the sample included in each group. The C2 Test is applied to dichotomous
variables (variable with two possible values, such as yes/no).
Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
(TEST)
(CHI)
(2WAY)

Next, specify the matrix that contains the data. The following shows the meaning of the above
items.
Observed ...... name of matrix (A to Z) that contains observed counts (all cells positive
integers)
Expected....... name of matrix (A to Z) that is for saving expected frequency
Calculation Result Output Example

• The matrix must be at least two lines by two columns. An error occurs if the matrix has only
one line or one column.
• Pressing (Mat) while the “Observed” and “Expected” parameter settings are highlighted
will display the Matrix (A to Z) setting screen.
• Pressing (MAT) while setting parameters enters the Matrix Editor, which you can use to
edit and view the contents of matrices.
• Pressing (MAT) while a calculation result is displayed enters the Matrix Editor, which
you can use to edit and view the contents of matrices.

I 2-Sample F Test
2-Sample F Test tests the hypothesis for the ratio of sample variances. The F Test is applied
to the F distribution.
6-30

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
(TEST)
(F)

The following shows the parameter data specification items that are different from list data
specification.

Calculation Result Output Example

 

S1xS2 ............ direction of test

x¯ 1 .................. Displayed only for Data: List setting.
x¯ 2 .................. Displayed only for Data: List setting.
You can use the following graph analysis functions after drawing a graph.
• (F) ... Displays F value.
Pressing (F) displays the F value at the bottom of the display, and displays the pointer at
the corresponding location in the graph (unless the location is off the graph screen).
Two points are displayed in the case of a two-tail test. Use B and C to move the pointer.
• (P) ... Displays p-value.
Pressing (P) displays the p-value at the bottom of the display without displaying the pointer.
• Executing an analysis function automatically stores the F and p values in alpha variables F
and P, respectively.
• [Save Res] does not save the S1 condition in line 2.

I ANOVA
ANOVA tests the hypothesis that the population means of the samples are equal when there
are multiple samples.
One-Way ANOVA is used when there is one independent variable and one dependent
variable.
Two-Way ANOVA is used when there are two independent variables and one dependent
variable.

6-31

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
(TEST)
(ANOV)

The following is the meaning of each item in the case of list data specification.
How Many..... selects One-Way ANOVA or Two-Way ANOVA (number of levels)
Factor A ........ category list (List 1 to 26)
Dependnt ...... list to be used for sample data (List 1 to 26)
Save Res ...... first list for storage of calculation results (None or List 1 to 22)*1
Execute......... executes a calculation or draws a graph (Two-Way ANOVA only)
*1 [Save Res] saves each vertical column of the table into its own list. The leftmost column
is saved in the specified list, and each subsequent column to the right is saved in the next
sequentially numbered list. Up to five lists can be used for storing columns. You can specify
an first list number in the range of 1 to 22.
The following item appears in the case of Two-Way ANOVA only.
Factor B ........ category list (List 1 to 26)
After setting all the parameters, use A to move the highlighting to “Execute” and then press
one of the function keys shown below to perform the calculation or draw the graph.
• (CALC) ... Performs the calculation.
• (DRAW) ... Draws the graph (Two-Way ANOVA only).
Calculation results are displayed in table form, just as they appear in science books.
Calculation Result Output Example

One-Way ANOVA
Line 1 (A) .......... Factor A df value, SS value, MS value, F value, p-value
Line 2 (ERR) ..... Error df value, SS value, MS value
Two-Way ANOVA
Line 1 (A) .......... Factor A df value, SS value, MS value, F value, p-value
Line 2 (B) .......... Factor B df value, SS value, MS value, F value, p-value
Line 3 (AB)........ Factor A s Factor B df value, SS value, MS value, F value, p-value
* Line 3 does not appear when there is only one observation in each
cell.
Line 4 (ERR) ..... Error df value, SS value, MS value

F ...................... F value
6-32

p ....................... p-value
df ..................... degrees of freedom
SS ..................... sum of squares
MS ................... mean squares
With Two-Way ANOVA, you can draw Interaction Plot graphs. The number of graphs depends
on Factor B, while the number of X-axis data depends on the Factor A. The Y-axis is the
average value of each category.
You can use the following graph analysis function after drawing a graph.
• (Trace) or (TRCE) ... Trace function
Pressing B or C moves the pointer on the graph in the corresponding direction. When there
are multiple graphs, you can move between graphs by pressing D and A.
• Graphing is available with Two-Way ANOVA only. V-Window settings are performed
automatically, regardless of Setup screen settings.
• Using the Trace function automatically stores the number of conditions to alpha variable A
and the mean value to variable M, respectively.

I ANOVA (Two-Way)
S Description
The nearby table shows measurement results for a metal product produced by a heat
treatment process based on two treatment levels: time (A) and temperature (B). The
experiments were repeated twice each under identical conditions.
B (Heat Treatment Temperature)
A (Time)

B1

B2

A1

113 ,

116 139 ,

132

A2

133 ,

131 126 ,

122

Perform analysis of variance on the following null hypothesis, using a significance level of 5%.
Ho : No change in strength due to time
Ho : No change in strength due to heat treatment temperature
Ho : No change in strength due to interaction of time and heat treatment temperature

S Solution
Use Two-Way ANOVA to test the above hypothesis.
Input the above data as shown below.
List1={1,1,1,1,2,2,2,2}
List2={1,1,2,2,1,1,2,2}
List3={113,116,139,132,133,131,126,122}

6-33

Define List 3 (the data for each group) as Dependent. Define List 1 and List 2 (the factor
numbers for each data item in List 3) as Factor A and Factor B respectively.
Executing the test produces the following results.
• Time differential (A) level of significance P = 0.2458019517
The level of significance (p = 0.2458019517) is greater than the significance level (0.05), so
the hypothesis is not rejected.
• Temperature differential (B) level of significance P = 0.04222398836
The level of significance (p = 0.04222398836) is less than the significance level (0.05), so the
hypothesis is rejected.
• Interaction (A s B) level of significance P = 2.78169946e-3
The level of significance (p = 2.78169946e-3) is less than the significance level (0.05), so the
hypothesis is rejected.
The above test indicates that the time differential is not significant, the temperature differential
is significant, and interaction is highly significant.

S Input Example

S Results

6-34

6. Confidence Interval
Important!
• Confidence interval calculations cannot be performed on the fx-7400GII.
A confidence interval is a range (interval) that includes a statistical value, usually the
population mean.
A confidence interval that is too broad makes it difficult to get an idea of where the population
value (true value) is located. A narrow confidence interval, on the other hand, limits the
population value and makes it difficult to obtain reliable results. The most commonly used
confidence levels are 95% and 99%. Raising the confidence level broadens the confidence
interval, while lowering the confidence level narrows the confidence level, but it also
increases the chance of accidently overlooking the population value. With a 95% confidence
interval, for example, the population value is not included within the resulting intervals 5% of
the time.
When you plan to conduct a survey and then t test and Z test the data, you must also consider
the sample size, confidence interval width, and confidence level. The confidence level changes
in accordance with the application.
1-Sample Z Interval calculates the confidence interval for an unknown population mean when
the population standard deviation is known.
2-Sample Z Interval calculates the confidence interval for the difference between two
population means when the population standard deviations of two samples are known.
1-Prop Z Interval calculates the confidence interval for an unknown proportion of successes.
2-Prop Z Interval calculates the confidence interval for the difference between the proportion
of successes in two populations.
1-Sample t Interval calculates the confidence interval for an unknown population mean when
the population standard deviation is unknown.
2-Sample t Interval calculates the confidence interval for the difference between two
population means when both population standard deviations are unknown.
On the initial STAT mode screen, press (INTR) to display the confidence interval menu,
which contains the following items.
• (INTR)(Z) ... Z intervals (page 6-36)
(t) ... t intervals (page 6-37)
After setting all the parameters, use A to move the highlighting to “Execute” and then press
the function key shown below to perform the calculation.
• (CALC) ... Performs the calculation.
• There is no graphing for confidence interval functions.

S General Confidence Interval Precaution
Inputting a value in the range of 0  C-Level < 1 for the C-Level setting sets a value you input.
Inputting a value in the range of 1  C-Level < 100 sets a value equivalent to your input divided
by 100.
6-35

I Z Interval
S 1-Sample Z Interval
1-Sample Z Interval calculates the confidence interval for an unknown population mean when
the population standard deviation is known.
Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
(INTR)
(Z)
(1-S)

The following shows the parameter data specification items that are different from list data
specification.

Calculation Result Output Example

S 2-Sample Z Interval
2-Sample Z Interval calculates the confidence interval for the difference between two
population means when the population standard deviations of two samples are known.
Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
(INTR)
(Z)
(2-S)

S 1-Prop Z Interval
1-Prop Z Interval uses the number of data to calculate the confidence interval for an unknown
proportion of successes.
Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
(INTR)
(Z)
(1-P)

6-36

Data is specified using parameter specification.
Calculation Result Output Example

S 2-Prop Z Interval
2-Prop Z Interval uses the number of data items to calculate the confidence interval for the
defference between the proportion of successes in two populations.
Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
(INTR)
(Z)
(2-P)

I t Interval
S 1-Sample t Interval
1-Sample t Interval calculates the confidence interval for an unknown population mean when
the population standard deviation is unknown.
Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
(INTR)
(t)
(1-S)

The following shows the parameter data specification items that are different from list data
specification.

Calculation Result Output Example

6-37

S 2-Sample t Interval
2-Sample t Interval calculates the confidence interval for the difference between two
population means when both population standard deviations are unknown. The t interval is
applied to t distribution.
Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
(INTR)
(t)
(2-S)

7. Distribution
Important!
• Distribution calculations cannot be performed on the fx-7400GII.
There is a variety of different types of distribution, but the most well-known is “normal
distribution”, which is essential for performing statistical calculations. Normal distribution
is a symmetrical distribution centered on the greatest occurrences of mean data (highest
frequency), with the frequency decreasing as you move away from the center. Poisson
distribution, geometric distribution, and various other distribution shapes are also used,
depending on the data type.
Certain trends can be determined once the distribution shape is determined. You can calculate
the probability of data taken from a distribution being less than a specific value.
For example, distribution can be used to calculate the yield rate when manufacturing some
product. Once a value is established as the criteria, you can calculate normal probability when
estimating what percent of the products meet the criteria. Conversely, a success rate target
(80% for example) is set up as the hypothesis, and normal distribution is used to estimate the
proportion of the products will reach this value.
Normal probability density calculates the probability density of normal distribution from a
specified x value.
Normal cumulative distribution calculates the probability of normal distribution data falling
between two specific values.
Inverse normal cumulative distribution calculates a value that represents the location within
a normal distribution for a specific cumulative probability.
Student-t probability density calculates t probability density from a specified x value.
Student-t cumulative distribution calculates the probability of t distribution data falling
between two specific values.
Inverse Student-t cumulative distribution calculates the lower bound value of a Student-t
cumulative probability density for a specified percentage.
Like t distribution, probability density (or probability), cumulative distribution and inverse
cumulative distribution can also be calculated for C2, F, Binomial, Poisson, Geometric and
Hypergeometric distributions.
On the initial STAT mode screen, press (DIST) to display the distribution menu, which
contains the following items.
6-38

• (DIST)(NORM) ... Normal distribution (page 6-39)
(t) ... Student-t distribution (page 6-41)
(CHI) ... C2 distribution (page 6-42)
(F) ... F distribution (page 6-43)
(BINM) ... Binomial distribution (page 6-44)
(E)(POISN) ... Poisson distribution (page 6-46)
(E)(GEO) ... Geometric distribution (page 6-47)
(E)(H.GEO) ... Hypergeometric distribution (page 6-49)
After setting all the parameters, use A to move the highlighting to “Execute” and then press
one of the function keys shown below to perform the calculation or draw the graph.
• (CALC) ... Performs the calculation.
• (DRAW) ... Draws the graph.

I Common Distribution Functions
• V-Window settings for graph drawing are set automatically when the Setup screen’s “Stat
Wind” setting is “Auto”. Current V-Window settings are used for graph drawing when the “Stat
Wind” setting is “Manual”.
• After drawing a graph, you can use the P-CAL function to calculate an estimated p-value for
a particular x value. The P-CAL function can be used only after a Normal Probability Density,
Student-t Probability Density, Ƶ2 Probability Density, or F Probability Density graph is drawn.
The following is the general procedure for using the P-CAL function.
1. After drawing a distribution graph, press (G-SLV) (P-CAL) to display the x value
input dialog box.
2. Input the value you want for x and then press U.
• This causes the x and p values to appear at the bottom of the display, and moves the
pointer to the corresponding point on the graph.
3. Pressing T or a number key at this time causes the x value input dialog box to reappear
so you can perform another estimated value calculation if you want.
4. After you are finished, press ) to clear the coordinate values and the pointer from the
display.
• Executing an analysis function automatically stores the x and p values in alpha variables X
and P, respectively.

I Normal Distribution
• Normal Probability Density

(DIST)(NORM)(NPd)

Normal Probability Density calculates the probability
density (p) for a specified single x-value or a list. When a
list is specified, calculation results for each list element are
displayed in list form.

6-39

• Normal probability density is applied to standard normal distribution.
• Specifying Ʊ = 1 and ƫ = 0 specifies standard normal distribution.
Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

Graph when an x-value is specified

• Graphing is supported only when a variable is specified and a single x-value is entered as
data.

• Normal Cumulative Distribution

(DIST)(NORM)(NCd)

Normal Cumulative Distribution calculates the normal
cumulative probability of a normal distribution between a
lower bound and an upper bound.

Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

Graph when an x-value is specified

• Graphing is supported only when a variable is specified and a single x-value is entered as
data.

• Inverse Normal Cumulative Distribution

(DIST)(NORM)(InvN)

Inverse Normal Cumulative Distribution calculates the
boundary value(s) of a normal cumulative distribution
probability for specified values.

Area: probability value
(0  Area  1)
Inverse cumulative normal distribution calculates a value that represents the location within a
normal distribution for a specific cumulative probability.

6-40



Upper



f (x)dx = p

Tail: Left
upper boundary
of integration
interval







f (x)dx = p

Lower

Tail: Right
lower boundary
of integration
interval

Upper

f (x)dx = p

Lower

Tail: Central
upper and lower
boundaries of
integration interval

Specify the probability and use this formula to obtain the integration interval.
• This calculator performs the above calculation using the following: d = 1E99, –d = –1E99
• There is no graphing for Inverse Normal Cumulative Distribution.

I Student-t Distribution
• Student-t Probability Density

(DIST)(t)(tPd)

Student-t Probability Density calculates the probability
density (p) for a specified single x-value or a list. When a
list is specified, calculation results for each list element are
displayed in list form.

Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

Graph when variable (x) is specified

• Graphing is supported only when a variable is specified and a single x-value is entered as
data.

• Student-t Cumulative Distribution

(DIST)(t)(tCd)

Student-t Cumulative Distribution calculates the Student-t
cumulative probability of a Student-t distribution between a
lower bound and an upper bound.

Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

Graph when variable (x) is specified
6-41

• Graphing is supported only when a variable is specified and a single x-value is entered as
data.

• Inverse Student-t Cumulative Distribution

(DIST)(t)(InvN)

Inverse Student-t Cumulative Distribution calculates the
lower bound value of a Student-t cumulative distribution for
a specified df (degrees of freedom) value.

Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

When variable (x) is specified

• There is no graphing for Inverse Student-t Cumulative Distribution.

I Ƶ2 Distribution
• Ƶ2 Probability Density

(DIST)(CHI)(CPd)

Ƶ2 Probability Density calculates the Ƶ2 probability density
(p) for a specified single x-value or a list. When a list is
specified, calculation results for each list element are
displayed in list form.

Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

Graph when variable (x) is specified

• Graphing is supported only when a variable is specified and a single x-value is entered as
data.

• Ƶ2 Cumulative Distribution

(DIST)(CHI)(CCd)

Ƶ Cumulative Distribution calculates the cumulative
probability of a Ƶ2 distribution between a lower bound and
2

an upper bound.

6-42

Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

Graph when variable (x) is specified

• Graphing is supported only when a variable is specified and a single x-value is entered as
data.

• Inverse Ƶ2 Cumulative Distribution

(DIST)(CHI)(InvC)

Inverse Ƶ Cumulative Distribution calculates the lower
bound value of a Ƶ2 cumulative distribution probability for a
specified df (degrees of freedom) value.
2

Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

When variable (x) is specified

• There is no graphing for Inverse Ƶ2 Cumulative Distribution.

I F Distribution
• F Probability Density

(DIST)(F)(FPd)

F Probability Density calculates the F probability density
(p) for a specified single x-value or a list. When a list is
specified, calculation results for each list element are
displayed in list form.

Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

Graph when variable (x) is specified

• Graphing is supported only when a variable is specified and a single x-value is entered as
data.
6-43

• F Cumulative Distribution

(DIST)(F)(FCd)

F Cumulative Distribution calculates the cumulative
probability of an F distribution between a lower bound and
an upper bound.

Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

Graph when variable (x) is specified

• Graphing is supported only when a variable is specified and a single x-value is entered as
data.

• Inverse F Cumulative Distribution

(DIST)(F)(InvF)

Inverse F Cumulative Distribution calculates the lower
bound value of an F cumulative distribution probability for
specified n:df and d:df (degrees of freedom of numerator
and denominator) values.

Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

When variable (x) is specified

• There is no graphing for Inverse F Cumulative Distribution.

I Binomial Distribution
• Binomial Probability

(DIST)(BINM)(BPd)

Binomial Probability calculates a probability at a specific
single x-value or each list element for the discrete binomial
distribution with the specified number of trials and
probability of success on each trial. When a list is specified,
calculation results for each list element are displayed in list
form.

6-44

Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

When variable (x) is specified

• There is no graphing for Binomial Probability.

• Binomial Cumulative Distribution

(DIST)(BINM)(BCd)

Binomial Cumulative Distribution calculates the cumulative
probability in a binomial distribution that the success will
occur on or before a specified trial.

Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

When variable (x) is specified

• There is no graphing for Binomial Cumulative Distribution.

• Inverse Binomial Cumulative Distribution

(DIST)(BINM)(InvB)

Inverse Binomial Cumulative Distribution calculates
the minimum number of trials of a binomial cumulative
distribution for specified values.

Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

When variable (x) is specified

• There is no graphing for Inverse Binomial Cumulative Distribution.

6-45

Important!
When executing the Inverse Binomial Cumulative Distribution calculation, the calculator uses
the specified Area value and the value that is one less than the Area value minimum number
of significant digits (>Area value) to calculate minimum number of trials values.
The results are assigned to system variables xInv (calculation result using Area) and >xInv
(calculation result using >Area). The calculator always displays the xInv value only. However,
when the xInv and >xInv values are different, the message shown below will appear with both
values.

The calculation results of Inverse Binomial Cumulative Distribution are integers. Accuracy may
be reduced when the first argument has 10 or more digits. Note that even a slight difference
in calculation accuracy affects calculation results. If a warning message appears, check the
displayed values.

I Poisson Distribution
(DIST)(E)(POISN)(PPd)

• Poisson Probability

Poisson Probability calculates a probability at a specific
single x-value or each list element for the discrete Poisson
distribution with the specified mean.

Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

When variable (x) is specified

• There is no graphing for Poisson Probability.

(DIST)(E)(POISN)(PCd)

• Poisson Cumulative Distribution

Poisson Cumulative Distribution calculates the cumulative
probability in a Poisson distribution that the success will
occur on or before a specified trial.

6-46

Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

When variable (x) is specified

• There is no graphing for Poisson Cumulative Distribution.

• Inverse Poisson Cumulative Distribution

(DIST)(E)(POISN)(InvP)

Inverse Poisson Cumulative Distribution calculates
the minimum number of trials of a Poisson cumulative
probability distribution for specified values.

Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

When variable (x) is specified

• There is no graphing for Inverse Poisson Cumulative Distribution.

Important!
When executing the Inverse Poisson Cumulative Distribution calculation, the calculator uses
the specified Area value and the value that is one less than the Area value minimum number
of significant digits (>Area value) to calculate minimum number of trials values.
The results are assigned to system variables xInv (calculation result using Area) and >xInv
(calculation result using >Area). The calculator always displays the xInv value only. However,
when the xInv and >xInv values are different, the message will appear with both values.
The calculation results of Inverse Poisson Cumulative Distribution are integers. Accuracy may
be reduced when the first argument has 10 or more digits. Note that even a slight difference
in calculation accuracy affects calculation results. If a warning message appears, check the
displayed values.

I Geometric Distribution
(DIST)(E)(GEO)(GPd)

• Geometric Probability

Geometric Probability calculates the probability at a specific
single x-value or each list element, and the number of the
trial on which the first success occurs, for the geometric
distribution with a specified probability of success.
6-47

Calculation Result Output Examples

When variable (x) is specified

When a list is specified

• There is no graphing for Geometric Probability.

(DIST)(E)(GEO)(GCd)

• Geometric Cumulative Distribution

Geometric Cumulative Distribution calculates the cumulative
probability in a geometric distribution that the success will
occur on or before a specified trial.

Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

When variable (x) is specified

• There is no graphing for Geometric Cumulative Distribution.

• Inverse Geometric Cumulative Distribution

(DIST)(E)(GEO)(InvG)

Inverse Geometric Cumulative Distribution calculates
the minimum number of trials of a geometric cumulative
probability distribution for specified values.

Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

When variable (x) is specified

• There is no graphing for Inverse Geometric Cumulative Distribution.

6-48

Important!
When executing the Inverse Geometric Cumulative Distribution calculation, the calculator uses
the specified Area value and the value that is one less than the Area value minimum number
of significant digits (>Area value) to calculate minimum number of trials values.
The results are assigned to system variables xInv (calculation result using Area) and >xInv
(calculation result using >Area). The calculator always displays the xInv value only. However,
when the xInv and >xInv values are different, the message will appear with both values.
The calculation results of Inverse Geometric Cumulative Distribution are integers. Accuracy
may be reduced when the first argument has 10 or more digits. Note that even a slight
difference in calculation accuracy affects calculation results. If a warning message appears,
check the displayed values.

I Hypergeometric Distribution
(DIST)(E)(H.GEO)(HPd)

• Hypergeometric Probability

Hypergeometric Probability calculates the probability at
a specific single x-value or each list element, and the
number of the trial on which the first success occurs, for the
hypergeometric distribution with a specified probability of
success.
Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

When variable (x) is specified

• There is no graphing for Hypergeometric Probability.

• Hypergeometric Cumulative Distribution

(DIST)(E)(H.GEO)(HCd)

Hypergeometric Cumulative Distribution calculates the
cumulative probability in a hypergeometric distribution that
the success will occur on or before a specified trial.

Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

When variable (x) is specified

• There is no graphing for Hypergeometric Cumulative Distribution.
6-49

• Inverse Hypergeometric Cumulative Distribution
(DIST)(E)(H.GEO)(InvH)
Inverse Hypergeometric Cumulative Distribution calculates
the minimum number of trials of a hypergeometric
cumulative probability distribution for specified values.

Calculation Result Output Examples

When a list is specified

When variable (x) is specified

• There is no graphing for Inverse Hypergeometric Cumulative Distribution.

Important!
When executing the Inverse Hypergeometric Cumulative Distribution calculation, the calculator
uses the specified Area value and the value that is one less than the Area value minimum
number of significant digits (>Area value) to calculate minimum number of trials values.
The results are assigned to system variables xInv (calculation result using Area) and >xInv
(calculation result using >Area). The calculator always displays the xInv value only. However,
when the xInv and >xInv values are different, the message will appear with both values.
The calculation results of Inverse Hypergeometric Cumulative Distribution are integers.
Accuracy may be reduced when the first argument has 10 or more digits. Note that even
a slight difference in calculation accuracy affects calculation results. If a warning message
appears, check the displayed values.

8. Input and Output Terms of Tests, Confidence
Interval, and Distribution
(All models except fx-7400GII)
The following explains the input and output terms that are used by tests, confidence interval,
and distribution.

I Input Terms
Data ...................................data type

ƫ (1-Sample Z Test) ...........population mean value test conditions (“x ƫ0” specifies two-tail test,
“< ƫ0” specifies lower one-tail test, “> ƫ0” specifies upper one-tail
test.)

ƫ1 (2-Sample Z Test) ..........population mean value test conditions (“x ƫ2” specifies two-tail test,
“< ƫ2” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is smaller than sample
2, “> ƫ2” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is greater than
sample 2.)
6-50

Prop (1-Prop Z Test) ..........sample proportion test conditions (“x p0” specifies two-tail test,
“< p0” specifies lower one-tail test, “> p0” specifies upper one-tail
test.)

p1 (2-Prop Z Test)...............sample proportion test conditions (“x p2” specifies two-tail test,
“< p2” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is smaller than sample
2, “> p2” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is greater than
sample 2.)

ƫ (1-Sample t Test) ............population mean value test conditions (“x ƫ0” specifies two-tail test,
“< ƫ0” specifies lower one-tail test, “> ƫ0” specifies upper one-tail
test.)

ƫ1 (2-Sample t Test) ...........sample mean value test conditions (“x ƫ2” specifies two-tail test,
“< ƫ2” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is smaller than sample
2, “> ƫ2” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is greater than
sample 2.)

B & R (LinearReg t Test) .....R-value test conditions (“x 0” specifies two-tail test, “< 0” specifies
lower one-tail test, “> 0” specifies upper one-tail test.)

Ʊ1 (2-Sample F Test)..........population standard deviation test conditions (“x Ʊ2” specifies
two-tail test, “< Ʊ2” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is smaller
than sample 2, “> Ʊ2” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is
greater than sample 2.)

ƫ0 .......................................assumed population mean
Ʊ.........................................population standard deviation (Ʊ > 0)
Ʊ1 .......................................population standard deviation of sample 1 (Ʊ1 > 0)
Ʊ2 .......................................population standard deviation of sample 2 (Ʊ2 > 0)
List .....................................list whose contents you want to use as data (List 1 to 26)
List1 ...................................list whose contents you want to use as sample 1 data (List 1 to 26)
List 2...................................list whose contents you want to use as sample 2 data (List 1 to 26)
Freq....................................frequency (1 or List 1 to 26)
Freq1..................................frequency of sample 1 (1 or List 1 to 26)
Freq2..................................frequency of sample 2 (1 or List 1 to 26)
Execute ..............................executes a calculation or draws a graph

M .........................................mean of sample
M1 .......................................mean of sample 1
M2 ........................................mean of sample 2
n .........................................size of sample (positive integer)
n1........................................size of sample 1 (positive integer)
n2........................................size of sample 2 (positive integer)
p0........................................expected sample proportion (0 < p0 < 1)
p1........................................sample proportion test conditions
x (1-Prop Z Test) ................sample value (x > 0 integer)
x (1-Prop Z Interval)...........data (0 or positive integer)
x1 ........................................data value of sample 1 (x1 > 0 integer)
x2 ........................................data value of sample 2 (x2 > 0 integer)
sx ........................................sample standard deviation (sx > 0)
sx1 .......................................standard deviation of sample 1 (sx1 > 0)
sx2 .......................................standard deviation of sample 2 (sx2 > 0)
6-51

XList...................................list for x-axis data (List 1 to 6)
YList...................................list for y-axis data (List 1 to 6)
C-Level...............................confidence level (0  C-Level < 1)
Pooled................................pooling On (in effect) or Off (not in effect)

x (Distribution)....................data
Ʊ (Distribution) ...................standard deviation (Ʊ > 0)
ƫ (Distribution) ...................mean
Lower (Distribution)............lower boundary
Upper (Distribution)............upper boundary

df (Distribution) ..................degrees of freedom (df > 0)
n:df (Distribution) ...............numerator degrees of freedom (positive integer)
d:df (Distribution) ...............denominator degrees of freedom (positive integer)
Numtrial (Distribution) ........number of trials

p (Distribution)....................success probability (0  p  1)

I Output Terms
z .........................................z score
p .........................................p-value
t ..........................................t score
Ƶ2 ........................................Ƶ2 value
F ........................................F value
ˆ..........................................estimated sample proportion
p
ˆ 1 ........................................estimated proportion of sample 1
p
ˆ 2 ........................................estimated proportion of sample 2
p

M .........................................mean of sample
M1 ........................................mean of sample 1
M2 ........................................mean of sample 2
sx ........................................sample standard deviation
sx1 .......................................standard deviation of sample 1
sx2 .......................................standard deviation of sample 2
sp ........................................pooled sample standard deviation

n ........................................size of sample
n1........................................size of sample 1
n2........................................size of sample 2
df ........................................degrees of freedom
a .........................................constant term
b .........................................coefficient
se ........................................standard error

r .........................................correlation coefficient
r2 ........................................coefficient of determination
Left.....................................confidence interval lower limit (left edge)
Right...................................confidence interval upper limit (right edge)
6-52

9. Statistic Formula
I Test
Test
1-Sample Z Test

 = (o – 0)/(/'
)

2-Sample Z Test

 = (o1 – o2)/ (12/1) + (22/2)

1-Prop Z Test

z = (x/n – p0)/ p0(1 – p0)/n

2-Prop Z Test

z = (x1/n1 – x2/n2)/ pˆ (1 – pˆ )(1/n1 + 1/n2)

1-Sample t Test

 = (o – 0)/(s/'
)
t = (o1 – o2)/ sp2(1/n1 + 1/n2)

2-Sample t Test (pooled)

sp = ((n1 – 1)sx12 + (n2 – 1)sx22)/(n1 + n2 – 2)

df = n1 + n2 − 2
t = (o1 – o2)/ sx12/n1 + sx22/n2
2-Sample t Test (not pooled) df = 1/(C 2/(n1 – 1) + (1 – C )2/(n2 – 1))
C = (sx12/n1)/(sx12/n1 + sx22/n2)

LinearReg t Test

n

n

i=1

i=1

b = (xi – o)(yi – p)/(xi – o)2

a = p – bo

t = r (n – 2)/(1 – r 2)
Oi: The i-th element of the observed
k

C2 GOF Test

2 =  ( Oi − Ei)2 /Ei
i

list

Ei: The i-th element of the expected
list

k R

2 = ( Oij − Eij)2 /Eij
C2 two-way Test

2-Sample F Test

i

j

k

R

i=1

j=1

Eij =  xij •  xij /  n

the observed matrix

Eij: The element at row i, column j of
the expected matrix

F = sx12/sx22
F = MS/MSe

MS = SS/Fdf

k

ANOVA Test

Oij: The element at row i, column j of

MSe = SSe/Edf
k

SS =  ni (oi − o)2

SSe =  ( ni – 1)sxi2

Fdf = k − 1

Edf =  ( ni – 1)

i=1

i=1
k

i=1

6-53

I Confidence Interval
Confidence Interval

Left: confidence interval lower limit (left edge)
Right: confidence interval upper limit (right edge)

1-Sample Z Interval


	

 = o +  (α /2) · /'


2-Sample Z Interval


	

 = (o1 – o2) + (α /2) 12/1 + 22/2

1-Prop Z Interval

Left, Right = x/n + Z(α /2) 1/n · (x/n · (1 – x/n))
Left, Right = (x1/n1 – x2/n2)

2-Prop Z Interval

+ Z(α /2) (x1/n1 · (1 – x1/n1))/n1 + (x2/n2 · (1 – x2/n2))/n2

1-Sample t Interval
2-Sample t Interval
(pooled)

Left, Right = o + tn−1(α /2) · sx/'
n
Left, Right = (o1 – o2) + tn1+n2−2 (α /2) sp2(1/n1 + 1/n2)
sp = ((n1 – 1)sx12 + (n2 – 1)sx22)/(n1 + n2 – 2)

Left, Right = (o1 – o2) + tdf (α /2) sx12/n1 + sx22/n2
2-Sample t Interval
(not pooled)

df = 1/(C 2/(n1 – 1) + (1 – C)2/(n2 – 1))
C = (sx12/n1)/(sx12/n1 + sx22/n2)

A: level of significance A = 1 − [C-Level ] C-Level : confidence level (0 C-Level 1)
Z(A/2): upper A/2 point of standard normal distribution
tdf (A/2): upper A/2 point of t distribution with df degrees of freedom

I Distribution (Continuous)
Distribution
Normal
Distribution

Probability Density
–
p(x) = 1 e
2

(x – )2
2

2

(
 > 0)
–

Student-t
Distribution

C Distribution

p(x) =

1  1
2
df
 2

2

df

x

ndf + ddf
2
p(x) =
ndf
ddf


2
2


F Distribution

df+1

x2
df + 1
1
+
 2
df
p(x) =

  df
df
 2
df

2

Cumulative Distribution

2

2

–1

–

 e

p=

x
2

(x  0)
ndf
ddf

ndf ndf
–1
2

x

2

– ndf + ddf
2

1 + ndf  x
ddf

(x  0)
6-54



Upper

p(x)dx
Lower

Inverse Cumulative Distribution

Distribution

Normal
Distribution

p=



Upper

p=

p(x)dx
–

tail = Left





p(x)dx
Lower

tail = Right

p=



Upper

p(x)dx
Lower

tail = Central

Student-t
Distribution

p=

C Distribution
2





p(x)dx
Lower

F Distribution

I Distribution (Discrete)
Distribution

Probability

Binomial Distribution

p(x) = nC x p x(1–p)n – x

Poisson Distribution

p(x) =

Geometric Distribution

p(x) = p(1– p)x – 1

p(x) =
Hypergeometric
Distribution

Distribution

e– μ × μ x
x!

MC x

(x = 0, 1, ·······, n) n: number of trials

(x = 0, 1, 2, ···)

M: mean ( M  0)

(x = 1, 2, 3, ···)

× N – MC n – x
NC n

n: Number of elements extracted from population (0  x integer)
M: Number of elements contained in attribute A (0  M integer)
N: Number of population elements (n  N, M  N integer)
Cumulative Distribution

Inverse Cumulative Distribution

Binomial Distribution
X

p = p(x)
x=0

X

p H p(x)
x=0

Poisson Distribution
X

Geometric Distribution

p = p(x)

Hypergeometric
Distribution

p = p(x)

x=1
X

x=0

6-55

X

p H p(x)
x=1
X

p H p(x)
x=0

Chapter 7 Financial Calculation (TVM)
Important!
• The fx-7400Gɉ is not equipped with the TVM mode.

1. Before Performing Financial Calculations
From the Main Menu, enter the TVM mode and display the Financial screen like the one
shown below.
Financial 1 screen

Financial 2 screen

• {SMPL} … {simple interest}
• {CMPD} … {compound interest}
• {CASH} … {cash flow (investment appraisal)}
• {AMT} … {amortization}
• {CNVT} … {interest rate conversion}
• {COST} … {cost, selling price, margin}
• {DAYS} … {day/date calculations}
• {DEPR} … {depreciation calculations}
• {BOND} … {bond calculations}

I Setup Items
S Payment
• {BGN}/{END} … Specifies {beginning of the period}/{end of the period} payment

S Date Mode
• {365}/{360} … Specifies calculation according to a {365-day}/{360-day} year

S Periods/YR. (payment interval specification)
• {Annu}/{Semi} … {annual}/{semiannual}
Note the following points regarding Setup screen settings whenever using the TVM mode.
• The following graph Setup screen settings are all turned off for graphing in the TVM mode:
Axes, Grid, Dual Screen.
• Drawing a financial graph while the Label item is turned on, displays the label CASH for the
vertical axis (deposits, withdrawals), and TIME for the horizontal axis (frequency).

7-1

7

I Graphing in the TVM Mode
After performing a financial calculation, you can use (GRPH) to graph the results as shown
below.

• Pressing (TRCE) while a graph is on the display activates Trace, which can be used
to look up other financial values. In the case of simple interest, for example, pressing C
displays PV, SI, and SFV. Pressing B displays the same values in reverse sequence.
• Zoom, Scroll, and Sketch cannot be used in the TVM mode.
• Whether you should use a positive or a negative value for the present value (PV) or the
purchase price (PRC) depends on the type of calculation you are trying to perform.
• Note that graphs should be used only for reference purposes when viewing TVM mode
calculation results.
• Note that calculation results produced in this mode should be regarded as reference values
only.
• Whenever performing an actual financial transaction, be sure to check any calculation results
obtained using this calculator with against the figures calculated by your financial institution.

2. Simple Interest
This calculator uses the following formulas to calculate simple interest.

S Formula
365-day Mode
360-day Mode

SI' = n × PV × i
365
SI' = n × PV × i
360

I%
100
I%
i=
100

i=

SI = –SI'
SFV = –(PV + SI' )

SI :
n :
PV :
I% :
SFV :

interest
number of interest periods
principal
annual interest
principal plus interest

Press (SMPL) from the Financial 1 screen to display the following input screen for simple
interest.
(SMPL)

n ........... number of interest periods (days)
I% ........ annual interest rate
PV ........ principal

7-2

After configuring the parameters, use one of the function menus noted below to perform the
corresponding calculation.
• {SI} … {simple interest}
• {SFV} … {simple future value}

• An error (Ma ERROR) occurs if parameters are not configured correctly.
Use the following function menus to maneuver between calculation result screens.
• {REPT} … {parameter input screen}
• {GRPH} … {draws graph}

After drawing a graph, you can press (TRCE) to turn on trace and read calculation
results along the graph.
Each press of C while trace is turned on cycles the displayed value in the sequence: present
value (PV) m simple interest (SI) m simple future value (SFV). Pressing B cycles in the
reverse direction.
Press ) to return to the parameter input screen.

3. Compound Interest
This calculator uses the following standard formulas to calculate compound interest.

S PV, PMT, FV, n
I%x0
PV = – ( PMT +  FV)

PMT = –
log

PV +  PMT
FV = –

I%0

39 ï307ðQ)9
)9 ï307sQ39

α = (1+ i × S) ×

S=

{

n=

{

PV +  FV


(1+ iS) × PMT – FV × i
(1+ iS) × PMT + PV × i

}

log (1+ i)

PV + FV
n
PV + FV
n=–
PMT
PMT = –

1–β
–n
, β = (1 + i)
i

0 .........Payment : End
(Setup Screen)
1 .........Payment : Begin
(Setup Screen)

i =

7-3

{

I%
............................... (P/Y = C/Y = 1)
100
C/Y
P/Y
I%
(1+
) –1 ..... (Other than
100 × [C/Y ]
those above)

SI %
i (effective interest rate)
i (effective interest rate) is calculated using Newton’s Method.
PV + A s 307 + B s FV = 0
To I % from i (effective interest rate)
i × 100 ................................. (P/Y = C/Y = 1)

I% =

{{

P/Y

}

(1+ i ) C/Y –1 × C/Y × 100... (Other than those above)

n ............ number of compound periods
I% ......... annual interest rate
PV ......... present value
307 ...... payment

FV ......... future value
P/Y ........ installment periods per year
C/Y ........ compounding periods per year

• A deposit is indicated by a plus sign (+), while a withdrawal is indicated by a minus sign (–).

Press (CMPD) from the Financial 1 screen to display the following input screen for
compound interest.
(CMPD)

n ........... number of compound periods
I% ........ annual interest rate
PV ........ present value (loan amount in case of loan; principal in case of savings)
307 ..... payment for each installment (payment in case of loan; deposit in case of savings)
FV ........ future value (unpaid balance in case of loan; principal plus interest in case of
savings)

P/Y ....... installment periods per year
C/Y ....... compounding periods per year
Important!
Inputting Values
A period (n) is expressed as a positive value. Either the present value (PV) or future value
(FV) is positive, while the other (PV or FV) is negative.
Precision
This calculator performs interest calculations using Newton’s Method, which produces
approximate values whose precision can be affected by various calculation conditions.
Because of this, interest calculation results produced by this calculator should be used
keeping the above limitation in mind or the results should be verified.
7-4

After configuring the parameters, use one of the function menus noted below to perform the
corresponding calculation.
• {n} … {number of compound periods}
• {I%} … {annual interest rate}
• {PV} … {present value} (Loan: loan amount; Savings: balance)
• {PMT} … {payment} (Loan: installment; Savings: deposit)
• {FV} … {future value} (Loan: unpaid balance; Savings: principal plus interest)
• {AMT} … {amortization screen}

• An error (Ma ERROR) occurs if parameters are not configured correctly.
Use the following function menus to maneuver between calculation result screens.
• {REPT} … {parameter input screen}
• {AMT} … {amortization screen}
• {GRPH} … {draws graph}

After drawing a graph, you can press (TRCE) to turn on trace and read calculation
results along the graph.
Press ) to return to the parameter input screen.

4. Cash Flow (Investment Appraisal)
This calculator uses the discounted cash flow (DCF) method to perform investment appraisal
by totalling cash flow for a fixed period. This calculator can perform the following four types of
investment appraisal.
• Net present value (NPV)
• Net future value (NFV)
• Internal rate of return (IRR)
• Payback period (PBP)
A cash flow diagram like the one shown below helps to visualize the movement of funds.

CF2 CF3 CF4

CF5

CF7
CF6

CF1
CF0
With this graph, the initial investment amount is represented by CF0. The cash flow one year
later is shown by CF1, two years later by CF2, and so on.
7-5

Investment appraisal can be used to clearly determine whether an investment is realizing
profits that were originally targeted.

S\
NPV

NPV = CF0 +

CF1
CF2
CF3
CFn
+
+
+…+
2
3
(1+ i) (1+ i)
(1+ i)
(1+ i)n

i=

I%
100

n: natural number up to 254
S\
NFV

NFV = NPV s(1 + i )n
S\
IRR

0 = CF0 +

CF2
CF3
CFn
CF1
+
+
+…+
2
3
(1 + i ) (1 + i ) (1 + i )
(1 + i )n

In this formula, NPV = 0, and the value of IRR is equivalent to i × 100. It should be noted,
however, that minute fractional values tend to accumulate during the subsequent calculations
performed automatically by the calculator, so NPV never actually reaches exactly zero. IRR
becomes more accurate the closer that NPV approaches to zero.

S\
PBP

PBP =

{

0 .................................. (CF0 > 0)

NPVn
... (Other than those above)
n–
NPVn+1 – NPVn

n

NPVn =


k

=0

CFk
(1 + i)k

n: smallest positive integer that satisfies the conditions NPVn  0, NPVn+1  0, or 0
Press (CASH) from the Financial 1 screen to display the following input screen for Cash
Flow.
(CASH)

I% ........ interest rate
Csh ....... list for cash flow

If you have not yet input data into a list, press (LIST) and input data into a list.
After configuring the parameters, use one of the function menus noted below to perform the
corresponding calculation.
• {NPV} … {net present value}
• {IRR} … {internal rate of return}
• {PBP} … {payback period}
• {NFV} … {net future value}
• {LIST} … {inputs data into a list}
• {LIST} … {specifies a list for data input}
7-6

• An error (Ma ERROR) occurs if parameters are not configured correctly.
Use the following function menus to maneuver between calculation result screens.
• {REPT} … {parameter input screen}
• {GRPH} … {draws graph}

After drawing a graph, you can press (TRCE) to turn on trace and read calculation
results along the graph.
Press ) to return to the parameter input screen.

5. Amortization
This calculator can be used to calculate the principal and interest portion of a monthly
installment, the remaining principal, and amount of principal and interest repaid up to any
point.

S Formula
a
1 payment
c
b
1 ............ PM1 ................... PM2 .......... Last
Number of Payments

a: interest portion of installment PM1 (,17)
b: principal portion of installment PM1 (PRN)
c: balance of principal after installment PM2 (BAL)

e

1 payment
d

1............. PM1................ PM2 ............. Last
Number of Payments

d: total principal from installment PM1 to payment of installment PM2 (3PRN)
e: total interest from installment PM1 to payment of installment PM2 (3,17)
*a + b = one repayment (307)
7-7

a : ,17PM1 = I BALPM1–1 s i I s (307 sign)
b : PRNPM1 =307 + BALPM1–1 s i
c : BALPM2 = BALPM2–1 + PRNPM2
PM2

d : 3PRN = PRNPM1 + PRNPM1+1 + … + PRNPM2
PM1

PM2

e : 3,17=,17PM1 +,17PM1+1 + … + ,17PM2
PM1

BAL0 = PV (,171 = 0 and PRN1 = 307 at beginning of installment term)
S Converting between the nominal interest rate and effective interest rate
The nominal interest rate (I% value input by user) is converted to an effective interest rate
(I%' ) for installment loans where the number of installments per year is different from the
number of compound interest calculation periods.

{

[C/Y ]

}

[P/Y ]
I%
I%' = (1+
) –1 × 100
100 × [C/Y ]

The following calculation is performed after conversion from the nominal interest rate to the
effective interest rate, and the result is used for all subsequent calculations.

i = I%'÷100
Press (AMT) from the Financial 1 screen to display the following input screen for
amortization.
(AMT)

PM1....... first installment of installments 1 through n
PM2....... second installment of installments 1 through n

n ........... installments
I% ........ interest rate
PV ........ principal
307 ..... payment for each installment
FV ........ balance following final installment
P/Y ....... installments per year
C/Y ....... compoundings per year
After configuring the parameters, use one of the function menus noted below to perform the
corresponding calculation.
• {BAL} … {balance of principal after installment PM2}
• {INT} … {interest portion of installment PM1}
• {PRN} … {principal portion of installment PM1}
7-8

• {3INT} … {total interest paid from installment PM1 to installment PM2}
• {3PRN} … {total principal paid from installment PM1 to installment PM2}
• {CMPD} … {compound interest screen}

• An error (Ma ERROR) occurs if parameters are not configured correctly.
Use the following function menus to maneuver between calculation result screens.
• {REPT} … {parameter input screen}
• {CMPD} … {compound interest screen}
• {GRPH} … {draws graph}

After drawing a graph, you can press (TRCE) to turn on trace and read calculation
results along the graph.
The first press of (TRCE) displays ,17 and PRN when n = 1. Each press of C shows
,17 and PRN when n = 2, n = 3, and so on.
Press ) to return to the parameter input screen.

6. Interest Rate Conversion
The procedures in this section describe how to convert between the annual percentage rate
and effective interest rate.

S Formula
n

EFF = 1 +

APR/100
–1 s100
n

EFF
APR = 1 +
100

1
n

APR : annual percentage rate (%)
EFF : effective interest rate (%)
n
: number of compoundings

–1 sn s100

Press (CNVT) from the Financial 1 screen to display the following input screen for interest
rate conversion.
(CNVT)

n ........... number of compoundings
I% ......... interest rate

7-9

After configuring the parameters, use one of the function menus noted below to perform the
corresponding calculation.
• {EFF} … {converts annual percentage rate to effective interest rate}
• {APR} … {converts effective interest rate to annual percent rate}

• An error (Ma ERROR) occurs if parameters are not configured correctly.
Use the following function menu to maneuver between calculation result screens.
• {REPT} … {parameter input screen}

7. Cost, Selling Price, Margin
Cost, selling price, or margin can be calculated by inputting the other two values.

S Formula

&67 = SEL 1–

05*
100

&67
05*
1–
100
&67
s100
05*(%) = 1–
SEL

SEL =

&67 : cost
SEL : selling price
05* : margin

Press (COST) from the Financial 2 screen to display the following input screen.
(E)(COST)
Cst......... cost
Sel......... selling price
Mrg........ margin

After configuring the parameters, use one of the function menus noted below to perform the
corresponding calculation.
• {COST} … {cost}
• {SEL} … {selling price}
• {MRG} … {margin}

• An error (Ma ERROR) occurs if parameters are not configured correctly.
7-10

Use the following function menu to maneuver between calculation result screens.
• {REPT} … {parameter input screen}

8. Day/Date Calculations
You can calculate the number of days between two dates, or you can determine what date
comes a specific number of days before or after another date.

Press (DAYS) from the Financial 2 screen to display the
following input screen for day/date calculation.
(E)(DAYS)
d1.......... date 1
d2.......... date 2
D .......... number of days
To input a date, first highlight d1 or d2. Pressing a number
key to input the month causes an input screen like the one
shown below to appear on the display.

Input the month, day, and year, pressing U after each.
After configuring the parameters, use one of the function menus noted below to perform the
corresponding calculation.
• {PRD} … {number of days from d1 to d2 (d2 – d1)}
• {d1+D} … {d1 plus a number of days (d1 + D)}
• {d1–D} … {d1 minus a number of days (d1 – D)}
• An error (Ma ERROR) occurs if parameters are not configured correctly.
Use the following function menu to maneuver between calculation result screens.
• {REPT} … {parameter input screen}
• The Setup screen can be used to specify either a 365-day or 360-day year for financial
calculations. Day/date calculations are also performed in accordance with the current setting
for number of days in the year, but the following calculations cannot be performed when the
360-day year is set. Attempting to do so causes an error.
(Date) + (Number of Days)
(Date) – (Number of Days)
• The allowable calculation range is January 1, 1901 to December 31, 2099.

• 360-day Date Mode Calculations
The following describes how calculations are processed when 360 is specified for the Date
Mode item in the Setup screen.
• If d1 is day 31 of a month, d1 is treated as day 30 of that month is used.
• If d2 is day 31 of a month, d2 is treated as day 1 of the following month, unless d1 is day 30.
7-11

9. Depreciation
Depreciation lets you calculate the amount that a business expense can be offset by income
(depreciated) over a given year.
• This calculator supports the following four types of depreciation calculations.
straight-line (SL), fixed-percentage (FP), sum-of-the-years’-digits (SYD), or declining-balance
(DB).
• Any one of the above methods can be used to calculate depreciation for a specified period.
A table and graph of the depreciated amount and undepreciated amount in year j.

S Straight-Line Method (SL)
SLj
n
PV
FV
j

depreciation charge for the jth year
useful life
original cost (basis)
residual book value
year for calculation of depreciation
cost
Y−1 : number of months in the first year
of depreciation

(PV–FV ) {Y–1}
S
n
12
(PV–FV )
SLj =
n
(PV–FV ) 12–{Y–1}
S
SLn+1 =
n
12

SL1 =

({Y–1}x12)

:
:
:
:
:

S Fixed-Percentage Method (FP)
FPj : depreciation charge for the jth year
RDVj : remaining depreciable value at the
end of jth year
I% : depreciation ratio

I% {Y–1}
FP1 = PV s 100 s 12
I%
FPj = (RDVj–1 )9) s
100
FPn+1 = RDVn ({Y–1}x12)
RDV1 = PV – FV – FP1
RDVj = RDVj–1 – FPj
RDVn+1 = 0

({Y–1}x12)

S Sum-of-the-Years’-Digits Method (SYD)
{Y–1}
n (n 1)
n' = n –
2
12
(n' integer part +1)(n' integer part + 2*n' fraction part )
Z' =
2
{Y–1}
n
s
(PV – FV )
SYD1 =
Z
12
n'– M2
SYDj = (
( jx1)
)(PV – FV – SYD1)
Z'
n'– (n 1)2
12–{Y–1}
({Y–1}x12)
SYDn+1 = (
)(PV – FV – SYD1) s
Z'
12

Z=

RDV1 = PV – FV – SYD1

SYDj : depreciation charge for the jth year
RDVj : remaining depreciable value at the
end of jth year

RDVj = RDVj –1 – SYDj
7-12

S Declining-Balance Method (DB)
DB1 = PV s

DBj : depreciation charge for the jth year
RDVj : remaining depreciable value at the
end of jth year
I% : depreciation factor

I%
Y–1
s
12
100n

RDV1 = PV – FV – DB1
DBj = (RDVj–1 + FV ) s

I%
100n

RDVj = RDVj–1 – DBj
DBn +1 = RDVn

({Y–1}x12)

RDVn+1 = 0

({Y–1}x12)

Press (DEPR) from the Financial 2 screen to display the following input screen for
depreciation calculation.
(E)(DEPR)

n ............ useful life
I% ......... depreciation ratio in the case of the fixed percent (FP) method, depreciation factor in
the case of the declining balance (DB) method

PV ......... original cost (basis)
FV ......... residual book value
j ............. year for calculation of depreciation cost
Y−1........ number of months in the first year of depreciation
After configuring the parameters, use one of the function menus noted below to perform the
corresponding calculation.
• {SL} … {Calculate depreciation for year j using the straight-line method}
• {FP} ... {FP} ....{Calculate depreciation for year j using the fixed-percentage method}
{I%} .....{Calculate depreciation ratio}
• {SYD} … {Calculate depreciation for year j using the sum-of-the-years’-digits method}
• {DB} … {Calculate depreciation for year j calculated using the declining-balance method}
Calculation Result Output Examples

{SYD}

{SYD} − {TABL}
7-13

{SYD} − {GRPH}

An error (Ma ERROR) occurs if parameters are not configured correctly.
Use the following function menu to maneuver between calculation result screens.
• {REPT} … {parameter input screen}
• {TABL} … {displays table}
• {GRPH} … {draws graph}

10. Bond Calculations
Bond calculation lets you calculate the purchase price or the annual yield of a bond.
Before starting bond calculations, use the Setup screen to configure “Date Mode” and
“Periods/YR.” settings (page 7-1).

S Formula
D
A

B

Redemption date (d2)

Issue date

Purchase date (d1)

Coupon Payment dates

PRC : price per $100 of face value
CPN : annual coupon rate (%)
YLD : yield to maturity (%)
A
: accrued days
0 : number of coupon payments per year (1=annual, 2=semi annual)
N
: number of coupon payments between settlement date and maturity date
RDB : redemption price or call price per $100 of face value
D : number of days in coupon period where settlement occurs
B
: number of days from settlement date until next coupon payment date = D − A
,17 : accrued interest
&67 : price including interest
S Price per $100 of face value (PRC)
• For one or fewer coupon period to redemption

RDV +
PRC = –
1+ (

B
D

×

CPN
M

YLD/100
M

7-14

+(
)

A
D

×

CPN
M

)

• For more than one coupon period to redemption

CPN
RDV

PRC = –
(1+
,17 –

A
D

s

YLD/100
0
CPN
0

0

N

)

(N–1+B/D )

– 3
k=1

(1+

YLD/100
0

A

+
)

D

(k–1+B/D )

s

CPN
0

&67 35&+ ,17

S Annual Yield (YLD)
YLD is calculated using Newton’s Method.
Press (BOND) from the Financial 2 screen to display the following input screen for Bond
calculation.
(E)(BOND)

d1.......... purchase date (month, date, year)
d2.......... redemption date (month, date, year)

RDV ...... redemption price per $100 of face value
CPN ...... coupon rate
PRC ...... price per $100 of face value
YLD ...... annual yield
After configuring the parameters, use one of the function menus noted below to perform the
corresponding calculation.
• {PRC} … {Calculate the bond’s price (PRC), accrued interest (INT), and cost of bond (CST)}
• {YLD} … {Calculate the yield to maturity}
Calculation Result Output Examples

{PRC}

{PRC} − {GRPH}

{PRC} − {MEMO}

An error (Ma ERROR) occurs if parameters are not configured correctly.
Use the following function menu to maneuver between calculation result screens.
• {REPT} … {parameter input screen}
• {GRPH} … {draws graph}
• {MEMO} … {displays numbers of days used in calculations}
7-15

MEMO Screen
• The following describes the meaning of the MEMO screen display items.

PRD ... number of days from d1 to d2
N......... number of coupon payments between settlement date and maturity date
A ......... accrued days
B ......... number of days from settlement date until next coupon payment date (D−A)
D ........ number of days in coupon period where settlement occurs
• Each press of U while the MEMO screen is displayed cycles the Coupon Payment Day
(CPD) display sequentially from the redemption year up to the purchase year. This is true
only when the “Date Mode” setting on the “Setup” screen is “365”.

11. Financial Calculations Using Functions
Important!
• The following operations cannot be performed on the fx-7400Gɉ.
You can use special functions in the RUN • MAT mode or PRGM mode to perform calculations
that are the same as the TVM mode financial calculations.
Example

To calculate the total interest and principal paid for a 2-year (730-day)
$300 loan at a simple annual interest rate of 5%. Use a Date Mode
setting of 365.

1. From the Main Menu, enter the RUN • MAT mode.
2. Press the keys as follows.
*(E)(E)(E)(TVM)
(SMPL)(SI)FB?D\
B??U
(SFV)FB?DB??\
U

• Use the TVM mode Setup screen (K(SET UP)) to change the Date Mode setting.
You also can use special commands (DateMode365, DateMode360) in the PRGM mode to
change the setting.
• For details about what you can do with the financial calculation functions and their syntax,
see “Performing Financial Calculations in a Program” (page 8-35).
7-16

Chapter 8 Programming
1. Basic Programming Steps
Commands and calculations are executed sequentially, just like manual calculation multistatements.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the PRGM mode. When you do, a program list appears on the
display.
Selected program area
(use D and A to move)

Files are listed in the alphabetic sequence of their names.
2. Register a file name.
3. Input the program.
4. Run the program.
• The values to the right of the program list indicate the number of bytes used by each
program.
• A file name can be up to eight characters long.
• The following are the characters you can use in a file name: A through Z, r, Q, spaces, [, ],
{, }, ’, ”, ~, 0 through 9, ., +, –, ×, ÷
• Registering a file name uses 32 bytes of memory.
To calculate the surface area (cm2) and volume (cm3) of three regular
octahedrons when the length of one side is 7, 10, and 15 cm,
respectively

Example

Store the calculation formula under the file name OCTA.
The following are the formulas used for calculating surface area S and volume
V of a regular octahedron for which the length of one side A is known.
A

'
2
S = 2'
3 A2, V = –––– A3
3

 K PRGM
 (NEW)H(O)((C)(T)T(A)U
 )(PRGM)(?)??T(A)(E)(:)
A	V()B	?T(A)V(E)(E)(<)
V()AB	?T(A),B
))
 (EXE) or U
FU(Value of A)
U

S when A = 7
V when A = 7

8-1

8

UU
@?U
U

S when A = 10
V when A = 10

UU
@DU
U*

1

S when A = 15
V when A = 15

*1 Pressing U while the program’s final result is on the display exits the program.
• You can also run a program while in the RUN • MAT (or RUN) mode by inputting: Prog "" U.
• Pressing U while the final result of a program executed using this method is on the display
re-executes the program.
• An error occurs if the program specified by Prog "" cannot be found.

2. PRGM Mode Function Keys
• {NEW} ... {new program}

S When you are registering a file name
• {RUN}/{BASE} ... {general calculation}/{number base} program input
• {0} ... {password registration}
• {SYBL} ... {symbol menu}

S When you are inputting a program —— (RUN) … default
• {TOP}/{BTM} ... {top}/{bottom} of program
• {SRC} ... {search}
• {MENU} ... {mode menu}
• {STAT}/{MAT}*/{LIST}/{GRPH}/{DYNA}*/{TABL}/{RECR}*
... {statistic}/{matrix}/{list}/{graph}/{Dynamic Graph}/{Table}/{recursion} menu
• {Aja} ... {toggles between upper-case and lower-case input}
• {CHAR} ... {displays a screen for selecting various mathematical symbols, special symbols,
and accented characters}
* Not included on the fx-7400GII
• Pressing )(PRGM) displays the following program (PRGM) menu.
• {COM} ... {program command menu}
• {CTL} ... {program control command menu}
• {JUMP} ... {jump command menu}
• {?}/{<} ... {input}/{output} command
• {CLR}/{DISP} ... {clear}/{display} command menu
• {REL} ... {conditional jump relational operator menu}
8-2

• {I/O} ... {I/O control/transfer command menu}
• {:} ... {multi-statement command}
• {STR} ... {string command}
See “Command Reference” on page 8-7 for full details on each of these commands.
• Pressing K(SET UP) displays the mode command menu shown below.
• {ANGL}/{COOR}/{GRID}/{AXES}/{LABL}/{DISP}/{S/L}/{DRAW}/{DERV}/{BACK}/{FUNC}/
{SIML}/{S-WIN}/{LIST}/{LOCS}*/{T-VAR}/{3DSP}*/{RESID}/{CPLX}/{FRAC}/{Y • SPD}*/
{DATE}*/{PMT}*/{PRD}*/{INEQ}/{SIMP}/{Q1Q3}
* Not included on the fx-7400GII
See “Setup Screen Function Key Menus” on page 1-26 for details about each of these
commands.

S When you are inputting a program —— (BASE)*1
• {TOP}/{BTM}/{SRC}
• {MENU}
• {d~o} ... {decimal}/{hexadecimal}/{binary}/{octal} value input
• {LOG} ... {bitwise operator}
• {DISP} ... conversion of displayed value to {decimal}/{hexadecimal}/{binary}/{octal}
• {Aja}/{SYBL}
• Pressing )(PRGM) displays the following PRGM (PROGRAM) menu.
• {Prog} ... {program recall}
• {JUMP}/{?}/{<}
• {REL} ... {conditional jump relational operator menu}
• {:} ... {multi-statement command}
• Pressing K(SET UP) displays the mode command menu shown below.
• {Dec}/{Hex}/{Bin}/{Oct}
*1 Programs input after pressing (BASE) are indicated by B to the right of the file name.
• {EXE}/{EDIT} ... program {execute}/{edit}
• {NEW} ... {new program}
• {DEL}/{DEL • A} ... {specific program}/{all program} delete
• {SRC}/{REN} ... file name {search}/{change}

3. Editing Program Contents
I Debugging a Program
A problem in a program that keeps the program from running correctly is called a “bug”,
and the process of eliminating such problems is called “debugging”. Either of the following
symptoms indicates that your program contains bugs that require debugging.
8-3

• Error messages appearing when the program is run
• Results that are not within your expectations

S To eliminate bugs that cause error messages
An error message, like the one shown to the right, appears
whenever something illegal occurs during program execution.

When such a message appears, press ) to display the place in the program where the
error was caused. The cursor will be flashing at the location of the problem. Check the “Error
Message Table” (page A-1) for steps you should take to correct the situation.
• Note that pressing ) does not display the location of the error if the program is password
protected.

S To eliminate bugs that cause bad results
If your program produces results that are not what you normally expect, check the contents of
the program and make necessary changes.
(TOP) ... Moves the cursor to the top of the
program
(BTM)... Moves the cursor to the bottom of
the program

I Searching for Data Inside a Program
Example

To search for the letter “A” inside the program named OCTA

1. Recall the program.
2. Press (SRC) and input the data you want to find.

(SRC)
?T(A)

3. Press U to begin the search. The contents of the
program appear on the screen with the cursor located at
the first instance of the data you specified.*1

8-4

4. Each press of U or (SRC) causes the cursor to jump
to the next instance of the data you specified.*2
*1 The message “Not Found” appears when the search data you specify cannot be found in the
program.
*2 If there are no more instances of the data you specified, the search operation ends.
• You cannot specify the newline symbol (=) or display command (<) for the search data.
• Once the contents of the program are on the screen, you can use the cursor keys to move
the cursor to another location before searching for the next instance of the data. Only the
part of the program starting from the current cursor location is searched when you press U.
• Once the search finds an instance of your data, inputting characters or moving the cursor
causes the search operation to be cancelled.
• If you make a mistake while inputting characters to search for, press
and re-input from the beginning.

to clear your input

4. File Management
I Searching for a File
S To find a file using initial character search
Example

To use initial character search to recall the program named OCTA

1. While the program list is on the display, press (E)(SRC) and input the initial
characters of the file you want to find.
(E)(SRC)
H(O)((C)(T)
2. Press U to search.
• The name that starts with the characters you input
highlights.
• If there is no program whose file name starts with the characters you input, the message
“Not Found” appears on the display. If this happens, press ) to clear the error message.

I Editing a File Name
1. While the program list is on the display, use D and A to move the highlighting to the file
whose name you want to edit and then press (E)(REN).
2. Make any changes you want.
3. Press U to register the new name and return to the program list.
The program list is resorted according to the changes you made in the file name.
• If the modifications you make result in a file name that is identical to the name of a program
already stored in memory, the message “Already Exists” appears. When this happens, you
can perform either of the following two operations to correct the situation.
8-5

- Press ) to clear the error and return to the file name editing screen.
- Press

to clear the input file name and input a new one.

I Deleting a Program
S To delete a specific program
1. While the program list is on the display, use D and A to move the highlighting to the
name of the program you want to delete.
2. Press (DEL).
3. Press (YES) to delete the selected program or (NO) to abort the operation without
deleting anything.

S To delete all programs
1. While the program list is on the display, press (DEL • A).
2. Press (YES) to delete all the programs in the list or (NO) to abort the operation
without deleting anything.
• You also can delete all programs by entering the MEMORY mode from the Main Menu. See
“Chapter 11 Memory Manager” for details.

I Registering a password
When inputting a program, you can protect it with a password that limits access to the program
contents to those who know the password.
• You do not need to input the password to run a program.
• The password input procedure is identical to that used for file name input.
1. While the program list is on the display, press (NEW) and input the file name of the new
program file.
2. Press (0) and then input the password.
3. Press U to register the file name and password. Now you can input the contents of the
program file.
4. After inputting the program, press )(QUIT) to
exit the program file and return to the program list.
Files that are password protected are indicated by an
asterisk to the right of the file name.

I Recalling a Password Protected Program
1. In the program list, use D and A to move the highlighting to the name of the program you
want to recall.
2. Press (EDIT).
3. Input the password and press U to recall the program.
• Inputting the wrong password when recalling a password protected program causes the
message “Mismatch” to appear.
8-6

5. Command Reference
I Command Index
Break....................................................8-10

RclCapt ................................................8-21

CloseComport38k ................................8-17

Receive( ...............................................8-17

ClrGraph ............................................. 8-14

Receive38k ..........................................8-18

ClrList ..................................................8-14

Return ..................................................8-11

ClrMat ..................................................8-14

Send( ...................................................8-17

ClrText .................................................8-14

Send38k ...............................................8-18

DispF-Tbl, DispR-Tbl ...........................8-14

Stop .................................................... 8-11

Do~LpWhile .........................................8-10

StrCmp(................................................8-19

DrawDyna ........................................... 8-14

StrInv( ..................................................8-19

DrawFTG-Con, DrawFTG-Plt ..............8-15

StrJoin(.................................................8-19

DrawGraph ..........................................8-15

StrLeft( .................................................8-19

DrawR-Con, DrawR-Plt .......................8-15

StrLen( .................................................8-19

DrawR3-Con, DrawR3-Plt ...................8-15

StrLwr( .................................................8-19

DrawStat ..............................................8-15

StrMid( .................................................8-20

DrawWeb ............................................ 8-15

StrRight( ...............................................8-20

Dsz ......................................................8-12

StrRotate(.............................................8-20

Exp(......................................................8-19

StrShift( ................................................8-20

ExpStr( .............................................8-19

StrSrc( ..................................................8-20

For~To~(Step~)Next ..............................8-9

StrUpr( .................................................8-20

Getkey .................................................8-16

While~WhileEnd ..................................8-10

Goto~Lbl ............................................. 8-12

? (Input Command) ................................8-8

If~Then~(Else~)IfEnd ............................8-9

< (Output Command) ...........................8-8

Isz ........................................................8-12

: (Multi-statement Command) ................8-8

Locate ..................................................8-17

= (Carriage Return) .............................8-8

Menu ....................................................8-13

’ (Comment Text Delimiter) ....................8-8

OpenComport38k ................................8-17

2 (Jump Code) ...................................8-13

Prog .....................................................8-11

=, x, >, <, r, b (Relational Operators) ..8-18

PlotPhase.............................................8-16

+ ...........................................................8-20

The following are conventions that are used in this section when describing the various
commands.
Boldface Text ............. Actual commands and other items that always must be input are
shown in boldface.
{Curly Brackets} ........... Curly brackets are used to enclose a number of items, one of which
must be selected when using a command. Do not input the curly
brackets when inputting a command.
[Square Brackets] ........ Square brackets are used to enclose items that are optional. Do not
input the square brackets when inputting a command.
Numeric Expressions ... Numeric expressions (such as 10, 10 + 20, A) indicate constants,
calculations, numeric constants, etc.
Alpha Characters ......... Alpha characters indicate literal strings (such as AB).
8-7

I Basic Operation Commands
? (Input Command)
Function: Prompts for input of values for assignment to variables during program execution.
Syntax: ? m , "" ? m
Example: ? m A=
Description:
• This command momentarily interrupts program execution and prompts for input of a value
or expression for assignment to a variable. If you do not specify a prompt, execution of this
command causes “?” to appear indicating the calculator is standing by for input. If a prompt
is specified, “?” appears to prompt input. Up to 255 bytes of text can be used for a
prompt.
• Input in response to the input command must be a value or an expression, and the
expression cannot be a multi-statement.
• You can specify a list name, matrix name, string name, function memory (fn), graph (Yn), etc.
as a variable name.
< (Output Command)
Function: Displays an intermediate result during program execution.
Description:
• This command momentarily interrupts program execution and displays alpha character text
or the result of the calculation immediately before the command.
• The output command should be used at locations where you would normally press the U
key during a manual calculation.
: (Multi-statement Command)
Function: Connects two statements for sequential execution without stopping.
Description:
• Unlike the output command (<), statements connected with the multi-statement command
are executed non-stop.
• The multi-statement command can be used to link two calculation expressions or two
commands.
• You can also use a carriage return indicated by = in place of the multi-statement command.
= (Carriage Return)
Function: Connects two statements for sequential execution without stopping.
Description:
• Operation of the carriage return is identical to that of the multi-statement command.
• You can create a blank line in a program by inputting a carriage return only. Using a carriage
return in place of the multi-statement command makes the displayed program easier to read.
’ (Comment Text Delimiter)
Function: Indicates comment text inserted inside a program.
Description: Anything following the apostrophe is treated as non-executable comment text.
8-8

I Program Commands (COM)
If~Then~(Else~)IfEnd
Function: The Then-statement is executed only when the If-condition is true (non-zero). The
Else-statement is executed when the If-condition is false (0). The IfEnd-statement is always
executed following either the Then-statement or Else-statement.
Syntax:
If


numeric expression

_
:
^

_
:
^

Then 

Else 

_
:
^



_
:
^



_
:
^

IfEnd

Parameters: condition, numeric expression
Description:
(1) If ~ Then ~ IfEnd
• When the condition is true, execution proceeds with the Then-statement and then
continues with the statement following IfEnd.
• When the condition is false, execution jumps to the statement following IfEnd.
(2) If ~ Then ~ Else ~ IfEnd
• When the condition is true, execution proceeds with the Then-statement and then jumps
to the statement following IfEnd.
• When the condition is false, execution jumps to the Else-statement and then continues
with the statement following IfEnd.
For~To~(Step~)Next
Function: This command repeats everything between the For-statement and the Nextstatement. The starting value is assigned to the control variable with the first execution, and
the value of the control variable is changed according to the step value with each execution.
Execution continues until the value of the control variable exceeds the ending value.
Syntax: For  m  To 
Step 

_
:
^

Next

Parameters:
• control variable name: A to Z
• starting value: value or expression that produces a value (i.e. sin x, A, etc.)
• ending value: value or expression that produces a value (i.e. sin x, A, etc.)
• step value: numeric value (default: 1)
Description:
• The default step value is 1.
• Making the starting value less than the ending value and specifying a positive step value
causes the control variable to be incremented with each execution. Making the starting
value greater than the ending value and specifying a negative step value causes the control
variable to be decremented with each execution.
8-9

Do~LpWhile
Function: This command repeats specific commands as long as its condition is true (nonzero).
Syntax:
Do

_
:
^



_
:
^

LpWhile


numeric expression

Parameters: expression
Description:
• This command repeats the commands contained in the loop as long as its condition is true
(non-zero). When the condition becomes false (0), execution proceeds from the statement
following the LpWhile-statement.
• Since the condition comes after the LpWhile-statement, the condition is tested (checked)
after all of the commands inside the loop are executed.
While~WhileEnd
Function: This command repeats specific commands as long as its condition is true (nonzero).
Syntax:
While


numeric expression

_
:
^



_
:
^

WhileEnd

Parameters: expression
Description:
• This command repeats the commands contained in the loop as long as its condition is true
(non-zero). When the condition becomes false (0), execution proceeds from the statement
following the WhileEnd-statement.
• Since the condition comes after the While-statement, the condition is tested (checked) before
the commands inside the loop are executed.

I Program Control Commands (CTL)
Break
Function: This command breaks execution of a loop and continues from the next command
following the loop.
Syntax: Break=
Description:
• This command breaks execution of a loop and continues from the next command following
the loop.
• This command can be used to break execution of a For-statement, Do-statement, and Whilestatement.

8-10

Prog
Function: This command specifies execution of another program as a subroutine. In the
RUN • MAT (or RUN) mode, this command executes a new program.
Syntax: Prog "file name"=
Example: Prog "ABC"=
Description:
• Even when this command is located inside of a loop, its execution immediately breaks the
loop and launches the subroutine.
• This command can be used as many times as necessary inside of a main routine to call up
independent subroutines to perform specific tasks.
• A subroutine can be used in multiple locations in the same main routine, or it can be called
up by any number of main routines.
Main Routine
A

Subroutines
D

Prog "D"
Prog "C"

C

E

Prog "E"

Prog "I"

Level 1 Level 2

I

J

Prog "J"

Level 3

Level 4

• Calling up a subroutine causes it to be executed from the beginning. After execution of the
subroutine is complete, execution returns to the main routine, continuing from the statement
following the Prog command.
• A Goto~Lbl command inside of a subroutine is valid inside of that subroutine only. It cannot
be used to jump to a label outside of the subroutine.
• If a subroutine with the file name specified by the Prog command does not exist, an error
occurs.
• In the RUN • MAT (or RUN) mode, inputting the Prog command and pressing U launches
the program specified by the command.
Return
Function: This command returns from a subroutine.
Syntax: Return=
Description: Execution of the Return command inside a main routine causes execution of
the program to stop. Execution of the Return command within a subroutine terminates the
subroutine and returns to the program from which the subroutine was jumped to.
Stop
Function: This command terminates execution of a program.
Syntax: Stop=
Description:
• This command terminates program execution.
• Execution of this command inside of a loop terminates program execution without an error
being generated.
8-11

I Jump Commands (JUMP)
Dsz
Function: This command is a count jump that decrements the value of a control variable by 1,
and then jumps if the current value of the variable is zero.
Syntax:
Variable Value x 0

_
Dsz  :  :
^
Variable Value = 0



Parameters: variable name: A to Z, r, Q
[Example] Dsz B : Decrements the value assigned to variable B by 1.
Description: This command decrements the value of a control variable by 1, and then tests
(checks) it. If the current value is non-zero, execution continues with the next statement. If the
current value is zero, execution jumps to the statement following the multi-statement command
(:), display command (<), or carriage return (=).
Goto~Lbl
Function: This command performs an unconditional jump to a specified location.
Syntax: Goto  ~ Lbl 
Parameters: label name: value (0 to 9), variable (A to Z, r, Q)
Description:
• This command consists of two parts: Goto n (where n is a parameter as described above)
and Lbl n (where n is the parameter referenced by Goto n). This command causes program
execution to jump to the Lbl-statement whose n parameter matches that specified by the
Goto-statement.
• This command can be used to loop back to the beginning of a program or to jump to any
location within the program.
• This command can be used in combination with conditional jumps and count jumps.
• If there is no Lbl-statement whose value matches that specified by the Goto-statement, an
error occurs.
Isz
Function: This command is a count jump that increments the value of a control variable by 1,
and then jumps if the current value of the variable is zero.
Syntax:
Variable Value x 0

_
Isz  :  :
^
Variable Value = 0



Parameters: variable name: A to Z, r, Q
[Example] Isz A : Increments the value assigned to variable A by 1.

8-12

Description: This command increments the value of a control variable by 1, and then tests
(checks) it. If the current value is non-zero, execution continues with the next statement. If the
current value is zero, execution jumps to the statement following the multi-statement command
(:), display command (<), or carriage return (=).
 (Jump Code)
Function: This code is used to set up conditions for a conditional jump. The jump is executed
whenever the conditions are false.
Syntax:
True

_
     :
^
False



Parameters:
• left side/right side: variable (A to Z, r, Q), numeric constant, variable expression (such as:
A × 2)
• relational operator: =, x, >, <, r, b (page 8-18)
Description:
• The conditional jump compares the contents of two variables or the results of two
expressions, and a decision is made whether or not to execute the jump based on the results
of the comparison.
• If the comparison returns a true result, execution continues with the statement following
the  command. If the comparison returns a false result, execution jumps to the statements
following the multi-statement command (:), display command (<), or carriage return (=).
Menu
Function: Creates a branching menu in a program.
Syntax: Menu "", "", ,
"" ,, ... , "", 
Parameters: value (0 to 9), variable (A to Z, r, Q)
Description:
• Each "" , part is a branch set, and the entire
branch set must be included.
• From two to nine branching sets can be included. An error occurs when there is only one or
more than nine branching sets.
• Selecting a branch on the menu while the program is running jumps to the same type of label
(Lbl n) as the one used in combination with the Goto command. Specifying “"OK", 3” for the
“"", ” part specifies a jump to Lbl 3.
Example: Lbl 2=
Menu "IS IT DONE?", "OK", 1, "EXIT", 2=
Lbl 1=
"IT’S DONE !"

8-13

I Clear Commands (CLR)
ClrGraph
Function: This command clears the graph screen.
Syntax: ClrGraph=
Description: This command clears the graph screen during program execution.
ClrList
Function: This command deletes list data.
Syntax: ClrList 
ClrList
Parameters: list name: 1 to 26, Ans
Description: This command deletes the data in the list specified by “list name”. All list data is
deleted if nothing is specified for “list name”.
(Not included on the fx-7400GII)

ClrMat
Function: This command deletes matrix data.
Syntax: ClrMat 
ClrMat
Parameters: matrix name: A to Z, Ans

Description: This command deletes the data in the matrix specified by “matrix name”. All
matrix data is deleted if nothing is specified for “matrix name”.
ClrText
Function: This command clears the text screen.
Syntax: ClrText=
Description: This command clears text from the screen during program execution.

I Display Commands (DISP)
DispF-Tbl, DispR-Tbl*

* (Not included on the fx-7400GII)

No parameters

Function: These commands display numeric tables.
Description:
• These commands generate numeric tables during program execution in accordance with
conditions defined within the program.
• DispF-Tbl generates a function table, while DispR-Tbl generates a recursion table.
DrawDyna

(Not included on the fx-7400GII)

No parameters

Function: This command executes a Dynamic Graph draw operation.
Description: This command draws a Dynamic Graph during program execution in accordance
with the drawing conditions defined within the program.
8-14

DrawFTG-Con, DrawFTG-Plt

No parameters

Function: This command uses values in a generated table to graph a function.
Description:
• This command draws a function graph in accordance with conditions defined within the
program.
• DrawFTG-Con produces a connect type graph, while DrawFTG-Plt produces a plot type
graph.
DrawGraph

No parameters

Function: This command draws a graph.
Description: This command draws a graph in accordance with the drawing conditions defined
within the program.
DrawR-Con, DrawR-Plt

(Not included on the fx-7400GII)

No parameters

Function: These commands graph recursion expressions, with an (bn or cn) as the vertical axis
and n as the horizontal axis.
Description:
• These commands graph recursion expressions in accordance with conditions defined within
the program, with an (bn or cn) as the vertical axis and n as the horizontal axis.
• DrawR-Con produces a connect type graph, while DrawR-Plt produces a plot type graph.
DrawR3-Con, DrawR3-Plt

(Not included on the fx-7400GII)

No parameters

Function: These commands graph recursion expressions, with 3an (3bn or 3cn) as the vertical
axis and n as the horizontal axis.
Description:
• These commands graph recursion expressions in accordance with conditions defined within
the program, with 3an (3bn or 3cn) as the vertical axis and n as the horizontal axis.
• DrawR3-Con produces a connect type graph, while DrawR3-Plt produces a plot type graph.
DrawStat
Function: This draws a statistical graph.
Syntax: See “Using Statistical Calculations and Graphs in a Program” on page 8-25.
Description: This command draws a statistical graph in accordance with conditions defined
within the program.
(Not included on the fx-7400GII)

DrawWeb

Function: This command graphs convergence/divergence of a recursion expression (WEB
graph).
Syntax: DrawWeb [, ]=
Example: DrawWeb an+1 (bn+1 or cn+1), 5=
Description:
• This command graphs convergence/divergence of a recursion expression (WEB graph).
• Omitting the number of lines specification automatically specifies the default value 30.
8-15

(Not included on the fx-7400GII)

PlotPhase

Function: Graphs a phase plot based on numeric sequences that correspond to the x-axis
and y-axis.
Syntax: PlotPhase , 
Description:
• Only the following commands can be input for each argument to specify the recursion table.

an, bn, cn, an+1, bn+1, cn+1, an+2, bn+2, cn+2, 3an, 3bn, 3cn, 3an+1, 3bn+1, 3cn+1, 3an+2, 3bn+2, 3cn+2
• A memory ERROR occurs if you specify a numeric sequence name that does not have
values stored in the recursion table.
Example: PlotPhase 3bn+1, 3an+1
Graphs a phase plot using 3bn+1 for the x-axis and 3an+1 for the y-axis.

I Input/Output Commands (I/O)
Getkey
Function: This command returns the code that corresponds to the last key pressed.
Syntax: Getkey=
Description:
• This command returns the code that corresponds to the last key pressed.

79

69

59

49

78

68

58

48

77

67

57

47

76

66

56

46

36

26

75

65

55

45

35

25

29

39
28
38

27
37

74

64

54

44

73

63

53

43

33

72

62

52

42

32

71

61

51

41

31

• A value of zero is returned if no key was pressed previous to executing this command.
• This command can be used inside of a loop.

8-16

Locate
Function: This command displays alpha-numeric characters at a specific location on the text
screen.
Syntax: Locate , , 
Locate , , 
Locate , , ""
[Example] Locate 1, 1, "AB"=
Parameters:
• line number: number from 1 to 7
• column number: number from 1 to 21
• value and numeric expression
• string: character string
Description:
• This command displays values (including variable contents) or text at a specific location on
the text screen. If there is a calculation input, that calculation result is displayed.
• The line is designated by a value from 1 to 7, while the column is designated by a value from
1 to 21.
(1, 1) 

(21, 1)

(1, 7) 

(21, 7)

Example: Cls=
Locate 7, 1, "CASIO FX"
This program displays the text “CASIO FX” in the center of the screen.
• In some cases, the ClrText command should be executed before running the above program.
Receive( / Send(
Function: This command receives data from and sends data to a connected device.
Syntax: Receive() / Send()
Description:
• This command receives data from and sends data to a connected device.
• The following types of data can be received (sent) by this command.
• Individual values assigned to variables
• Matrix data (all values - individual values cannot be specified)
• List data (all values - individual values cannot be specified)
OpenComport38k / CloseComport38k
Function: Opens and closes the 3-pin COM port (serial).
Description: See the Receive38k/Send38k command below.

8-17

Receive38k / Send38k
Function: Executes data send and receive at a data rate of 38 kbps.
Syntax: Send38k 
Receive38k




Description:
• The OpenComport38k command must be executed before this command is executed.
• The CloseComport38k command must be executed after this command is executed.
• If this command is executed when the communication cable is not connected, program
execution will continue without generating an error.

I Conditional Jump Relational Operators (REL)
=, x, >, <, r, b
Function: These relational operators are used in combination with the conditional jump
command.
Syntax:   
Parameters:
• left side/right side: variable (A to Z, r, Q), numeric constant, variable expression (such as:
A s 2)
• relational operator: =, x, >, <, r, b

I Strings
A string is a series of characters enclosed in double quotes. In a program, strings are used
to specify display text. A string made up of numbers (like "123") or an expression (like "x–1")
cannot be processed as a calculation.
To display a string at a specific location on the screen, use the Locate command (page 8-17).
• To include double quotes (") or a backslash (\) in a string, put a backslash (\) in front of the
double quotes (") or backslash (\).
Example 1: To include Japan: “Tokyo” in a string
"Japan:\"Tokyo\""
Example 2: To include main\abc in a string
"main\\abc"
You can input a backslash from the menu that appears when you press (CHAR)(SYBL)
in the PRGM mode, or from the String category of the catalog that appears when you press
C(CATALOG).
• You can assign strings to string memory (Str 1 through Str 20). For details about strings, see
“String Memory” (page 2-7).
• You can use the “+” command (page 8-20) to connect strings inside of an argument.
• A function or command within a string function (Exp(, StrCmp(, etc.) is treated as a single
character. For example, the “sin” function is treated as a single character.

8-18

Exp(
Function: Converts a string to an expression, and executes the expression.
Syntax: Exp(""[)]
ExpStr(
Function: Converts a graph expression to a string and assigns it to the specified variable.
Syntax: ExpStr(, [)]
Description: A graph expression (Yn, r, Xt, Yt, X), recursion formula (an, an+1, an+2, bn, bn+1, bn+2,
cn, cn+1, cn+2), or function memory (fn) can be used as the first argument ().
StrCmp(
Function: Compares “” and “” (character code comparison).
Syntax: StrCmp("", ""[)]
Description: Compares two strings and returns one of the following values.
Returns 0 when “” = “”.
Returns 1 when “” > “”.
Returns –1 when “” < “”.
Strlnv(
Function: Inverts the sequence of a string.
Syntax: StrInv(""[)]
StrJoin(
Function: Joins “” and “”.
Syntax: StrJoin("", ""[)]
Note: The same result also can be achieved using the “+” command (page 8-20).
StrLeft(
Function: Copies a string up to the nth character from the left.
Syntax: StrLeft("", n[)]

(0  n  9999, n is a natural number)

StrLen(
Function: Returns the length of a string (the number of its characters).
Syntax: StrLen(""[)]
StrLwr(
Function: Converts all the characters of a string to lower case.
Syntax: StrLwr(""[)]

8-19

StrMid(
Function: Extracts from the n-th to the m-th character of a string.
Syntax: StrMid("", n [,m)]

(0  n  9999, n is a natural number)

Description: Omitting “m” will extract from the n-th character to the end of the string.
StrRight(
Function: Copies a string up to the nth character from the right.
Syntax: StrRight("", n[)]

(0  n  9999, n is a natural number)

StrRotate(
Function: Rotates the left side part and right side part of a string at the nth character.
Syntax: StrRotate("", [,n)]

(–9999  n  9999, n is an integer)

Description: Rotation is to the left when “n” is positive, and to the right when “n” is negative.
Omitting “n” uses a default value of +1.
Example: StrRotate("abcde", 2) ........ Returns the string “cdeab”.
StrShift(
Function: Shifts a string left or right n characters.
Syntax: StrShift("", [,n)]

(–9999  n  9999, n is an integer)

Description: Shift is to the left when “n” is positive, and to the right when “n” is negative.
Omitting “n” uses a default value of +1.
Example: StrShift("abcde", 2) ........ Returns the string “cde”.
StrSrc(
Function: Searches “” starting from the specified point (nth character from
beginning of string) to determine if it contains the data specified by “”. If the data is
found, this command returns the location of the first character of “”, starting from the
beginning of “”.
Syntax: StrSrc("", ""[,n)]

(0  n  9999, n is a natural number)

Description: Omitting the start point causes the search to start from the beginning of
“”.
StrUpr(
Function: Converts all the characters of a string to upper case.
Syntax: StrUpr(""[)]
+
Function: Joins “” and “”.
Syntax: ""+""
Example: "abc"+"de"mStr 1 .......... Assigns “abcde” to Str 1.

8-20

I Other
RclCapt
Function: Displayed the contents specified by the capture memory number.
Syntax: RclCapt 

(capture memory number: 1 to 20)

6. Using Calculator Functions in Programs
I Text Display
You can include text in a program by simply enclosing it between double quotation marks.
Such text appears on the display during program execution, which means you can add labels
to input prompts and results.
Program

Display

"CASIO"

CASIO

?mX

?

"X =" ? m X

X=?

• If the text is followed by a calculation formula, be sure to insert a display command (<)
between the text and calculation.
• Inputting more than 21 characters causes the text to move down to the next line. The screen
scrolls automatically if the text exceeds 21 characters.
• You can specify up to 255 bytes of text for a comment.

I Using Matrix Row Operations in a Program

(Not available on the fx-7400GII)

These commands let you manipulate the rows of a matrix in a program.
• For this program, enter the RUN • MAT mode and then use the Matrix Editor to input the
matrix, and then enter the PRGM mode to input the program.

S To swap the contents of two rows (Swap)
Example 1

To swap the values of Row 2 and Row 3 in the following matrix:

Matrix A =

1

2

3

4

5

6

The following is the syntax to use for this program.
Swap A, 2, 3=
Rows to be swapped
Matrix name

Mat A
8-21

Executing this program produces the following result.

S To calculate a scalar multiplication (>Row)
Example 2

To calculate the product of Row 2 of the matrix in Example 1 and the
scalar 4

The following is the syntax to use for this program.
>Row 4, A, 2=
Row
Matrix name
Multiplier

Mat A

S To calculate a scalar multiplication and add the results to another row
(>Row+)
Example 3

To calculate the product of Row 2 of the matrix in Example 1 and the
scalar 4, then add the result to row 3

The following is the syntax to use for this program.
>Row+ 4, A, 2, 3=
Rows to be added
Row for which scalar multiplication is to be calculated
Matrix name
Multiplier

Mat A

S To add two rows (Row+)
Example 4

To add Row 2 to Row 3 of the matrix in Example 1

The following is the syntax to use for this program.
Row+ A, 2, 3=
Row number to be added to
Row number to be added
Matrix name

Mat A

I Using Graph Functions in a Program
You can incorporate graph functions into a program to draw complex graphs and to overlay
graphs on top of each other. The following shows various types of syntax you need to use
when programming with graph functions.
• V-Window

View Window –5, 5, 1, –5, 5, 1=

• Graph function input

Y = Type= ....................Specifies graph type.
"X2 – 3" m Y1*1=
8-22

• Graph draw operation

DrawGraph=

*1 Input this Y1 with )(GRPH)(Y)@ (displayed as
if you input “Y” with the calculator keys.

). A Syntax ERROR will occur

S Syntax of other graphing functions
• V-Window

View Window , , , , , ,
, , 
StoV-Win ............... area: 1 to 6
RclV-Win ............... area: 1 to 6

• Zoom

Factor , 
ZoomAuto........................................ Non-parameter

• Pict

StoPict ................. area: 1 to 6
numeric expression

RclPict  ............... area: 1 to 6
numeric expression

• Sketch

PlotOn , 
PlotOff , 
PlotChg , 
PxlOn , 
PxlOff , 
PxlChg , 
PxlTest , 
Text , , ""
Text , , 
SketchThick 
SketchBroken 
SketchDot 
SketchNormal 

Tangent , 
Normal , 
Inverse 
Line
F-Line , , ,

Circle , ,

Vertical 
Horizontal 

I Using Dynamic Graph Functions in a Program
Using Dynamic Graph functions in a program makes it possible to perform repeated Dynamic
Graph operations. The following shows how to specify the Dynamic Graph range inside a
program.
8-23

• Dynamic Graph range
1 m D Start=
5 m D End=
1 m D pitch=

I Using Table & Graph Functions in a Program
Table & Graph functions in a program can generate numeric tables and perform graphing
operations. The following shows various types of syntax you need to use when programming
with Table & Graph functions.
• Table range setting

• Graph draw operation

1 m F Start=

Connect type: DrawFTG-Con=

5 m F End=

Plot type: DrawFTG-Plt=

1 m F pitch=
• Numeric table generation
DispF-Tbl=

I Using Recursion Table & Graph Functions in a Program
Incorporating Recursion Table & Graph functions in a program lets you generate numeric
tables and perform graphing operations. The following shows various types of syntax you need
to use when programming with Recursion Table & Graph functions.
• Recursion formula input

an+1 Type= .... Specifies recursion type.
"3an + 2" m an+1=
"4bn + 6" m bn+1=
• Table range setting

• Numeric table generation

1 m R Start=

DispR-Tbl=

5 m R End=

• Graph draw operation

1 m a0=

Connect type: DrawR-Con=, DrawR3-Con=

2 m b0=

Plot type: DrawR-Plt=, DrawR3-Plt=

1 m an Start=

• Statistical convergence/divergence graph
(WEB graph)
DrawWeb an+1, 10=

3 m bn Start=

I Using List Sort Functions in a Program
These functions let you sort data in lists into ascending or descending order.
• Ascending order




SortA (List 1, List 2, List 3)
Lists to be sorted (up to six can be specified)






*

8-24

• Descending order


SortD (List 1, List 2, List 3)
Lists to be sorted (up to six can be specified)




I Using Statistical Calculations and Graphs in a Program
Including statistical calculations and graphing operations in a program lets you calculate and
graph statistical data.

S To set conditions and draw a statistical graph
Following a StatGraph command (“S-Gph1”, “S-Gph2”, or “S-Gph3”), you must specify the
following graph conditions:
• Graph draw/non-draw status (DrawOn/DrawOff)
• Graph Type
• x-axis data location (list name)
• y-axis data location (list name)
• Frequency data location (list name)
• Mark Type
• Pie graph display setting (% or Data)
• Pie graph percentage data storage list specification (None or list name)
• First bar graph data (list name)
• Second and third bar graph data (list name)
• Bar graph orientation (Length or Horizontal)
The graph conditions that are required depends on the graph type. See “Changing Graph
Parameters” (page 6-1).
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a scatter diagram or xyLine graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Scatter, List 1, List 2, 1, Square =
In the case of an xy line graph, replace “Scatter” in the above specification with “xyLine”.
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a normal probability plot.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, NPPlot, List 1, Square =
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a single-variable graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Hist, List 1, List 2 =
The same format can be used for the following types of graphs, by simply replacing “Hist” in
the above specification with the applicable graph type.
Histogram ....................... Hist

Normal Distribution ............. N-Dist
1

Broken Line ......................... Broken

Median Box .................... MedBox*
*1 Outliers:On

Outliers:Off

S-Gph1 DrawOn, MedBox, List 1, 1, 1

8-25

S-Gph1 DrawOn, MedBox, List 1, 1, 0

• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a regression graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Linear, List 1, List 2, List 3 =
The same format can be used for the following types of graphs, by simply replacing “Linear”
in the above specification with the applicable graph type.
Linear Regression .......... Linear

Logarithmic Regression ...... Log

Med-Med......................... Med-Med

Exponential Regression ...... ExpReg(a·eˆbx)
ExpReg(a·bˆx)

Quadratic Regression .... Quad
Cubic Regression .......... Cubic

Power Regression ............... Power

Quartic Regression ........ Quart
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a sinusoidal regression graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Sinusoidal, List 1, List 2 =
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a logistic regression graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Logistic, List 1, List 2 =
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a pie graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Pie, List 1, %, None =
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a bar graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Bar, List 1, None, None, StickLength =
• To draw a statistical graph, insert the “DrawStat” command following the graph condition
specification line.
ClrGraph
S-Wind Auto
{1, 2, 3} m List 1
{1, 2, 3} m List 2
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Scatter, List 1, List 2, 1, Square =
DrawStat

I Using Distribution Graphs in a Program

(Not available on the fx-7400GII)

Special commands are used to draw distribution graphs in a program.

• To draw a normal cumulative distribution graph

DrawDistNorm ,  [,S, ƫ]
Population mean*1
Population standard deviation*1
Data upper limit
Data lower limit




*1 This can be omitted. Omitting these items performs the calculation using Ʊ = 1 and ƫ = 0.

p= 1
2



Upper

–

e
Lower

(x – )2
2

2

dx

ZLow =

Lower – 


8-26

ZUp =

Upper – 


• Executing DrawDistNorm performs the above calculation
in accordance with the specified conditions and draws
the graph. At this time the ZLow  x  ZUp region on the
graph is filled in.

• At the same time, the p, ZLow, and ZUp calculation result values are assigned respectively to
variables p, ZLow, and ZUp, and p is assigned to Ans.

• To draw a Student-t cumulative distribution graph

DrawDistT , , 
Degree of freedom
Data upper limit
Data lower limit




p=



Upper
Lower

df + 1

2
df

2

–

df + 1

2
2
1+ x
df
dx

  df

tLow = Lower

tUp = Upper

• Executing DrawDistT performs the above calculation in accordance with the specified
conditions and draws the graph. At this time the Lower  x  Upper region on the graph is
filled in.
• At the same time, the p calculation result value and the Lower and Upper input values are
assigned respectively to variables p, tLow, and tUp, and p is assigned to Ans.

• To draw a Ƶ2 cumulative distribution graph

DrawDistChi , , 
Degree of freedom
Data upper limit
Data lower limit




p=



Upper
Lower

df

1
df

2



1
2

2

df

 x

2

–1

 e

–

x
2

dx

• Executing DrawDistChi performs the above calculation in accordance with the specified
conditions and draws the graph. At this time the Lower  x  Upper region on the graph is
filled in.
• At the same time, calculation result p is assigned to variables p and Ans.

• To draw an F cumulative distribution graph

DrawDistF , , , 
Degrees of freedom of denominator
Degrees of freedom of numerator
Data upper limit
Data lower limit

8-27





p=



Upper
Lower

ndf + ddf
2
ndf

ndf  ddf
ddf


2
2


ndf
2

ndf
2

 x

–1

ndf x
 1+
ddf

–

ndf + ddf
2

dx

• Executing DrawDistF performs the above calculation in accordance with the specified
conditions and draws the graph. At this time the Lower  x  Upper region on the graph is
filled in.
• At the same time, calculation result p is assigned to variables p and Ans.

I Performing Statistical Calculations in a Program
• Single-variable statistical calculation


1-Variable List1, List 2
Frequency data (Frequency)

x-axis data (XList)




• Paired-variable statistical calculation


2-Variable List 1, List 2, List 3
Frequency data (Frequency)

y-axis data (YList)
x-axis data (XList)




• Regression statistical calculation
LinearReg(ax+b) List 1, List 2, List 3



Calculation
type*



Frequency data (Frequency)

y-axis data (YList)
x-axis data (XList)



* Any one of the following can be specified as the calculation type.
LinearReg(ax+b)......linear regression (ax+b type)
LinearReg(a+bx)......linear regression (a+bx type)
Med-MedLine ..........Med-Med calculation
QuadReg .................quadratic regression
CubicReg .................cubic regression
QuartReg .................quartic regression
LogReg ...................logarithmic regression
ExpReg(a·eˆbx)........exponential regression (a·ebx type)
ExpReg(a·bˆx)..........exponential regression (a·bx type)
PowerReg ...............power regression
8-28

• Sinusoidal regression statistical calculation
SinReg List 1, List 2

y-axis data (YList)
x-axis data (XList)
• Logistic regression statistical calculation
LogisticReg List 1, List 2

y-axis data (YList)
x-axis data (XList)

I Performing Distribution Calculations in a Program
(Not available on the fx-7400GII)
• The following values are substituted whenever any of the values enclosed in brackets ([ ]) are
omitted.

 S=1, ƫ=0, tail=L (Left)
• For the calculation formula of each probability density function, see “Statistic Formula”
(page 6-53).

• Normal Distribution
NormPD(: Returns the normal probability density (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: NormPD(x[, S, ƫ)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for x. Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
NormCD(: Returns the normal cumulative distribution (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: NormCD(Lower, Upper[, S, ƫ)]
• Single values or lists can be specified for Lower and Upper. Calculation results p, ZLow, and
ZUp are assigned respectively to variables p, ZLow, and ZUp. Calculation result p also is
assigned to Ans (ListAns when Lower and Upper are lists).
InvNormCD(: Returns the inverse normal cumulative distribution (lower and/or upper value(s))
for the specified p value.
Syntax: InvNormCD(["L(or –1) or R(or 1) or C(or 0)", ]p[,S, ƫ])
tail (Left, Right, Central)

• A single value or a list can be specified for p. Calculation results are output in accordance
with the tail setting as described below.
tail = Left
The Upper value is assigned to variables x1InvN and Ans (ListAns when p is a list).
tail = Right
The Lower value is assigned to variables x1InvN and Ans (ListAns when p is a list).
tail = Central
The Lower and Upper values are assigned respectively to variables x1InvN and x2InvN.
Lower only is assigned to Ans (ListAns when p is a list).

8-29

• Student- t Distribution
tPD(: Returns the Student-t probability density (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: tPD(x, df [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for x. Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
tCD(: Returns the Student-t cumulative distribution (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: tCD(Lower,Upper,df [)]
• Single values or lists can be specified for Lower and Upper. Calculation results p, tLow,
and tUp are assigned respectively to variables p, tLow, and tUp. Calculation result p also is
assigned to Ans (ListAns when Lower and Upper are lists).
InvTCD(: Returns the inverse Student-t cumulative distribution (Lower value) for the specified
p value.
Syntax: InvTCD(p,df [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for p. The Lower value is assigned to the xInv and
Ans variables (ListAns when p is a list).

• Ƶ2 Distribution
ChiPD(: Returns the Ƶ2 probability density (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: ChiPD(x,df [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for x. Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
ChiCD(: Returns the Ƶ2 cumulative distribution (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: ChiCD(Lower,Upper,df [)]
• Single values or lists can be specified for Lower and Upper. Calculation result p is assigned
to variables p and Ans (ListAns when Lower and Upper are lists).
InvChiCD(: Returns the inverse Ƶ2 cumulative distribution (Lower value) for the specified p
value.
Syntax: InvChiCD(p,df [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for p. The Lower value is assigned to the xInv and
Ans variables (ListAns when p is a list).

• F Distribution
FPD(: Returns the F probability density (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: FPD(x,ndf,ddf [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for x. Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
FCD(: Returns the F cumulative distribution (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: FCD(Lower,Upper,ndf,ddf [)]
• Single values or lists can be specified for Lower and Upper. Calculation result p is assigned
to variables p and Ans (ListAns when Lower and Upper are lists).
8-30

InvFCD(: Returns the inverse F cumulative distribution (Lower value) for the specified data.
Syntax: InvFCD(p,ndf,ddf [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for p. The Lower value is assigned to the xInv and
Ans variables (ListAns when p is a list).

• Binomial Distribution
BinomialPD(: Returns the binomial probability (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: BinomialPD([x,]n,P[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for x. Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
BinomialCD(: Returns the binomial cumulative distribution (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: BinomialCD([X,]n,P[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for each X. Calculation result p is assigned to
variables p and Ans (ListAns when X is omitted or is a list).
InvBinomialCD(: Returns the inverse binomial cumulative distribution for the specified data.
Syntax: InvBinomialCD(p,n,P[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for p. The calculation result X value is assigned to the
xInv and Ans variables (ListAns when p is a list).

• Poisson Distribution
PoissonPD(: Returns the Poisson probability (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: PoissonPD(x, ƫ[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for x. Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
PoissonCD(: Returns the Poisson cumulative distribution (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: PoissonCD(X,μ[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for each X. Calculation result p is assigned to
variables p and Ans (ListAns when X is a list).
InvPoissonCD(: Returns the inverse Poisson cumulative distribution for the specified data.
Syntax: InvPoissonCD(p,μ[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for p. The calculation result X value is assigned to the
xInv and Ans variables (ListAns when p is a list).

• Geometric Distribution
GeoPD(: Returns the geometric probability (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: GeoPD(x, P[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for x. Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).

8-31

GeoCD(: Returns the geometric cumulative distribution (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: GeoCD(X,P[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for each X. Calculation result p is assigned to
variables p and Ans (ListAns when X is a list).
InvGeoCD(: Returns the inverse geometric cumulative distribution for the specified data.
Syntax: InvGeoCD(p,P[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for p. The calculation result X value is assigned to the
xInv and Ans variables (ListAns when p is a list).

• Hypergeometric Distribution
HypergeoPD(: Returns the hypergeometric probability (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: HypergeoPD(x, n, M, N[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for x. Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
HypergeoCD(: Returns the hypergeometric cumulative distribution (p value) for the specified
data.
Syntax: HypergeoCD(X, n, M, N[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for each X. Calculation result p is assigned to
variables p and Ans (ListAns when X is a list).
InvHypergeoCD(: Returns the inverse hypergeometric cumulative distribution for the specified
data.
Syntax: InvHypergeoCD(p, n, M, N[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for p. The calculation result X value is assigned to the
xInv and Ans variables (ListAns when p is a list).

I Using the TEST Command to Execute a Command in a Program
(Not available on the fx-7400GII)
• The following are the specifications ranges for the “ƫ condition” argument of the command.
“<” or –1 when ƫ < ƫ0
“x” or 0 when ƫ x ƫ0
“>” or 1 when ƫ > ƫ0
The above also apply for the “R condition” and “ơ&R condition” specification methods.
• For explanations of arguments that are not covered in detail here, see “Tests” (page 6-22)
and “Input and Output Terms of Tests, Confidence Interval, and Distribution” (page 6-50).
• For the calculation formula of each command, see “Statistic Formula” (page 6-53).

• Z Test
OneSampleZTest: Executes 1-sample Z-test calculation.
Syntax:

OneSampleZTest "ƫ condition", ƫ0, S, M, n

Output Values:

Z, p, M, n are assigned respectively to variables z, p, M, n and to ListAns
elements 1 through 4.
8-32

Syntax:

OneSampleZTest "ƫ condition", ƫ0, S, List[, Freq]

Output Values:

Z, p, M, sx, n are assigned respectively to variables z, p, M, sx, n and to
ListAns elements 1 through 5.

TwoSampleZTest: Executes 2-sample Z-test calculation.
Syntax:

TwoSampleZTest "ƫ1 condition", S1, S2, M1, n1, M2, n2

Output Values:

Z, p, M1, M2, n1, n2 are assigned respectively to variables z, p, M1, M2, n1, n2
and to ListAns elements 1 through 6.

Syntax:

TwoSampleZTest "ƫ1 condition", S1, S2, List1, List2[, Freq1 [, Freq2]]

Output Values:

Z, p, M1, M2, sx1, sx2, n1, n2 are assigned respectively to variables z, p, M1, M2,
sx1, sx2, n1, n2 and to ListAns elements 1 through 8.

OnePropZTest:

Executes 1-proportion Z-test calculation.

Syntax:

OnePropZTest "p condition", p0, x, n

Output Values:

Z, p, pˆ, n are assigned respectively to variables z, p, pˆ, n and to ListAns
elements 1 through 4.

TwoPropZTest:

Executes 2-proportion Z-test calculation.

Syntax:

TwoPropZTest "p1 condition", x1, n1, x2, n2

Output Values:

Z, p, pˆ 1, pˆ 2, pˆ, n1, n2 are assigned respectively to variables z, p, pˆ 1, p
ˆ 2, pˆ,
n1, n2 and to ListAns elements 1 through 7.

• t Test
OneSampleTTest: Executes 1-sample t-test calculation.
Syntax:

OneSampleTTest "ƫ condition", ƫ0, M, sx, n
OneSampleTTest "ƫ condition", ƫ0, List[, Freq]

Output Values:

t, p, M, sx, n are assigned respectively to the variables with the same
names and to ListAns elements 1 through 5.

TwoSampleTTest: Executes 2-sample t-test calculation.
Syntax :

TwoSampleTTest "ƫ1 condition", M1, sx1, n1, M2, sx2, n2[,Pooled condition]
TwoSampleTTest "ƫ1 condition", List1, List2, [, Freq1[, Freq2[,
Pooled condition ]]]

Output Values:

When Pooled condition = 0, t, p, df, M1 M2, sx1, sx2, n1, n2 are assigned
respectively to the variables with the same names and to ListAns
elements 1 through 9.
When Pooled condition = 1, t, p, df, M1, M2, sx1, sx2, sp, n1, n2 are assigned
respectively to the variables with the same names and to ListAns
elements 1 through 10.

Note:

Specify 0 when you want to turn off the Pooled condition and 1 when you
want to turn it on. Omitting the input is treated as Pooled condition off.

LinRegTTest:

Executes linear regression t-test calculation.

Syntax:

LinRegTTest "ơ&R condition", XList, YList[, Freq]

Output Values:

t, p, df, a, b, s, r, r2 are assigned respectively to the variables with the
same names and to ListAns elements 1 through 8.

8-33

• Ƶ2 Test
ChiGOFTest:

Executes a chi-square goodness of fit test.

Syntax:

ChiGOFTest List 1, List 2, df, List 3
(List 1 is the Observed list, List 2 is the Expected list, and List 3 is the
CNTRB list.)

Output Values:

Ƶ2, p, df are assigned respectively to the variables with the same names
and to ListAns elements 1 through 3. The CNTRB list is stored in List 3.

ChiTest:

Executes a chi-square test.

Syntax:

ChiTest MatA, MatB
(MatA is the Observed matrix and MatB is the Expected matrix.)

Output Values:

Ƶ2, p, df are assigned respectively to the variables with the same names
and to ListAns elements 1 through 3. The Expected matrix is assigned to
MatB.

• F Test
TwoSampleFTest: Executes 2-sample F-test calculation.
Syntax:

TwoSampleFTest "S1 condition", sx1, n1, sx2, n2

Output Values:

F, p, sx1, sx2, n1, n2 are assigned respectively to the variables with the
same names and to ListAns elements 1 through 6.

Syntax:

TwoSampleFTest "S1 condition", List1, List2, [, Freq1 [, Freq2]]

Output Values:

F, p, M1, M2, sx1, sx2, n1, n2 are assigned respectively to the variables with
the same names and to ListAns elements 1 through 8.

• ANOVA
OneWayANOVA:

Executes one-factor ANOVA analysis of variance.

Syntax:

OneWayANOVA List1, List2
(List1 is Factor list (A) and List2 is the Dependent list.)

Output Values:

Adf, Ass, Ams, AF, Ap, ERRdf, ERRss, ERRms are assigned respectively
to variables Adf, SSa, MSa, Fa, pa, Edf, SSe, MSe.
Also, output values are assigned to MatAns as shown below.
MatAns =

Adf

Ass

Ams

ERRdf ERRss ERRms

AF Ap
0

0

TwoWayANOVA:

Executes two-factor ANOVA analysis of variance.

Syntax:

TwoWayANOVA List1, List2, List3 (List1 is Factor list (A), List2 is Factor
list (B), and List3 is the Dependent list.)

Output Values:

Adf, Ass, Ams, AF, Ap, Bdf, Bss, Bms, BF, Bp, ABdf, ABss, ABms, ABF,
ABp, ERRdf, ERRss, ERRms are assigned respectively to variables Adf,
SSa, MSa, Fa, pa, Bdf, SSb, MSb, Fb, pb, ABdf, SSab, MSab, Fab, pab,
Edf, SSe, MSe.
Also, output values are assigned to MatAns as shown below.

MatAns =

Adf

Ass

Ams

AF

Ap

Bdf

Bss

Bms

BF

Bp

ABdf

ABss

ABms ABF ABp

ERRdf ERRss ERRms
8-34

0

0

I Performing Financial Calculations in a Program
(Not available on the fx-7400GII)

• Setup Commands
• Date Mode Setting for Financial Calculations
DateMode365....... 365 days
DateMode360....... 360 days
• Payment Period Setting
PmtBgn................. Start of period
PmtEnd................. End of period
• Bond Calculation Payment Periods
PeriodsAnnual ...... Annual
PeriodsSemi ......... Semiannual

• Financial Calculation Commands
For the meaning of each argument, see “Chapter 7 Financial Calculation (TVM)”.
• Simple Interest
Smpl_SI:

Returns the interest based on simple interest calculation.

Syntax:

Smpl_SI(n, I%, PV)

Smpl_SFV:

Returns the total of principal and interest based on simple interest calculation.

Syntax:

Smpl_SFV(n, I%, PV)

• Compound Interest
Note:
• P/Y and C/Y can be omitted for all compound interest calculations. When they are omitted,
calculations are performed using P/Y=12 and C/Y=12.
• If you perform a calculation that uses a compound interest function (Cmpd_n(, Cmpd_I%(,
Cmpd_PV(, Cmpd_PMT(, Cmpd_FV(), the argument(s) you input and the calculation results
will be saved to the applicable variables (n, I%, PV, etc.). If you perform a calculation that
uses any other type of financial calculation function, the argument and calculation results are
not assigned to variables.
Cmpd_n:

Returns the number of compound periods.

Syntax:

Cmpd_n(I%, PV, PMT, FV, P/Y, C/Y)

Cmpd_I%:

Returns the annual interest.

Syntax:

Cmpd_I%(n, PV, PMT, FV, P/Y, C/Y)

Cmpd_PV:

Returns the present value (loan amount for installment payments, principal for
savings).

Syntax:

Cmpd_PV(n, I%, PMT, FV, P/Y, C/Y)

Cmpd_PMT: Returns equal input/output values (payment amounts for installment payments,
deposit amounts for savings) for a fixed period.
8-35

Syntax:

Cmpd_PMT(n, I%, PV, FV, P/Y, C/Y)

Cmpd_FV:

Returns the final input/output amount or total principal and interest.

Syntax:

Cmpd_FV(n, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y)

• Cash Flow (Investment Appraisal)
Cash_NPV:

Returns the net present value.

Syntax:

Cash_NPV(I%, Csh)

Cash_IRR:

Returns the internal rate of return.

Syntax:

Cash_IRR(Csh)

Cash_PBP: Returns the payback period.
Syntax:

Cash_PBP(I%, Csh)

Cash_NFV:

Returns the net future value.

Syntax:

Cash_NFV(I%, Csh)

• Amortization
Amt_BAL:

Returns the remaining principal balance following payment PM2.

Syntax:

Amt_BAL(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y)

Amt_INT:

Returns the interest paid for payment PM1.

Syntax:

Amt_INT(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y)

Amt_PRN:

Returns the principal and interest paid for payment PM1.

Syntax:

Amt_PRN(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y)

Amt_3INT:

Returns the total principal and interest paid from payment PM1 to PM2.

Syntax:

Amt_3INT(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y)

Amt_3PRN: Returns the total principal paid from payment PM1 to PM2.
Syntax:

Amt_3PRN(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y)

• Interest Rate Conversion
Cnvt_EFF:

Returns the interest rate converted from the nominal interest rate to the effective
interest rate.

Syntax:

Cnvt_EFF(n, I%)

Cnvt_APR:

Returns the interest rate converted from the effective interest rate to the nominal
interest rate.

Syntax:

Cnvt_APR(n, I%)

• Cost, Selling Price, Margin Calculations
Cost:

Returns the cost based on a specified selling price and margin.

Syntax:

Cost(Sell, Margin)

Sell:

Returns the selling price based on a specified cost and margin.

Syntax:

Sell(Cost, Margin)

Margin:

Returns the margin based on a specified cost and selling price.

Syntax:

Margin(Cost, Sell)
8-36

• Day/Date Calculations
Days_Prd:

Returns the number of days from a specified d1 to specified d2.

Syntax:

Days_Prd(MM1, DD1, YYYY1, MM2, DD2, YYYY2)

• Bond Calculations
Bond_PRC: Returns in list form bond prices based on specified conditions.
Syntax:

Bond_PRC(MM1, DD1, YYYY1, MM2, DD2, YYYY2, RDV, CPN, YLD) = {PRC,
INT, CST}

Bond_YLD: Returns the yield based on specified conditions.
Syntax:

Bond_YLD(MM1, DD1, YYYY1, MM2, DD2, YYYY2, RDV, CPN, PRC)

7. PRGM Mode Command List
Not all of the commands listed below are available on all models covered by this manual.
RUN Program
X^4
Log

(MENU) key
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
STAT

DRAW On
Off
GRPH GPH1
GPH2
GPH3
Scat
xy
Hist
Box
Bar
N-Dis
Brkn
X
Med
X^2
X^3
X^4
Log
Pwr
Sin
NPP
Lgst
Pie
List
TYPE
DIST

CALC

DrwN
Drwt
DrwC
DrwF
1VAR
2VAR
Med
X^2
X^3

Command
DrawOn
DrawOff
S-Gph1_
S-Gph2_
S-Gph3_
Scatter
xyLine
Hist
MedBox
Bar
N-Dist
Broken
Linear
Med-Med
Quad
Cubic
Quart
Log
*1
Power
Sinusoidal
NPPlot
Logistic
Pie
List_
*2
DrawDistNorm_
DrawDistT_
DrawDistChi_
DrawDistF_
1-Variable_
2-Variable_
*3
Med-MedLine_
QuadReg_
CubicReg_

Pwr
Sin
Lgst
MAT

LIST
GRPH

DYNA

Swap
×Rw
×Rw+
Rw+
Srt-A
Srt-D
SEL

On
Off
TYPE Y=
r=
Parm
X=
Y>
Y<
YP
YO
X>
X<
XP
XO
STYL —
—
·····
······
GMEM Sto
Rcl
On
Off
Var
TYPE Y=
r=
Parm

8-37

QuartReg_
LogReg_
*4
PowerReg_
SinReg_
LogisticReg_
Swap_
>Row_
>Row+_
Row+_
SortA(
SortD(
G_SelOn_
G_SelOff_
Y=Type
r=Type
ParamType
X=Type
Y>Type
YType
X
<
P
O
Lcte
Gtky
Send
Recv
S38k
R38k
Open
Close

Tabl
G-Con
G-Plt
Tabl
Phase
Web
an-Cn
3a-Cn
an-Pl
3a-Pl

STR

Command
If_
Then_
Else_
IfEnd
For_
_To_
_Step_
Next
While_
WhileEnd
Do
LpWhile_
Prog_
Return
Break
Stop
Lbl_
Goto_

Isz_
Dsz_
Menu_
?
<
ClrText
ClrGraph
ClrList_
ClrMat_
DrawStat
DrawGraph
DrawDyna
DispF-Tbl
DrawFTG-Con
DrawFTG-Plt
DispR-Tbl
PlotPhase
DrawWeb_
DrawR-Con
DrawR 3-Con
DrawR-Plt
DrawR 3-Plt
=
x
>
<
P
O
Locate_
Getkey
Send(
Receive(
Send38k_
Receive38k_
OpenComport38k
CloseComport38k
:

StrJoin(
StrLen(
StrCmp(
StrSrc(
StrLeft(
StrRight(
StrMid(
ExpStr(
Exp(
StrUpr(
StrLwr(
StrInv(
StrShift(
StrRotate(

Join
Len
Cmp
Src
Left
Right
Mid
ES
Exp
Upr
Lwr
Inv
Shift
Rot

CPLX

FRAC
Y• SPD
DATE
PMT
PRD
INEQ
SIMP

K(SET UP) key
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
ANGL

COOR
GRID
AXES
LABL
DISP

Deg
Rad
Gra
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Fix
Sci
Norm
Eng

On
Off
Eng

}
—
·····
······
DRAW Con
Plot
DERV On
Off
BACK None
Pict
FUNC On
Off
SIML
On
Off
S-WIN Auto
Man
LIST
File
LOCS On
Off
T-VAR Rang
List
3DSP On
Off
RESID None
List

S/L

8-40

Q1Q3

Command
Deg
Rad
Gra
CoordOn
CoordOff
GridOn
GridOff
AxesOn
AxesOff
LabelOn
LabelOff
Fix_
Sci_
Norm_
EngOn
EngOff
Eng
S-L-Normal
S-L-Thick
S-L-Broken
S-L-Dot
G-Connect
G-Plot
DerivOn
DerivOff
BG-None
BG-Pict_
FuncOn
FuncOff
SimulOn
SimulOff
S-WindAuto
S-WindMan
File_
LocusOn
LocusOff
VarRange
VarList_
3dispOn
3dispOff
Resid-None
Resid-List_

Real
a+bi
rQ
d/c
ab/c
Y=DrawSpeedNorm
Y=DrawSpeedHigh
DateMode365
DateMode360
PmtBgn
PmtEnd
PeriodsAnnual
PeriodsSemi
IneqTypeAnd
IneqTypeOr
SimplfyAuto
SimplfyMan
Q1Q3TypeStd
Q1Q3TypeOnData

Real
a+bi
rQ
d/c
ab/c
Norm
High
365
360
Bgn
End
Annu
Semi
And
Or
Auto
Man
Std
OnD

 key
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
ZOOM

Fact
Auto
V-WIN V-Win
Sto
Rcl
SKTCH Cls
Tang
Norm
Inv
GRPH

PLOT

LINE
Crcl
Vert
Hztl
Text
PIXL

Test

Command

Factor_
ZoomAuto
ViewWindow_
StoV-Win_
RclV-Win_
Cls
Tangent_
Normal_
Inverse_
Y=
Graph_Y=
r=
Graph_r=
Parm
Graph(X,Y)=(
X=c
Graph_X=
G-° dx
Graph_ °
Y>
Graph_Y>
Y<
Graph_Y<
YP
Graph_YP
YO
Graph_YO
X>
Graph_X>
X<
Graph_X<
XP
Graph_XP
XO
Graph_XO
Plot
Plot_
Pl-On PlotOn_
Pl-Off PlotOff_
Pl-Chg PlotChg_
Line
Line
F-Line F-Line_
Circle_
Vertical_
Horizontal_
Text_
On
PxlOn_
Off
PxlOff_
Chg
PxlChg_
PxlTest(

STYL

}
—
·····
······

SketchNormal_
SketchThick_
SketchBroken_
SketchDot_

Level 3 Level 4
*1

Exp

*2

MARK

STICK

BASE Program

%DATA

(MENU) key
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
d~o

LOG

DISP

d
h
b
o
Neg
Not
and
or
xor
xnor
Dec
Hex
Bin
Oct

Command
d
h
b
o
Neg_
Not_
and
or
xor
xnor
Dec
Hex
Bin
Oct

*3

None
X

*4

EXP

*5

NORM

t

CHI

F

BINM

)(PRGM) key
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Prog
JUMP

Lbl
Goto

Isz
Dsz
Menu

?
<
REL

=
x
>
<
P
O

:

Command
Prog_
Lbl_
Goto_

Isz_
Dsz_
Menu_
?
<
=
x
>
<
P
O
:

POISN

GEO

H • GEO

*6

Z

t

Chi

K(SET UP) key
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Dec
Hex
Bin
Oct

Command

F
ANOV

Command

Exp(ae^bx)
Exp(ab^x)
Square
×
Cross
I
Dot
Leng
StickLength
Hztl
StickHoriz
%
%
Data
Data
None
ax+b
LinearReg(ax+b)
a+bx
LinearReg(a+bx)
ae^bx ExpReg(a•e^bx)
ab^x
ExpReg(a•b^x)
NPd
NormPD(
NCd
NormCD(
InvN
InvNormCD(
TPd
tPD(
TCd
tCD(
Invt
InvTCD(
CPd
ChiPD(
CCd
ChiCD(
InvC
InvChiCD(
FPd
FPD(
FCd
FCD(
InvF
InvFCD(
BPd
BinomialPD(
BCd
BinomialCD(
InvB
InvBinomialCD(
PPd
PoissonPD(
PCd
PoissonCD(
InvP
InvPoissonCD(
GPd
GeoPD(
GCd
GeoCD(
InvG
InvGeoCD(
HPd
HypergeoPD(
HCd
HypergeoCD(
InvH
InvHyperGeoCD(
1-S
OneSampleZTest_
2-S
TwoSampleZTest_
1-P
OnePropZTest_
2-P
TwoPropZTest_
1-S
OneSampleTTest_
2-S
TwoSampleTTest_
REG
LinRegTTest_
GOF
ChiGOFTest_
2-WAY ChiTest_
TwoSampleFTest_
1-W
OneWayANOVA_
2-W
TwoWayANOVA_

*7

TEST

ae^bx
ab^x

Dec
Hex
Bin
Oct

8-41

INTR

DIST

p
z
t
Ƶ2

p
z
t
Chi
F
pˆ
pˆ 1
pˆ 2

F
pˆ
pˆ 1
pˆ 2

df
se
r
r2
pa
Fa
Adf
SSa
MSa
pb
Fb
Bdf
SSb
MSb
pab
Fab
ABdf
SSab
MSab
Edf
SSe
MSe
Left
Right
pˆ
pˆ 1
pˆ 2

df
se
r
r2
pa
Fa
Adf
SSa
MSa
pb
Fb
Bdf
SSb
MSb
pab
Fab
ABdf
SSab
MSab
Edf
SSe
MSe
Left
Right
pˆ
pˆ 1
pˆ 2

df
p
xInv
x1Inv
x2Inv
zLow
zUp
tLow
tUp

df
p
xInv
x1Inv
x2Inv
zLow
zUp
tLow
tUp

8. Program Library
• Be sure to check how many bytes of unused memory are remaining before attempting to
perform any programming.

Program Name

Prime Factorization

Description
This program continually divides a natural number by factors until all its prime factors are
produced.
Purpose
This program accepts input of natural number A, and divides it by B (2, 3, 5, 7....) to find the
prime factors of A.
• If a division operation does not produce a remainder, the result of the operation is assigned
to A.
• The above procedure is repeated until B > A.
Example

462 = 2 s 3 s 7 s 11

CEAU

U

UU

U

8-42

Program Name

Ellipse

Description
This program displays a number table of the following values based on input of the foci of an
ellipse, the sum of the distance between the loci and foci, and the pitch (step size) of X.
Y1: Coordinate values of upper half of ellipse
Y2: Coordinate values of lower half of ellipse
Y3: Distances between right focus and loci
Y4: Distances between left focus and loci
Y5: Sum of Y3 and Y4
Next, the program plots the foci and values in Y1 and Y2.
Purpose
This program shows that the sums of the distances between the loci and two foci of an ellipse
are equal.

BU

@?U

@U

U

8-43

Chapter 9 Spreadsheet
The Spreadsheet application provides you with powerful, take-along-anywhere spreadsheet
capabilities.
All of the operations in this section are performed in the S • SHT mode.

Important!
• The fx-7400GII and fx-9750GII are not equipped with the S • SHT mode.

1. Spreadsheet Basics and the Function Menu
Selecting S • SHT on the Main Menu will display a spreadsheet screen. Entering the S • SHT
mode automatically creates a new spreadsheet file named “SHEET”.
The spreadsheet screen shows a number of cells (squares) and the data contained in each
cell.
File name
Shows as many characters
as possible of the ﬁle name.

Row numbers
(1 to 999)

Edit box
Shows the contents of the cell where the cell
cursor is currently located. When multiple
cells are selected, the edit box indicates the
selected cell range.

Column letters (A to Z)

Cell cursor

9
Function menu

You can enter the following types of data into a cell.
Constants

A constant is something whose value is fixed as soon as you finalize its input. A
constant can be either a numeric value, or a calculation formula (such as 7+3,
sin30, A1s2, etc.) that does not have an equal sign 	 in front of it.

Text

A character string that starts with a quote mark (") is treated as text.

Formula

A formula that starts out with an equal sign 	, such as =A1s2, is executed as it
is written.

Note that complex numbers are not supported in the S • SHT mode.

I Spreadsheet Screen Function Menu
• {FILE} ... Displays the following FILE submenu.
• {NEW}/{OPEN}/{SV • AS}/{RECAL}
• {EDIT} ... Displays the following EDIT submenu.
• {CUT}/{PASTE}/{COPY}/{CELL}/{JUMP}/{SEQ}/{FILL}/{SRT • A}/{SRT • D}
• PASTE is displayed only immediately after CUT or COPY is executed.
9-1

• {DEL} ... Displays the following DEL (delete) submenu.
• {ROW}/{COL}/{ALL}
• {INS} ... Displays the following INS (insert) submenu.
• {ROW}/{COL}
• {CLR} ... Clears the content from a selected range of cells.
• {GRPH} ... Displays the following GRPH menu. (Same as in the STAT mode.)
• {GPH1}/{GPH2}/{GPH3}/{SEL}/{SET}
• {CALC} ... Displays the following CALC (statistical calculation) menu. (Same as in the STAT
mode.)
• {1VAR}/{2VAR}/{REG}/{SET}
• {STO} ... Displays the following STO (store) submenu.
• {VAR}/{LIST}/{FILE}/{MAT}
• {RCL} ... Displays the following RCL (recall) submenu.
• {LIST}/{FILE}/{MAT}
• Data Entry Function Menu
• {GRAB} ... Enters the GRAB mode for entering a cell reference name.
• {$} ... Inputs the cell absolute reference command ($).
• {:} ... Inputs the cell range specification command (:).
• {If} ... Inputs the CellIf( command.
• {CEL} ... Displays a submenu for inputting the following commands.
• CellMin(, CellMax(, CellMean(, CellMedian, CellSum, CellProd(
• {REL} ... Displays a submenu for inputting the following relational operators.
• =, x, >, <, P, O

2. Basic Spreadsheet Operations
This section explains spreadsheet file operations, how to move the cursor and select one or
more cells, and how to enter and edit data.

I Spreadsheet File Operations
S To create a new file
1. Press (FILE)(NEW).
2. On the dialog box that appears, enter up to eight characters for the file name, and then
press U.
• This will create a new file and display a blank spreadsheet.
• A new file will not be created it there is already a file with the same file name you enter in
step 2. Instead, the existing file will be opened.

9-2

S To open a file
1. Press (FILE)(OPEN).
2. On the file list that appears, use D and A to select the file you want and then press U.

S Auto Save
In the S • SHT mode, Auto Save saves the currently open file automatically whenever you edit
it. This means you do not need to perform any manual save operation.

S To save a file under a new name
1. Press (FILE)(SV • AS).
2. On the dialog box that appears, enter up to eight characters for the new file name, and then
press U.
• If a file already exists with the same file name you enter in step 2, a message will appear
asking if you want to replace the existing file with the new one. Press (Yes) to replace
the existing file, or (No) to cancel the save operation and return to the file name input
dialog box in step 2.

S To delete a file
1. Press (FILE)(OPEN).
2. On the file list that appears, use D and A to select the file you want to delete and then
press (DEL).
3. This causes a confirmation message to appear. Press (Yes) to delete the file, or (No)
to cancel without deleting anything.
4. To return to the spreadsheet from the file list, press ).
• Deleting the currently open file will automatically create a new file named “SHEET” and
display its spreadsheet.

I Recalculating All of the Formulas in the Currently Open Spreadsheet
The S • SHT mode has an Auto Calc features that automatically recalculates all of the formulas
in a spreadsheet whenever you open it or perform any editing operation. Auto Calc is enabled
under initial factory default settings. You also can execute a recalculation manually, if you want.

S Auto Calc
Auto Calc is an S • SHT mode Setup item (page 1-29).
When Auto Calc is enabled (On), all of the formulas in a spreadsheet are recalculated when
the spreadsheet is opened or when any editing operation is performed. It should be noted,
however, that recalculation can slow down the overall processing speed. When Auto Calc is
disabled (Off), you need to execute recalculation manually as required.

S To execute spreadsheet re-calculation manually
Press (FILE)(RECAL). This recalculates all of the formulas in the currently open file and
displays the applicable results.
9-3

I Using the Cell Cursor
The cell cursor shows the cell that is selected on a spreadsheet. The highlighted cell is the one
that is currently selected by the cell cursor.

Cell cursor

Edit box

When a single cell is selected by the cell cursor, the contents of that cell are displayed in the
edit box. The cell contents can be edited in the edit box.
When a multiple cells are selected by the cell cursor, the selection range is displayed in the
edit box. In this case, you can copy, delete, or perform other cell operations on the entire range
of selected cells.

S To select cells
To select this:

Do this:

A single cell

Use the cursor keys to move the cell cursor to the cell
you want, or use the JUMP comment to jump directly
to the cell.

A range of cells

See “To select a range of cells” (page 9-5).

An entire row of cells

Move the cell cursor to column A of the row whose
cells you want to select and then press B. Pressing
B while the cell cursor is located at cell A2, for
example, will select the entire second row (from A2 to
Z2). This will cause A2:Z2 (which indicates the selected
range) to appear in the edit box.

An entire column of cells.

Move the cell cursor to row 1 of the column whose cells
you want to select and then press D. Pressing D
while the cell cursor is located at cell C1, for example,
will select the entire column C (from C1 to C999).
This will cause C1:C999 (which indicates the selected
range) to appear in the edit box.

All of the cells in the spreadsheet

Press B while the entire column A is selected or
press D while the entire row 1 is selected. This will
select all of the cells in the spreadsheet and display the
spreadsheet file name in the edit box.

9-4

S Using the JUMP Command to Move the Cell Cursor
To move the cell cursor to here:

Do this:

A particular cell

1. Press (EDIT)(JUMP)(GO).
2. On the dialog box that appears, enter the name
of the cell (A1 to Z999) to which you want to
jump.
3. Press U.

Line 1 of the current column

Press (EDIT)(JUMP)(TOPl).

Column A of the current row

Press (EDIT)(JUMP)(TOPk).

Last line of the current column

Press (EDIT)(JUMP)(BOTn).

Column Z of the current row

Press (EDIT)(JUMP)(BOTm).

S To select a range of cells
1. Move the cell cursor to the start point of the range of cells you want to select.
• You could select and entire row or column of cells as the start point, if you want. For details
about selecting cells, see “To select cells” on page 9-4.
2. Press G(CLIP).
• This will change the cell cursor to a thick-line boundary instead of the normal highlighting.
3. Use the cursor keys to move the cell cursor to the end
point of the range of cells you want to select.
• The edit box will show the range of the selected cells.
• To cancel cell selection, press ). If you do, the cell
cursor will be located at the end point of the range you
selected.

I Data (Constants, Text, Formula) Input Basics
First let’s have a look at a few basic procedures that apply regardless of the type of data you
are inputting.

S To overwrite data currently in a cell with new data
1. Move the cell cursor to the cell where you want to input data.
• If the cell you select already contains data, the following step will overwrite the existing
data with new input.
2. Use the calculator’s keys to input data.
• As you perform key operations to input values or text
(such as @, ?J(B), etc.), the applicable figures
will appear aligned left inside the edit box.
• To cancel an input operation part way through at any
point before advancing to step 3 below, press ). This
will return the cell contents to what they were in step 1
of this procedure.
3. To finalize and apply your input, press U.
9-5

S To edit cell data
1. Move the cell cursor to the cell whose contents you want to edit.
2. Press (EDIT)(CELL).
• Cell contents in the edit box will change from align left
to align right. A text cursor will appear in the edit box so
you can edit its contents.

3. Use C and B to move the cursor around the contents of the cell, and edit them as
required.
• To cancel an edit operation part way through at any point before advancing to step 4
below, press ). This will return the cell contents to what they were in step 1 of this
procedure.
4. To finalize and apply your edits, press U.

S To move the cell cursor while inputting data into a cell
Under factory default settings, pressing U while inputting data into a cell will cause the cell
cursor to move to the next line. You can specify movement to the next column instead using the
“Move” setting as described on page 1-29.

I Inputting a Constant (Value, Calculation Result, Number Sequence) into
a Cell
A constant is something whose value is fixed as soon as you finalize its input. A constant can
be either a numeric value, or a calculation formula (such as 7+3, sin30, A1s2, etc.) that does
not have an equal sign 	 in front of it. Inputting QB?U, for example will cause the
value 0.5 (the calculation result) to appear in the cell (when Deg is selected as the Angle unit).

S To input a number sequence automatically based on a function expression
1. Move the cell cursor to the cell where you want number sequence input to start.
• Under initial default settings, automatic input of the number sequence will proceed
downwards from the start cell. You can specify a different direction using the “Move” setting
as described on page 1-29.
2. Press (EDIT)(SEQ) to display the Sequence screen, and then specify the function
expression and values required to generate the required number sequence.
You can input data for the item that is highlighted on
the screen.
Reference name of the cell selected in step 1

9-6

Item

Description

Expr

Input the function expression f(x) for generating the number sequence.
Example: ?
(X)V
@U (X2 + 1)

Var

Input the variable name used in the function expression input for Expr.
Example: ?
(X)U (X)

Start

Input the starting value (X1) of the value to be substituted for the variable
specified by Var.
Example: AU

End

Input the ending value (Xn) of the value to be substituted for the variable
specified by Var.
Example: @?U

Incre

Input the increment value (m) for successive value of X1, as in: (X2 = X1 + m),
(X3 = X2 + m), and so on. The number sequence is generated in the range of
X1 + (n – 1) m  Xn.
Example: AU

1st Cell

Input the reference name (A1, B2, etc.) of the cell where you want the first
value of the number sequence to be input. Specify a cell here only if the
starting cell is different from the one you specified in step 1 of this procedure.
Example: ?J(B)@U (B1)

• Each time you press U after inputting data for a setting item, the highlighting will move to
the next setting item. You also can use D and A to move the highlighting upwards and
downwards as required.
• Performing the next step will input the number string automatically starting from the
specified cell. If any cell that is within the range of cells where the number sequence
values will be input already contains data, the existing data will be replaced with the
number sequence values.
3. After inputting data for all the setting items, press (EXE) or the U key to start number
sequence generation and input.



I Inputting Text into a Cell
To input text, make sure the first thing you input into the cell is ?$(”). The quote mark (")
tells the calculator that what follows is text, and should be displayed as-is without calculation.
The quote mark (") is not displayed as part of the text.

9-7

I Inputting a Formula into a Cell
For the sake of example, let’s try making a table that contains data based on the formula
 s  = . To do this, we would put  values in column
A,  values in column B, and calculation formulas (like = A1 s B1, = A2 s B2, and
so on) in column C. If the Auto Calc feature is enabled (On), the values in column C would be
recalculated and updated any time we change the values in column A or B.
In this example, note that we must start out the data in column C with the equal sign 	 in
order to indicate it is a formula. In addition to values, arithmetic operators, and cell reference
names, a formula also can contain built-in function commands (page 2-11) and special S • SHT
mode commands (page 9-14).

S Formula Input Example
A
1

B

PRICE

C

QUANTITY

TOTAL

2

35

15

525

3

52

15

780

4

78

20

1560

Procedure
1. Input the text for line 1, and the applicable values in cells A2 through B4.
2. Move the cursor to cell C2, and input the formula for A2 s B2.

	?T(A)A	?J(B)AU
3. Copy the formula in cell C2 and copy it into cells C3 and C4. Move the cell cursor to cell C2
and then perform the following operation.
(EDIT)(COPY)A(PASTE)A(PASTE))
• For details about the copy and paste operations, see
“Copying and Pasting Cell Contents” (page 9-10).

I Inputting a Cell Reference Name
Each cell on a spreadsheet has what is called a “reference name”, which is derived by
combining its column name (A through Z) with its row name (1 through 999). A cell reference
name can be used inside of a formula, which makes the value of the called cell part of the
formula. See “Inputting a Formula into a Cell” above for more information. There are two
methods you can use to input a cell reference name: direct input of the name and input using
the GRAB command. The following illustrates how you would use each of these methods to
input =A1+5 into cell B1.

9-8

S To input a cell reference name using direct input
Move the cell cursor to cell B1 and then perform the following operation.

	?T(A)@
DU

S To input a cell reference name using the GRAB command
Move the cell cursor to cell B1 and then perform the following operation.

	(GRAB)B(SET)
DU
• Commands (GO) through (BOTm) on the submenu that appears when you press
(GRAB) are identical to commands (GO) through (BOTm) of the JUMP command
submenu. See “Using the JUMP Command to Move the Cell Cursor” on page 9-5 about
these commands.

I Relative and Absolute Cell Reference Names
There are two types of cell reference names: relative and absolute. Normally, cell reference
names are treated as being relative.
Relative Cell Reference Names
In the formula =A1+5, the cell reference name A1 indicates a relative cell reference. It is
“relative” because copying the formula and pasting in a different cell will cause the cell
reference name to change in accordance with the location of cell where it is pasted. If the
formula =A1+5 is originally located in cell B1, for example, copying at pasting in cell C3 will
result in =B3+5 in cell C3. Moving from column A to column B (one column) causes A to
change to B, while moving from row 1 to row 3 changes (two rows) changes the 1 to 3.
Important!: If the result of a copy and paste operation causes a relative cell reference name
to change to something that is outside the range of the spreadsheet cells, the applicable
column letter and/or row number will be replaced by a question mark (?), and “ERROR” will be
displayed as the cell’s data.
Absolute Reference Names
If you want the row or the column, or both the row and the column parts of a cell reference
name to remain the same to matter where you paste them, you need to create an absolute cell
reference name. You do this by affixing a dollar sign ($) in front of the part of the cell reference
name you want to remain unchanged. You have three options when using the dollar sign ($)
to create an absolute cell reference name: absolute column with relative row ($A1), relative
column with absolute row (A$1), and absolute row and column ($A$1).

S To input the absolute cell reference name symbol ($)
When inputting a cell reference into a spreadsheet cell, press ($).
For example, the following key operation inputs the absolute cell reference name = $B$1

	($)?J(B)($)@

9-9

I Copying and Pasting Cell Contents
You can copy the contents of one or more cells and paste them into another location. Once
you perform the copy operation, you can copy the contents to multiple locations, if you want.

S To copy and paste spreadsheet data
1. Select the cell(s) you want to copy.
• See “To select cells” (page 9-4) for more information.
2 Press (EDIT)(COPY).
• This will go into paste standby for the selected data, indicated by the  menu item
changing to (PASTE).
• You can exit the paste standby at any time before you perform step 4 below by pressing
).
3. Use the cursor keys to move the cell cursor to location where you want to paste the data.
• If you selected a range of cells in step 1, the cell you select with the cell cursor will be the
upper left cell of the paste range.
• If the location you select is within the range that you copied, performing step below will
cause the exiting data to be overwritten with the pasted data.
4. Press (PASTE).
• This will paste the copied data.
• To paste the same data in other locations, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. After you are finish pasting the data, press ) to exit paste standby.

I Cutting and Pasting Cell Contents
You can use cut and paste to move the contents of one or more cells to another location. Cell
contents (regardless of whether it includes relative or absolute cell name references) generally
are unchanged by a cut and paste operation.



Cutting the formula =A1+5 in cell B1 and pasting it into cell B2. The A1 reference name is
unchanged.

When you are cut and paste a range cells, reference names that affect relationships within
the range are changed accordingly when the range is pasted in order to maintain the correct
relationship, regardless of whether they are relative or absolute reference names.



9-10

Cutting the B1:C1 range of cells that includes the formula =B1+5 and pasting it into B2:C2.
The formula pasted into C2 is changed to =B2+5 in order to maintain the relationship with
the cell to the left, which was also part of the pasted range.

S To cut and paste spreadsheet data
1. Select the cell(s) you want to cut.
• See “To select cells” (page 9-4) for more information.
2 Press (EDIT)(CUT).
• This will go into paste standby for the selected data, indicated by the  menu item
changing to (PASTE).
• You can exit the paste standby at any time before you perform step 4 below by pressing
).
3. Use the cursor keys to move the cell cursor to location where you want to paste the data.
• If you selected a range of cells in step 1, the cell you select with the cell cursor will be the
upper left cell of the paste range.
• If the location you select is within the range that you cut, performing step below will cause
the exiting data to be overwritten with the pasted data.
4. Press (PASTE).
• This will paste the data from the cell(s) you selected in step 1 and paste it into the location
you selected in step 3.
• Regardless of whether Auto Calc is enabled or disabled (page 9-3), pasting cut data will
cause all of the formulas in the spreadsheet to be recalculated.

I Inputting the Same Formula into a Range of Cells
Use the Fill command when you want to input the same formula into a specified range of cells.
The rules governing relative and absolute cell name references are the same as those for copy
and paste.
When you need to input the same formula into cells B1, B2, and B3, for example, the Fill
command lets you do so by inputting the formula once, into cell B1. Note the following about
how the Fill command handles cell name references in this case.
When cell B1 contains this:

The Fill command will do this:

=A1s2

A

B

1

=A1s2

2

=A2s2

3

=A3s2

=$A$2s2

A

B

1

=$A$2s2

2

=$A$2s2

3

=$A$2s2

9-11

* Note that in actual practice
cells B1, B2, and B3
will show the calculation
results, not the formulas as
shown here.

S To input the same formula into a range of cells
1. Select the range of cells into which you want to input the same formula.
• In this example we will assume the B1:B3 is selected. See “To select a range of cells”
(page 9-5).
2 Press (EDIT)(E)(FILL).
3. On the Fill screen that appears, enter the formula you want to input.
You can input data for the item that is
highlighted on the screen.

This is the range of cells you selected in step 1.

• In the “Formula” line, input =A1s2 (
	?T(A)@	AU). Pressing U will
cause the cell cursor to move to the “Cell Range” line.
• If any cell within the cell range already contains data, performing the next step will cause
the existing data to be overwritten with the new fill data (formula).
4. Press (EXE) or the U key.
• This will input the formula into the range of cells you specified.

I Sorting Constant Data
Note that only constant data can be sorted. You can select multiple columns within a single line
or multiple lines within a single column for sorting.

S To sort constant data
1. Select a range of column cells in a single row or a range of row cells in a single column.
• See “To select a range of cells” (page 9-5).
• A Syntax ERROR message will appear if any of the cells in the range you select contain
data other than constant data.
2. Depending on the type of sort you want to perform, perform either one of the following
operations.
To sort ascending: (EDIT)(E)(SRT • A)
To sort descending: (EDIT)(E)(SRT • D)

I Deleting and Inserting Cells
S To delete an entire line or column of cells
Select the row(s) or column(s) you want to delete and then press (DEL). This will delete the
selected row(s) or column(s) immediately, without displaying a confirmation message.
You also can perform the following steps to delete a row or column.

9-12

1. Select one or more cells inside the row(s) or column(s) you want to delete.
• If you want to delete lines 2 through 4, for example, you could select A2:B4, C2:C4, or any
other range of cells that includes the lines to be deleted.
• If you want to delete columns A and B, for example, you could select A1:B1, A2:B4, etc.
2. Press (DEL).
• This enters delete standby. If you decide you want to cancel the delete operation at this
time, press ).
3. To delete the entire line(s) that include the cells you selected in step 1, press (ROW). To
delete the entire column, press (COL).

S To delete the contents of all the cells in a spreadsheet
1. Press (DEL)(ALL).
2. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press (Yes) to delete the data or
(No) to cancel without deleting anything.

S To insert a row or column of blank cells
1. Perform one of the following operations to specify the location of the insert and the number
of rows or columns to be inserted.
• To insert rows
Starting with the row immediately below of the row where you want the insert to be
performed, select the same number of rows that you want to insert.
Example: To insert three rows above row 2, you could select A2:A4, B2:C4, etc.
• To insert columns
Starting with the column immediately to the right of the column where you want the insert
to be performed, select the same number of columns that you want to insert.
Example: To insert three columns to the left of column B, you could select B2:D4,
B10:D20, etc.
2. Press (INS).
• This will enter insert standby. If you decide you want to cancel the insert operation at this
time, press ).
3. Press (ROW) to insert the applicable number of rows or (COL) to insert columns.
• A Range ERROR occurs if an insert operation causes existing cells that contain data to
move outside the range of A1:Z999.

S To clear the contents of specific cells
Select the cell or range of cells you want to clear and then press (CLR).

9-13

3. Using Special S • SHT Mode Commands
The S • SHT mode has a number of special commands like CellSum(, which returns the sum
of a range of cells, and CellIf(, which specifies branching conditions. These special commands
can be used inside of formulas.

I Special S • SHT Mode Command List
“Input Key Operation” operations can be performed during cell input only.
You can omit anything enclosed in brackets ([ ]) in the Syntax of each command.
Command

Description

CellIf(
(Branch Condition)

Returns Expression 1 when the equality or inequality provided as
the branch condition is true, and Expression 2 when it is false.
Input Key Operation: (If)
Syntax: CellIf(equality, expression 1, expression 2[)] or
CellIf(inequality, expression 1, expression 2[)]
Example: =CellIf(A1>B1, A1, B1)
Returns the value of A1 when {Cell A1 value} > {Cell B1 value}.
Otherwise, returns the value of B1.

CellMin(
(Cell Minimum Value)

Returns the minimum value in a specified range of cells.
Input Key Operation: (CEL)(Min)
Syntax: CellMin(start cell:end cell[)]
Example: =CellMin(A3:C5)
Returns the minimum value of the data in cell range A3:C5.

CellMax(
(Cell Maximum Value)

Returns the maximum value in a specified range of cells.
Input Key Operation: (CEL)(Max)
Syntax: CellMax(start cell:end cell[)]
Example: =CellMax(A3:C5)
Returns the maximum value of the data in cell range A3:C5.

CellMean(
(Mean of Cells)

Returns the mean value in a specified range of cells.
Input Key Operation: (CEL)(Mean)
Syntax: CellMean(start cell:end cell[)]
Example: =CellMean(A3:C5)
Returns the mean value of the data in cell range A3:C5.

CellMedian(
(Median of Cells)

Returns the median value in a specified range of cells.
Input Key Operation: (CEL)(Med)
Syntax: CellMedian(start cell:end cell[)]
Example: =CellMedian(A3:C5)
Returns the median value of the data in cell range A3:C5.

CellSum(
(Sum of Cells)

Returns the sum of the data in a specified range of cells.
Input Key Operation: (CEL)(Sum)
Syntax: CellSum(start cell:end cell[)]
Example: =Cellsum(A3:C5)
Returns the sum of the data in cell range A3:C5.
9-14

CellProd(
(Product of Cells)

Returns the product of the data in a specified range of cells.
Input Key Operation: (CEL)(Prod)
Syntax: CellProd(start cell:end cell[)]
Example: =CellProd(B3:B5)
Returns the product of the data in cell range B3:B5.

I S • SHT Mode Command Example
This example inputs the special S • SHT mode formula CellSum( into cell C1 in order to
calculate the sum of all the data in cell range A1:B5. It is assumed that there is already data in
the cell range A1:B5.
1. Move the cell cursor to cell C1 and then perform the following operation.

	(CEL)(Sum)
)?T(A)@(:)?J(b)D
• You can perform the following operation, which uses the
GRAB function (page 9-9) and CLIP function (page 9-5)
in place of the underlined part in the above operation.
)(GRAB)(TOPk)

(Enters the GRAB mode and moves the cursor to A1.)

G(CLIP)CAAAA

(Specifies the selection range for the CLIP function.)

U
2. Press U to finalize input of the formula.

4. Drawing Statistical Graphs, and Performing
Statistical and Regression Calculations
When you want to check the correlation between two sets of data (such as temperature and
the price of some product), trends become easier to spot if you draw a graph that uses one set
of data as the x-axis and the other set of data as the y-axis.
With the spreadsheet you can input the values for each set of data and draw a scatter plot or
other types of graphs. Performing regression calculations on the data will produce a regression
formula and correlation coefficient, and you can overlay a regression graph over the scatter
plot.
S • SHT mode graphing, statistical calculations, and regression calculations use the same
functions as the STAT mode. The following shows an operation example that is unique to the
S • SHT mode.

9-15

I Example of Statistical Graph Operations (GRPH Menu)
Input the following data and draw a statistical graph (scatter plot in this example).
0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2

(x-axis data)

–2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4

(y-axis data)

S To input data and draw a statistical graph (scatter plot)
1. Input the statistical calculation data into the spreadsheet.
• Here we will input the x-axis data into column A, and the y-axis data into column B.
2. Select the range of cells you want to graph (A1:B5).

3. Press (E)(GRPH) to display the GRPH menu, and then press (GRPH1).
• This will produce a scatter plot of the data in the range
of cells you selected in step 2 of this procedure.
• The graph shown here is what is produced under
initial default S • SHT mode settings. You can change
the configuration of graph settings on the screen that
appears when you press (SET) on the GRPH
menu. For details see “General Graph Settings Screen
Operations” below.

I General Graph Settings Screen Operations
You can use the general graph setting screen to specify the range of data to be used for
graphing, and to select the type of graph to be drawn.

S To configure statistical graph settings
1. Input the statistical calculation data into the spreadsheet and then select the range of cells
you want to graph.
• Actually, the above step is not necessary at this point. You also could configure settings
first before inputting data and selecting the range of cells to be graphed.
2. Press (E)(GRPH)(SET).
• This will display the general graph settings screen (StatGraph1 in this example).
You can configure the setting for the item that is
highlighted on the screen.

A function menu will appear when certain
setting items are selected.

9-16

• The number of columns you select in step 1 will determine what information is input
automatically on the general graph settings screen.
If you select this
number of columns:

This information will be input automatically:

1

XCellRange

2

XCellRange, YCellRange

3

XCellRange, YCellRange, Frequency

• The following describes each of the setting items for this screen.
Item

Description

StatGraph1

Select the name of the setup you want. You can have up to three
different setups registered, named StatGraph 1, 2, or 3.

Graph Type

Select the graph type. The initial default setting is Scat (scatter plot).

XCellRange

Specifies the cell range assigned to the graph x-axis (XCellRange).
Only XCellRange is displayed for some Graph Types.

YCellRange

Specifies the cell range assigned to the graph y-axis (YCellRange).
The YCellRange is not displayed for some Graph Types.

Frequency

Specifies the range cells that contain values indicating the frequency
of each graph data item. Select (1) if you do not want to use
frequency values.

Mark Type

Specify the type of mark (U, s, or •) to use as the mark on the scatter
plot.

3. Use D and A to move the highlighting to the setting item you want to change. On the
function menu that appears, select the setting you want.
• For details about the StatGraph1, Graph Type, and Mark Type settings, see “To display the
general graph settings screen” (page 6-2).
• If you want to change the XCellRange, YCellRange, or Frequency setting, move the
highlighting to the item you want to change and then input the cell range directly, or select
(CELL) ((CELL) for Frequency) and then edit the currently input range. When
inputting a cell range manually, use (:) to enter a colon (:) between two cells that define
the range.
4. After configuring the required settings, press ) or U.

I Example of Statistical Calculation Operation (CALC Menu)
This example uses the data from the “Drawing a Scatter Diagram and xy Line Graph” (page
6-9) to perform paired-variable statistical calculations.
0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2

(x-data)

–2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4

(y-data)

9-17

S To perform paired-variable statistical calculations and regression
calculations
1. Input the above x-data into cells A1:A5 of the
spreadsheet and the y-data into cells B2:B5, and then
select the range of the cells where you input the data (A1:
B5).

2. Press (E)(CALC) to display the CALC menu, and
then press (2VAR).
• This will display a screen of paired variable calculation
results based on the data you selected in step 1. Use
C and B to scroll the result screen. To close the
screen, press ).
• For information about the meaning of each of the values
on the result screen, see “Displaying the Calculation
Results of a Drawn Paired-Variable Graph” on page
6-14.
3. To return to the spreadsheet screen, press ).

I Using the Statistical Calculation Data Range Specification Screen
You can use a special setting screen to specify the range of data to be used for statistical
calculation.

S To specify the data range for statistical calculation
1. Input the statistical calculation data into the spreadsheet and then select its range of cells.
2. Press (E)(CALC)(SET).
• This will display a setting screen like the one shown to
the right.

• The number of columns you select in step 1 will determine what information is input
automatically on the statistical calculation data range specification screen.
If you select this
number of columns:

This information will be input automatically:

1

1Var XCell and 2Var XCell

2

1Var Freq and 2Var YCell

3

2Var Freq

9-18

• The following describes each of the setting items for this screen.
Item

Description

1Var XCell
1Var Freq

The cell range data specified here is used for variable x and
Frequency values when performing single-variable statistical
calculations.

2Var XCell
2Var YCell
2Var Freq

The cell range data specified here is used for variable x, variable y,
and Frequency values when performing paired-variable statistical
calculations.

3. If you want to change the cell range, use D and A to move the highlighting to the item
you want to change and the input the new cell range.
• To input the colon (:), press (:).
• To edit the currently input cell range, press (CELL) (in the case of 1Var XCell, 2Var
XCell, and 2Var YCell) or (CELL) (in the case of 1Var Freq and 2Var Freq).
4. After configuring the required settings, press ) or U.

I STAT Mode and S • SHT Mode Function Menu Correspondence Table
In both the STAT mode and the S • SHT mode, statistical graph functions are on the GRPH
function menu and statistical/regression calculation functions are on the CALC function menu.
The structures of these menus and their submenus are the same in the STAT mode and the
S • SHT mode. For details about each menu item, refer to the pages referenced in the table
below.
For information about
this menu item:

Refer to:

{GRPH} - {GPH1}

“Changing Graph Parameters” (page 6-1)

{GRPH} - {GPH2}
{GRPH} - {GPH3}
{GRPH} - {SEL}

“Graph draw/non-draw status” (page 6-3)

{GRPH} - {SET}

“Changing Graph Parameters” (page 6-1)
“General graph settings”(page 6-1)
“To display the general graph settings screen”(page 6-2)
“General Graph Settings Screen Operations” (page 9-16)

{CALC} - {1VAR}

“Single-Variable Statistical Calculations” (page 6-15)

{CALC} - {2VAR}

“Paired-Variable Statistical Calculations” (page 6-15)

{CALC} - {REG}

“Regression Calculation” (page 6-16)

{CALC} - {SET}

“Using the Statistical Calculation Data Range Specification
Screen” (page 9-18)

9-19

5. S • SHT Mode Memory
You can use the calculator’s different types of memory (variables, list memory, file memory,
matrix memory) to store data, and recall data from a memory into the spreadsheet.

I Saving Spreadsheet Data to a Memory
The following table shows an overview of the store operations for each type of memory. For
details about each operation, see the example operations following the table.
Memory Type

Store Operation

Variables
(A ~ Z, r, Q)

You can assign the content of a single cell to a variable.
While a single cell is selected, press (E)(STO)(VAR), and
then specify the variable name on the screen that appears.

List Memory
(List 1 ~ List 26)

You can store data in a range of cells in a single row or a single
column in list memory.
While a range of cells in a single row or single column is selected,
press (E)(STO)(LIST), and then specify the list number
on the screen that appears.

File Memory
(File 1 to File 6)

You can store data in a range of cells that spans a multiple rows
and columns in file memory. While a range of cells is selected, press
(E)(STO)(FILE), and then specify the file number on the
screen that appears.
The first column of the selected range is stored in the specified file
as List 1, the second column is saved as List 2, and so on.

Matrix Memory
(Mat A ~ Mat Z)

You can store data in a range of cells that spans a multiple rows and
columns in matrix memory. While a range of cells is selected, press
(E)(STO)(MAT), and then specify the matrix name on the
screen that appears.
The first column of the selected range is stored in the specified
matrix as List 1, the second column is saved as List 2, and so on.

Important!
The following describes what happens if you try to store data in memory when a cell does not
contain any data, when a cell contains text, or when ERROR is displayed for a cell.
• If you are assigning data to a variable, an error occurs.
• If you are storing data in list memory, file memory, or matrix memory, 0 is written into the
applicable cell(s).

S Example: To store column data in list memory
1. In a single column, select the range of cells you want to store in list memory.
• For example, you could select A1:A10.
2. Press (E)(STO)(LIST).
• This will display a screen like the one shown to the right.
The “Cell Range” setting will show the range of cells you
selected in step 1.
3. Press A to move the highlighting to “List[1-26]”.
9-20

4. Input the List number (1 to 26) of the list memory where you want to store the data and then
press U.
• Performing the next step will overwrite any data currently stored under the list memory
number you specified here with the data in the range of cells specified by “CellRange”.
5. Press (EXE) or the U key to store the data.

I Recalling Data from Memory to a Spreadsheet
The following table shows an overview of the recall operations for each type of memory. For
details about each operation, see the example operations following the table.
Memory Type

Recall Operation

List Memory
(List 1 ~ List 26)

You can recall data from a specified list memory to a range of
cells in a single row or a single column. While the first cell of
the range in a single row or single column is selected, press
(E)(RCL)(LIST), and then specify the list number on the
screen that appears.
Whether the data is recalled in a column direction or row direction
depends on the Setup screen’s “Move” setting (page 1-29).

File Memory
(File 1 ~ File 6)

You can recall data from a specified file memory to the spreadsheet.
Select the cell you want to be the upper left corner of the recalled
data and then press (E)(RCL)(FILE). Next, specify the file
memory number on the screen that appears.

Matrix Memory
(Mat A ~ Mat Z)

You can recall data from a specified matrix memory to the
spreadsheet. Select the cell you want to be the upper left corner of
the recalled data and then press (E)(RCL)(MAT). Next,
specify the matrix name on the screen that appears.

S Example: To recall data from a matrix memory to a spreadsheet
1. On the spreadsheet, select the upper left cell of the range where you want the recalled data
to be input.
2. Press (E)(RCL)(MAT).
• This will display a screen like the one shown to the right.
The “1st Cell” setting will show the name of the cell you
selected in step 1.
3. Input the name (A to Z) of the matrix memory whose data you want to recall and then press
U.
4. Press (EXE) or U to recall the data.

Important!
When recalling list memory, file memory, or matrix memory data, an error will occur if the
recalled data runs outside the allowable range of the spreadsheet (A1:Z999).

9-21

Chapter 10 eActivity
You can use the eActivity mode to input data into an eActivity file. You can input text and
numeric expressions, and also paste data (like graphs, tables, etc.) from the calculator’s builtin applications as “strips”.

eActivity files can be used by a teacher, for example, to create math problems or exercises that
provide hints to solutions, for distribution to students. Students can use eActivity files to keep
classroom notes, memos of problems and their solutions, etc.

Important!
• The fx-7400GII and fx-9750GII are not equipped with the e • ACT mode.

1. eActivity Overview
The first thing that appears when you select the e • ACT mode on the Main Menu is the file
menu.

10
No e • ACT mode files in memory

At least one e • ACT mode file in

Opening a file in the eActivity mode will display a workspace screen that you can use for
inputting and editing text, calculation expressions, and other data.
Calculator’s
display area
Text lines
Strip

Math lines
Stop line

10-1

The following explains the type of data you can input and edit in an eActivity file.
Text line.................A text line can be used to input characters, numbers, and expressions as
text.
Calculation line......Use the calculation line to enter an executable calculation formula. The
result will appear in the following line. Calculations are performed the same
way as they are performed in the RUN • MAT mode, while natural input is
enabled.
Stop line................A stop line can be used to stop calculation at a particular point.
Strip ......................A strip can be used to embed data into an eActivity from the Graph, Conics
Graph, Spreadsheet, or other built-in applications.

2. eActivity Function Menus
I File List Function Menu
• {OPEN} ... Opens an eActivity file or folder.
• {NEW} ... Creates a new eActivity file.
• {DEL} ... Deletes an eActivity file.
• {SRC} ... Searches for an eActivity file.
• {SD}/{SMEM} ... Toggles the files displayed in the file menu between calculator main memory
files and SD card memory files (models that support SD cards only). This menu item
shows {SD} while the file menu is showing main memory files and {SMEM} while the file
menu is showing SD card files.
• Only the (NEW) function key is are displayed when there are no eActivity files in memory.
• At least 128 kbytes of memory area is required when the e • ACT mode is used for the first
time. A Memory Full error will appear if there is not enough memory available.

I Workspace Screen Function Menu
Part of the content of the workspace function menu depends on the line (or strip) that is
currently selected.
• Workspace Screen Common Menu Items
• {FILE} ... Displays the following file operation submenu.
• {SAVE} ... Saves the file currently being edited.
• {SV • AS} ... Saves the file currently being edited under another name.
• {OPT} ... See “Optimizing the Storage Memory or SD Card Memory” on page 11-11.
• {CAPA} ... Displays a screen showing the data size of the file being edited and how much
memory capacity remains.
• {STRP} ... Inserts a strip.
• {JUMP} ... Displays the following submenu to control cursor movement.
• {TOP}/{BTM}/{PgUp}/{PgDn} ... See page 10-4.
• {DEL-L} ... Deletes the line that is currently selected or where the cursor is located.

10-2

• {INS} ... Displays the following insert submenu, for inserting a new line above the line that is
currently selected or where the cursor is located.
• {TEXT} ... Inserts a text line.
• {CALC} ... Inserts a calculation line.
• {STOP} ... Inserts a calculation stop line.
• {MAT} ... Displays the Matrix Editor (page 10-7).
• {LIST} ... Displays the List Editor (page 10-7).
• Menu when a Text Line is Selected
• {TEXT} ... Changes the current line from a text line to a calculation line.
• {CHAR} ... Displays a menu for inputting math symbols, special symbols, and characters of
various languages.
• {Aa} ... Toggles between uppercase and lowercase input while alpha character input is
enabled (by pressing the ? key).
• {MATH} ... Displays the MATH menu (page 1-12).
• Menu when a Calculation Line or Stop Line is Selected
• {CALC} ... Changes the current line from a calculation line to a text line.
• {MATH} ... Same as {MATH} under “Menu when a Text Line is Selected”.
• Menu when a Strip is Selected
• {FILE} ... Displays the following file operation submenu.
• {SAVE}/{SV • AS}/{OPT}/{CAPA} ... Same as the {FILE} submenus under “Workspace
Screen Common Menu Items”.
• {SIZE} ... Displays the size of the strip at the current cursor position.
• {CHAR} ... Same as {CHAR} under “Menu when a Text Line is Selected”.
• {Aa} ... Same as {Aa} under “Menu when a Text Line is Selected”.

3. eActivity File Operations
This section explains the different file operations you can perform from the eActivity file menu
screen. All of the operations in this section can be performed while the file menu is displayed.
This section does not cover folder operations. For details about folders, see “Chapter 11
Memory Manager”.

S To create a new file
1. While the file menu is displayed, press (NEW).
• This will display a file name input screen.

2. Input up to 8 characters for the file name and then press U.
• This displays a blank workspace screen.
Cursor
• The following are the characters allowed in a file name.
A to Z, {, }, ’, ˜, 0 to 9
10-3

S To open a file
Use D and A to highlight the file you want to open, and then press (OPEN) or U*.
* If an error occurs, delete capture memory and clipboard data, or transfer the data to your
computer.

S To delete a file
1. Use D and A to highlight the file you want to delete, and then press (DEL).
• This will display a “Delete eActivity?” confirmation message.
2. Press (Yes) to delete the file or (No) to cancel without deleting anything.

S To search for a file
1. While the file menu is displayed, press (SRC).
• This will display a file search screen.
2. Enter part or the entire name of the file you want to find.
• File name characters are searched from left to right. Entering “IT” will count names like
ITXX, ITABC, IT123 as hits, but not names like XXIT or ABITC.
3. Press U.
• If a name matches the text you input in step 2, it will be
selected on the file menu.

• The message “Not Found” will appear if a match cannot be found. Press the ) key to
close the message dialog box.

4. Inputting and Editing Data
All of the operations in this section are performed on the eActivity workspace screen. Use the
procedures under “eActivity File Operations” (page 10-3) to create a new file or to open an
existing file.

I Cursor Movement and Scroll Operations
When you want to do this:

Use this key operation:

Move the cursor forward and back

D or A

Scroll one screen forward

D or
(E)(JUMP)(PgUp)

Scroll one screen back

A or
(E)(JUMP)(PgDn)

Move the cursor to the beginning of the workspace screen

(E)(JUMP)(TOP)

Move the cursor to the end of the workspace screen

(E)(JUMP)(BTM)

10-4

I Inputting into a Text Line
Use a text line to input alphanumeric characters, expressions, etc.

S Inputting characters and expressions as text
1. Move the cursor to a text line.
• While the cursor is in a text line, “TEXT” will be displayed for the F3 function menu item.
This indicates that text input is enabled.
Text line cursor

 key menu becomes “TEXT”.
• “CALC” will be displayed for the F3 function menu item if the cursor is located in a
calculation line. Pressing (CALC) will change the calculation line to a text line.
• If the cursor is located in a strip, use D and A to move to the cursor to a text line.
• On the function menu, selecting {INS} and then {TEXT} will insert a new text line above the
line where the cursor is currently located.
2. Input the text or expression you want into the text strip.
• See “Text Line Input and Editing Operations” described below.

S Text Line Input and Editing Operations
• You can input up to 255 bytes of text into a single text line. Text in the text line wraps
automatically to fit inside the display area (Word Wrap Function). Note, however, that
numeric expressions and commands do not wrap.*1 Scroll arrows (;) will appear on the
left and right sides of the calculation line to let you know some of the calculation does not fit
within the calculation line display area. In this case, you can use the left and right cursor keys
to scroll the calculation.
• The (Aja) function key toggles between upper-case and lower-case input. This function
is available only while alpha text input is enabled. See page 2-7 for details. The text line
cursor is while upper-case input is selected, and during lower-case input.
• Press U to input a carriage return into text. No symbol will be displayed for a carriage
return.
• If the text is wrapped into multiple lines, pressing the
key will delete the line where the
cursor is currently located only. The part of the text that is wrapped to other lines will not be
deleted.
• Always use natural input (page 1-10) to input an expression into a text line.
*1 Also, any word that includes the symbol “ ’ ”, “ { ” or “ ”, which are input using the menu
that appears when you press (CHAR), does not wrap.

10-5

I Inputting into a Calculation Line
Inputting a calculation expression into an eActivity calculation line and pressing U will display
the calculation result in the following line. Such a calculation line can be used in the same way
as the RUN • MAT mode (page 1-3). A calculation line and its result make up one set.
• Note that the word wrap function does not apply in the case of math lines. Scroll arrows
(;) will appear on the left and right sides of the calculation line to let you know some of
the calculation does not fit within the calculation line display area. In this case, you can use
the left and right cursor keys to scroll the calculation.

S To input a calculation formula into an eActivity
1. Move the cursor to a calculation line.
• While the cursor is in a calculation line, “CALC” will be displayed for the F3 function menu
item. This indicates that calculation expression input is enabled.

Math line cursor

This will cause the  key menu to change to
“CALC”.
• “TEXT” will be displayed for the F3 function menu item if the cursor is located in a text line.
Pressing (CALC) will change the calculation line to a text line.
• If the cursor is located in a strip, use D and A to move to the cursor to a calculation
line.
• On the function menu, selecting {INS} and then {CALC} will insert a new calculation line
above the line where the cursor is currently located.
2. Input a calculation expression (Example: Q$(P)AE).
• Calculation line input and editing operations are the
same as those in the natural input RUN • MAT mode.

3. To obtain the result of the calculation, press U.

10-6

S Matrix Calculations Using the Matrix Editor
Selecting {MAT} on the function menu displays the Matrix Editor.
Matrix Editor operations and matrix calculations in the eActivity mode are the fundamentally
identical to those in the RUN • MAT mode. For details about the Matrix Editor and matrix
calculation operations, see “Matrix Calculations” (page 2-36). Note, however, that eActivity
mode Matrix Editor operations and matrix calculations differ from those in the RUN • MAT
mode as described below.
• eActivity mode matrix variable values are saved separately for each file. Matrix variable
values will be different from those produced when called from a non-eActivity mode.

S List Calculations Using the List Editor
Selecting {LIST} on the function menu displays the List Editor.
List Editor operations in the eActivity mode are identical to those in the STAT mode (“Inputting
and Editing a List”, page 3-1). This processing and calculations are fundamentally the
identical to those in the RUN • MAT mode (“Manipulating List Data” on page 3-5, “Arithmetic
Calculations Using Lists” on page 3-10). Note, however, that eActivity mode List Editor
operations and list calculations differ from those in other modes as described below.
• The eActivity mode List Editor function menu provides only screen two of the STAT mode
List Editor function menu.
• To return to the workspace screen from the List Editor in the eActivity mode, press ).
• In the eActivity mode, values for list variables are saved separately for each file. List variable
values will be different from those produced when called from a non-eActivity mode.

I Inserting a Calculation Stop Line
Pressing U after you edit a calculation line on a workspace screen that contains multiple
calculation lines will cause all of the calculations following the edited line to be re-calculated.
Re-calculation can take quite a bit of time if there are a large number of calculation lines or
if some of the calculations are complex. Inserting a calculation stop line will stop the recalculation process at the point where the line is located.

S To insert a stop line
On the function menu, select {INS} and then {STOP} to insert a stop line above the currently
selected line or strip.

I Using Strips
Strips are tools that let you embed built-in application data into an eActivity file. Only one
built-in application screen can be associated with each strip, and the strip can store the data
(graphs, etc.) produced by the screen.
The table below shows the built-in application screens that can be inserted into strips. The
“Strip Name” column shows the names included on the dialog box that appears when you
press (STRP).

10-7

Strip Data Type Table
Data Type

Strip Name

RUN • MAT mode calculation data (When the RUN • MAT mode is
called from an eActivity, it starts up in the natural input mode.)

Run (Math)

GRAPH mode graph screen data

Graph

GRAPH mode graph relation list screen data

Graph Editor

TABLE mode table relation list screen data

Table Editor

CONICS mode graph screen data

Conics Graph

CONICS mode function list screen data

Conics Editor

STAT mode statistical graph screen data

Stat Graph

STAT mode List Editor data

List Editor

EQUA mode calculation solution screen data

Solver

RECUR mode recursion type selection screen

Recur Editor

Notes screen data (Notes is a special eActivity application. See “Notes
Strips” on page 10-10 for more information.)

Notes

RUN • MAT mode Matrix Editor data

Matrix Editor

EQUA mode simultaneous equation solution screen data

Simul Equation

EQUA mode high-order equation solution screen data

Poly Equation

DYNA mode graph screen data

Dynamic Graph

TVM mode calculation solution screen data

Financial

S • SHT mode spreadsheet screen data

SpreadSheet

E-CON2 mode setup wizard data

Econ SetupWizard

E-CON2 mode advanced setup data

Econ AdvancSetup

E-CON2 mode advanced setup data
(Executing this strip starts sampling immediately based on the setup
information that is recorded to the strip the first time the strip is
executed.)

Econ Sampling

E-CON2 mode advanced setup data
(Executing this strip graphs sampled data that is recorded to the strip
the first time the strip is executed.)

Econ Graph

S To insert a strip
1. Move the cursor to the location where you want to insert
the strip.

10-8

2. Press (STRP).
• This will display a dialog box with a list if insertable
strips. For information about the display names and
data types that appear on this dialog box, see the “Strip
Data Type Table” (page 10-8).

3. Use A and D to select the strip that corresponds to the type of data you want to insert.
• In this example we will select “Graph” (GRAPH mode graph screen data).
4. Press U.
• This will insert the type of strip you selected (Graph strip in this example) one line above
the line where you located the cursor in step 1 of this procedure.
5. Input up to 16 characters for the strip title, and then press
U.

6. Press U again to start creating strip data.
• This will start up the built in application for the selected
strip type (GRAPH mode in this example), and display
the graph screen. At this point, a blank graph screen
appears because there is no data yet.

7. Press ) to display the graph function list screen.
8. Enter the function you want to graph.
1 2
X – 1)
(Example: Y =
2

9. Press (DRAW).
• This will graph the function you entered.

10. To return to the eActivity workspace screen, press ?(	).
• The data that is graphed in step 8 will be saved in the Graph strip.
• The saved graph data is linked to this Graph strip only. It is independent of data for
modes that are entered from the Main Menu.
11. Pressing U here again will display the graph screen, and draw the graph based on the
data saved by the strip.
10-9

S Notes Strips
“Notes” is a special eActivity text editor that comes in handy when you want to write long text
explanations on the workspace screen. You can call up the Notes screen from a Notes strip on
the workspace screen. Input and editing operations on the Notes screen are identical to those
you use for an eActivity text line.

The following describes the Notes screen function menu items.
• {JUMP}... Displays a JUMP menu that you can use to jump to the top ((TOP)) of the data,
the bottom ((BTM)) of the data, the previous page ((PgUp)), or the next page
((PgDn)).
• {DEL-L} ... Deletes the line that is currently selected or where the cursor is located.
• {INS} ... Inserts one new line above the line where the cursor is currently located.
• {MATH} ... Displays the MATH menu (page 1-12).
• {CHAR} ... Displays a menu for inputting math symbols, special symbols, and characters of
various languages.
• {Aa} ... Toggles between uppercase and lowercase input while alpha character input is
enabled (by pressing the ? key).

S To change the title of a strip
1. Use A and D to select the strip whose title you want to change.
2. Input up to 16 characters for the strip title, and then press U.
• The remainder of the existing title will disappear as soon as you input the first character.
Input the new title in its entirety. If you want to partially edit the existing title, press B or
C first to move the cursor.
• Pressing ) instead of U will exit trip title editing without changing anything.

S To call an application from a strip
Use A and D to select the strip whose application you want to call and then press U.
• This will display the application screen that corresponds to the selected strip. If the strip
already contains data, the application is called using the data that was last saved.
• If you select a Conics Graph strip and press U without inputting any graph data, the Conics
Editor screen appears in place of the Conics Graph screen.

S To toggle between the eActivity workspace screen and an application screen
called from a strip
Press ?(	).
Each press of ?(	) toggles between the eActivity workspace screen and the
application screen called from the strip.
10-10

S To switch from an application screen called up from a strip to another
application screen
Press (
). On the dialog box that appears, use A and D to select the name of
an application and then press U.

S To display the strip memory usage screen
1. Use A and D to select the strip whose memory usage screen you want to view.
2. Press (FILE)(SIZE).
• This will display the memory usage screen of the
currently selected strip.

3. To exit the memory usage screen, press ).

S To delete a line or strip
1. Move the cursor to the line or strip you want to delete.
• If you move the cursor to a calculation line, note that both the calculation and the result will
be deleted.
2. Press (E)(DEL-L).
• This causes a confirmation message to appear.
3. Press (Yes) to delete, or (No) to cancel without deleting anything.

I Saving a File
Use the procedures in this section to save a file after inputting or editing it on the workspace
screen.
An eActivity file for OS Version 2.00 or later may have a file name extension of “g2e”.
Performing either of the following operations on a calculator model covered by this manual
(with OS Version 2.00 or later operating system) to save an eActivity file always will cause the
extension “g2e” to be appended to the file name.
• Saving a newly created file
• Saving an existing file using the “save as” operation ((FILE)(SV-AS))
If you save an eActivity file using a calculator model covered by this manual to save a file with
a file name extension “g1e” (a file transferred from an older version calculator), the file name
extension will be determined according to the following rules.
• The “g2e” extension is used for an eActivity file that includes data for new features (except for
math functions and commands) added by OS Version 2.00 or later.
Here, the expression “data for new features added by OS Version 2.00 or later” means, for
example, calculation result data displayed in  or P format.
• The “g1e” extension is used for eActivity files other than those described above.

10-11

S To replace the existing file with the new version
Press (FILE)(SAVE) to save the currently open file.

S To save a file under a new name
1. On the eActivity workspace screen, press (FILE)(SV-AS).
• This will display a file name input screen.
2. Input up to 8 characters for the file name and then press U.
• If a file already exists with the same file name you enter in step 2, a message will appear
asking if you want to replace the existing file with the new one. Press (Yes) to replace
the existing file, or (No) to cancel the save operation and return to the file name input
dialog box in step 2.

Important!
• An eActivity file with the “g2e” file name extension cannot be opened on a calculator running
an operating system older than OS Version 2.00.
• Opening an eActivity file with the “g1e” filename extension, inputting functions added with
OS Version 2.00 or later, and then saving the file may cause the new save to retain the “g1e”
file name extension. Though you will be able to open such a file on a calculator running an
operating system older than OS Version 2.00 (since it has the “g1e” file name extension), you
will not be able to use the math functions and commands added since OS Version 2.00.

I Displaying the eActivity Memory Usage Screen
The maximum size of an eActivity file is approximately 30,000 bytes.* You can use the
eActivity file memory usage screen to check how much memory capacity remains for the file
you are currently working on.
* Actual maximum file size depends on capture memory and clipboard memory usage, and
may be less than 30,000 bytes.

S To display the eActivity memory usage screen
On the workspace screen, press (FILE)(CAPA).

File usage
Remaining file memory capacity

To exit the memory usage screen, press ).

S To return to the file list from the workspace screen
Press ).
If a confirmation message appears asking if you want to save the current file appears, perform
one of the operations described below.

10-12

To do this:

Press this key:

Overwrite the existing eActivity file with the edited version and return
to the file list

(Yes)

Return to the file list without saving the file you are currently editing

(No)

Return to the eActivity workspace screen

5. eActivity Guide

(fx-9860G Slim only)

eActivity Guide is a function that helps you navigate through scientific function calculation
operations.
You can perform calculator operations simply by following the instructions that appear on the
display.
• Using eActivity Guide to prepare lessons makes it possible for students to become familiar
with calculator operations without using the user’s guide.
• Students can learn operations in the classroom are their own pace.
Creating a Guide
Key operations are recorded in each eActivity strip. You can also add comments about key
operations.
Since a guide records only key operations that are contained within a strip, operations
performed after exiting the strip (to go to another strip, to go to another file) cannot be
recorded.
Running a Guide
Running a guide that you created will sequentially display key operations and comments.
The student can become familiar with calculator operations simply by performing input as
instructed.
Three Types of Operation Patterns
eActivity Guide has three operation pattern types as described below. A guide can be created
by combining these three patterns.
• 1-key Operation: A comment is attached to each key operation.
• n-key Operation: One comment is attached to a key operation sequence.
• AUTO Operation: A key operation sequence is performed automatically, with one comment
attached to the auto operation.
(Examples: Graph and box zoom; specification of an integration graph
range)

I Creating a Guide
S To enter the guide creation mode
1. On the eActivity workspace screen, select a strip and then press (E) to display page two
of the function menu.
10-13

• In this example we will select a Graph Editor strip.

2. Press (GUIDE).
• This will enter the guide creation mode and display the
operation pattern selection screen.
• {nKEYS} ... {creates an n-key operation}
• {1-KEY} ... {creates a 1-key operation}
• {AUTO} ... {creates an AUTO operation}
• {END} ... {exits the guide creation mode}
• {PLAY} ... {plays back recorded key operations}
You should also select this option when you want to select a recorded key
operation and edit it. PLAY does not appear if there are no key operations
recorded.
• If you press (GUIDE) while a strip you selected already contains data, a confirmation will
appear asking whether you want to delete the existing operation data.

(Yes) ... Deletes the strip’s existing operation data and starts guide creation from an
empty strip.
(No) ... Cancels guide creation and returns to the eActivity workspace screen.

S To create an n-key operation
1. On the operation pattern selection screen, press (nKEYS).
• This will display the dialog box shown below.
Key indicator

• (OK) ... Starts key input recording.
• D ... Displays the key indicator in the upper right corner.
• A ... Displays the key indicator in the lower right corner.
2. Press (OK).

10-14

3. Input the key operation sequence.
• In this example, we will input a graphing key sequence.
TV
@U
(Inputs the graph function.)
Indicates that recording is in
progress.

(DRAW)
(Draws the graph.)
(G-SLV)(E)(°dx)
(Selects the integration command.)

4. After input is complete, press

.

• This will display a comment box.
5. Input any comment text you want about the key operation
sequence.
• You can input up to two lines in the comment box.

6. After inputting comment text, press U to register the n-key operation input.
• This will return to the operation pattern selection screen.
You can now edit the guide by pressing (PLAY) and
selecting the key operation you want to change.

See “Editing a Guide” (page 10-18) for details about editing guides.

S To create a 1-key operation
The following operation assumes that you are continuing from the procedure under “To create
an n-key operation” (page 10-14).
1. On the operation pattern selection screen, press
(1-KEY).

2. Press a key.
• Here we will press U.
• This will display a comment box.
U (Executes the integration command.)
10-15

3. Input any comment text you want about the key operation sequence.
4. After inputting comment text, press U to register the 1-key operation input.
• This will return to the operation pattern selection screen. You can now edit the guide by
pressing (PLAY) and selecting the key operation you want to change.
See “Editing a Guide” (page 10-18) for details about editing guides.

S To create an AUTO operation
The following operation assumes that you are continuing from the procedure under “To create
a 1-key operation” (page 10-15).
1. On the operation pattern selection screen, press (AUTO).
• This will display the dialog box shown to the right.

2. Press (OK).

•  ... Executing the guide performs auto key input at low speed. Use this option for
operations that the teacher explains while they are being performed, and for trace
operations performed G-Solve analysis.
•  ... Executing the guide performs auto key input at medium speed. Use this option for
simple value input, expression input, and function menu operations.
•  ... Executing the guide performs auto key input at high speed. Use this option for
tracing or box zooming a graph.
•  ... Executing the guide performs auto key input at ultra-high speed. Use this option
when creating list or matrix data. This speed is too fast for the eye to follow.
3. Press , , , or .
4. Input the key operation sequence.
• Here we will input the following key sequence.
CCC…C (15 times)
U
5. After input is complete, press

.

• This will display a comment box.
6. Input any comment text you want about the key operation sequence.

10-16

7. After inputting comment text, press U to register the AUTO operation input.
• This will return to the operation pattern selection screen. You can now edit the guide by
pressing (PLAY) and selecting the key operation you want to change.

• ; key and < key operations are not recorded. The ; and < keys are disabled
while creating a guide. (Models with ; and < keys only.)
• Up to 999 key operations can be recorded per strip.

S To change the position of the comment box
While inputting comment text, you can use the function keys to change the display position
of the comment box. This capability comes in handy when an important part of the screen
becomes blocked by the comment box.
• {BTM} ... {displays the comment box at the bottom of the screen}
• {TOP} ... {displays the comment box at the top of the screen}
• {HIDE} ... {hides the comment box}

(BTM)

(TOP)

(HIDE)

S To exit the guide creation mode
1. While creating a guide, press (END).
• This will display the dialog box shown to the right.

• (Yes) ... Turns on the exit strip setting. When using the guide as a demo, the strip is
exited and the eActivity workspace screen returns to the display after the guide
is complete.
• (No) ... Turns off the exit strip setting. The strip is not exited when the guide is complete.
Select this option when you want students to continue operation using the strip
after the guide is complete.
2. Press (Yes) or (No).
• Exits the guide creation operation and returns to the eActivity workspace screen.
10-17

• An ongoing guide creation operation can be cancelled by pressing ?(	). The exit
strip dialog box will not appear when a guide creation operation is cancelled.
• Guide creation also canceled if the K key is pressed to change to another mode while a
guide creation operation is in progress. The exit strip dialog box will not appear in this case,
either.
• The amount of memory used by strips is calculated when you press (Yes) or (No). See
“To display the strip memory usage screen” (page 10-11) for more information.
• You cannot exit a guide creation operation while the application list (page 10-9) is on the
display. Select an application on the application list or close the application list, and then exit
guide creation.

I Editing a Guide
There are two methods that can be used to edit a guide.
• Editing of the guide you are currently creating
• Editing of the guide of an existing strip from the eActivity workspace screen

I Editing the Guide You Are Creating
S To display the key editing screen
In this example, we show how to display the @ key editing screen of a graph function
(Y1 = −X2 + 1) that is input at the end of the operation under “To create an n-key operation”
(page 10-14).
1. On the operation pattern selection screen, press
(PLAY).

•{

} ... {jumps to the first key}

•{

} ... {jumps back n keys}
Pressing this key will display a dialog box for input of a value to specify how many
keys to jump.

•{

} ... {starts auto play from the current position}
A dialog box appears which can be used to specify the playback speed. To stop
auto play, press
.

•{

} ... {jumps forward n keys}
Pressing this key will display a dialog box for input of a value to specify how many
keys to jump.

•{

} ... {jumps to the last key and displays the guide creation screen}

2. Press (

).

• This will display the dialog box shown to the right.

10-18

3. Input a value to specify the number of keys you want to jump and then press U.
• Here we want to jump to the @ key, so we will input FU.
This number indicates the number of the current key
operation from the beginning of the function. In the
case of an AUTO operation, the letter “A” is appended
to the beginning of this number (A005).

• {nKEYS} ... {inserts an n-key operation at the display position}
• {1-KEY} ... {inserts a 1-key operation at the display position}
• {EDIT} ... {starts editing of the key at the current position}
• {END} ... {exits the editing operation}
• {PLAY} ... {displays a dialog box for selecting the key to be edited}
• {NEXT} ... {displays the next key}
• Use D and A to change the key indicator display position.
D ... Displays the key indicator in the upper right corner.
A ... Displays the key indicator in the lower right corner.
4. Press (EDIT).
• This will display the @ key editing screen.
• {INS} ... {inserts one key before the current key}
• {OVW} ... {overwrites the current key}
• {NOTE} ... {edits the current comment}
• {AUTO} ... {inserts an AUTO operation after the current
key} See “To create an AUTO operation”
(page 10-16).
• {DEL} ... {deletes the current key}
• {DEL • A} ... {deletes everything from the current key to the end}

I Editing Example
In this example, we show how to edit the graph function (Y1 = −X2 + 1) that is input at the end
of the operation under “To create an n-key operation” (page 10-14).

S To change −X2 + 1 to −2X2 + 1 (by inserting a A key before the T key)
1. This will display the T key editing screen.

10-19

2. Press (INS).

3. Press A.
• This inputs a A key before the T key and displays
the guide creation screen from the T key.

S To change −2X2 + 1 to −2X2 + 2 (by overwriting the @ key with the A key)
1. This will display the @ key editing screen.

2. Press (OVW).

3. Press A.
• This will overwrite the @ key with the A key and
display the guide creation screen from the next key (U
key).

S To edit an n-key operation comment
1. This will display the  key editing screen.

2. Press (NOTE).

10-20

3. Edit the comment and then press U.
• This will display the guide creation screen from the 
key.

S To change −2X2 + 2 to 2X2 + 2 (by deleting the  key)
1. This will display the  key editing screen.

2. Press (DEL).

3. Press (Yes).
• This will delete the  key and display the guide
creation screen from the next key (A key).

S To exit a editing operation
1. Press (END).
2. Press (Yes) or (No).
• Exits the editing operation and returns to the eActivity workspace screen.

S To edit the guide of an existing strip from the eActivity workspace screen
1. On the eActivity workspace screen, select a strip that already has a guide and then press
(E) to display page two of the function menu.

10-21

2. Press (GUIDE).
• This will display the first key editing screen.

3. Operations from this points are identical to those under “Creating a Guide” (page 10-13) and
“Editing the Guide You Are Creating” (page 10-18).

S Running a Guide
This example shows how to run the guide created under “Creating a Guide” (page 10-13).
1. On the eActivity workspace screen, select the Graph strip and then press U.
• This will display the screen shown to the right.

2. Press the key indicated by the key indicator that appears in the upper or lower right corner
of the screen.
• This will cause the next key to be pressed to appear in
the upper or lower right corner.

3. Perform the key operation in accordance with the keys that appear on the screen.
• Exit Strip ON: U will appear in the upper or lower right
corner when the guide is complete.

• Exit Strip OFF: The strip will be freely usable when the guide is complete. Note, however,
that this operation does not save the strip.
4. If exit strip is turned on, press U.
• This will display the dialog box shown to the right.

• (Yes) ... Exits the strip and returns to the eActivity workspace screen.
• (No) ... Returns to the screen in step 3.
10-22

• Pressing a key that is different from the one displayed in the upper or lower right corner of
the screen will display the dialog box shown below. The guide operation cannot proceed if
you do not follow its instructions.

) or

...... Returns to the previous screen.

?(	).... Exits the strip and displays the eActivity workspace screen.
• Pressing
during auto key input of an AUTO operation will stop key input and display the
normal script screen. Guide playback cannot be restarted from the place where playback is
stopped.

I eActivity Guide Editing Techniques
S To edit a guide from the end
On the editing screen, press (PLAY)(

).

S To insert SETUP or V-Window setting changes into a key operation
sequence
On the editing screen, display the location where you want to insert the setting change
operation, insert an n-key operation, and then input the change operation.

S To allow students to continue with their own operation after executing a
problem guide
Input an n-key operation with the example, and specify “No” for the exit strip option at the end
of the guide creation operation.

S To create a guide that starts with list data input
Use an AUTO operation for the list data input operation when creating a guide that starts with
list data input. Select “Ultra-fast” for the play speed of the data input. This will cause the data to
be input at very high speed when the guide is executed.

10-23

Chapter 11 Memory Manager
fx-7400GII/fx-9750GII
These models support the following data operations: data display, search, and delete.

Important!
fx-7400GII/fx-9750GII calculators are not equipped with storage memory or an SD card slot.
Because of this, the storage memory and SD card memory operations described below are
not supported.
fx-9860GII/fx-9860GII SD/fx-9860G AU PLUS/fx-9860G Slim
These models are equipped with both a main memory and a storage memory, so the following
data operations are supported: data display, search, and delete, as well as data copy between
memories.
The main memory is a work area where you can input data, perform calculations, and run
programs. Data in the main memory is relatively safe, but it can be deleted by batteries going
dead or when you perform a full reset.
The storage memory uses “flash memory,” so data is safe even when power is interrupted.
Normally, you should use the storage memory for data you need to store securely for long
periods, loading data into the main memory only when you need it.
• Use of SD card memory (when an SD card is loaded in the SD card slot) also is supported
by the fx-9860GII SD.

1. Using the Memory Manager
From the Main Menu, select the MEMORY icon to enter the MEMORY mode.
• On the fx-7400GII/fx-9750GII, the main memory
information screen shown to the right will appear. For
information about using this screen, see “Memory
Information Screen” (page 11-2).

• On other models, the screen shown to the right appears.

• {MAIN} ... {displays main memory information}
• {SMEM} ... {displays storage memory information}
• {SD} ... {displays SD card memory information} (fx-9860GII SD only)
• {BKUP} ... {main memory backup}
• {OPT} ... {storage memory, SD card optimization}

11-1

11

I Memory Information Screen
The memory information screen shows information about one memory at a time: the
calculator’s main memory or storage memory, or the SD card memory.
• Since an fx-7400GII or fx-9750GII calculator has only
main memory, main memory contents only appear on the
main memory information screen.

• With other model calculators, perform one of the following MEMORY mode menu operations
to display the memory information screen you want.
When this memory information screen is displayed:

Press this key:

Main memory

(MAIN)

Storage memory

(SMEM)

SD card memory (fx-9860GII SD only)

(SD)

• Use the cursor D and A keys to move the highlighting and check the number of bytes
used by each type of data.
• Line 7 shows how many bytes of memory are currently unused in the currently selected
memory (main, storage, or SD card).
• The first time you store data to the storage memory, the calculator will reserve a
management memory area automatically, which will reduce the “Free” value by 65536 bytes.
• On the main memory screen, < > indicates a data group. On the storage memory and SD
card screens, [ ] indicates folders.
Moving the highlighting to a data group or folder and pressing U will display the data group
or folder contents. Pressing ) will return to the previous screen.
When the contents of a storage memory or SD card folder are displayed, the first line of the
screen shows the name of the folder.
11-2

The following data can be checked.
Main Memory
Data Name

Contents

ALPHA MEM

Alpha letter variables



Capture memory group

CAPT n (n = 1 to 20)

Capture memory

CONICS*1

Conics setting data

DYNA MEM*1

Dynamic Graph memory

EQUATION

Equation data

FINANCIAL*1

Financial data



Function memory group

F-MEM n (n = 1 to 20)

Function memory



Graph memory group

G-MEM n (n = 1 to 20)

Graph memory



List file group

LIST n (n = 1 to 26, and Ans)

List memory contents

LIST FILE n (n = 1 to 6)

List file

*1

Matrix group

MAT n (n = A to Z, and Ans)*1

Matrix



Picture memory group

PICT n (n = 1 to 20)

Picture memory



Program group

Each program name

Programs

RECURSION*1

Recursion data

SETUP

Setup data

STAT

Stat result data



String memory group

STR n (n = 1 to 20)

String memory

SYSTEM

OS and data shared by applications (clipboard, replay,
history, etc.)

*2

Spreadsheet group

Each spreadsheet name*2

Spreadsheet data

Each add-in application name*2 Application-specific data
TABLE

Table data



V-Window memory group

V-WIN n (n = 1 to 6)

V-Window memory

Y=DATA

Graph expression

*1 Not included on the fx-7400GII.

*2 Not included on the fx-7400GII/fx-9750GII.
11-3

Storage Memory, SD Card*1
Data Name

Contents

*.g1m or .g2m file names

Data items listed in the Main Memory table that has
been copied to storage memory or an SD card.
The names of these files have the extension “.g1m” or
“.g2m”.

eActivity data names

eActivity data stored in storage memory or on an SD
card.

Add-in software names
(Applications, languages,
menus)

Add-in applications, add-in languages, and add-in
menus stored in storage memory or on an SD card.

Folder names

Enclosed in square brackets ([ ]).

Unknown

Area that is unusable due to writing error, etc.

*1 “No Data” is displayed when there is no data in storage memory or on the SD card. The
message “No Card” indicates there is no SD card loaded in the calculator.

I Creating a Folder in Storage Memory or on an SD Card
S To create a new folder
1. While storage memory or SD card memory data is on the display, press (MK • F) to
display the folder name input screen.
2. Input up to eight characters for the name you want to give
to the folder.

• Only the following characters are supported: A through Z, {, }, ’, ~, 0 through 9
Inputting any invalid character will cause an “Invalid Name” error.
• An “Invalid Name” also occurs if the name you input is already being used by an existing
file.
• To cancel folder creation, press ).
3. Press U to create the folder and return to the storage
memory or SD card memory information screen.

S To rename a folder
1. On the storage memory or SD card memory information screen, select the folder you want
to rename.
2. Press (RN • F) to display the rename folder screen.

11-4

3. Input up to eight characters for the name you want to give
to the folder.

• Only the following characters are supported: A through Z, {, }, ’, ~, 0 through 9
Inputting any invalid character will cause an “Invalid Name” error.
• An “Invalid Name” also occurs if the name you input is already being used by an existing
file.
• To cancel folder creation, press ).
4. Press U to rename the folder and return to the storage
memory or SD card memory information screen.

I Selecting Data
• Press (SEL) to select the currently highlighted item, which is indicated by the black
selection pointer (C) appearing next to it. Pressing (SEL) again will deselect the item,
causing the selection pointer to disappear.
• You can select multiple files, if you want.


(SEL)



• Selecting a group or folder also selects everything inside of it. Deselecting a group or folder
deselects all of its contents.

w



• If you select one or more individual items inside of a data group or folder, the black selection
pointer (C) appears next to each item, while a white selection pointer (E) appears next to the
group or folder name.

J



• Returning to the MEMORY mode initial screen deselects all currently selected items.
11-5

I Copying Data
Important!
• Data copy is not supported on an fx-7400GII or fx-9750GII calculator.

S To copy from main memory to storage memory
Note
• The following procedure saves the selected data into a single file. You assign a name to the
file, which is stored in storage memory.
1. On the main memory data information screen, select the data you want to copy.
2. Press (COPY).
• This displays the storage memory/SD card selection
screen (fx-9860GII SD only).*1

3. Press @ to select storage memory (fx-9860GII SD
only).*2
• This displays the folder selection screen.
4. Select the folder to which you want to copy the data.
• This displays the file name input screen.
5. Input the file name you want to give to the file.
• To cancel the copy operation, press ).
6. Press U.
• This copies the data.
7. The message “Complete!” appears when the copy operation is complete. Pressing ) will
return to the MEMORY mode initial screen.
*1 Copying data from the storage memory or an SD card causes one of the screens shown
below to appear (fx-9860GII SD only).

Pressing @ selects main memory and copies the data, without displaying the folder
selection screen.
The file name input screen does not appear when you copy data from storage memory
or/and SD card to main memory.
*2 To copy to the SD card, press A. The “No Card” error message will appear if there is no
SD card loaded in the calculator.

11-6

I Error Checks During Data Copy
The following error checks are performed while a data copy operation is being executed.
Low battery check
The calculator performs low battery check before starting the data copy operation. If the
battery is at Level 1, a low battery error occurs and the copy operation is not performed.
Available memory check
The calculator checks to see if there is enough free memory available to store the copied data.
A “Memory Full” error occurs if there is not enough memory available.
A “Too Many Data” error occurs when the number of data items is too great.
A “Fragmentation ERROR” occurs when there is enough free memory available, but a garbage
collection operation is required.
If a “Fragmentation ERROR” occurs, perform the optimization procedure (page 11-11).
Overwrite check
The calculator checks to see if there is any existing data at the copy destination with the same
name as the data being copied.
An overwrite confirmation message appears if there is data
with the same name.

• (Yes) ... overwrites the existing data with the new data
• (No) ... advances to the next data item without copying the data with the same name
• Pressing

will cancel the copy operation and return to the MEMORY mode initial screen.

Overwrite check is performed for the following types of data only. All other types of data are
copied, without checking for data files with the same name.
• Programs
• Matrices
• List files
• Graph memories
• Dynamic Graph memories
• Spreadsheet data
Overwrite check is performed for data of the same type only. If different types of data have the
same name, the copy operation is performed without regard to the data with the same name.
Overwrite check applies only to the destination of the copy operation.
Type mismatch error check
eActivity data, add-in applications, add-in languages, add-in menus, and backup data cannot
be copied to main memory. Attempting to do so will cause a type mismatch error.

11-7

I Deleting Files
S To delete a main memory file
1. Display the main memory information screen.
• See “Memory Information Screen” on page 11-2.
2. Select the file(s) you want to delete. You can select multiple files, if you want.
3. Press (DEL).
• Press (Yes) to delete the file.
• Press (No) to cancel the delete operation.

S To delete a storage memory file
1. Display the storage memory information screen.
• See “Memory Information Screen” on page 11-2.
2. Select the file(s) you want to delete. You can select multiple files, if you want.
3. Press (DEL).
• Press (Yes) to delete the file.
• Press (No) to cancel the delete operation.

S To delete SD card files (fx-9860GII SD only)
1. Display the SD card memory information screen.
• See “Memory Information Screen” on page 11-2.
2. Select the file(s) you want to delete. You can select multiple files, if you want.
3. Press (DEL).
• Press (Yes) to delete the file.
• Press (No) to cancel the delete operation.

I Searching for a File
S To search for a file in the main memory
Example

To search for all files in the main memory whose names begin with the
letter “R”

1. Display the main memory information screen.
• See “Memory Information Screen” on page 11-2.
2. Press (SRC).
• Input the letter “R” for the keyword.

11-8

• The first file name that begins with the letter “R” appears
highlighted on display.

• You can input up to eight characters for the keyword.

S To search for a file in the storage memory
Example

To search for all files in the storage memory whose names begin with
the letter “S”

1. Display the storage memory information screen.
• See “Memory Information Screen” on page 11-2.
2. Press (SRC).
• Input the letter “S” for the keyword.
• The first file name that begins with the letter “S” appears
highlighted on display.

S To search for a file in the SD card (fx-9860GII SD only)
Example

To search for all files in the SD card whose names begin with the letter
“R”

1. Display the SD card memory information screen.
• See “Memory Information Screen” on page 11-2.
2. Press (SRC).
• Input the letter “R” for the keyword.
• The first file name that begins with the letter “R” appears
highlighted on display.

• The message “Not Found” appears if there are no file names that match your keyword.

I Backing Up Main Memory Data
Important!
• Data back-up is not supported on an fx-7400GII or fx-9750GII calculator.

S To back up main memory data
1. On the initial MEMORY mode screen press (BKUP).

11-9

2. Press (SAVE).
This displays the save location selection screen
(fx-9860GII SD only).
• @ ... storage memory
• A ... SD card
3. Press @ or A (fx-9860GII SD only).
This displays a folder selection screen.

4. Use D and A to select the folder where you want to save the data.
5. Press U to start the backup.
• Backup data is saved in a file named BACKUP.g2m.
The message “Complete!” appears when the backup operation is finished.
Press ) to return to the screen displayed in step 1.
The following message appears if there is already backup data in the storage memory.

Press (Yes) to back up the data, or (No) to cancel the backup operation.
A “Memory Full” occurs when there is not enough space available in the storage memory to
complete the backup operation.

S To restore backup data to the main memory
1. On the initial MEMORY mode screen press (BKUP).
• On the screen that appears, you can confirm whether or not there is backup data in the
storage memory.
2. Press (LOAD).
This displays the restore source data selection screen
(fx-9860GII SD only).
• @ ... Restore from storage memory
• A ... Restore from SD card
3. Press @ or A (fx-9860GII SD only).
This displays the folder selection screen.

11-10

4. Use D and A to select a folder.
5. Press U.*1
• A message appears to confirm whether or not you really
want to restore the backed up data.
*1 The message “No Data” will appear if there is no
backup data stored in memory. Pressing ) will
return the screen in step 1.
Press (Yes) to restore the data and delete any data currently in the area.
Press (No) to cancel the data backup operation.
The message “Complete!” appears when the restore operation is finished.
Press ) to return to the screen displayed in step 1.

I Optimizing the Storage Memory or SD Card Memory
Storage memory or SD card memory can become fragmented after many store and load
operations. Fragmentation can cause blocks of memory to become unavailable for data
storage. Because of this, you should periodically perform the storage memory or SD card
optimization procedure, which rearranges the data in the storage memory or SD card and
makes memory usage more economical.

S To optimize the storage memory
1. On the initial MEMORY mode screen press (OPT) to optimize the storage memory.
2. Select the memory you want to optimize (fx-9860GII SD
only).
• @ ... storage memory
• A ... SD card

3. Press @ or A to start optimization.

The message “Complete!” appears when the optimize operation is complete.
Press ) to return to the initial MEMORY mode screen.
• In some cases, the amount of free memory capacity may be unchanged when you check
it after performing the optimization procedure. This does not indicate any problem with the
calculator.

11-11

Chapter 12 System Manager
Use the System Manager to view system information and make system settings.

1. Using the System Manager
From the Main Menu, enter the SYSTEM mode and display the following menu items.
• (

) ... {display contrast adjustment}

• (

) ... {Auto Power Off time setting}

• (LANG) ... {system language}
• (VER) ... {version}
• (RSET) ... {system reset operations}

2. System Settings
I Contrast Adjustment
While the initial SYSTEM mode screen is displayed, press (
Adjustment screen.

) to display the Contrast

• The C cursor key makes display contrast darker.
• The B cursor key makes display contrast lighter.
• (INIT) returns display contrast to its initial default.
Press ) or )(QUIT) to return to the initial SYSTEM mode screen.
You can adjust contrast while any screen is on the display by pressing  and then C or
B. To exit contrast adjustment, press  again.

I Power Properties Settings

12

S To specify the Auto Power Off trigger time
While the initial SYSTEM mode screen is displayed, press (
Properties setting screen.

Models equipped with a backlight

) to display the Power

Models not equipped with a backlight

• (10) ... {10 minutes} (initial default setting)
• (60) ... {60 minutes}
Press ) or )(QUIT) to return to the initial SYSTEM mode screen.
12-1

S To specify the backlight key (for models equipped with a backlight only)
1. While the initial SYSTEM mode screen is displayed, press (
Properties setting screen.

) to display the Power

2. Use D and A to select “Backlight Setting”.
• (LIGHT) ... {Backlight on/off: *(LIGHT)}
• (ANY) ... {Backlight on: Any key}
3. Press ) or )(QUIT) to return to the initial SYSTEM mode screen.

S To specify the backlight duration (for models equipped with a backlight
only)
1. On the initial SYSTEM mode screen, press (
screen.

) to display the Power Properties setting

2. Use D and A to select “Backlight Duration”.

• (10) ... {turns off the backlight 10 seconds after the last key operation is performed}
• (30) ... {turns off the backlight 30 seconds after the last key operation is performed}
(initial default setting)
• (Always) ... {leaves the backlight turned on until the backlight key is pressed or until the
calculator is turned off}
3. Press ) or )(QUIT) to return to the initial SYSTEM mode screen.

I System Language Setting
Use LANG to specify the display language for built-in applications.

S To select the message language
1. From the initial SYSTEM mode screen, press (LANG) to display the Message Language
selection screen.
2. Use the D and A cursor keys to select the language you want, and then press (SEL).
3. The pop up window appears using the language you selected. Check the contents and then
press ).
4. Press ) or )(QUIT) to return to the initial SYSTEM mode screen.

S To select the Menu Language (fx-9860GɉSD/fx-9860Gɉfx-9860G AU PLUS)
1. From the initial SYSTEM mode screen, press (LANG) to display the Message Language
selection screen.
2. Press (MENU).
3. Use the D and A cursor keys to select the language you want, and then press (SEL).
4. The pop up window appears using the language you selected. Check the contents and then
press ).
12-2

• Press (MSG) to return to the Message Language selection screen.
5. Press ) or )(QUIT) to return to the initial SYSTEM mode screen.

I Version List
Use VER (version) to display the operating system version. You can also register the user
name you want.

S To display version information
1. On the initial SYSTEM mode screen, press (VER) to display the Version list.
2. Use D and A to scroll the screen. The contents of the list are shown below.
• Items marked with an asterisk (*) are displayed for all models. Other items are displayed
on models that support the applicable functions.
- Operating system version*
- Add-in application names and versions (only installed add-ins are displayed)
- Message languages and versions*
- Menu languages and versions
- User name*
3. Press ) or )(QUIT) to return to the initial SYSTEM mode screen.
• The operating system version that actually appears depends on the calculator model.

S To register a user name
1. While the Version list is displayed, press (NAME) to
display the user name input screen.
2. Input up to eight characters for the user name you want.
3. After inputting the name, press U to register it, and
return to the Version list.
• If you want to cancel user name input and return to the
Version list without registering a name, press ).

I Reset
1. While the initial SYSTEM mode screen is displayed, press (RSET) to display the Reset
Screen 1.

Important!
Items that appear on the Reset Screen(s) depend on the
calculator mode.
• (STUP) ... {setup initialization}
• (MAIN) ... {main memory data clear}
• (ADD) ... {add-in application clear}*
• (SMEM) ... {storage memory data clear}*
• (A&S) ... {add-in application and storage memory data clear}*
12-3

Pressing (E) on the above screen displays the Reset Screen 2 shown below.
• (M&S) ... {main memory data and storage memory
data clear}*
• (ALL) ... {all memory clear}*
• (SD) ... {SD card format} (fx-9860GII SD only)
* Not included on the fx-7400GII/fx-9750GII.
The following table shows the functions of the function keys. You can use the function keys
to delete the specific data you want.
Function Key Functions
Delete Storage
Initialize
Delete Main Delete Add-in
Memory Data
Format
Setup
Memory Data Applications (Excluding Add-in SD Card
Information
Applications)
(STUP)

5

(MAIN)

5

5
5

(ADD)

5

(SMEM)

5

(A&S)
(E)(M&S)

5

5

(E)(ALL)

5

5

5
5

5

5
5

(E)(SD)
2. Press the function key that corresponds to the reset operation you want to perform.

3. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press (Yes) to perform the reset
operation you specified, or (No) to cancel.
4. A message appears to let you know when the reset operation is complete.

Screen produced when
(MAIN) is pressed in step 2.

Screen produced when
(MAIN) is pressed in step 2.

12-4

Chapter 13 Data Communications
This chapter tells you everything you need to know to transfer programs between two
CASIO Power Graphic calculators connected using the cable that is equipped as a standard
accessory.

1. Connecting Two Units
The following procedure describes how to connect two units with the connecting cable that
comes equipped as a standard accessory.

S To connect two units
1. Check to make sure that the power of both units is off.
2. Connect the two units using the cable.
• Step 3 is not required on the fx-7400GII.
3. Perform the following steps on both units to specify 3PIN as the cable type.
(1) From the Main Menu, enter the LINK mode.
(2) Press (CABL). This displays the cable type selection screen.
(3) Press (3PIN).
Cable

• Models that are supported for this configuration are shown below.
fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GII, fx-9860G AU PLUS, fx-9750GII, fx-7400GII, fx-9860G Slim
(OS 2.00/1.11), fx-9860G SD (OS 2.00/1.05), fx-9860G (OS 2.00/1.05), fx-9860G AU (OS
2.00/1.05), fx-7400G series, CFX-9850G series

2. Connecting the Calculator to a Personal
Computer
You can transfer data between the calculator and a computer by using the Program-Link
Software (FA-124) and a special cable*1 to establish a connection between them.
For details about establishing a connection and data transfer procedures, see the FA-124
User’s Guide.
13-1

13

*1 With the fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GII, fx-9860G AU PLUS, and fx-9860G Slim (OS 2.00),
use the Program-Link Software and USB cable that comes with the calculator.
For the fx-9750GII and fx-7400GII, you will need to purchase the separately available
FA-124.

3. Performing a Data Communication Operation
From the Main Menu, enter the LINK mode. The following data communication main menu
appears on the display.
• {TRAN} ... {displays the data send screen}
• {RECV} ... {displays the data receive screen}
• {CABL} ... {displays the cable type selection screen}
(not included on the fx-7400GII)
• {WAKE} ... {displays the wakeup setting screen}
• {CAPT} ... {displays the screen image send setting screen}
Communication parameters are fixed at the following settings.
• 3-pin serial port
• Speed (BPS): 9600 bps max. (Connected with CFX-9850G series or fx-7400G series
calculator)
115200 bps max. (Connected with another fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GII,
fx-9860G AU PLUS, fx-9750GII, fx-7400GII, fx-9860G Slim (OS 2.00/1.11),
fx-9860G SD (OS 2.00/1.05), fx-9860G (OS 2.00/1.05) or fx-9860G AU (OS
2.00/1.05) calculator)
• Parity (PARITY): NONE
• USB port*
• Communication speed is in accordance with USB standards.
* The fx-7400GII is not equipped with a USB port.

I Select Connection Mode Screen (All models except fx-7400GII)
Connecting the USB cable to the calculator will cause the dialog box shown nearby to appear.
You can use this dialog box to select the USB cable Connection Mode (screen image send
mode).

• (DataTrans) ... {mode selection for data transfer with PC}
• (ScreenCapt) ... {mode selection for sending calculator screen captures to PC using FA124 Screen Capture function}
• (Projector) ... {mode selection for calculator screen output to a CASIO OHP unit or CASIO
projector}
13-2

• (ScreenRecv) ... {mode selection for sending calculator screen images to PC using fx9860G Manager PLUS Screen Receiver function}
To transfer data between a PC and calculator memory, press .
Use keys  through  to select the appropriate mode for sending the calculator screen
image to an external device. For details about calculator operations when keys  through 
are pressed, see “Screen Image Send” (page 13-11).

I Performing a Data Transfer Operation
Connect the two units and then perform the following procedures.
Receiving unit
To set up the calculator to receive data, press (RECV)
while the data communication main menu is displayed.

The calculator enters a data receive standby mode and waits for data to arrive. Actual data
receive starts as soon as data is sent from the sending unit.
Sending unit
To set up the calculator to send data, press (TRAN) while the data communication main
menu is displayed.
This displays a screen for specifying the data selection method.
• {SEL} ... {selects new data}
• {CRNT} ... {automatically selects previously selected data*1}

*1 The previously selected data memory is cleared whenever you change to another mode.

S To send selected data items (Example: To send user data)
Press (SEL) or (CRNT) to display a data item selection screen.
• {SEL} ... {selects data item where cursor is located}
• {ALL} ... {selects all data}
• {TRAN} ... {sends selected data items}

Use the D and A cursor keys to move the cursor to the data item you want to select and
press (SEL) to select it. Currently selected data items are marked with “ C”. Pressing
(TRAN) sends all the selected data items.
• To deselect a data item, move the cursor to it and press (SEL) again.
13-3

Only items that contain data appear on the data item selection screen. If there are too many
data items to fit on a single screen, the list scrolls when you move the cursor to the bottom line
of the items on the screen.

S To execute a send operation
After selecting the data items to send, press (TRAN). A message appears to confirm that
you want to execute the send operation.
• (Yes) ... sends data
• (No) ... returns to data selection screen

Press (Yes) to send the data.

• You can interrupt a data operation at any time by pressing

.

The following shows what the displays of the sending and receiving units look like after the
data communication operation is complete.
Sending Unit

Receiving Unit

Press ) to return to the data communication main menu.

I Configuring the Receiver’s Wakeup Feature
When Wakeup is turned on the receiver, the receiver turns on automatically when data transfer
starts.
fx-7400GII
• The receiver enters the receive mode automatically after it wakes up.
All models except fx-7400GII
• When communicating between two calculators (3PIN selected as the cable type), the
receiver enters the receive mode automatically after it wakes up.
• When communication is with a computer (USB selected as the cable type), connecting the
USB cable to a computer and then to the calculator (while the calculator is turned off) will
cause the calculator to turn on and the “Select Connection Mode” dialog box to appear.
13-4

1. On the receiver’s data communication main menu, press
(WAKE).
This displays the Wakeup setting screen.
• {On} ... {turns Wakeup on}
• {Off} ... {turns Wakeup off}
2. Press (On).
This turns on Wakeup and returns of the data communication main menu.
3. Turn off the receiver.
4. Connect the receiver to the sender.
5. Starting a send operation on the sender causes the receiver to turn on automatically and
performs the data transfer operation.

4. Data Communications Precautions
The following are the types of data items that can be sent.
• Data names marked with an asterisk (*) in the table are not included on the fx-7400GII.
Data Item

Contents

Overwrite Check*1

ALPHA MEM

Alpha memory contents



Capture memory group

CAPT n

Capture memory (1 to 20) data

No

CONICS*

Conics setting data

No

DYNA MEM*

Dynamic Graph functions

Yes

EQUATION

Equation calculation coefficient values

No

E-CON2*

E-CON2 setup memory contents

No

FINANCIAL*

Financial data

No



Function memory group

F-MEM n

Function memory (1 to 20) contents



Graph memory group

G-MEM n

Graph memory (1 to 20) contents



List file group

LIST n

List memory (1 to 26, and Ans) contents

Yes

LIST FILE n

List file memory (1 to 6) contents

Yes

*

Matrix group

MAT n*

Matrix memory (A to Z, and Ans) contents



Picture memory group

PICT n

Picture (graph) memory (1 to 20) data



Program group

Program names

Program contents (All programs are listed.)
13-5

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Data Item

Contents

Overwrite Check*1

RECURSION*

Recursion data

No

SETUP

Setup data

No

STAT

Stat result data

No



String memory group

STR n

String memory (1 to 20) data

No

SYSTEM

OS and data shared by applications (clipboard,
replay, history, etc.)

No



Spreadsheet group

Spreadsheet data
names

Spreadsheet data
(All spreadsheet data are listed.)

Yes

TABLE

Table data

No



V-Window memory group

V-WIN n

V-Window memory (1 to 6) contents

No

Y=DATA

Graph expressions, graph draw/non-draw status,
V-Window contents, zoom factors

No

*1 No overwrite check: If the receiving unit already contains the same type of data, the existing
data is overwritten with the new data.
With overwrite check: If the receiving unit already contains the same type of data, a
message appears to ask if the existing data should be overwritten with the new data.
Data item name

• (YES) ... {replaces the receiving unit’s existing data
with the new data}
• (NO) ... {skips to next data item}
Note the following precautions whenever you perform data communications.
• An error occurs whenever you try to send data to a receiving unit that is not yet standing by
to receive data. When this happens, press ) to clear the error and try again, after setting
up the receiving unit to receive data.
• An error occurs whenever the receiving unit does not receive any data approximately six
minutes after it is set up to receive data. When this happens, press ) to clear the error.
• An error occurs during data communications if the cable becomes disconnected, if the
parameters of the two units do not match, or if any other communications problem occurs.
When this happens, press ) to clear the error, then correct the problem before trying data
communications again. If data communications are interrupted by the ) key operation or
an error, any data successfully received up to the interruption will be in the memory of the
receiving unit.
• An error occurs if the receiving unit memory becomes full during data communications. When
this happens, press ) to clear the error and delete unneeded data from the receiving unit
to make room for the new data, and then try again.

13-6

I Exchanging Data with another Model Calculator
In this section, the term “OS 2.00 calculators” refers to the following models.
• fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GII, fx-9860G AU PLUS, fx-9750GII, fx-7400GII
• fx-9860G Slim, fx-9860G SD, fx-9860G and fx-9860G AU whose operating systems have
been updated to Version 2.00
An OS 2.00 calculator supports data exchange with the following calculator models.
OS 2.00 calculators, fx-9860G series, fx-7400G series, CFX-9850G series
When you perform a data exchange operation with the above calculator models, the OS 2.00
calculator will decide whether or not specific data can be sent or received, and convert data
as required. The following describes the basic operations that are performed when exchanging
data between an OS 2.00 calculator and another model calculator.
• Sending data from the OS 2.00 calculator to another calculator model
Data that is supported by the OS 2.00 calculator but is not supported by the receiving model
either is not sent or is converted to a format supported by the receiving model before it is
sent.
• Sending data from another calculator model to an OS 2.00 calculator
Basically, data sent from another calculator model is received as it is. However, when there is
a difference between an OS 2.00 calculator function and the function of the sending model,
the OS 2.00 calculator will convert the data as required.
The following provides details about data compatibility between an OS 2.00 calculator and
other calculator models.

S Transferring Data between the fx-9860Gɉ SD, fx-9860Gɉ, fx-9860G AU
PLUS, fx-9750Gɉ, fx-9860G Slim (OS 2.00), fx-9860G SD (OS 2.00), fx9860G (OS 2.00), fx-9860G AU (OS 2.00) and fx-7400Gɉ
Sender:

fx-7400GII

Receiver:

fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GII, fx-9860G AU PLUS, fx-9860G Slim (OS 2.00),
fx-9860G SD (OS 2.00), fx-9860G (OS 2.00), fx-9860G AU (OS 2.00)

All data transferred.
Sender:

fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GII, fx-9860G AU PLUS, fx-9860G Slim (OS 2.00),
fx-9860G SD (OS 2.00), fx-9860G (OS 2.00), fx-9860G AU (OS 2.00)

Receiver:

fx-7400GII

• The following data is not sent from the fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GII, fx-9860G AU PLUS, fx9860G Slim (OS 2.00), fx-9860G SD (OS 2.00), fx-9860G (OS 2.00), fx-9860G AU (OS 2.00)
or is disregarded when received by the fx-7400GII.
- CONICS mode data
- DYNA mode data
- E-CON2 mode data
- Matrix data
- RECUR mode data
- TVM mode data
- STAT mode function and variable data for which there is no corresponding function for
variable on the fx-7400GII (Example: Ƶ2 GOF Test calculation result data, etc.)
13-7

- Clipboard and history data (Including the “SYSTEM” data item.)
- e • ACT mode data*1
- S • SHT mode data*1
*1 Can be transferred from an fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GII, fx-9860G AU PLUS, fx-9860G
Slim (OS 2.00), fx-9860G SD (OS 2.00), fx-9860G (OS 2.00) or fx-9860G AU (OS 2.00)
calculator.
• Program data is transferred as-is.
However, any command in a transferred program that is not supported by the fx-7400GII
will be replaced by the at sign (@). Running such a program on the fx-7400GII will cause an
error.

S Sending Data from an OS 2.00 Calculator to any Older Model Calculator
The following are general rules that apply when transferring data from an OS 2.00 calculator to
an fx-9860G series or CFX-9850G series calculator.
• The following data is not transferred.
- String memory data
- TVM mode bond calculation and depreciation calculation data
- STAT mode function and variable data for which there is no corresponding function for
variable on the receiving calculator model (Example: Ƶ2 GOF Test calculation result data,
etc.)
• The following data is converted by the OS 2.00 calculator to a format that is supported by the
receiving calculator model before it is sent.
- GRAPH mode, DYNA mode Graph Type setting data
When transferring to an fx-9860G series or CFX-9850G series calculator, X=, X>, X<, XP,
and XO type expressions are converted to an X=c type expression
- Graph line type setting data
When sending to a CFX-9850G series calculator, line settings are converted as follows
before being sent: Normal: Blue; Thick: Orange; Broken, Dotted: Green.
- STAT mode Graph1, Graph2, and Graph3 setting data
When sending to an fx-9860G series calculator, pie and bar type graphs are converted to
ScatterPlot before being sent. Other settings are not sent.
• Program data is transferred as-is.
However, any command in a transferred program that is not supported by the other model
calculator will be replaced by the at sign (@). Running such a program on the other model
calculator will cause an error.
• Refer to the following if an error message appears on the OS 2.00 calculator when you are
sending data to another calculator model.
Invalid Data Size
- Matrix data exceeds 256 rows or 256 columns*1
- List data exceeds 256 lines
- Table data exceeds 256 rows
- Recursion table data exceeds 256 lines*1*3
- EQUA mode input data includes 4 to 6-degree equation
13-8

Complex Number in data
- Matrix data includes an element containing a complex number*1
- List data includes an element containing a complex number
- EQUA mode simultaneous equation input data has a complex number coefficient
- EQUA mode simultaneous equation calculation result includes a complex number solution
Invalid Data Number
- List data with a number greater than List 6
- Picture data with a number greater than Pict 6*2
- Function memory data with a number greater than F-Mem 6*2
- Graph memory data with a number greater than G-Mem 6*2
*1 Can be transferred from an OS 2.00 calculator except the fx-7400GII.
*2 Can be transferred to an fx-9750G series or CFX-9850G series calculator only.
*3 Can be transferred to an fx-9860G series calculator only.

S Sending Data from an OS 2.00 Calculator to a CFX-9850G Series
Calculator
Sender:

OS 2.00 calculator

Receiver:

CFX-9850G series

The following data is not sent from an OS 2.00 calculator or is disregarded when received by
the CFX-9850G series calculator.
• Capture memory data
• Clipboard, replay, and history data (Including the “SYSTEM” data item.)
• CONICS mode data*1
• E-CON2 mode data*1
• RECUR mode cn (cn+1, cn+2) expressions*1
• RECUR mode table data*1
• Setup data
• STAT mode data
• TABLE mode table data
• TVM mode data*1
• V-Window x-dot data
• Calculation results of simultaneous equations and high-order equations
*1 Can be transferred from an OS 2.00 calculator except the fx-7400GII.

S Sending Data from an OS 2.00 Calculator to an fx-7400G Series Calculator
Sender:

OS 2.00 calculator

Receiver:

fx-7400G series

13-9

The following data is not sent from the OS 2.00 calculator or is disregarded when received by
the fx-7400G series calculator
• Any alpha memory variable (A to Z, r, Ƨ) with a complex number assigned
• Answer Memory
• Capture memory data
• Clipboard, replay, and history data (Including the “SYSTEM” data item.)
• CONICS mode data*1
• DYNA mode data*1
• E-CON2 mode data*1
• EQUA mode data
• Function memory data
• Graph memory data
• Matrix data*1
• Picture memory data
• RECUR mode data*1
• Setup data
• STAT mode data
• TABLE mode table data
• TVM mode data*1
• V-Window Memory with number V-Win 2 or greater
• V-Window x-dot data
• Graph expressions excluding Y=f(x) type expression, Y inequalities and parametric
expressions
*1 Can be transferred from an OS 2.00 calculator except the fx-7400GII.

S Sending Data from the OS 2.00 Calculator (except the fx-9750Gɉ/fx7400Gɉ) to an fx-7400Gɉ, fx-9860G Series, CFX-9850G Series or fx-7400G
Series Calculator
Sender:

fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GII, fx-9860G AU PLUS

Receiver:

fx-9750GII, fx-7400GII, fx-9860G series, CFX-9850G series, fx-7400G
series

• When the following data includes a square root () or pi (P) expression, it is sent as a
decimal value.
- Alpha memory data (A to Z, r, Q)
- Ans memory data*1
- Coefficients and calculation results of EQUA mode simultaneous linear equations and highorder equations*1
- History data (Including the “SYSTEM” data item.)*1
- List data
- Matrix data*1

13-10

• The following numeric expressions input in the Math input/output mode are converted to
Linear input/output mode before being sent.
- Graph expressions registered in the DYNA mode and RECUR mode*1
- Solve expressions registered in the EQUA mode
- Graph expressions registered in the GRAPH mode and TABLE mode *1
*1 Not receivable by an fx-7400G series calculator.

S Sending Data from an fx-9860G Series Calculator to an OS 2.00 Calculator
Sender:

fx-9860G series

Receiver:

OS 2.00 calculator

• X=c type expressions are converted to X= type expressions.

S Sending Data from a CFX-9850G Series Calculator to an OS 2.00
Calculator
Sender:

CFX-9850G series

Receiver:

OS 2.00 calculator

• X=c type expressions are converted to X= type expressions.
• V-Window Xmin and Xmax values are sent as-is. Since, the Xdot value does not exist on the
CFX-9850G series calculators, the OS 2.00 calculator calculates it automatically from the
Xmin and Xmax values they send.
• Performing the data transfer operation changes the graph memory and dynamic graph
memory setup values to their initial defaults.
• When graph expression data is received from a CFX-9850 series calculator, line settings are
converted as follows: Blue: Normal; Orange: Thick; Green: Dotted.

5. Screen Image Send
Pressing (CAPT) while the data communication main menu is displayed will cause the
“Capture Set Mode” screen to appear. You can use this screen to select the screen image send
mode.

• (Mem) ... {mode selection for data transfer with PC (screen image send turned off)}
• (Capt) ... {mode selection for sending calculator screen captures to PC using FA-124
Screen Capture function (manual screen image send turned on)}
• (Proj)* ... {mode selection for calculator screen output to a CASIO OHP unit or CASIO
projector (auto screen image send turned on)}

13-11

• (Recv)* ... {mode selection for sending calculator screen images to PC using fx-9860G
Manager PLUS Screen Receiver function (auto screen image send turned on)}
* Not included on the fx-7400GII.

I Select Connection Mode Screen (All models except fx-7400GII)
You also can perform the same mode selection operations as the Capture Set Mode screen on
the “Select Connection Mode” dialog box that appears when you connect the USB cable to the
calculator.

The options on the Select Connection Mode screen correspond to the options on the Capture
Set Mode screen as follows: (DataTrans) = (Mem), (ScreenCapt) = (Capt),
(Projector) = (Proj), (ScreenRecv) = (Recv).
• The following types of screen images cannot be transferred to another calculator or computer
using auto screen image send.
- The screen displayed during data transfer
- The screen displayed during a calculation
- The screen displayed after reset is performed
- The low battery screen

I Transferring Screen Images to a Computer
Use the following procedure to transfer calculator screen images to a computer. Perform this
procedure using FA-124 software running on the computer.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the calculator to the computer.
On the fx-7400GII
2. On the calculator, press (CAPT)(Capt).
On other models
2. On the calculator, press (ScreenCapt) in response to the “Select Connection Mode”
dialog box that appears when connecting the USB cable to the calculator.
3. On the calculator, display the screen you want to transfer.
4. Use FA-124 to perform the transfer operation.
5. On the calculator, press F(CAPTURE).
6. The screen data is sent to the computer.

13-12

I Auto Screen Image Send to an OHP Unit (Not available on the fx-7400GII)
The following procedure sends the screen of this calculator to an OHP unit at fixed intervals.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the calculator to the OHP unit.
• Connecting the USB cable to the calculator will cause the “Select Connection Mode” dialog
box to appear.
2. Press (Projector).
3. Display the image you want to send.
4. The displayed image is sent automatically to the OHP unit.
5. To continue with auto screen image send, return to step 3.
6. To stop auto screen image send, press (CAPT)(Mem) on the data communication
main menu.
See the User’s Guide that comes with the OHP unit for information about connecting the OHP
unit and how to use the calculator while the OHP unit is attached.

I Auto Screen Image Send to a Computer Using the fx-9860G Manager
PLUS (Not available on the fx-7400GII)
Use the following procedure to transfer calculator screen images to a computer. Perform this
procedure using fx-9860G Manager PLUS software running on the computer.
1. After starting up Screen Receiver on the fx-9860G Manager PLUS software, use the USB
cable to connect the calculator to your computer.
• Connecting the USB cable to the calculator will cause the “Select Connection Mode” dialog
box to appear.
2. Press (ScreenRecv).
3. On the calculator, display the screen you want to transfer.
4. The displayed image is sent automatically to the computer.
5. To continue with auto screen image send, return to step 3.
6. To stop auto screen image send, press (CAPT)(Mem) on the data communication
main menu.

I Connecting to a Projector (Not available on the fx-7400GII)
You can connect the calculator to a CASIO projector and project calculator screen contents
onto a screen.

S Connectable Projectors (As of January 2009)
XJ-S35, XJ-S36, XJ-S46, XJ-S37, XJ-S47, XJ-S57, XJ-SC215
• You can also connect the calculator to a YP-100 Multifunctional Presentation Kit and project
from the projectors other than the model shown above.

13-13

S To project calculator screen contents from a projector
1. Use the USB cable that comes with the calculator to connect to the projector (or YP-100
unit).
• Connecting the USB cable to the calculator will cause the “Select Connection Mode” dialog
box to appear.
2. Press (Projector).

S Precautions when Connecting
• An hourglass figure may remain projected on the screen after you connect the calculator
to a projector (or YP-100). If this happens, performing some operation on the calculator will
restore normal display.
• If the calculator stops operating normally, disconnect the USB cable and then reconnect it. If
this does not correct the problem, disconnect the USB cable, turn the projector (or YP-100)
off and then back on, and then reconnect the USB cable.

13-14

Chapter 14 Using SD Cards
(fx-9860Gɉ SD only)
You can use SD cards to store calculator data. You can copy main memory and
storage memory data to and from an SD card.

TM

Important!
• Always use an SD memory card. Operation is not guaranteed when another type of memory
card is used.
• Be sure to read the user documentation that comes with an SD card before using it.
• Certain types of SD cards can slow down processing speeds.
• Certain types of SD cards and operating conditions can shorten battery life.
• SD cards have a write protect switch, which protects against accidental erasure of data. Note,
however, that you need to remove write protection before you can copy data to or delete data
from, or format a disk that is write-protected.
• Static electric charge, electric noise, and other phenomena can delete or corrupt card data
unexpectedly. Because of this you should always backup valuable data to other media (CD-R,
CD-RW, MO disk, hard disk, etc.)
• SD Logo is a trademark.

1. Using an SD Card
Important!
• Always turn off the calculator before inserting or removing an SD card.
• Note that a card needs to be oriented correctly (proper side must be facing upwards, the
proper end must be inserted) when inserting it into the calculator. Trying to force card into the
slot while it is oriented incorrectly can damage the card and slot.

S Removing the Dummy Card
• Your calculator is shipped from the factory with a dummy card inserted in the SD card slot.
Before using an SD card, first use the procedure under “To remove the SD card” on page
14-2 to remove the dummy card.

14

14-1

S To insert an SD card
1. Orient the SD card so its back is facing upwards (in the same direction as the calculator
keyboard).
2. Carefully insert the SD card into the calculator’s SD card slot.

Front

Back

Important!
• Never insert anything other than SD cards into the SD card slot. Doing so can damage the
calculator.
• Should water or any foreign matter ever get into the SD card slot, immediately turn off
the calculator, remove its batteries, and contact your original retailer or nearest CASIO
authorized service center.

S To remove the SD card
1. Press in on the SD card and then release it.
• This will cause the card to pop part way out of the slot.
2. Grasp the SD card with your fingers and pull it out of the slot.

Important!
• Never remove the SD card while data is being transferred to it. Doing so not only stops the
data you are transferring to the card from being saved, it can also corrupt SD card contents.
• Exerting undue force when removing an SD card can damage the card slot or the card.

14-2

2. Formatting an SD Card
• Use the procedure under “Reset” (page 12-3) to format an SD card.

3. SD Card Precautions during Use
• SD card problems can normally be corrected by reformatting the card. However, it is always a
good idea to take along more than one SD card to avoid data storage problems.
• Card formatting (initialization) is recommended before using a new SD card for the first time.
• If an SD card has been formatted on a computer or other device, you can use it as-is without
reformatting. A computer or other device also will be able to use an SD card that has been
formatted with the calculator.
• Never perform any of the following operations while the SD card is being accessed.
- Removing the SD card
- Connecting or disconnecting a USB cable
- Turning off the calculator
- When connected to a computer, exiting the FA-124 software or shutting down the computer
• Note that an SD card needs to be oriented correctly (proper side must be facing upwards,
the proper end must be inserted) when inserting it into the calculator. Trying to force an SD
card into the slot when it is oriented incorrectly can damage the card and slot.
• Use of certain SD cards while calculator battery power is low can cause the display to go
blank without displaying the low battery warning message. If this happens, replace the
batteries.

I Recommended SD Card Types
Toshiba
SD-NA032MT

SD-NA064MT

SD-NA128MT

SD-NA512MT

SD-FA128MT

SD-FA256MT

SD-C01GTR

SD-C02GTR

SD-C02GT4

SD-NA256MT

SanDisk
SDSDB-64-J60

SDSDB-128-J60

SDSDB-256-J60

SDSDB-512-J60

SDSDH-256-903

SDSDH-512-903

SDSDB-1024

SDSDB-2048

SDSDH-1024

SDSDH-002G

For detailed information (specifications, features, etc.) about the SD card, contact the SD card
manufacturer.

14-3

Appendix
1. Error Message Table
Message

Meaning

Countermeasure

Syntax
ERROR

•
•

Illegal syntax
Attempt to input an illegal command

•

Press ) to display the error and
make necessary corrections.

Ma ERROR

•

Calculation result exceeds the
display range.
Calculation is outside the input
range of a function.
Mathematical error (division by zero,
etc.)
Sufficient precision could not be
obtained for 3 calculation,
differential calculation, etc.
Solution could not be obtained for
equation calculation, etc.

•

Check input values and make
corrections to ensure that values
are within allowable limits.

•
•
•

•
Go ERROR

 No corresponding Lbl n for Goto n.

 No program stored in program area
Prog "file name".
Nesting
ERROR

•

Nesting of subroutines by Prog
"file name" exceeds 10 levels.

 Correctly input a Lbl n to correspond to the Goto n, or delete the
Goto n if not required.
 Store a program in program area
Prog "file name", or delete the
Prog "file name" if not required.
•

•

Stack ERROR

•

Execution of calculations that
exceed the capacity of the stack
for numeric values or stack for
commands.

•

•
Memory
ERROR

•

Operation or memory storage
operation exceeds remaining
memory capacity.

•

•

•

A-1

Ensure that Prog "file name" is
not used to return from
subroutines to main routine. If
used, delete any unnecessary
Prog "file name".
Trace the subroutine jump
destinations and ensure that no
jumps are made back to the
original program area. Ensure that
returns are made correctly.
Simplify the formulas to keep
stacks within 10 levels for the
numeric values and 26 levels for
the commands.
Divide the formula into two or
more parts.
Keep the number of memories
you use within the currently
specified number of memories.
Simplify the data you are trying to
store to keep it within the available
memory capacity.
Delete no longer needed data to
make room for the new data.

A

Message

Meaning

Countermeasure

Argument
ERROR

•

Incorrect argument specification
for a command that requires an
argument.

•

Correct the argument.

Dimension
ERROR

•

Illegal dimension used during matrix
or list calculations.

•

Check the matrix or list dimension.

Range ERROR  Input of an improper V-Window
value.
 V-Window range settings exceeded
when a graph is redrawn.
 Input of an improper value on the
range screen and use of that value
for execution.
 The spreadsheet cell range was
exceeded by paste, recall, or other
cell operation.

 Change the V-Window value so it
is within range.
 Redraw using the proper settings.

Condition
ERROR

•

Execution of a calculation or
function before all conditions
required for execution are met.

•

Check the conditions and make
any necessary corrections.

Non-Real
ERROR

•

Calculation that produces a complex
number when Real is specified for
the Complex Mode setting on the
Setup screen, even though the
argument is a real number.

•

Change the Complex Mode
setting to something other than
Real.

Complex
Number In List

•

List containing complex number
used in a calculation or operation
for which complex number data is
invalid.

•

Change all data in the list to real
numbers.

Complex
Number in
Matrix

•

Matrix containing complex number
used in a calculation or operation
for which complex number data is
invalid.

•

Change all data in the matrix to
real numbers.

Complex
Number in
Data

•

Data sent from a function of this
calculator (matrix, etc.) includes
complex number data, but the
corresponding function of the
receiving calculator does not
support data that includes complex
numbers.
Example: Attempting to send a
matrix containing a complex number
in an element to CFX-9850G.

•

Send data that does not include
complex numbers.

Can’t Simplify

•

Fraction simplification was
attempted using the Simp function
(page 2-21), but simplification
could not be performed using the
specified divisor.
Example: Specifying a divisor of 3 to
simplify the fraction 4/8.

•

Specify a different divisor or
execute Simp without specifying
any divisor.

A-2

 Input a proper range value.

 Repeat the procedure taking
care that the cell range is not
exceeded.

Message

Meaning

Countermeasure

Can’t Solve!
Adjust initial
value or
bounds. Then
try again

•

No Variable

 No variable specified within a graph
function being used for Dynamic
Graph.
 No variable within a Solve equation.

 Specify a variable for the graph
function.

•

Attempting to use the unit
conversion command to convert
between two units in different
categories.
Executing a conversion calculation
using the same command twice in a
conversion expression.

•

In a conversion expression,
specify two different commands
that are in the same category.

Conversion
ERROR

•

A Solve calculation could not obtain
a solution within the specified range.

•
•

Change the specified range.
Correct the input expression.

 Input a Solve equation that
includes a variable.

Com ERROR

•

Problem with cable connection or
parameter setting during program
data communications.

•

Check to make sure there is
nothing wrong with the cable
connection, and that parameters
are configured correctly.

Transmit
ERROR

•

Problem with cable connection
or parameter setting during data
communications.

•

Check to make sure there is
nothing wrong with the cable
connection, and that parameters
are configured correctly.

Receive
ERROR

•

Problem with cable connection
or parameter setting during data
communications.

•

Check to make sure there is
nothing wrong with the cable
connection, and that parameters
are configured correctly.

Memory Full

•

Memory of receiving unit
became full during program data
communications.

•

Delete some data stored in the
receiving unit and try again.

Invalid Data
Size

•

Attempting to send data of a
size that is not supported by the
receiving device.
Example: Attempting to send a
matrix with more than 256 lines from
the fx-9750GII to an older model.

•

Make sure the data being sent is
of a size that is supported by the
receiving device.

Invalid Data
Number

•

Attempting to send data with a data
number that is not supported by the
receiving device.
Example: Attempting to send
List 7 from the fx-9750GII to an
older model that supports only up
to List 6.

•

Specify a data number supported
by the receiving device when
sending data.

A-3

Message
Time Out

Meaning
•

Countermeasure

A Solve calculation or integration
calculation was unable to satisfy
convergence conditions.

•

•

If you are performing a Solve
calculation, try changing to the
initial default estimated value.
If you are performing an
integration calculation, try
changing to a larger tol value.

Circular
ERROR

•

There is a circular reference
(such as “=A1” in cell A1) in the
spreadsheet.

•

Change cell contents to remove
the circular references.

Please
Reconnect

•

The connection was dropped for
some reason while updating the
operating system.

•

Reconnect and try again.

Too Many Data •

The number of data items is too
large.

•

Delete unneeded data.

Fragmentation
ERROR

•

Memory must be optimized before
any more data can be stored.

•

Optimize memory.

Invalid Name

•

The file name you input includes
invalid characters.

•

Use the correct characters to
input a valid file name.

Invalid Type

•

An illegal data type is specified.

•

Specify valid data.

Storage
Memory Full

•

The storage memory is full.

•

Delete unneeded data.

No Card*

•

There is no SD card loaded in the
calculator.

•

Load an SD card.

SD Card Full*

•

The SD card is full.

•

Delete unneeded data.

Invalid file
name or folder
name.*

•

Data or folders that are supported
by this calculator cannot be found
on the SD card.

•

Replace the card with one that
contains data/folders that are
supported by this calculator.

Invalid Card*

•

A card that is not compatible with
the calculator is loaded.

•

Replace the card with a
compatible card.

Card is
protected*

•

The SD card is write protected.

•

Remove write protection.

Data ERROR

•

A data error occurred.

•

Check to make sure you are
writing correct type of data and try
again.

Card ERROR*

•

An SD card error occurred.

•

Remove and correctly insert the
SD card and try again. If this error
occurs again, re-format the SD
card.

Data is
protected*

•

The Read Only attribute of the SD
card loaded in the calculator has
been turned on using a computer,
etc.

•

Turn off the SD card’s Read Only
attribute.

* fx-9860GII SD only

A-4

2. Input Ranges
Function
sinx
cosx
tanx

Input range for real
number solutions
(DEG) |x| < 9 s (109)°
(RAD) |x| < 5 s 107Prad
(GRA) |x| < 1 s 1010grad

sin–1x
cos–1x

|x|  1

tan x

|x| < 1 s 10

sinhx
coshx

|x|  230.9516564

tanhx

|x| < 1 s10100

sinh–1x

|x| < 1 s 10100

cosh–1x

1  x < 1 s 10100

tanh–1x

|x| < 1

–1

Internal
digits

15 digits

Precision
As a rule,
precision is
p1 at the
10th digit.*

1 s 10–99  x < 1 s 10100

10x

–1 s 10100 < x < 100

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

• Complex numbers can be
used as arguments.

"

"

• Complex numbers can be
used as arguments.

e

–1 s 10100
< x  230.2585092

x


0  x < 1 s 10100

x2

|x| < 1 s 1050

1/x

|x| < 1 s 10100, x x 0

x


|x| < 1 s 10100

x!

0  x  69
(x is an integer)

"

"

Result < 1 s 10100
n, r (n and r are integers)
0  r  n, n < 1 s 1010

"

"

"

"

3

nPr
nCr
Pol (x, y)
Rec
(r ,Q)

However, for tanx :
|x| x 90(2n+1): DEG
|x| x P/2(2n+1): RAD
|x| x 100(2n+1): GRA

100

logx
Inx

x

Notes

x2 + y2 < 1 × 10100
|r| < 1 s 10100
(DEG) |Q| < 9 s (109)°
(RAD) |Q| < 5 s 107P rad
(GRA) |Q| < 1 s 1010grad

"

A-5

"

• Complex numbers can be
used as arguments.

• Complex numbers can be
used as arguments.

However, for tanQ :
|Q| x 90(2n+1): DEG
|Q| x P/2(2n+1): RAD
|Q| x 100(2n+1): GRA

Input range for real
number solutions

Function

° ’”
k}

° ’”

Internal
digits

Precision

15 digits

As a rule,
precision is
p1 at the
10th digit.*

|a|, b, c < 1 s 10100
0  b, c
|x| < 1 s 10100
Sexagesimal display:
|x| < 1 s 107

Notes

x > 0:

^(xy)

–1 s 10100 < ylogx < 100
x=0:y>0
m
x < 0 : y = n, ––––
2n+1
(m, n are integers)
However;
–1 s 10100 < y log |x| < 100

"

"
• Complex numbers can be
used as arguments.

y>0:xx0
–1 × 10100 < 1 logy < 100

x

y


x
y=0:x>0
2n+1
y < 0 : x = 2n+1, ––––
m
(m x 0; m, n are integers)

"

"

However;

• Complex numbers can be
used as arguments.

–1 × 10100 < 1 log |y| < 100

x

ab/c

Total of integer, numerator
and denominator must be
within 10 digits (includes
division marks).

"

"

* For a single calculation, calculation error is p1 at the 10th digit. (In the case of exponential display,
calculation error is p1 at the last significant digit.) Errors are cumulative in the case of consecutive
calculations, which can also cause them to become large. (This is also true of internal consecutive
y, x!, 3
x, nPr, nCr, etc.)
calculations that are performed in the case of ^(xy), x
In the vicinity of a function’s singular point and point of inflection, errors are cumulative and may
become large.
Function
Binary, octal,
decimal,
hexadecimal
calculation

Input range
Values fall within following ranges after conversion:
DEC: –2147483648  x  2147483647
BIN: 1000000000000000  x  1111111111111111 (negative)
0  x  111111111111111 (0, positive)
OCT: 20000000000  x  37777777777 (negative)
0  x  17777777777 (0, positive)
HEX: 80000000  x  FFFFFFFF (negative)
0  x  7FFFFFFF (0, positive)

A-6

E-CON2
Application

All of the explanations provided here assume that you are already familiar
with the operating precautions, terminology, and operational procedures of
the calculator and the EA-200.

20051101

1-1
E-CON2 Overview

1 E-CON2 Overview
• From the Main Menu, select E-CON2 to enter the E-CON2 Mode.

E-CON2 Main Menu

• The “E-CON2 Mode” provides the functions listed below for simple and more efficient data
sampling using the CASIO EA-200.
• 1(SET) ........ Displays a screen for setting up the EA-200.
• 2(MEM) ....... Displays a screen for saving EA-200 setup data under a file name.
• 3(PROG) ..... Performs program conversion.
• This function can be used to convert EA-200 setup data configured
using E-CON2 to an EA-200 control program (or EA-100 control
program) that can run on the fx-9860G SD/fx-9860G.
• It also can be used to convert data to a program that can be run on
a CFX-9850 Series/fx-7400 Series calculator.
• 4(STRT) ...... Starts data collection.
• 5(GRPH) ..... Graphs data sampled by the EA-200, and provides tools for analyzing
graphs. Graph Analysis tools include calculation of periodic frequency,
various types of regression, Fourier series calculation, and more.
• 6(HELP) ...... Displays E-CON2 help.
• Pressing the K key (Setup Preview) or a cursor key while the E-CON2 main menu is on
the screen displays a preview dialog box that shows the contents of the setup in the
current setup memory area.

To close the preview dialog box, press J.
Note
For details about setup data and the current setup memory area, see “6 Using Setup
Memory” (page 6-1).

About online help
Pressing the 6(HELP) key displays online help about the E-CON2 Mode.

20051101
20070101

2-1
Using the Setup Wizard

2 Using the Setup Wizard
This section explains how to use the Setup Wizard to configure the EA-200 setup quickly
and easily simply by replying to questions as they appear.
If you need more control over specific sampling parameters, you should consider using the
Advanced Setup procedure on page 3-1.

k Setup Wizard Parameters
Setup Wizard lets you make changes to the following three EA-200 basic sampling
parameters using an interactive wizard format.
• Sensor (Select Sensor):
Specify a CASIO or VERNIER* sensor from a menu of choices.
*Vernier Software & Technology
• Total Sampling Time:
Specify a value within the range of 0.01 second to 30 days.
• Sampling Time Unit (Select Unit):
Specify seconds (sec), minutes (min), hours (hour), or days (day) as the time unit of the
value you input for the total sampling time (Total Sampling Time).
Note
For some sensors (EA-200 built-in microphone, Vernier PhotoGate, etc.), sampling
parameters are different from those shown above. The differences between sampling
parameters and setup procedures for each sensor are described in this section.

Setup Wizard Rules
Note the following rules whenever you use the Setup Wizard.
• The EA-200 sampling channel is CH1 or SONIC.
• The trigger for a Setup Wizard setup is always the w key.

20051101

2-2
Using the Setup Wizard

u To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard
Before getting started...
• Before starting the procedure below, make sure you first decide if you want to start
sampling immediately using the setup you configure with Setup Wizard, or if you want to
store the setup for later sampling.
• See sections 6-1, 7-1, and 8-1 of this manual for information about procedures required to
start sampling and to store a setup. We recommend that you read through the entire
procedure first, referencing the other sections and pages as noted, before actually trying
to perform it.
• To terminate Setup Wizard part way through and cancel the setup, press !J(QUIT).
1. Display the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1).
2. Press 1(SET) and then 1(WIZ).
• This launches the Setup Wizard and displays the “Select Sensor” screen.

3. Press 1 to specify a CASIO sensor or 2 to specify a Vernier sensor.
• Pressing either key will display the corresponding sensor list. The following shows the
sensor list that appears when you press 1.

4. Specify the sensor you want to use.
Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the sensor you want to use,
and then press w.
• If the sensor you specified has more than one option (more detailed specifications, such
as sampling unit, mode, etc.), an option list will appear on the display at this time. If this
happens, advance to step 5 (where you will see an example of the screen that appears
when you select 1 - [Temperature] in step 4).

20051101

2-3
Using the Setup Wizard

• If the “Input Total Sampling Interval” screen appears, skip to step 6.

5. Select the options for the sensor you specified in step 4.
Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the option you want to select,
and then press w.
• If the “Input Total Sampling Interval” screen appears, advance to step 6.
Important!
When special settings are required by the sensor and/or option you select, other screens
other than the “Input Total Sampling Interval” screen will appear on the display. The
following shows where you should go to find information about the operations you need to
perform for each sensor/option selection.
If you select this sensor/option:

Go here for more information:

[CASIO] - [Microphone] - [Sound wave & FFT]
[CASIO] - [Microphone] - [FFT only]

“Using Setup Wizard to Configure
Settings for FFT (Frequency
Characteristics) Data Sampling” on
page 2-5

[VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Gate]

“To configure a setup for PhotoGate
alone” on page 2-6

[VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Pulley]

“To configure a setup for PhotoGate
and Smart Pulley” on page 2-7

[CASIO] - [Speaker] - [y=f(x)]

“Outputting the Waveform of a Function
through the Speaker” on page 2-8

6. Use the number input keys to input the total sampling time. Just input a value.
In step 8 of this procedure, you will be able to specify the unit (seconds, minutes, hours,
days) of the value you input here.
Note
• With some sensors ([CASIO] - [Microphone] - [Sound wave], etc.) sampling time is
limited to a few seconds. The unit for such a sensor is always seconds, and so the
“Select Unit” screen does not appear.
• If you specify a total sampling time value in the range of 10 seconds to 23 hours, 59
minutes, 59 seconds, real-time graphing will be performed during sampling. This is the
same as selecting the Realtime Mode on the “Advanced Setup” screen.

20051101

2-4
Using the Setup Wizard

7. After inputting total sampling time value you want, press w. This displays the “Select
Unit” screen.

8. Use number keys b through e to specify the unit for the value you specified in step 6.
• This displays a confirmation screen like the one shown below.

9. If there is not problem with the contents of the confirmation screen, press 1.
If you need to change the setup, press 6 or J. This will return to the screen in step 4
(for setting the total sampling interval), where you can change the setting.
• Pressing 1 will take you to the final Setup Wizard screen.

10. Press number keys described below to specify what you want to do with the setup you
have configured.
b(Start Setup) ............... Starts sampling using the setup (page 8-1)
c(Save Setup-MEM) ..... Saves the setup (page 6-1)
d(Convert Program) ...... Converts the setup to a program (page 7-1)

20051101

2-5
Using the Setup Wizard

k Using Setup Wizard to Configure Settings for FFT (Frequency
Characteristics) Data Sampling
When you perform sound sampling executed the EA-200’s built-in microphone (by specifying
[CASIO] - [Microphone] as the sensor), Setup Wizard will provide you with three options:
[Sound wave], [Sound wave & FFT], and [FFT only]. “Sound wave” records the following two
dimensions for the sampled sound data: elapsed time (horizontal axis) and volume (vertical
axis). “FFT” records the following two dimensions: frequency (horizontal axis) and volume
(vertical axis).
The following shows the settings for recording FFT data.
1. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using
Setup Wizard” on page 2-2.
2. On the “Select Sensor” screen, select [CASIO] - [Microphone] - [Sound wave & FFT] or
[CASIO] - [Microphone] - [FFT only].
• This causes a “Select FFT Range” screen to appear.

• You can select one of four settings for FFT Range. The setting you select will
automatically apply the applicable fixed parameters shown below.

Parameter

Setting 2 - 1000 Hz:
1

Frequency pitch
Frequency max
Sampling interval
Number of samples

2 Hz
1000 Hz
61 μ sec
8192

4 - 2000 Hz:
2

6 - 3000 Hz:
3

8 - 4000 Hz:
4

4 Hz
2000 Hz
31 μ sec
8192

6 Hz
3000 Hz
20 μ sec
8192

8 Hz
4000 Hz
31 μ sec
4096

The following explains the meaning of each parameter.
Frequency pitch: Pitch in Hz at which sampling is performed
Frequency max: Upper limit of sampling frequency (lower limit is fixed at 0 Hz)
Sampling interval: Interval in μ seconds at which sampling is performed
Number of samples: Number of times sampling is performed
3. Use function keys 1 through 4 to select an FFT Range setting.
• Selecting an FFT Range causes the final Setup Wizard screen to appear.
4. Perform step 10 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” on page 2-2
to finalize the procedure.

20051101

2-6
Using the Setup Wizard

k Using Setup Wizard to Configure a PhotoGate Setup
Connection of a Vernier PhotoGate requires configuration of setup parameters that are
slightly different from parameters for other types of sensors.
u To configure a setup for PhotoGate alone
1. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using
Setup Wizard” on page 2-2.
2. On the “Select Sensor” screen, select [VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Gate].
• This displays a screen where you specify whether PhotoGate is connected to the CH1
or SONIC channel.

3. Press 1 to specify CH1 or 2 to specify SONIC.
• This causes a “Gate Status” screen to appear.

• “Open” means the photo path is not blocked, while “Close” means the photo path is
blocked.
• The gate status defines what PhotoGate status should cause timing to start, and what
status should cause timing to stop.
Open-Open ...... Timing starts when the gate opens, and continues until it closes and
then opens again.
Open-Close ...... Timing starts when the gate opens, and continues until it closes.
Close-Open ...... Timing starts when the gate closes, and continues until it opens.
Close-Close ...... Timing starts when the gate closes, and continues until it opens and
then closes again.

20051101

2-7
Using the Setup Wizard

4. Use function keys 1 through 4 to select a Gate Status setting.
• Selecting a gate status causes a screen for specifying the number of samples to appear.

5. Input an integer in the range of 1 to 255 to specify the number of samples.
6. Perform step 10 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” on page 2-2
to finalize the procedure.
u To configure a setup for PhotoGate and Smart Pulley
1. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using
Setup Wizard” on page 2-2.
2. On the “Select Sensor” screen, select [VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Pulley].
• This causes an “Input Distance(m)” screen to appear.

• The distance you specify here is the distance the weight travels after it is released.
• Input a value in the range of 0.1 to 4 to specify the distance in meters.
3. Perform step 10 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” on page 2-2
to finalize the procedure.

20051101

2-8
Using the Setup Wizard

k Outputting the Waveform of a Function through the Speaker
Normally, the Setup Wizard helps you configure setups for sensors connected to the EA-200.
If you select [CASIO] - [Speaker] - [y=f(x)] on the “Select Sensor” screen, however, it
configures the EA-200 to output the sound that corresponds to a function that you input and
graph on the calculator.
u To configure a setup for speaker output
1. Connect the data communication cable (SB-62) to the communication port of the
calculator and the MASTER port of the EA-200.
2. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using
Setup Wizard” on page 2-2.
3. On the “Select Sensor” screen, select [CASIO] - [Speaker] - [y=f(x)].
This displays a screen like the one shown below.

4. Press w to advance to the View Window setting screen.
• The following settings are configured automatically: Ymin = –1.5 and Ymax = 1.5. Do not
change these settings.
5. Press w or J to advance to the graph function list.
6. In line “Y1”, input the function of the waveform for the sound you want to input.

• Note that the angle unit is always radians.
• Input a function where the value of “Y” is within the range of –1.5 to +1.5.

20051101

2-9
Using the Setup Wizard

7. Press 6(DRAW) to graph the function.
• This graphs the function and displays a vertical cursor line as shown below. Use the
graph to specify the range that you want to output to the speaker.

8. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the cursor to the start point of the output, and
then press w to register it.
9. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the cursor to the end point of the output, and
then press w to register it.
• After you specify the start point and end point, an output frequency dialog box shown
below appears on the display.

/
10. Input a percent value for the output frequency value you want.
• To output the original sound as-is, specify 100%. To raise the original sound by one octave,
input a value of 200%. To lower the original sound by one octave, input a value of 50%.
11. After inputting an output frequency value, press w.
• This outputs the waveform between the start point and end point from the EA-200 speaker.
• If the sound you configured cannot be output for some reason, the message “Range
Error” will appear. If this happens, press J to scroll back through the previous setting
screens and change the setup as required.
12. To terminate sound output, press the EA-200 [START/STOP] key.
13. Press w.
• This displays a screen like the one shown below.

20051101

2-10
Using the Setup Wizard

14. Perform one of the following operations, depending on what you want to do.

To change the output frequency and try again:
Press 1(Yes) to return to the “Output Frequency” dialog box. Next, repeat the above
steps from step 10.

To change the output range of the waveform graph and try again:
Press 6(No) to return to the graph screen in step 7. Next, repeat the above steps from
step 8.

To change the function:
Press 6(No) and then J to return to the graph function list in step 6. Next, repeat the
above steps from step 6.

To exit the procedure and return to the E-CON2 main menu:
Press 6(No) and then press J twice.

20051101

3-1
Using Advanced Setup

3 Using Advanced Setup
Advanced Setup provides you with total control over a number of parameters that you can
adjust to configure the EA-200 setup that suits your particular needs.
The procedures in this section provide the general steps you should perform when using
Advanced Setup to configure an EA-200 setup, and to returns setup settings to their initial
default values. You can find details about individual settings and the options that are
available with each setting are provided by the explanations that start on page 3-3.

k Advanced Setup Operations
u To configure an EA-200 setup using Advanced Setup
The following procedure describes the general steps for using Advanced Setup. Refer to the
pages as noted for more information.
1. Display the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1).
2. Press 1(SET). This displays the “Setup EA-200” submenu.
3. Press 2(ADV). This displays the Advanced Setup menu.

Advanced Setup Menu

4. If you want to configure a custom probe at this point, press f(Custom Probe). Next,
follow the steps under “To configure a custom probe setup” on page 4-1.
• You can also configure a custom probe during the procedure under “To configure Channel
Setup settings” on page 3-3.
• Custom probe configurations you have stored in memory can be selected using Channel
in step 5, below.
5. Use the Advanced Setup function keys described below to set other parameters.
• b(Channel) .... Displays a screen that shows the sensors that are currently
assigned to each channel (CH1, CH2, CH3, SONIC, Mic). You can
also use this dialog to change sensor assignments. See “Channel
Setup” on page 3-3 for more information.
• c(Sample) ..... Displays a screen for selecting the sampling mode, and for
specifying the sampling interval, the number of samples, and the
warm-up mode. When “Fast” is selected for “Mode”, this dialog box
also displays a setting for turning FFT (frequency characteristics)
graphing on and off. See “Sample Setup” on page 3-5 for more
information.

20051101
20070101

3-2
Using Advanced Setup

• d(Trigger) ...... Displays a screen for configuring sampling start (trigger) conditions.
See “Trigger Setup” on page 3-8 for more information.
• e(Graph) ....... Displays a screen for configuring graph settings. See “Graph Setup”
on page 3-13 for more information.
• You can return the settings on the above setup screens (b through e) using the
procedure described under “To return setup parameters to their initial defaults”.
6. After you configure a setup, you can use the function key operations described below to
start sampling or perform other operations.
• 1(STRT) ...... Starts sampling using the setup (page 8-1).
• 2(MLTI) ....... Starts MULTIMETER Mode sampling using the setup (page 5-1).
• 3(MEM) ....... Saves the setup (page 6-1).
• 4(PROG) ..... Converts the setup to a program (page 7-1).
• 5(GRPH) ..... Graphs data sampled by the EA-200, and provides tools for analyzing
graphs (page 10-1).
• 6(ABT) ........ Displays version information about the EA-200 unit that is currently
connected to the calculator.

u To return setup parameters to their initial defaults
Perform the following procedure when you want to return the parameters of the setup in the
current setup memory area to their initial defaults.
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press g(Initialize).

2. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to initialize the
setup.
• To clear the confirmation message without initializing the setup, press 6(No).

20051101

3-3
Using Advanced Setup

k Channel Setup
The Channel Setup screen shows the sensors that are currently assigned to each channel
(CH1, CH2, CH3, SONIC, Mic).
u To configure Channel Setup settings
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press b(Channel).
• This displays the Channel Setup screen.

Currently selected channel

Channel Setup Screen

2. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the channel whose setting
you want to change.
3. What you need to do next depends on the currently selected channel.
• CH1, CH2, or CH3
Press a function key to display a menu of sensors that can be assigned to the selected
channel.
1(CASIO) ...... Displays a menu of CASIO sensors.
2(VRNR) ....... Displays a menu of Vernier sensors.
3(CSTM) ....... Displays a menu of custom probes.
4(None) ......... Press this key when you want leave the channel without any sensor
assigned to it.
• SONIC Channel
Press a function key to display a menu of sensors that can be assigned to this channel.
1(CASIO) ...... Displays a menu of CASIO sensors, but only “Motion” can be
selected.
2(VRNR) ....... Displays a menu of Vernier sensors. You can select “Motion” or
“Photogate”.
Note
• On the menu that appears after you select “Motion” from either the CASIO or
Vernier sensor menu, select either “meters” or “feet” as the sampling unit.
• After selecting “Motion” from either the CASIO or Vernier sensor menu, you can
press the K key to toggle “smoothing (correction of measurement error)” on
(“-Smooth” displayed) and off (“-Smooth” not displayed).

20051101
20070101

3-4
Using Advanced Setup

• From the menu that appears after you select “Photogate” as the sensor, select
[Gate] or [Pulley].
[Gate] ............... Select this option when using the PhotoGate sensor alone.
[Pulley] ............. Select this option when using the PhotoGate sensor along with a
smart pulley.
4(None) ......... Select this option to disable the SONIC channel.
• Mic Channel
For this channel, the sensor is automatically set to Built-in (External) Microphone.
However, you need to configure the settings described below.
1(Snd) ........... Select this option to record elapsed time and volume 2-dimensional
sampled sound data (elapsed time on the horizontal axis, volume on
the vertical axis).
2(FFT) ........... Select this option to record frequency and volume 2-dimensional
sampled sound data (frequency on the horizontal axis, volume on the
vertical axis).
4(None) ......... Select this option to disable the Mic channel.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as many times as necessary to configure all the channels you want.
5. After all the settings are the way you want, press w.
• This returns to the Advanced Setup menu.
Note
• When you select a channel on the Channel Setup screen, the sampling range of the
selected channel appears in the bottom line of the screen.

In the above example, the range of the temperature sensor assigned to CH2 appears on the
display.
If the sampling range value is too long to fit on the display, only the part of the value that fits
on the display will be shown.
• Whenever the current Sample Setup (page 3-5) and Trigger Setup (page 3-8) settings
become incompatible due to a change in Channel Setup settings, these settings revert
automatically to their initial defaults. Selecting the Mic channel with Channel Setup while
the Sample Setup has “Extended” selected for the sampling mode, for example, will cause
the sampling mode to change automatically to “Fast” (which is the initial default setting
when the Mic channel is selected). For information about the channels that can be selected
for each sampling mode, see “Sample Setup” (page 3-5).

20051101
20070101

3-5
Using Advanced Setup

k Sample Setup
The Sample Setup screen lets you configure a number of settings that control sampling.
u To configure Sample Setup settings
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press c(Sample).
• This displays the Sample Setup screen, with the “Mode” line highlighted, which indicates
that you can select the sampling mode.

2. Select the sampling mode that suits the type of sampling you want to perform.
To do this:

Press this
key:

To select
this mode:

Graph data in real-time as it is sampled

1(R-T)

Realtime

Perform sampling of high-speed phenomena (sound, etc.) 2(Fast)
Perform sampling over a long time (weather, etc.)
• The EA-200 enters a power off sleep state while standing 4(Extd)
by.

Fast
Extended

Sample sound using the EA-200’s built-in microphone

6(g)
1(Snd)

Sound

Record the time of the occurrence of a particular trigger
event as an absolute value starting from 0, which is the
sampling start time

6(g)
2(Clck)

Clock

Perform periodic sampling, from a start trigger event to an
end trigger event

6(g)
3(Priod)

Period

Perform sampling other than that described above

3(Norm)

Normal

• Note that the mode you select also determines the channel(s) you can use.
Sampling mode:
Realtime, Extended, Normal

Selectable Channel(s)
CH1, CH2, CH3, SONIC

Fast
Sound

CH1, Mic
Mic

Clock, Period

CH1

20051101

3-6
Using Advanced Setup

3. To change the sampling interval setting, move the highlighting to “Interval”. Next, press
1 to display a dialog box for specifying the sampling interval.
• The range of values you can select depends on the current sampling mode setting.
If this sampling mode is selected:
Realtime

This is the allowable setting range:
0.2 to 299 sec

Fast
Extended

20 to 500 μsec
5 to 240 min

Period
Sound

“=Trigger” only (no value input required)
20 to 27 μsec

Clock
Normal

“=Trigger” only (no value input required)
0.0005 to 299 sec

4. To change the number of samples setting, move the highlighting to “Number”. Next, press
1 to display a dialog box for specifying the number of samples.
• You can specify a value in the range of 10 to 30,000.
• The total sampling time shown at the bottom of the dialog box is calculated by multiplying the “Sampling Interval” value you specified in step 3 by the number of samples you
specify here.
Important!
• When all of the following conditions exist, a “Distance” setting appears in place of the
“Number” setting. See “To configure the Distance setting” (page 3-7) for information
about configuring the “Distance” setting.
• Channel Setup (page 3-3): 2(VRNR) - [Photogate] - [Pulley]
• Sampling Mode (page 3-5): Clock
5. To change the warm-up time setting, move the highlighting to “Warm-up”. Next, perform
one of the function key operations described below.
Note
• The “Warm-up” setting will not be displayed on the Sample Setup screen if “Fast”,
“Sound” or “Extended” is currently selected as the sampling mode.
To do this:

Press this key:

Have the warm-up time for each sensor set automatically

1 (Auto)

Input a warm-up time, in seconds, manually

2 (Man)

Disable the warm-up time

3 (None)

Important!
• When the following condition exists, an “FFT Graph” setting appears in place of the
“Warm-up” setting. See “To configure the FFT Graph setting” (page 3-7) for information
about configuring the “FFT Graph” setting.
• Sampling Mode (page 3-5): Fast

20051101
20070101

3-7
Using Advanced Setup

6. After all the settings are the way you want, press w.
• This returns to the Advanced Setup menu.
Note
• Whenever the current Channel Setup (page 3-3) and Trigger Setup (page 3-8) settings
become incompatible due to a change in Sample Setup settings, these settings revert
automatically to their initial defaults. Selecting “Realtime” as the sampling mode with
Sample Setup while the Mic channel is selected with Channel Setup and the Trigger
Setup has “Mic” selected for “Source”, for example, will cancel the Channel Setup Mic
channel selection and change the Trigger Setup “Source” setting to “[EXE] key”.
For information about the channels that can be selected for each sampling mode, see
step 2 of “To configure Sample Setup settings”. For information about the trigger sources
that can be selected for each sampling mode, see “Trigger Setup” (page 3-8).
u To configure the Distance setting
In place of step 3 of the procedure under “To configure Sample Setup settings”, press 1 to
display a dialog box for specifying the distance the weight travels in meters.
• Specify a value in the range of 0.1 to 4 meters.
u To configure the FFT Graph setting
In place of step 5 of the procedure under “To configure Sample Setup settings”, press 1 to
display a dialog box for turning frequency characteristic graphing (FFT Graph) on and off.
To do this:
Turn on graphing of frequency characteristics after sampling

Press this key:
1(On)

Turn off graphing of frequency characteristics after sampling

2(Off)

20051101

3-8
Using Advanced Setup

k Trigger Setup
You can use the Trigger Setup screen to specify the event that causes sampling to start (w
key operation, etc.) The event that causes sampling to start is called the “trigger source”,
which is indicated as “Source” on the Trigger Setup screen.

The following table describes each of the six available trigger sources.
To start sampling when this happens:
When the w key is pressed

Select this trigger source:
[EXE] key

After the specified number of seconds are counted down

Count Down

When input at CH1 reaches a specified value

CH1

When input at the SONIC channel reaches a specified value

SONIC

When the EA-200’s built-in microphone detects sound

Mic

When the EA-200’s [START/STOP] key is pressed

[START] key

Note
The trigger sources you can select depends on the sampling mode selected with the Sample
Setup (page 3-5).
For this sampling mode:

The following trigger source(s) can be selected:

Realtime

[EXE] key, Count Down

Fast

[EXE] key, Count Down, CH1, Mic

Normal

[EXE] key, Count Down, CH1, SONIC, [START] key

Extended

[EXE] key

Sound

[EXE] key, Count Down, Mic

Clock

CH1

Period

CH1

20051101

3-9
Using Advanced Setup

u To configure Trigger Setup settings
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press d(Trigger).
• This displays the Trigger Setup screen with the “Source” line highlighted.

• The function menu items that appears in the menu bar depend on the sampling mode
selected with Sample Setup (page 3-5). The above screen shows the function menu
when “Normal” is selected as the sample sampling mode.
2. Use the function keys to select the trigger source you want.
• The following shows the trigger sources that can be selected for each sampling mode.
Sampling Mode

Trigger Source

Realtime

1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cnt) : Count Down

Fast

1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cnt) : Count Down, 3(CH1),
5(Mic)

Normal

1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cnt) : Count Down, 3(CH1),
4(Sonic), 5(STR) : [START] key

Sound

1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cnt) : Count Down, 5(Mic)

• The trigger source is always “[EXE] key” when the sampling mode is “Extended”, and
“CH1” when the sampling mode is “Clock” or “Period”.

20051101

3-10
Using Advanced Setup

3. Perform one of the following operations, in accordance with the trigger source that was
selected in step 2.
If this is the trigger
source:

Do this next:

[EXE] key

Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced
Setup menu.

Count Down

Specify the countdown start time. See “To specify the
countdown start time” below.

CH1

Specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge direction.
See “To specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge
type”, “To configure trigger threshold, trigger start edge, and
trigger end edge settings” on page 3-11 or “To configure
PhotoGate trigger start and end settings” on page 3-12.

SONIC

Specify the trigger threshold value and motion sensor level.
See “To specify the trigger threshold value and motion sensor
level” on page 3-12.

Mic

Specify microphone sensitivity. See “To specify microphone
sensitivity” below.

[START] key

Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced
Setup menu.

u To specify the countdown start time
1. Move the highlighting to “Timer”.
2. Press 1(Time) to display a dialog box for specifying the countdown start time.
3. Input a value in seconds from 1 to 10.
4. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu.
u To specify microphone sensitivity
1. Move the highlighting to “Sense” and then press one of the function keys describe below.
To select this level of microphone sensitivity:
Low

Press this key:
1(Low)

Medium

2(Mid)

High

3(High)

2. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1).

20051101

3-11
Using Advanced Setup

u To specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge type
Perform the following steps when “Fast”, “Normal”, or “Clock” is specified as the sampling
mode (page 3-5).
1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”.
2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is
value that data needs to attain before sampling starts.
Sensor assigned to CH1 or SONIC by Channel Setup
(page 3-3)

Measurement unit supported by assigned sensor

3. Input the value you want, and then press w.
4. Move the highlighting to “Edge”.
5. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of edge:
Falling

Press this key:
1(Fall)

Rising

2(Rise)

6. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1).
u To configure trigger threshold, trigger start edge, and trigger end edge settings
Perform the following steps when “Period” is specified as the sampling mode (page 3-5).
1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”.
2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is
value that data needs to attain before sampling starts.
3. Input the value you want.
4. Move the highlighting to “Start to”.
5. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of edge:
Falling

Press this key:
1(Fall)

Rising

2(Rise)

6. Move the highlighting to “End Edge”.
7. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of edge:

Press this key:

Falling

1(Fall)

Rising

2(Rise)

8. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1).

20051101
20070101

3-12
Using Advanced Setup

u To configure PhotoGate trigger start and end settings
Perform the following steps when CH1 is selected as a Photogate trigger source.
1. Move the highlighting to “Start to”.
2. Press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this PhotoGate status:
PhotoGate closed

Press this key:
1(Close)

PhotoGate open

2(Open)

3. Move the highlighting to “End Gate”.
4. Press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this PhotoGate status:
PhotoGate closed

Press this key:
1(Close)

PhotoGate open

2(Open)

5. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1).
u To specify the trigger threshold value and motion sensor level
1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”.
2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is
value that data needs to attain before sampling starts.
3. Input the value you want, and then press w.
4. Move the highlighting to “Level”.
5. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of level:
Below

Press this key:
1(Blw)

Above

2(Abv)

6. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1).

20051101

3-13
Using Advanced Setup

k Graph Setup
Use the Graph Setup screen to configure settings for the graph produced after sampling is
complete. You use the Sample Setup settings (page 3-5) to turn graphing on or off.
u To configure Graph Setup settings
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press e(Graph).
• This displays the Graph Setup screen.
Currently selected item

Graph Setup Screen

2. To change the graph source data name display setting, use the f and c cursor keys
to move the highlighting to “Graph Func”. Next, press one of the function keys described
below.
To specify this graph source data name display setting:
Display source data name

Press this key:
1(On)

Hide source data name

2(Off)

• When the graph data is stored in a sample data memory file, the file name appears as
the source data name. When the graph data is stored in current data area, the channel
name appears.
Note
• For details about sample data memory and current data area, see “9 Using Sample Data
Memory”.
3. To change the trace operation coordinate display setting, use the f and c cursor keys
to move the highlighting to “Coord”. Next, press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this coordinate display setting for the trace operation:

Press this key:

Display trace coordinates

1(On)

Hide trace coordinates

2(Off)

4. To change the numeric axes display setting, use the f and c cursor keys to move the
highlighting to “Econ Axes”. Next, press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this axes display setting:
Display axes

Press this key:
1(On)

Hide axes

2(Off)

20051101
20070101

3-14
Using Advanced Setup

5. To change the real-time scroll setting, use the f and c cursor keys to move the
highlighting to “RealScroll”. Next, press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this real-time scrolling setting:

Press this key:

Real-time scrolling on

1(On)

Real-time scrolling off

2(Off)

6. Press w to finalize Graph Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu.

20051101
20070101

4-1
Using a Custom Probe

4 Using a Custom Probe
You can use the procedures in this section to configure a custom probe for use with the EA200. The term “custom probe” means any sensor other than the CASIO or Vernier sensors
specified as standard for the E-CON2 Mode.

k Configuring a Custom Probe Setup
To configure a custom probe setup, you must input values for the constants of the fixed
linear interpolation formula (ax + b). The required constants are slope (a) and intercept (b). x
in the above expression (ax + b) is the sampled voltage value (sampling range: 0 to 5 volts).
u To configure a custom probe setup
1. From the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 1(SET) and then c(ADV) to display
the Advanced Setup menu.
• See “3 Using Advanced Setup” for more information.
2. On the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1), press f(Custom Probe) to display the Custom
Probe List.

• The message “No Custom Probe” appears if the Custom Probe List is empty.
3. Press 2(NEW).
• This displays a custom probe setup screen like the one shown below.

• The initial default setting for the probe name is “Voltage(6pin)”. The first step for
configuring custom probe settings is to change this name to another one. If you want to
leave the default name the way it is, skip steps 4 and 5.
4. Press 1(EDIT).
• This enters the probe name editing mode.
5. Input up to 18 characters for the custom probe name, and then press E.
• This will cause the highlighting to move to “Slope”.

20051101

4-2
Using a Custom Probe

6. Use the function keys described below to configure the custom probe setup.
• To change the setting of an item, first use the f and c cursor keys to move the
highlighting to the item. Next, use the function keys to select the setting you want.
(1) Slope
Press 1(EDIT) to input the slope for the linear interpolation formula.
(2) Intercept
Press 1(EDIT) to input the intercept for the linear interpolation formula.
(3) Unit Name
Press 1(EDIT) to input up to eight characters for the unit name.
(4) Warm-up
Press 1(EDIT) to input the warm-up time.
7. Press wand then input a memory number (1 to 99).
• This saves the custom probe setup and returns to the Custom Probe List, which should
now contain the new custom probe setup you configured.
u To recall the specifications of a Vernier sensor and configure custom

probe settings
1. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure a custom probe setup” on
page 4-1.
2. Press 5(VRNR).
• This displays a Vernier sensor list.

3. Use the f and c keys to move the highlighting to the Vernier sensor whose setting
you want to use as the basis of the custom probe settings, and then press w.
• The name and specifications of the Vernier sensor you select will appear on the custom
probe setup screen.

• To complete this procedure, perform steps 4 through 7 under “To configure a custom
probe setup” (page 4-1).

20051101

4-3
Using a Custom Probe

k Auto Calibrating a Custom Probe
Auto calibration automatically corrects the slope and intercept values of a custom probe
setup based on two actual samples.
Important!
• Before performing the procedure below, you should prepare two conditions whose
measurement values are known.
• When inputting reference value in step 5 of the procedure below, input the exact known
measurement value of the condition you will sample in step 4. When inputting reference
value in step 7 of the procedure below, input the exact known measurement value of the
condition you will sample in step 6.
u To auto calibrate a custom probe
1. Connect the calculator and EA-200, and connect the custom probe you want to auto
calibrate to CH1 of the EA-200.
2. What you should do first depends on whether you are configuring a new custom probe for
calibration, or editing the configuration of an existing custom probe.

If you are configuring a new custom probe:
• Perform steps 1 through 6 of the procedure under “To configure a custom probe setup”
on page 4-1.
• Auto calibrate will automatically set the slope and intercept, so you do not need to
specify them in step 6 of the above procedure.

If you are editing the configuration of an existing custom probe:
• Perform steps 1 through 3 of the procedure under “To edit a custom probe setup” on
page 4-6.
3. Press 2(CALIB).
• This will start the first sampling operation with the sensor connected to EA-200’s CH1,
and then display a screen like the one shown below.

First sampling operation
Real-time display of sampled values

20051101

4-4
Using a Custom Probe

4. After the sampled value stabilizes, hold down w for a few seconds.
• This will register the first sampled value and display it on the screen. At this time the
cursor will appear at the bottom of the display, ready for input of a reference value.

5. Use the key pad to input the reference value for the first sampled value, and then press
w.
• This cause sampling of the second value to be performed automatically, and display the
same type of screen that appeared in step 3.

Second sampling operation

6. After the sampled value stabilizes, hold down w for a few seconds.
• This will register the second sampled value and display it on the screen. The cursor will
appear at the bottom of the display, ready for input of a reference value.

7. Use the key pad to input the reference value for the second sampled value, and then
press w.
• This will return to the custom probe setup screen.
• The E-CON2 will calculate the slope and intercept value based on the two reference
values that you input, and configure the settings automatically. The automatically
configured values will appear on the custom probe setup screen, where you can view
them.

20051101

4-5
Using a Custom Probe

8. Press w, and then input a memory number from 1 to 99.
• This saves the custom probe setup and returns to the custom probe list.

k Zero Adjusting a Custom Probe
This procedure zero adjusts a custom probe and sets its intercept value based on an actual
sample using the applicable custom probe.
u To zero adjust a custom probe
1. Connect the calculator and EA-200, and connect the custom probe you want to zero
adjust to CH1 of the EA-200.
2. What you should do first depends on whether you are configuring a new custom probe for
zero adjusting, or editing the configuration of an existing custom probe.

If you are configuring a new custom probe:
• Perform steps 1 through 6 of the procedure under “To configure a custom probe setup”
on page 4-1.
• Auto calibrate will automatically set the intercept, so you do not need to specify it in step
6 of the above procedure.

If you are editing the configuration of an existing custom probe:
• Perform steps 1 through 3 of the procedure under “To edit a custom probe setup” on
page 4-6.
3. Press 3(ZERO).
• This will start the sampling operation with the sensor connected to EA-200’s CH1, and
then display a screen like the one shown below.

20051101
20070101

4-6
Using a Custom Probe

4. At the point your want to perform zero adjustment (the point that the displayed value is
the appropriate zero adjust value), press w.
• This will return to the custom probe setup screen.
• The E-CON2 will set the intercept value automatically based on the sampled value. The
automatically configured value will appear on the custom probe setup screen, where you
can view it.

5. Press w, and then input a memory number from 1 to 99.
• This saves the custom probe setup and returns to the custom probe list.

k Managing Custom Probe Setups
Use the procedures in this section to edit and delete existing custom probe setups.
u To edit a custom probe setup
1. Display the Custom Probe List.
2. Select the custom probe setup whose configuration you want to edit.
• Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the custom probe you want.
3. Press 3(EDIT).
• This displays the screen for configuring a custom probe setup.
• To edit the custom probe setup, perform the procedure starting from step 6 under “To
configure a custom probe setup” on page 4-1.
u To delete a custom probe setup
1. Display the Custom Probe List.
2. Select the custom probe setup you want to delete.
• Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the custom probe setup you
want.
3. Press 4(DEL).
4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the
custom probe setup.
• To clear the confirmation message without deleting anything, press 6(No).

20051101
20070101

5-1
Using the MULTIMETER Mode

5 Using the MULTIMETER Mode
You can use the Channel Setup screen (page 3-3) to configure a channel so that EA-200
MULTIMETER Mode sampling is triggered by a calculator operation.
u To use the MULTIMETER Mode
1. Connect the calculator and EA-200, and connect the sensors you want to the applicable
EA-200 channels.
2. From the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1), use the Channel Setup screen (page 3-3) to
configure sensor setups for each channel you will be using.
3. After configuring the sensor setups, press w to return to the Advanced Setup menu
(page 3-1), and then press 2(MLTI).
• This starts sampling in the EA-200 MULTIMETER mode and displays a list of sample
values for each channel.

• Displayed sample data is refreshed at 0.5-second intervals.
• Do not connect sensors to any other channels except for those you specified in step 2.
• Data sampled in the MULTIMETER mode is not saved in memory.
4. To end MULTIMETER mode sampling, press the w key.

20051101
20070101

6-1
Using Setup Memory

6 Using Setup Memory
Creating EA-200 setup data using the Setup Wizard or Advanced Setup causes the data to
be stored in the “current setup memory area”. The current contents of the current setup
memory area are overwritten whenever you create other setup data.
You can use setup memory to save the current setup memory area contents to calculator
memory to keep it from being overwritten, if you want.

k Saving a Setup
A setup can be saved when any one of the following conditions exist.
• After configuring a new setup with Setup Wizard
See step 8 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” on page 2-2.
• After configuring a new setup with Advanced Setup
See step 6 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Advanced Setup” on page 3-1 for
more information.
• While the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display
Performing the setup save operation while the E-CON2 main menu is on the display saves
the contents of the current setup memory area (which were configured using Setup Wizard
or Advanced Setup).
Details on saving a setup are listed below.

u To save a setup
1. If the final Setup Wizard screen (page 2-4) is on the display, advance to step 2. If it isn’t,
start the save operation by performing one of the function key operations described
below.
✔ If the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press 3(MEM).
✔ If the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display, press 2(MEM).
• Performing any one of the above operations causes the setup memory list to appear.

• The message “No Setup-MEM” appears if setup memory is empty.

20051101
20070101

6-2
Using Setup Memory

2. If you are starting from the final Setup Wizard screen, press c(Save Setup-MEM).
If you are starting from another screen, press 2(SAVE).
• This displays the screen for inputting the setup name.

3. Input up to 18 characters for the setup name.
4. Press w and then input a memory number (1 to 99).
• If you start from the final Setup Wizard screen (page 2-4), this saves the setup and the
message “Complete!” appears. Press w to return to the final Setup Wizard screen
(page 2-4).
• If you start from the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) or the E-CON2 main menu (page
1-1), this saves the setup and returns to the setup memory list which includes the name
you assigned it.
Important!
• Since you assign both a setup name and a file number to each setup, you can assign
the same name to multiple setups, if you want.

k Using and Managing Setups in Setup Memory
All of the setups you save are shown in the setup memory list. After selecting a setup in the
list, you can use it to sample data or you can edit it.

u To preview saved setup data
You can use the following procedure to check the contents of a setup before you use it for
sampling.
1. On the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press K(Setup Preview).
• This displays the preview dialog box.

4. To close the preview dialog box, press J.

20051101
20070101

6-3
Using Setup Memory

u To recall a setup and use it for sampling
Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with the EA-200.
1. Connect the calculator to the EA-200.
2. Turn on EA-200 power.
3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the
appropriate EA-200 channel.
4. Prepare the item whose data is to be sampled.
5. On the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list.
6. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
7. Press 1(STRT).
8. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1.
• Pressing w sets up the EA-200 and then starts sampling.
• To clear the confirmation message without sampling, press 6.
Note
• See “Operations during a sampling operation” on page 8-2 for information about
operations you can perform while a sampling operation is in progress.

u To change the name of setup data
1. On the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press 3(REN).
• This displays the screen for inputting the setup name.

4. Input up to 18 characters for the setup name, and then press w.
• This changes the setup name and returns to the setup memory list.

20051101
20070101

6-4
Using Setup Memory

u To delete setup data
1. On the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press 4(DEL).
4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the
setup.
• To clear the confirmation message without deleting anything, press 6(No).

u To recall setup data
Recalling setup data stores it in the current setup memory area. You can then use Advanced
Setup to edit the setup. This capability comes in handy when you need to perform a setup
that is slightly different from one you have stored in memory.
1. On the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press 5(LOAD).
4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to recall the setup.
• To clear the confirmation message without recalling the setup, press 6(No).
Note
• Recalling setup data replaces any other data currently in the current setup memory area.

20051101
20070101

7-1
Using Program Converter

7 Using Program Converter
Program Converter converts an EA-200 setup you configured using Setup Wizard or
Advanced Setup to a program that can run on the calculator. You can also use Program
Converter to convert a setup to a CFX-9850 Series/fx-7400 Series-compatible program.*1 *2
*1 See the documentation that came with your scientific calculator or EA-200 for information
about how to use a converted program.
*2 See online help (PROGRAM CONVERTER HELP) for information about supported CFX9850 Series and fx-7400 Series models.

k Converting a Setup to a Program
A setup can be converted to a program when any one of the following conditions exists.
• After configuring a new setup with Setup Wizard
See step 8 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” on page 2-2.
• After configuring a new setup with Advanced Setup
See step 6 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Advanced Setup” on page 3-1 for
more information.
• While the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display
Performing the program converter operation while the E-CON2 main menu is on the
display converts the contents of the current setup memory area (which were configured
using Setup Wizard or Advanced Setup).
The program converter procedure is identical in all of the above cases.

u To convert a setup to a program
1. Start the converter operation by performing one of the key operations described below.
✔ If the final Setup Wizard screen (page 2-4) is on the display, press d(Convert Program).
✔ If the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press 4(PROG).
✔ If the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display, press 3(PROG).
• After you perform any one of the above operations, the program converter screen will
appear on the display.

20051101

7-2
Using Program Converter

2. Enter up to eight characters for the program name.
Note
Using the program converter initial default settings will create a program like the one
below.
• Associated Scientific Calculator: fx-9860 Series
• Associated Data Analyzer: EA-200
• Calibration: None
• Password: None
If you want to use these settings the way they are without changing them, skip steps 3
through 7 and go directly to step 8. If you want to change any of the settings, perform the
applicable operations in steps 3 through 7.
3. Specify the scientific calculator model to be associated with the program. Perform one of
the following key operations to associate the program with a scientific calculator.
To associate the program with this calculator:

Perform this key operation:

fx-9860 Series

1(CALC) 1(9860)

CFX-9850 Series

1(CALC) 2(9850)

fx-7400 Series

1(CALC) 3(7400)

• The number part of the scientific calculator model number you specify will appear in line
“F1:” of the program converter screen.
Note
For information about 1(CALC)4(→38K), see “Converting a CFX-9850 Series
Program to a fx-9860 Series Compatible Program” (page 7-4).
4. Specify the Data Analyzer model (EA-100 or EA-200) to be associated with the program.
Perform one of the following key operations to associate the program with a Data
Analyzer.
To associate the program with this Data Analyzer:
EA-200

Perform this key operation:
2(TYPE) 1(200)

EA-100

2(TYPE) 2(100)

• The number part of the Data Analyzer model number you specify will appear in line “F2:”
of the program converter screen.
Important!
• Note that the capabilities of the EA-100 and EA-200 are different. Because of this, you
should keep in mind that an EA-200 program converted to an EA-100 program and used
to perform sampling with an EA-100 setup may not produce the desired results.

20051101

7-3
Using Program Converter

5. If you plan to use a custom probe connected to CH1 of the Data Analyzer, specify
whether calibration or zero adjust should be performed. Perform one of the following key
operations to configure the desired setting.
To perform this operation:

Perform this key operation:

Calibration of the CH1 custom probe

3(CALB) 1(CALIB)

Zero adjust of the CH1 custom probe

3(CALB) 2(ZERO)

No calibration

3(CALB) 3(None)

• The operation you specify will appear in line “F3:” of the program converter screen.
6. To password protect the program, press 4(

).

• This will cause the “Password?” prompt and password input field to appear under the
program name input field.

7. Enter up to eight characters for the password.
• If you change your mind about assigning a password, press J here. This will cause
the password input field to disappear and cancel password input.
8. After everything is the way you want, press w to convert the program in accordance
with the setup.
• The message “Complete!” appears when conversion is complete. To clear the message
and return to the screen that was on the display in step 1, press w or J.

20051101
20070101

7-4
Using Program Converter

k Converting a CFX-9850 Series Program to a fx-9860 Series Compatible
Program
To use an EA-200 control program created on the CFX-9850 Series calculator (for use on
the CFX-9850) on the E-CON2, you need to convert the program to an fx-9860 program.
Conversion can be performed using the program converter.
EA-200 Control Program for
CFX-9850 Series

Convert

EA-200 Control Program for
fx-9860 Series

u To convert a program
1. Transfer the EA-200 control program created for the CFX-9850 Series to the fx-9860
main memory.
• Use the cable that comes bundled with the fx-9860 to connect its 3-pin serial port to the
3-pin serial port of the CFX-9850. For details, see the chapter titled “Data
Communications” in the manuals that come with each unit.
2. Perform step 1 under “To convert a setup to a program” on page 7-1, which displays the
program converter screen.
3. Press 1(CALC) and then press 4(→38K).
• This displays a list of programs currently in main memory.

4. Use f and c to move the highlighting of the program you want to convert, and then
press 1(EXE) or w.
• A program name input screen will appear after conversion is complete.

20051101

7-5
Using Program Converter

5. Enter up to eight characters for the program name.
• If you want to password protect the program, perform steps 6 and 7 under “To convert a
setup to a program” after inputting the program name.
6. Press w to start conversion of the program.
• The message “Complete!” appears when conversion is complete. To clear the message,
press w or J.

20051101

8-1
Starting a Sampling Operation

8 Starting a Sampling Operation
The section describes how to use a setup configured using the E-CON2 Mode to start an
EA-200 sampling operation.

k Before getting started...
Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with the EA-200.
1. Connect the calculator to the EA-200.
2. Turn on EA-200 power.
3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the
appropriate EA-200 channel.
4. Prepare the item whose data is to be sampled.

k Starting a Sampling Operation
A sampling operation can be started when any one of the following conditions exist.
• After configuring a new setup with Setup Wizard
See step 8 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” on page 2-2.
• After configuring a new setup with Advanced Setup
See step 6 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Advanced Setup” on page 3-1.
• While the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display
Starting a sampling operation while the E-CON2 main menu is on the display performs
sampling using the contents of the current setup memory area (which were configured
using Setup Wizard or Advanced Setup).
• While the setup memory list is on the display
You can select the setup you want on the setup memory list and then start sampling.
The following procedures explain the first three conditions described above. See “To recall a
setup and use it for sampling” on page 6-3 for information about starting sampling from the
setup memory list.

20051101

8-2
Starting a Sampling Operation

u To start sampling
1. Start the sampling operation by performing one of the function key operations described
below.
✔ If the final Setup Wizard screen (page 2-4) is on the display, press b(Start Setup).
✔ If the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press 1(STRT).
✔ If the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display, press 4(STRT).
• After you perform any one of the above operations, a sampling start confirmation screen
like the one shown below will appear on the display.

2. Press w.
• This sets up the EA-200 using the setup data in the current setup memory area.
• The message “Setting EA-200...” remains on the display while EA-200 setup is in
progress. You can cancel the setup operation any time this message is displayed by
pressing A.
• The screen shown below appears after EA-200 setup is complete.

3. Press w to start sampling.
• The screens that appear while sampling is in progress and after sampling is complete
depend on setup details (sampling mode, trigger setup, etc.). For details, see
“Operations during a sampling operation” below.

u Operations during a sampling operation
Sending a sample start command from the calculator to the EA-200 causes the following
sequence to be performed.
Setup Data Transfer → Sampling Start → Sampling End →
Transfer of Sample Data from the EA-200 to the Calculator
The table on the next page shows how the trigger conditions and sensor type specified in the
setup data affects the above sequence.

20051101

20051101
20070101

Clock

Period

Extended

Sound

Normal

Fast

Real-time

Mode

1. EA-200 Setup

Starts Sampling
2. Start Standby

Pressing 1 advances to
“4. Graphing”.
Pressing w there returns to
“3. Sampling”.

• The screen shown below appears when CH1,
SONIC, or Mic is used as the trigger.

3. Sampling

w

Outputting through
speaker

w

Sample values is stored as List
data only.

The following three graph types
can be produced when PhotoGate-Pulley is being used.
1. Time and distance graph
2. Time and velocity graph
• When Number of Samples > 1 3. Time and acceleration graph

• When Number of Samples = 1

w

Input values.
w

w

• When Mode = Sound
Graph screen does not show all sampled values,
but only a partial preview.

Sampled values are saved as
Current Sample Data.

4. Graphing

8-3
Starting a Sampling Operation

9-1
Using Sample Data Memory

9 Using Sample Data Memory
Performing an EA-200 sampling operation from the E-CON2 Mode causes sampled results
to be stored in the “current data area” of E-CON2 memory. Separate data is saved for each
channel, and the data for a particular channel in the current data area is called that channel’s
“current data”.
Any time you perform a sampling operation, the current data of the channel(s) you use is
replaced by the newly sampled data. If you want to save a set of current data and keep it
from being replaced by a new sampling operation, save the data in sample data memory
under a different file name.

k Managing Sample Data Files
u To save current sample data to a file
1. On the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 5(GRPH).
• This displays the Graph Mode screen.

Graph Mode Screen

• For details about the Graph Mode screen, see “10 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to
Graph Data”.
2. Press 2(DATA).
• This displays the Sampling Data List screen.

List of current data files
“cd” stands for “current data”. The
text on the right side of the colon
indicates the channel name.

20051101

Sampling Data List Screen

9-2
Using Sample Data Memory

3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the current data file you want
to save, and then press 2(SAVE).
• This displays the screen for inputting a data name.

4. Enter up to 18 characters for the data file name, and then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for inputting a memory number.
5. Enter a memory number in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w.
• This saves the sample data at the location specified by the memory number you input.
The sample data file you save is indicated
on the display using the format:
:.

• If you specify a memory number that is already being used to store a data file, a
confirmation message appears asking if you want to replace the existing file with the
new data file. Press 1 to replace the existing data file, or 6 to return to the memory
number input dialog box in Step 4.
6. To return to the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press J twice.
Note
• You could select another data file besides a current data file in step 3 of the above
procedure and save it under a different memory number. You do not need to change the
file’s name as long as you use a different file number.

20051101

9-3
Using Sample Data Memory

u To rename an existing sample data file
Note
• You cannot use this procedure to rename a current data file name.
1. On the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 5(GRPH).
• This displays the Graph Mode screen.
2. Press 2(DATA).
• This displays the Sampling Data List screen.
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the data file you want to
rename, and then press 3(REN).
• This displays the screen for inputting a file name.
4. Enter up to 18 characters for the new data file name, and then tap w.
• This returns to the Sampling Data List screen.
5. To return to the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press J twice.
u To delete a sample data file
1. On the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 5(GRPH).
• This displays the Graph Mode screen.
2. Press 2(DATA).
• This displays the Sampling Data List screen.
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the data file you want to
delete, and then press 4(DEL).
4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the data
file.
• To clear the confirmation message without deleting the data file, press 6(No).
• This returns to the Sampling Data List screen.
5. To return to the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press J twice.

20051101
20070101

10-1
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data

10 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data
Graph Analysis tools make it possible to analyze graphs drawn from sampled data.

k Accessing Graph Analysis Tools
You can access Graph Analysis tools using either of the two methods described below.
u Accessing Graph Analysis tools from the Graph Mode screen, which is

displayed by pressing 5(GRPH) on the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1)

Graph Mode Screen

• The main menu appears after you perform a sampling operation. Press 5(GRPH) at
that time.
• When you access Graph Analysis tools using this method, you can select from among a
variety of other Analysis modes. See “Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph”
(page 10-2) for more information about the other Analysis modes.
u Accessing Graph Analysis tools from the screen of a graph drawn after a

sampling operation is executed from the Setup Wizard or from Advanced
Setup (Realtime Mode)

Graph Screen

• In this case, data is graphed after the sampling operation is complete, and the calculator
accesses Graph Analysis tools automatically. See “Graph Screen Key Operations” on
page 11-1.

20051101

10-2
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data

k Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph
This section contains a detailed procedure that covers all steps from selecting an analysis
mode to drawing a graph.
Note
• Step 4 through step 6 are not essential and may be skipped, if you want. Skipping any
step automatically applies the initial default values for its settings.
• If you skip step 2, the default analysis mode is the one whose name is displayed in the
top line of the Graph Mode screen.
u To select an analysis mode and draw a graph
1. On the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 5(GRPH).
• This displays the Graph Mode screen.
2. Press 3(MODE), and then select the analysis mode you want from the menu that
appears.
To do this:

Perform this menu
operation:

To select this
mode:

Graph three sets of sampled data
simultaneously

[Norm]

Graph Analysis

Graph sampled data along with its first and
second derivative graph

[diff]

d/dt & d2/dt2

Display the graphs of different sampled data in
[CMPR]/[GRPH]
upper and lower windows for comparison

Compare Graph

Output sampled data from the speaker,
displaying graph of the raw data in the upper
window and the output waveform in the lower
window

Compare Sound

[CMPR]/[Snd]

Display the graph of sampled data in the upper
window and its first derivative graph in the
[CMPR]/[d/dt]
lower window

Compare d/dt

Display the graph of sampled data in the upper
window and its second derivative graph in the [CMPR]/[d2/dt2]
lower window

Compare d2/dt2

• The name of the currently selected mode appears in the top line of the Graph Mode
screen.
Analysis mode name

3. Press 2(DATA).
• This displays the Sampling Data List screen.
20051101

10-3
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data

4. Specify the sampled data for graphing.
a. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the name of the sampled
data file you want to select, and then press 1(ASGN) or w.
• This returns to the Graph Mode screen, which shows the name of the sample data file
you selected.
Sample data file name

Graph on/off indicator

Name of sensor used for sampling

Graph Mode Screen

b. Repeat step a above to specify sample data files for other graphs, if there are any.
• If you select “Graph Analysis” as the analysis mode in step 2, you must specify sample
data files for three graphs. If you select “Compare Graph” as the analysis mode in step
2, you must specify sample data files for two graphs. With other modes, you need to
specify only one sample data file.
• For details about Sampling Data List screen operations, see “9 Using Sample Data Memory”.
5. Turn on graphing for each of the graphs listed on the Graph Mode screen.
a. On the Graph Mode screen, use the f and c cursor keys to select a graph, and then
press 1(SEL) to toggle graphing on or off.

Graphing turned off.
Graphing turned on.

b. Repeat step a to turn each of the graphs listed on the Graph Mode screen on or off.
6. Select the graph style you want to use.
a. On the Graph Mode screen, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to
the graph (Gph1, Gph2, etc.) whose style you want to specify, and then press 4(STYL).
This will cause the function menu to change as shown below.

20051101

10-4
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data

b. Use the function keys to specify the graph style you want.
To specify this graph style:

Press this key:

Line graph with dot ( • ) data markers

1(

)

2(

)

Line graph with X (×) data markers

3(

)

Scatter graph with dot ( • ) data markers

4(

)

Scatter graph with square (

5(

)

6(

)

Line graph with square (

) data markers

) data markers

Scatter graph with X (×) data markers

c. Repeat a and b to specify the style for each of the graphs on the Graph Mode screen.
7. On the Graph Mode screen, press 6(DRAW) or w.
• This draws the graph(s) in accordance with the settings you configured in step 2 through
step 6.

Graph Screen

• When a Graph screen is on the display, the function keys provide you with zooming and
other capabilities to aid in graph analysis.
For details about Graph screen function key operations, see the following section.
u To deselect sampled data assigned for graphing on the Graph Mode

screen
1. On the Graph Mode screen, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to
the graph (Gph1, Gph2, etc.) whose sampled data you want to deselect.
2. Press 5(DEL).
• This will deselect sample data assigned to the highlighted graph.

20051101

11-1
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

11 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
This section explains the various operations you can perform on the graph screen after
drawing a graph.
You can perform these operations on a graph screen produced by a sampling operation, or by the
operation described under “Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph” on page 10-2.

k Graph Screen Key Operations
On the graph screen, you can use the keys described in the table below to analyze (CALC)
graphs by reading data points along the graph (Trace) and enlarging specific parts of the
graph (Zoom).
Key Operation

Description

!1(TRCE)

Displays a trace pointer on the graph along with the coordinates of the
current cursor location. Trace can also be used to obtain the periodic
frequency of a specific range on the graph and assign it to a variable.
See “Using Trace” on page 11-3.

!2(ZOOM)

Starts a zoom operation, which you can use to enlarge or reduce the
size of the graph along the x-axis or the y-axis. See “Using Zoom” on
page 11-4.

Displays a function menu of special View Window commands for the
E-CON2 Mode graph screen.
!3(V-WIN)
For details about each command, see “Configuring View Window
Parameters” on page 11-14.
Displays a menu that contains the following commands: Cls, Plot,
F-Line, Text, PEN, Vert, and Hztl. For details about each command, see
!4(SKTCH)
“5-10 Changing the Appearance of a Graph” in the manual that comes
with the fx-9860G SD/fx-9860G calculator.

K1(PICT)

Saves the currently displayed graph as a graphic image. You can recall a
saved graph image and overlay it on another graph to compare them.
For details about these procedures, see “5-4 Storing a Graph in Picture
Memory” in the manual that comes with the fx-9860G SD/fx-9860G
calculator.

K2(LMEM)

Displays a menu of functions for saving the sample values in a specific
range of a graph to a list. See “Transforming Sampled Data to List Data”
on page 11-5.

20051101
20070101

11-2
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

Key Operation

Description

K3(EDIT)

Displays a menu of functions for zooming and editing a particular graph
when the graph screen contains multiple graphs. See “Working with
Multiple Graphs” on page 11-10.

K4(CALC)

Displays a menu that lets you transform a sample result graph to a
function using Fourier series expansion, and to perform regression to
determine the tendency of a graph. See “Using Fourier Series Expansion
to Transform a Waveform to a Function” on page 11-6, and “Performing
Regression” on page 11-8.

K5(Y=fx)

Displays the graph function list, which lets you select a Y=f(x) graph to
overlay on the sampled result graph. See “Overlaying a Y=f(x) Graph on
a Sampled Result Graph” on page 11-9.

K6(SPKR)

Starts an operation for outputting a specific range of a sound data
waveform graph from the speaker. See “Outputting a Specific Range of a
Graph from the Speaker” on page 11-12.

k Scrolling the Graph Screen
Press the cursor keys while the graph screen is on the display scrolls the graph left, right, up,
or down.
Note
• The cursor keys perform different operations besides scrolling while a trace or graph
operation is in progress. To perform a graph screen scroll operation in this case, press
J to cancel the trace or graph operation, and then press the cursor keys.

20051101

11-3
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

k Using Trace
Trace displays a crosshair pointer on the displayed graph along with the coordinates of the
current cursor position. You can use the cursor keys to move the pointer along the graph.
You can also use trace to obtain the periodic frequency value for a particular range, and
assign the range (time) and periodic frequency values in separate Alpha-Memory values.
u To use trace
1. On the graph screen, press !1(TRCE).
• This causes a trace pointer to appear on the graph. The coordinates of the current trace
pointer location are also shown on the display.

2. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the trace pointer along the graph to the location
you want.
• The coordinate values change in accordance with the trace pointer movement.
• You can exit the trace pointer at any time by pressing J.
u To obtain the periodic frequency value
1. Use the procedure under “To use trace” above to start a trace operation.
2. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range whose periodic frequency you want
to obtain, and then press w.
3. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range whose periodic frequency you want
to obtain.
• This causes the period and periodic frequency value at the start point you selected in
step 2 to appear along the bottom of the screen.

20051101
20070101

11-4
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

4. Press w to assign the period and periodic frequency values to Alpha-Memory variables.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying variable names for [Period] and [Frequency]
values.

• The initial default variable name settings are “S” for the period and “H” for the periodic
frequency. To change to another variable name, use the up and down cursor keys to
move the highlighting to the item you want to change, and then press the applicable
letter key.
5. After everything is the way you want, press w.
• This stores the values and exits the trace operation.
• For details about using Alpha-Memory, see the manual that comes with the fx-9860G
SD/fx-9860G calculator.

k Using Zoom
Zoom lets you enlarge or reduce the size of the graph along the x-axis or the y-axis.
Note
• When there are multiple graphs on the screen, the procedure below zooms all of them.
For information about zooming a particular graph when there are multiple graphs on the
screen, see “Working with Multiple Graphs” on page 11-10.
u To zoom the graph screen
1. On the graph screen, press !2(ZOOM).
• This causes a magnifying glass cursor (

) to appear in the center of the screen.

2. Use the cursor keys to move the magnifying glass cursor to the location on the screen
that you want at the center of the enlarged or reduced screen.

20051101

11-5
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

3. Press w.
• This causes the magnifying glass to disappear and enters the zoom mode.
• The cursor keys perform the following operations in the zoom mode.
To do this:
Enlarge the graph image horizontally

Press this cursor key:
e

Reduce the size of the graph image horizontally

d

Enlarge the graph image vertically

f

Reduce the size of the graph image vertically

c

4. To exit the zoom mode, press J.

k Transforming Sampled Data to List Data
Use the following procedure to transform the sampled data in a specific range of a graph into
list data.
u To transform sampled data to list data
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 2(LMEM).
• This displays the [LMEM] menu.
2. Press 2(SEL).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the range on the graph.
3. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range you want to convert to list data, and
then press w.

4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range you want to convert to list data, and
then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the lists where you want to store the time data
and the sampled data.

/

• The initial default lists are List 1 for the time and List 2 for sample data. To change to
another list (List 1 to List 26), use the up and down cursor keys to move the highlighting
to the list you want to change, and then input the applicable list number.

20051101

11-6
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

5. After everything is the way you want, press w.
• This saves the lists and the message “Complete!” appears. Press w to return to the
graph screen.
• For details about using list data, see the manual that comes with the fx-9860G SD/fx9860G calculator.
Note
• Pressing 1(All) in place of 2(SEL) in step 2 converts the entire graph to list data. In this
case, the “Store Sample Data” dialog box appears as soon as you press 1(All).

k Using Fourier Series Expansion to Transform a Waveform to a Function
Fourier series expansion is effective for studying sounds by expressing them as functions.
The procedure below assumes that there is a graph of sampled sound data already on the
graph screen.
u To perform Fourier series expansion
1. On the graph screen , press K, and then 4(CALC).
• The [CALC] menu appears at the bottom of the display.

2. Press 1(Furie).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the graph range.
3. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range for which you want to perform
Fourier series expansion, and then press w.

20051101
20070101

11-7
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range for which you want to perform Fourier
series expansion, and then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the start degree of the Fourier series.

/
5. Input a value in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for inputting the degree of the Fourier series.

6. Input a value in the range of 1 to 10, and then press w.
• The graph function list appears with the calculation result.

7. Pressing 6(DRAW) here graphs the function.

• This lets you compare the expanded function graph and the original graph to see if they
are the same.
Note
When you press 6(DRAW) in step 7, the graph of the result of the Fourier series
expansion may not align correctly with the original graph on which it is overlaid. If this
happens, shift the position the original graph to align it with the overlaid graph.
For information about how to move the original graph, see “To move a particular graph on
a multi-graph display” (page 11-12).

20051101
20070101

11-8
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

k Performing Regression
You can use the procedure below to perform regression for a range specified using the trace
pointer. All of the following regression types are supported: Linear, Med-Med, Quadratic,
Cubic, Quartic, Logarithmic, Exponential, Power, Sine, and Logistic.
For details about these regression types, see page 6-3-5 through 6-3-10 of the manual that
comes with the fx-9860G SD/fx-9860G calculator.
The following procedure shows how to perform quadratic regression. The same general
steps can also be used to perform the other types of regression.
u To perform quadratic regression
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 4(CALC).
• The [CALC] menu appears at the bottom of the display.
2. Press 5(X^2).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the range on the graph.

3. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range for which you want to perform
quadratic regression, and then press w.
4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range for which you want to perform
quadratic regression, and then press w.
• This displays the quadratic regression calculation result screen.

20051101
20070101

11-9
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

5. Press 6(DRAW).
• This draws a quadratic regression graph and overlays it over the original graph.

• To delete the overlaid quadratic regression graph, press !4(SKTCH) and then
1(Cls).

k Overlaying a Y=f(x) Graph on a Sampled Result Graph
Use the following procedure when you want to overlay a Y=f(x) graph on the sampled result
graph.
u To overlay a Y=f(x) graph on an existing graph
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 5(Y=fx).
• This displays the graph function list. Any functions you have previously input on the
graph function list appear at this time.

2. Input the function you want to graph.
• To input a function, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the line
where you want to input it, and then use the calculator keys for input. Press w to store
the function.
3. On the graph function list, specify which functions you want to graph.
• Graphing is turned on for any function whose “=” symbol is highlighted. To toggle
graphing of a function on or off, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting
to the function, and then press 1(SEL).

20051101

11-10
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

4. After the graph function list settings are configured the way you want, press 6(DRAW).
• This overlays graphs of all the functions for which graphing is turned on, over the graph
that was originally on the graph screen.

/
Original Graph

Overlaid with Y=f(x) Graph

• To delete the overlaid graph, press !4(SKTCH) and then 1(Cls).
Important!
• The screenshot shown in step 4 above is of a function that was calculated and stored by
performing regression on a graph that was drawn using sampled data. Note that
overlaying a Y=f(x) graph on a sampled data graph does not automatically draw a
regression graph based on sampled data.

k Working with Multiple Graphs
The procedures in this section explain how you can zoom or move a particular graph when
there are multiple graphs on the display.
u To zoom a particular graph on a multi-graph display
1. When the graph screen contains multiple graphs, press K, and then 3(EDIT).
• The [EDIT] menu appears at the bottom of the display.

2. Press 1(ZOOM).
• This displays only one of the graphs that were originally on the graph screen.

20051101

11-11
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is
displayed, and then press w.
• This enters the zoom mode and causes all of the graphs to reappear, along with a
magnifying glass cursor ( ) in the center of the screen.

4. Use the cursor keys to move the magnifying glass cursor to the location on the screen
that you want at the center of the enlarged or reduced screen.
5. Press w.
• This causes the magnifying glass to disappear and enters the zoom mode.
• The cursor keys perform the following operations in the zoom mode.
To do this:
Enlarge the graph image horizontally

Press this cursor key:
e

Reduce the size of the graph image horizontally

d

Enlarge the graph image vertically

f

Reduce the size of the graph image vertically

c

/
6. To exit the zoom mode, press J.

20051101
20070101

11-12
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

u To move a particular graph on a multi-graph display
1. When the graph screen contains multiple graphs, press K, and then 3(EDIT).
• This displays the [EDIT] menu.
2. Press 2(MOVE).
• This displays only one of the graphs that were originally on the graph screen.
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is
displayed, and then press w.
• This enters the move mode and causes all of the graphs to reappear.
4. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the graph left and right, or the f and c
cursor keys to move the graph up and down.

/
5. To exit the move mode, press J.

k Outputting a Specific Range of a Graph from the Speaker
Use the following procedure to output a specific range of a sound data waveform graph from
the speaker.
u To output a graph from the speaker
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 4(SPKR).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the range on the graph.

2. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range you want to output from the speaker,
and then press w.

20051101

11-13
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

3. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range you want to output from the speaker,
and then press w.
• After you specify the start point and end point, an output frequency dialog box shown
below appears on the display.

/
4. Input a percent value for the output frequency value you want.
• The output frequency specification is a percent value. To output the original sound as-is,
specify 100%. To raise the original sound by one octave, input a value of 200%. To lower
the original sound by one octave, input a value of 50%.
5. After inputting an output frequency value, press w.
• This outputs the waveform between the start point and end point from the EA-200
speaker.
• If the sound you configured cannot be output for some reason, the message “Range
Error” will appear. If this happens, press J to scroll back through the previous setting
screens and change the setup as required.
6. To terminate sound output, press the EA-200 [START/STOP] key.
7. Press w.
• This displays a screen like the one shown below.

8. If you want to retry output from the speaker, press 1(Yes). To exit the procedure and
return to the graph screen, press 6(No).
• Pressing 1(Yes) returns to the “Output Frequency” dialog box. From there, repeat the
above steps from step 4.

20051101

11-14
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

k Configuring View Window Parameters
Pressing !3(V-Window) while the graph screen is on the display displays a View
Window function key menu along the bottom of the display.

Press the function key that corresponds to the View Window parameter you want to configure.
Function Key

Description

1(Auto)

Automatically applies the following View Window parameters.
Y-axis Elements: In accordance with screen size
X-axis Elements: In accordance with screen size when 1 data item
equals 1 dot; 1 data equals 1 dot in other cases

2(FULL)

Resizes the graph so all of it fits in the screen.

3(Y)

Resizes the graph so all of it fits in the screen along the Y-axis, without
changing the X-axis dimensions.

4(UNIT)

Specifies the unit of the numeric axis grid displayed by the Econ Axes
setting of the graph setup screen (page 3-13).
1(μ sec): microseconds
2(msec): milliseconds
3(sec): seconds
4(DHMS):days, hours, minutes, seconds (1 day, 2 hours, 30 minutes,
5 seconds = 1d2h30m5s)
5(Auto):Auto selection

5(CHNG)

Toggles display of the source data on the graph screen on and off.

To exit the View Window function key menu and return to the standard function key menu,
press J.

20051101
20070101

12-1
Calling E-CON2 Functions from an eActivity

12 Calling E-CON2 Functions from an eActivity
You can call E-CON2 functions from an eActivity by including an “Econ strip” in the eActivity
file. The following describes each of the four available Econ strips.
u Econ SetupWizard strip
This strip calls the E-CON2 Setup Wizard. The Econ Setup Wizard strip makes it
possible to perform the following series of operations from the eActivity: EA-200
setup using the Setup Wizard R Sampling R Graphing.
u Econ AdvancedSetup strip
This strip calls the E-CON2 Advanced Setup screen. The Advanced Setup provides
access to almost all executable functions (except for the program converter),
including detailed EA-200 setup and sampling execution; graphing and Graph
Analysis Tools; simultaneous sampling with multiple sensors using the
MULTIMETER Mode, etc.
u Econ Sampling strip
This strip records on set of EA-200 setup information configured using Advanced
Setup, and performs sampling. Once setup information is recorded to this type of
strip, sampling starts immediately based on the recorded setup information the next
time the strip is executed.
u Econ Graph strip
This strip graphs sampled data that is recorded in the strip. The sampled data is
recorded to the strip the first time the strip is executed.
This section explains how to insert each type of Econ strip into an eActivity file, and how to
use inserted Econ strips. For details about eActivity operations, see “Chapter 10 eActivity” in
the manual that comes with the fx-9860G SD or fx-9860G.

20051101

12-2
Calling E-CON2 Functions from an eActivity

k Inserting an Econ Strip into an eActivity File
The following procedure assumes that the eActivity file into which you want to insert the
Econ strip is already open. For information about creating a new file and other basic eActivity
operations, see “Basic eActivity File Operation” (page 10-1-5) in the manual that comes with
the fx-9860G SD or fx-9860G.
u To insert an Econ Strip into an eActivity file
1. On the eActivity workspace screen, move the cursor the location where you want to insert
the Econ strip.
2. Press 2(STRP).
• This will display a dialog box with a list of insertable strips.

3. Use f and c to move the highlighting to the type of Econ strip you want to insert.

• See the beginning of this section (page 12-1) for details about each Econ strip type.
4. Press w.
• The strip is inserted above the line or the strip where the cursor is currently located.

5. Enter up to 16 characters for the strip title.

20051101

12-3
Calling E-CON2 Functions from an eActivity

6. Press w to assign the title to the strip.

• This will highlight the strip.
• You can execute the strip here by pressing w. For details about operations that are
required when you execute a strip, see “Calling an E-CON2 Function from an Econ
Strip” below.

k Calling an E-CON2 Function from an Econ Strip
This section explains operations for each type of Econ strip that can be inserted into an
eActivity file. The following procedure assumes that the applicable Econ strip has already
been inserted into an eActivity that is currently open.
u To access the Setup Wizard from an Econ SetupWizard strip
1. On the eActivity workspace screen, use the f and c keys to move the highlighting to
the Econ SetupWizard strip.

2. Press w.
• This launches the Setup Wizard and displays the “Select Sensor” screen.

20051101
20070101

12-4
Calling E-CON2 Functions from an eActivity

3. Perform the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” (page
2-2) from step 3 to set up the EA-200 and execute sampling.
Note
• In the case of the Econ SetupWizard strip, only the “1: Start Setup” is available on the
“Complete!” dialog box. Other options are not available.

4. To return to the eActivity workspace screen, press !a(')J.
u To access Advanced Setup from an Econ Advanced Setup strip
1. On the eActivity workspace screen, use the f and c keys to move the highlighting to
the Econ Advanced Setup strip.
2. Press w.
• This displays the Advanced Setup screen.

• From here, perform the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Advanced
Setup” (page 3-1) from step 4.
• To return to the eActivity workspace screen after you finished the procedure or at any
point during the procedure, press !a(') .
Note
• Using an Econ Advanced Setup strip to configure a setup causes the setup information
to be registered in the applicable strip. This means that the next time you open the strip,
sampling can be performed in accordance with the previously configured setup
information.

20051101
20070101

12-5
Calling E-CON2 Functions from an eActivity

u To execute sampling from an Econ Sampling strip
1. On the eActivity workspace screen, use the f and c keys to move the highlighting to
the Econ Sampling strip.

2. Press w.
• This displays a sampling start confirmation screen.

• If this is the first time you are using this Econ Sampling strip for sampling, continue on to
step 3.
• If this is an Econ Sampling strip that you have used for sampling in the paste and want
to re-execute with the same setup, jump to step 8.
3. Press !,(,) to display the application list.

4. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to “Econ AdvancSetup”, and
then press w.
• This displays the Advanced Setup screen.
5. Perform steps 4 and 5 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Advanced Setup (page
3-1) to configure the setup for sampling.
6. Press !,(,) to display the application list.
7. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to “Econ Sampling”, and then
press w.
• This will return to the sampling start confirmation screen in step 2 of this procedure.

20051101
20070101

12-6
Calling E-CON2 Functions from an eActivity

8. Press w.
• This will set up the EA-200 in accordance with the setup data registered in the Econ
Sampling strip. The message “Start sampling?” appears on the screen after EA-200 set
up is complete.
9. Press w to start sampling.
• The screens that appear while sampling is in progress and after sampling is complete
depend on setup details. For more information, see “Starting a Sampling Operation”
(page 8-1).
• After sampling is complete, the data will be graphed in accordance with the setup
settings.
10.To return to the eActivity workspace screen from the graph screen, press !a(').
u To graph sampled data from an Econ Graph strip
1. On the eActivity workspace screen, use the f and c keys to move the highlighting to
the Econ Graph strip.
2. Press w.
• If this Econ Graph strip already has sampled data registered to it because of a previous
execution, a graph of the existing data will appear on the display. In this case, jump to
step 5 of this procedure.
• If this is the first time you are executing this Econ Graph strip, the Advanced Setup
screen will appear on the display. If this happens, proceed with step 3 of this procedure.
3. Perform steps 4 and 5 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Advanced Setup (page
3-1) to configure the setup for sampling.
4. Press 1(STRT).
• As instructed by the message that appears on the display, press the w key to perform
sampling.
• After sampling is complete, the data will be graphed in accordance with the setup
settings.
5. To return to the eActivity workspace screen from the graph screen, press !a(').

20051101

12-7
Calling E-CON2 Functions from an eActivity

u Econ Strip Memory Capacity Precautions
• The memory capacity of each Econ strip is 25 KB. An error will occur if you perform an
operation that causes this capacity to be exceeded. Particular care is required when
handling a large number of samples, which can cause memory capacity to be exceeded.
• Always make sure that FFT Graph is turned off whenever performing sampling with the
microphone. Leaving FFT Graph turned on cause memory capacity to be exceeded.
• If an error occurs, press !a(') to return to the eActivity workspace screen and
perform the procedure again.
• For information about checking the memory usage of each strip, see “10-5 eActivity File
Memory Usage Screen” in the manual that comes with the fx-9860G SD or fx-9860G.

20051101
20070101

Manufacturer:
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome
Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan
Responsible within the European Union:
CASIO EUROPE GmbH
Casio-Platz 1
22848 Norderstedt, Germany

This mark applies in EU countries only.

CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome
Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan
One or more of the following patents may be used in the product.
U.S.Pats. 5,166,897 5,210,708 5,535,317 5,539,867

SA0902-A
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : No Encryption : Standard V1.2 (40-bit) User Access : Print, Fill forms, Extract, Assemble, Print high-res Author : CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. Create Date : 2009:02:04 11:55:02+09:00 Modify Date : 2014:12:07 12:55:39+08:00 XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 8.1.0 (Macintosh) Metadata Date : 2014:12:07 12:55:39+08:00 Creator Tool : Acrobat: pictwpstops filter 1.0 Thumbnail Format : JPEG Thumbnail Width : 256 Thumbnail Height : 256 Thumbnail Image : (Binary data 13919 bytes, use -b option to extract) Document ID : uuid:E650ECFBF44411DDA46FAB8DFD7CC35D Instance ID : uuid:ba68e8b6-7c2e-874e-9e97-43c6806bbbcd Derived From Instance ID : uuid:f9873304-f266-11dd-bd9e-001451628961 Derived From Document ID : adobe:docid:indd:8d2061e6-eac8-11dd-b08e-8a676c5545ea Derived From Rendition Class : proof:pdf Format : application/postscript Title : fx-9860G Series_fx-9750GII_fx-7400GII_Software Ver. 2.00_Eng Creator : CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. Page Layout : OneColumn Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 412
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
Casio Fx9750Gii 0Calculator Graphic Users Manual Fx 9860G Series_fx 9750GII_fx 7400GII_Software Ver. 2.00_Eng

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation
